加载中...
共找到 25,033 条相关资讯
Operator: Greetings. Welcome to Simply Good Foods Company's First Quarter Fiscal Year 2026 Earnings Call. [Operator Instructions] Please note, this conference is being recorded. At this time, I'll turn the conference over to Joshua Levine, Vice President, Investor Relations and Treasury. Thank you. You may now begin. Joshua Levine: Thank you, operator. Good morning, and welcome to The Simply Good Foods Company's First Quarter Fiscal Year 2026 Earnings Call for the period ended November 29, 2025. Today, Geoff Tanner, President and CEO; and Chris Bealer, CFO, will provide you with an overview of our results, which were provided in our earnings release issued earlier this morning. Our prepared remarks will then be followed by a Q&A session. A copy of the release and accompanying presentation are available on the Investors section of the company's website at thesimplygoodfoodscompany.com. This call is being webcast, and an archive of today's remarks will be made available. During the course of today's call, management will make forward-looking statements, which are subject to various risks and uncertainties that may cause actual results to differ materially. The company undertakes no obligation to update these statements based on subsequent events. A detailed listing of such risks and uncertainties can be found in today's press release and the company's SEC filings. On today's call, we will refer to certain non-GAAP financial measures that we believe provide useful information for investors. Due to the company's asset-light business model, we evaluate our performance on an adjusted basis as it relates to EBITDA and diluted EPS. Please refer to today's press release for a reconciliation of our non-GAAP financial measures to their most comparable measures prepared in accordance with GAAP. Finally, all retail takeaway data included in our discussion today, unless otherwise noted, reflects a combination of Sircana's MULO++C (sic) [ MULO+C ] measured channel data, and the company estimates for unmeasured channels for the 13 weeks ended November 30, 2025, as compared to the prior year. I will now turn the call over to Geoff Tanner, President and CEO. Geoff Tanner: Thank you, Josh, and thank you for joining us for our call. I'm pleased with our Q1 performance, and I want to reiterate our confidence in our plan for the balance of the year. As a result, we are reaffirming our full year outlook for net sales and adjusted EBITDA. Consumption in Q1 grew 2%, led by double-digit growth from Quest and OWYN, which combined to generate 71% of our net sales. This was offset by expected declines on Atkins. Quest and OWYN continue to benefit from expanded distribution and marketing with added contribution from recent innovation. Growth was also supported by another robust quarter of the nutritional snacking category, which grew 10%. We are executing well on initiatives to drive the top line and to rebuild our gross margin. Specifically, with respect to our margin, recent pricing actions are now reflected on shelf with elasticities to date, in line with our expectations, albeit data remains limited. Our robust productivity program, which we started 18 months ago is delivering results taking cost out of the system and ensuring we have a multiyear pipeline of initiatives for the future. These gains, which will be easier to see in the second half once we're past the peak levels of inflation, is a testament to the hard work from everyone in our organization, particularly the supply chain and operations team. Finally, we took advantage of the opportunity to extend supply coverage at attractive year-over-year prices on several key inputs, most notably cocoa, where we have now locked in incremental supply at sequentially more favorable level, which will begin to flow into the P&L late in Q4 and into fiscal 2027. We know our results for the first half of this fiscal year for reasons we've discussed previously, are below our longer-term expectations. However, we remain confident that our top and bottom line performance will improve once we get beyond Q2. And as mentioned, we are reaffirming our full year outlook. With this in mind, and with our stock at levels that we believe discounts our long-term growth opportunity, we borrowed an incremental $150 million during the quarter that allowed us to accelerate our share buyback program. Since the start of the year, we have repurchased over 7% of our common stock. And as you saw in our press release today, the Board authorized a $200 million increase to our existing share repurchase program. Our decision to repurchase our stock reflects our continued confidence in our long-term runway, and we expect to continue with this program as long as the opportunity remains attractive. Simply Good Foods is well positioned as a leader in the nutritional snacking category. The growth is being propelled by the mainstreaming of consumer demand for high-protein, low-sugar and low carb product. We have a strong foundation for sustainable top line growth, which coupled with our history of strong margin and a proven track record of successfully converting a significant percentage of adjusted EBITDA into free cash flow, I believe will create shareholder value for the long term. Turning to our brand. Quest had another solid quarter, delivering 12% consumption growth and nearly 10% growth in net sales. Key brand metrics are up nicely. Household penetration reached nearly 20% this quarter, up 200 basis points year-over-year and up 50 basis points versus last quarter, a continuation of sequential momentum we've observed for some time. Our salty snacks business once again performed very well in the quarter, with consumption up 40%, reflecting underlying distribution gains and velocity growth as well as somewhat easier year-ago comp when we were supply constrained. As a result, household penetration for Quest Salty surpassed 10% this quarter, up 220 basis points over the last 12 months. Our Salty innovation strategy has been focused on developing and launching a full suite of exciting flavors, which continue to prove highly incremental. This is enabling us to build a highly visible brand block on shelf that enhances our leadership position. We're also introducing channel-specific packs, helping us attract new households and expand product usage occasions. To put this into perspective, ACV was up nearly 5 points in the quarter versus the prior year, and average items per store were up 34%. With visibility to further distribution gains and strong merchandising ahead, we remain confident and sustained growth for our Salty business. Quest Bars consumption was flat versus the prior year in Q1 with solid results from our Taste Forward Crispy line and new Overload platform. As I've said in the past, reaccelerating growth in our Bar business is a critical imperative with Overload the first step. Beginning in the second half, we expect to benefit from several additional initiatives, which are already underway, including further platform innovation and improved in-store activations and merchandising to drive trial. We are hyper-focused on ensuring strong execution of these initiatives and improving performance in this important segment. Lastly, we continue to see solid performance of our new 45-gram Protein Milkshake, which during the quarter gained an additional 8 ACV points. We are gaining trial-focused placements across the store including a number of new opportunities we've secured at several retailers this winter and spring. In addition, our high protein donut launched this quarter, initially on e-commerce and more recently with a large mass retailer. We expect ACV to ramp in the coming months as more retailers reset their shelves, which will provide us with a better read on performance. As we look ahead in the short term, we have a robust new year new merchandising program in place, including significant off shop displays, both in and outside our aisle. I want to remind you, as we said last quarter, the consumption growth in Q2, will be below the full year outlook in large part due to business with a key club customer shifting from Q2 focus last year to more balanced across the rest of the year. However, we remain confident that the strong in-store activation and trial driving activity will deliver continued household penetration gains, positioning the brand for a strong second half. As a result, Quest remains on track to deliver high single-digit consumption growth consistent with our outlook from last quarter. The brand is our largest and highest-margin business, Retailers view us as the innovation leader in the category, which is why we are benefiting from significant distribution and merchandising gains today with line of sight for further expansion in the spring. Finally, we continue to invest heavily in marketing, brand building and new capacity and production capabilities to support ongoing demand. Shifting to Atkins. Consumption declined 19%, consistent with our outlook. Declines were largely driven by lost distribution at several key retailers, which accounted for 2/3 of the headwind. As we've said previously, we continue to work strategically with our retail partners to find the proper breadth and assortment for the brand and to repurpose space from Atkins tail in favor of incremental gains to more productive Quest and OWYN SKUs, all in an effort to get a core assortment with a clear differentiated position in the category focused around weight. These actions are consistent with our fiscal year outlook for the brand, which continues to call for consumption declines around 20%, driven mostly by distribution losses. Over the last few months, many of our initiatives to modernize the Atkins brand have begun to hit the market. These include introducing a 4-pack within our meal bar portfolio, offering consumers a more attractive entry price point, new packaging across nearly every SKU and updated website and refreshed marketing. Our shift to sharpen our opening price points with a 4-pack and meal bars is doing what was intended with unit velocities on average up high single digits year-over-year, building trial and repeat rates and a 300 basis point increase in the percentage of new buyers added to the brand. As we are only 1 quarter into this initiative, we will continue to assess the benefits of the lower price point versus the overall revenue that the business generates over time. I would highlight that improved brand health, including new buyers and repeat rates is an important series of KPIs we will monitor and consider as we work to stabilize the business. The core promise of Atkins has always been to help consumers reach and maintain their weight goals backed by science and proven results. As we continue to see a segment of consumers turn to GLP-1 drugs to help them with their weight loss, we recently concluded a pilot clinical study to assess the effectiveness of Atkins for consumers using GLP-1 drugs. The study showed several encouraging results, including positive data around muscle mass retention, digestive comfort and certain metabolic markers important to consumers with diabetes. GLP-1 drugs are clearly a game changer for many people and how they lose weight, and we're excited in the coming months to share more information about our research into how Atkins nutritional approach can help these consumers achieve their goals. Moving on. We were pleased to see OWYN's performance in market this quarter with consumption up 18%, benefiting from distribution-led growth for RTDs and powders and an ongoing test in some club stores. Household penetration was up 100 basis points to 4.5%. In the near term, consistent with our outlook from last quarter, we expect Q2 consumption growth to slow somewhat due to the impact of initial elasticities following the recent pricing actions, lapping elevated prior year promotional levels and a lingering impact on velocity from the product issues we talked about on our last call. I'm pleased with our team's effort to address the product quality issues. We've seen our ratings level improve versus the summer, helped by our new and improved formula, which has been shipping since August. But we also know we have work to do to rebuild the quality perception with some consumers. As we look ahead, we remain confident in the brand and we will leverage the full scale and capabilities of Simply Goods to drive growth of the business. This includes leveraging our sales force to fill ACV opportunities, narrowing the gap for leading peers increasing marketing double digits this year with marketing as a percentage of sales expected to exceed 10%. Household penetration is only 4.5% and brand awareness is only 20%, pointing to a significant opportunity for more consumers to discover the brand. And lastly, launching both close-in and platform innovation, building upon the brand's strong position and authenticity in the fast-growing clean label movement. To summarize, with only 1 quarter of the year completed, we are reiterating our full year outlook. We are on track and remain confident in our plan. I want to close by thanking our team. They have attacked marketplace challenges head on with resilience and agility. Our nimble and flexible operating model, short- and long-term growth opportunities for Quest and OWYN and strong margins and balance sheet position us well. We are taking the right actions for the business to enhance our growth vectors and to position the company to win for the long term. I'll now hand the call over to Chris. Christopher Bealer: Thanks, Geoff. Good morning, everyone. Thank you for joining us. Overall, we delivered a solid start to the year relative to our plan with net sales and adjusted EBITDA modestly ahead of our expectations. Quest continued to be the engine of growth on the top and bottom line, most notably in salty snacks with solid execution across the organization as we position the company for improved results in the second half. First quarter reported net sales of $340.2 million were essentially flat versus a year ago. Quest net sales grew nearly 10%, driven by robust consumption growth of 12%, while Atkins and OWYN declined 17% and 3%, respectively. For Atkins, while challenged versus prior year, net sales paced slightly ahead of the expectations we provided last quarter as retailer reductions in trade inventory proved less of a headwind than we had expected. On OWYN, Q1 net sales lagged consumption meaningfully, driven by lingering product quality issues and the related impact on retailer inventory levels, which began the quarter in an elevated position. As we enter New Year New You, inventory balances are now more aligned for shipments to match consumption. Gross profit of $109.9 million declined 15.8% on a reported basis from the year ago period, driven primarily by an elevated inflationary costs, most notably cocoa and our first full quarter of tariffs, which were approximately $4 million. Gross margin was 32.3% on a GAAP basis, a decline of 590 basis points versus prior year, largely reflecting higher input costs and about 120 basis points impact from tariffs, which were only partially offset by productivity and mix. Excluding approximately $2.6 million of onetime OWYN integration expenses in the current period and $1 million of noncash purchase accounting inventory step-up expenses in Q1 of fiscal 2025, gross margin declined 540 basis points to 33.1%. Selling and marketing expenses of $29.7 million declined 10.1% versus prior year, primarily the result of planned pullback in Atkins marketing. Quest and OWYN marketing in aggregate increased nearly 10%. G&A expenses of $38 million were flat year-over-year. Excluding stock-based compensation, onetime integration and other costs, including $2.8 million related to the extension and upsizing of our term loan and revolving credit facilities, G&A declined 4.4% to $28.3 million, driven by cost synergies related to the OWYN acquisition and cost management across the organization. As a result, adjusted EBITDA was $55.6 million, down 20.6% due to the margin pressures I spoke about a moment ago. Net interest expense of $3.8 million was down nearly 50% versus the prior year as a result of lower average debt balances, while the effective tax rate was 25.3%. Net income was $25.3 million, a decline of 34% versus last year due primarily to the aforementioned margin challenges and onetime costs. Diluted earnings per share was $0.26 versus $0.38 in the year ago period. Adjusted diluted earnings per share was $0.39 versus $0.49 in the year ago period. Please note that we calculate adjusted diluted EPS as adjusted EBITDA less interest income, interest expense and income taxes divided by diluted shares outstanding. Moving to the balance sheet and cash flow. As of the end of Q1, the company had cash of $194.1 million and an outstanding principal balance on its term loan of $400 million, bringing our net debt to trailing 12-month adjusted EBITDA to approximately 0.8x. Cash flow from operations of $50.1 million represented an increase from approximately $32 million last year due to improved working capital. Capital expenditures were approximately $2.1 million. Higher cash and debt balances at quarter end reflected the company's strategic decision to borrow an additional $150 million as part of the refinancing and extension of our credit facilities, which closed in November. I would highlight that despite upsizing our credit facility, we were able to maintain a consistent spread over SOFR of our Term Loan B, reflecting the credit market's confidence in our long-term story, our cash flow and our balance sheet today. With the additional liquidity and our stock trading at attractive levels, we aggressively increased our rate of share repurchases since we last spoke with you in October. For Q1, we repurchased 5 million shares for $100 million. And on a fiscal year-to-date basis through January 6, the company has spent nearly $150 million to repurchase more than 7% of the shares outstanding at the beginning of this fiscal year. Finally, as Geoff mentioned, with our prior authorization nearly exhausted and our stock remaining at attractive levels, the Board of Directors recently approved an additional $200 million increase to the company's existing stock repurchase program, building on the $150 million incremental authorization announced last quarter. As of today, the company has approximately $224 million remaining under its current stock repurchase program. At current prices, we see share repurchases as a very attractive use of cash. Moving on to our discussion of our outlook. Reflecting our Q1 results and continued confidence in the return to growth on the top and bottom line in the second half, we are reaffirming our outlook for fiscal year 2026. Specifically, we continue to expect the following: net sales growth is expected to be in the range of negative 2% to positive 2%, with growth from Quest and OWYN offset by Atkins. Gross margins are expected to decline in the range of 100 to 150 basis points and adjusted EBITDA year-over-year is expected to be in the range of negative 4% to positive 1%. This includes increased marketing spend on Quest and OWYN to support growth while focusing on profitability for Atkins. Management is focused on the long-term growth of the total company and we'll look to provide more fuel should we find the opportunities to do so. Following the increase in the company's borrowings and accelerated rate of share repurchases, we are updating our outlook for certain below-the-line items. Net interest expense is now expected to be in the range of $19 million to $21 million, while the weighted average diluted share count is expected to be approximately 96 million shares. Our expected full year effective tax rate remains 25%. As we look at the shape of fiscal year 2026, consistent with what we laid out last quarter, we continue to expect that the second half will be stronger on both the top and bottom line than our first half. Specifically, consistent with our prior outlook, we assume Q2 will be the weakest quarter for consumption and net sales growth versus prior year. While we will see the underlying benefit of recent distribution gains on Quest and OWYN, growth will be muted by a combination of initial price elasticities, lingering impacts from the product quality issues on OWYN and challenging laps for Quest and OWYN, both of which benefited in the prior year from stronger New Year New You merchandising programs. All in, we expect Q2 net sales to decline in the range of 3.5% to 4.5%. Below net sales, we expect to deliver sequential improvement in year-over-year gross margin declines as compared to Q1, with Q2 gross margins down approximately 300 basis points versus prior year, helped by the contribution from pricing and productivity, which we expect will begin to offset headwinds from historically high cocoa prices, recent increases in whey and tariffs. As a result, adjusted EBITDA is now expected to decline double digits, slightly below our previous outlook given the impact of more elevated weight costs than we had previously expected. By the second half, we expect growth to improve meaningfully on both the top and bottom line. Specifically, net sales growth is expected at the higher end of our full year range, benefiting from distribution growth, including some recent wins, normalizing elasticities, lapping the initial impacts from OWYN's product issues and an exciting slate of innovation launches across our brands. On the gross margin line, consistent with our outlook from last quarter, we expect second half levels to be roughly in line with or slightly better than our full year fiscal 2025 gross margin on a GAAP basis. This implies flattish year-over-year gross margins in Q3 before Q4 expansion of nearly 200 basis points on a year-over-year basis. I would also highlight that this reaffirmed outlook includes modest tailwinds towards the end of the year from lower expectations for cocoa costs and tariffs given recently secured supply commitments and announced trade agreements and exemptions. These new benefits will be offset by higher assumptions for why across the year. For adjusted EBITDA, consistent with what we have said last quarter, phasing should generally track the shape of our expectations for gross margins with much stronger results by Q4, which we expect will be our strongest period of profit growth, up double digits year-over-year. We continue to expect capital expenditures to be in the $30 million to $40 million range due mainly to the ongoing previously discussed co-investment with a key co-man partner to support additional capacity in our fast-growing salty snacks business. Finally, I would note that our outlook assumes current economic conditions, consumer purchasing behavior and prevailing tariff rates will remain generally consistent across the company's fiscal year. While our outlook includes a number of important assumptions, there remains several uncertain swing factors outside of our control that could represent risk to our outlook. For a comprehensive summary of our full year outlook, please see Slide 15 in our presentation. Thank you for your time and interest in our company. We are now available to take your questions. Operator: [Operator Instructions] Our first question will come from the line of Peter Grom with UBS. Peter Grom: Happy New Year. So Geoff, I appreciate the commentary on the path forward. But can you maybe just elaborate on the confidence in the back half inflection that's embedded in the guidance and just what remains an uncertain volatile environment for the industry? Maybe where do you have the highest degree of confidence or visibility? Conversely, where -- what do you see as some key risks or launch points? And I guess, as we think about the shape of the year, just given the 1Q and the Q2 guidance, is it playing out as you anticipated? Geoff Tanner: Yes. So it's playing out very much as expected and as we previously communicated, our plan from the start has known about certain first half headwinds, for example, some shifted promotional activity out of first half and second and known about some second half tailwinds, which we communicated on our last call. If I break that down on the top line, as we look to the second half, we have line of sight to new distribution, some wins there, some merchandising gains, particularly on Quest. I'm very pleased with our innovation pipeline that we have that will start shipping in the spring and then through the summer. Atkins will start moving past some of its larger distribution laps, for example, at Club. And we expect, as we normally see, elasticities to burn off from pricing. So on the top line, just listing a few drivers there that underpin our confidence in the second half. On the bottom line, we have line of sight to improved gross margin, underlying profit growth because we mentioned in the script, the -- we'll have the full benefit of pricing. We'll have the full benefit of productivity. I'm very pleased with the productivity progress we've made as an organization, setting us up for a strong second half, but also into '27. And as mentioned, we've taken more favorable positions in cocoa, which has come down materially. So on the top and on the bottom, we certainly have a lot of confidence that we will -- the business will start to inflect through the second half and into '27. Christopher Bealer: And then Peter, it's Chris. I'll just build on Geoff's answer. Consistent with our prior outlook, our EBITDA is generally going to track pretty closely to the gross margin trajectory. Q3 gross margins, for example, will be flattish year-over-year. And Q4 will be the strongest position for us in both gross margin and EBITDA. And EBITDA as an example, we expect it to be up about double digits. And I think importantly, for me, that sets us up nicely for FY '27 on a margin standpoint. Operator: Our next question is from the line of Brian Holland with D.A. Davidson. Brian Holland: I wanted to ask about Quest Bars flat, obviously underperforming vis-a-vis the broader category there. Innovation is contributing nicely. Overload is off to a good start, as you mentioned, et cetera. But obviously also implies then that the core or the legacy SKUs sort of in aggregate are declining. So maybe first question there, just innovation is obviously important. The category thrives off that new product news. So that's important and obviously encouraging that you guys have accelerated that pipeline. But what do we -- what needs to be done on the legacy bar business just given the sheer size and scale, I mean, is this merchandising that we need to increasingly focus on, which I know you've talked about before? Or does there need to be some sort of rightsizing on some of these tail SKUs in that brand? Geoff Tanner: Yes. If you look at Quest Bars in the quarter, Q1, they were flat, but we started a little bit more recently, more recent weeks, which we expected. As we mentioned, lapping some prior year promotional events through New Year, New Year, some shift in timing. And we always see a higher initial impact from pricing, which we took on Quest Bar. So what we're seeing on Quest bar right now is very consistent with what we expected and what we said on the last call. But to your question, we're obviously not happy with flat. That doesn't work. It's unacceptable. We are the leader in the bar segment, and we should be driving it. I think I've talked about this in the past. Over the past year, in response to that, we have developed a comprehensive plan to reaccelerate our bar business, and that includes platform innovation, which you'll see in the spring. It includes additional merchandising and new distribution that we have line of sight to. And additional marketing that we're going to put behind bars. So right now, we're flat. That's unacceptable. To your point, it's a multipronged plan to reaccelerate bars, inclusive of innovation, but also driving our core bar business through merchandising, through distribution and through marketing. Obviously, this is a multiyear plan. It will take time, but I'm very confident in the plan, and you should start to see the impact of that in the results in the second half. Brian Holland: Appreciate the color. And then pivoting over to OWYN briefly. Obviously, there's a lot of noise right now between the increase in marketing spend, working through the product quality issues and that old inventory. But as we start to move forward, you're giving us metrics around brand awareness, household penetration. So maybe a 2-part question here. If I look at the relationship between household penetration, I think, 4.5% branded awareness at -- or aided or I know the awareness at like 20%. Is that the right delta today? Or does that imply better or worse conversion of that awareness than if you compare that against other brands that you've managed? And as we go forward, how should we be judging the step-up in marketing investment and your ability to convert? Is it watching the relationship between household penetration and brand awareness that you're building over time? Geoff Tanner: Yes. That relationship between 20% aided awareness and 4-ish, 4.5% household penetration pretty standard. So what it does point to is the significant upside opportunity we have on this brand. So while the relationship is pretty standard, those numbers are very low. And that really is a key opportunity for us to drive awareness, which is why we've increased marketing substantially, which then should translate into increased household penetration. One of the ways in which we plan to accelerate that in addition to marketing is to expand the footprint of OWYN. So right now, we've got a really good shakes business. We'll continue to drive that. We've got distribution upside. We've got a smallish powders business that's growing 50% plus that we plan to put more effort behind. And then you should expect us to bring platform innovation that will expand the footprint of the brand further. So the key ways to expand household penetration, marketing, which we've increased more than double, innovation to expand the footprint and then continuing to drive our distribution. We see this brand having a tremendous runway where we acquired it's on the leading edge of the clean movement, and we plan to pull all of those levers to drive awareness and drive household penetration. Operator: The next question is from the line of Megan Clapp with Morgan Stanley. Megan Christine Alexander: I wanted to stick with OWYN, if we could. So underlying consumption in the quarter clearly strong, I think a bit better than you had actually laid out when we talked last quarter, talked about kind of the gap and the destock related to some of the quality issues in inventory. I wondered if you could just give a little bit more color on how that kind of came up during the quarter, whether it was driven by one or multiple customers? And then just, Chris, I think you said as you move into the New Year and New You period, you'd expect shipments to better align with consumption. Should we interpret that as there was still maybe a gap at the start of this quarter and it should close as we move through the second quarter? Just trying to kind of understand your level of confidence in consumption, which is clearly strong kind of matching shipments as we move through the balance of the quarter. Geoff Tanner: Yes, I'll start and turn it over to Chris. To your point, we were pleased with how consumption came in, in Q1, led by some distribution gains at mass test and a club customer. RTDs were solid, as I mentioned earlier, previous question. powders growing 50%. And this does underscore the leadership position we have in plant-based and clean label, which grew 20%. In terms of bridging the gap to sales, as Chris mentioned, the primary driver of Q1 was we came in heavier on inventory, and we had some lingering impact from the quality issue. Christopher Bealer: And then Megan, just to build on that, we do believe we're in a better position now in terms of shipping to consumption. As you mentioned in the remarks, the ERP cutover was a big piece of why we were slightly heavy on inventory coming into Q1. We thought that was a prudent action to take to make sure we didn't have any supply disruption. And then obviously, as Jeff mentioned, the lingering effects of the product issues also had an impact on the quarter. So overall, though, in the long run, we do think consumption is the best measure of brand health. And as I said, we think we're set up now in Q2 to be much more -- much closer in terms of shipment to consumption. Megan Christine Alexander: Okay. That's helpful. And then, Chris, just a follow-up, if I could, on the margin. I think you said at the end of your response to Pete's question that you'll be set up nicely in fiscal '27 from a margin standpoint. I guess when we look at the shape of this year, I think you'll end the year and exit kind of in that mid-36% range on the gross margin and understand there can be kind of seasonality and you probably don't want to give fiscal '27 guidance right now, but is that a good jumping off point as we think about fiscal '27, just that exit rate on 4Q, particularly as you talked about some of the favorability you expect from cocoa? Christopher Bealer: Yes. As I talked about, I think, last quarter as well, we do have good line of sight with our supply coverage. And we do obviously know what we paid last year for cocoa and for other commodities, we can see where the prices are. So we feel very confident about our overall gross margin. I think the mid-36s range that you mentioned on Q4 is directionally right. And I think that is, as you said, a good jumping off point for F '27. But clearly, at this point, I'm not going to be guiding on F '27. But all else equal, probably a decent assumption in terms of the starting point for the year. Operator: Our next questions are from the line of Alexia Howard with Bernstein. Alexia Howard: Can I ask about margins? I seem to remember that when you first bought OWYN, it was a pretty low-margin business, but you're obviously in the middle of extracting a lot of cost synergy from that. And I also seem to remember that you commented recently on quite a wide discrepancy between where the Quest margins are and the lower margins for Atkins. And if we look out over the next 18 months, do we see sort of a major ramp on the margin side, both on the gross margin side and on the operating margin side, driven by things like cutting off the tail of unprofitable SKUs and the ongoing cost synergy realization at OWYN, other drivers that you anticipate? I'm really thinking about the gross margin getting back to that sort of 37% territory is there line of sight into that? Christopher Bealer: Thanks, Alexia. Yes, from a margin standpoint, -- in terms of getting back and rebuilding our margins up into that sort of 37-plus range, the biggest drivers really are the pricing and productivity. We know there's a lag. We talked about it last time, pricing productivity lag versus inflation. That lag is going to start to overlap in half 2 of this year. We also, as I said, have good line of sight to cost visibility, both on cocoa and our other commodities. And we do have a nice tailwind coming from cocoa, which will start to kick in, in Q4 of this year, will flow more into F '27. Obviously, as we talked about in the prepared remarks, we do have -- we do see inflation on whey, which is going to offset that to some extent. But those are some pretty big drivers on margin and certainly very much in our control, which makes me very confident on rebuilding our margins. In addition to that, there is the mix impact as we mix out of Atkins, we mix into Quest, that is also obviously going to have a more long-term structural benefit on margins. And then as you mentioned, I think in the question, yes, we did drive some very nice synergies on OWYN as we integrated it. Those are building through this fiscal year. So those are kind of already embedded in that 3 -- mid-36% range for Q4. That's already sort of fully loaded from an OWYN margin standpoint. And then I guess the final piece I would just put on OWYN, as we talked about, as we build scale and we build, as Jeff mentioned, platform innovation, I would hope certainly that those would certainly be accretive to the OWYN margin as a brand. Geoff Tanner: The only build I would have on that is Alexia about 18 months ago, we did put in place a very robust and enhanced productivity program. That took 6 or so months to ramp. But as we sit here today, we have strong visibility based on terrific work from this team and our supply chain team, the R&D team, and that will enable us to continue to support our margin that will allow us to continue to support investment in the business. Operator: Our next question is from the line of Jon Andersen with William Blair. Jon Andersen: Just a couple here. On sales overall flat for the quarter, can you help us a little bit with the composition? How much did pricing help in the first quarter? And how much will pricing -- how much will flow through as we move into the second quarter and second half? And then I had a question -- a second question on Atkins. I think last quarter, you talked about 10% to 15% of the Atkins business being kind of tail, meaning in the bottom quartile of velocities. Is there an update on that? And what I'm really trying to get at is where you think you are kind of in the process of getting to that optimal assortment for that rightsized assortment on Atkins? Christopher Bealer: Jon, I'll take the top line question and maybe Geoff wants to take the Atkins one. Look, for Q1, I think what's important to keep in mind is we had -- yes, we were roughly flat year-over-year, but slightly better than we had anticipated and certainly a little bit better than we guided at the start of the year. Quest and Atkins, we're quite happy with where Q1 landed. Both of them were ahead of expectations. And OWYN, as we talked about, obviously behind for the reasons we've already stated. In terms of composition of that, pricing really was almost 0 benefit in Q1. The effective date on shelf was really towards the very, very end of October. So we had a very small amount flowing into Q1. So really minimal impact in Q1. And it will be closer to sort of low single-digit benefit for balance to grow, which is consistent with what we said last quarter. Geoff Tanner: Yes, I'll take the Atkins question. I think it's important to point out that the majority, 2/3 of the declines we're seeing on Atkins today are driven by lost distribution, particular impact at club, which will be almost fully passed in April. But to your question, Atkins, if you look at the business today, as we said in the past, 75% of Atkins sales today come from SKUs in the top half of category velocity, which, in my experience, is generally considered safe. If you look at just the lowest quartile, 10% to 15%, which typically would be at risk. So no change there. I hope that helps dimensionalize the risk. And we'll say that rather than just lose those SKUs, we believe the right thing to do for the brand, the category and the company is to partner with retailers to drive to an assortment that would include replacing those SKUs with Quest and with OWYN, faster turning SKUs. I think that's the benefit of the category and the company. What I would say is I have been pleased that we've seen more flowback than we had forecasted on Atkins in Q1 where we've lost distribution. So early days there, but the level of flowback we are seeing into the business, I think partially explains why Atkins had a better than forecasted quarter. Operator: The next question come from the line of Matt Smith with Stifel. Matthew Smith: Chris, just a follow-up question on cost visibility and tariff expense. You called out a $4 million headwind from tariffs in the quarter. When would you expect to start to see relief given the revised trade agreements? Should you start to see tariff favorability relative to your previous guidance in the second half of the year? Or does that really start to flow through in fiscal '27? Christopher Bealer: Yes. Thanks, Matt. I think importantly, again, as we look at total cost, and we see that we have good visibility out. We did get a little bit of relief since we set guidance on tariffs with the especially Annex 3 exemptions. And that will start to flow through. It's going to be flowing through really starting in the second half of the year. Again, when you think about cost of inventory and as it flows through our inventory and we ultimately ship it, there is a timing lag. So that will be more of a second half benefit and into next year. Again, I'll just refer back to, yes, we have some tariff benefit coming in, in the second half. We have cocoa benefit that's going to start flowing in Q4. But we do have a new sort of headwind that's come in, which is the way inflation. So all in, not concerned overall on cost, and that's why we haven't changed our gross margin guidance for the year. And actually pretty much right on the same number for Q4 in terms of what we were thinking. But yes, from a tariff standpoint, benefit will start playing in the second half. Matthew Smith: And Geoff, as a follow-up to your commentary on capital allocation, the company has been running as a portfolio of brands for some time, and you've been open to adding brands. But are you seeing a change in the category given the insurgent brand dynamics and competitive activity? Is that impacting your M&A view? And when we think about the share repurchase year-to-date has been fairly aggressive. Are you confident in the current brands that you own supporting your long-term algorithm? Geoff Tanner: That's a good question. So obviously, we haven't changed our framework for capital allocation. Certainly, M&A is something we look at. I think we've got a pretty decent track record with M&A. Right now, as we look at our stock price, which we think is significantly undervalued, we think the right use of cash is to be in there and buying the stock back, given our confidence in the long-term health of the business. But M&A is something that we're always looking at. There are -- as you mentioned, there are targets out there. Obviously, we want to get it at the right price. So we haven't -- that hasn't changed. Our buyback position is opportunistic in a sense and that we view our stock is significantly undervalued, and we think the best use is to go in there and buy it back at these cheap levels. Christopher Bealer: And I would just -- Matt, I'll just build on Geoff's answer that we have a very strong balance sheet. Obviously, we took, I think, advantage of the stock price, and we also took advantage of our refinancing window to increase our debt level a little bit like modestly, still less than a turn at this present time. We project that to still be around a turn by the end of the year. And we use that extra -- those extra funds to accelerate our stock buyback while our stock is cheap. And I think the authorization increase from our Board recently of another $200 million, I think it's just in my mind, reflects our confidence in the long-term strength of our business and long-term strength of our balance sheet. And while we still have attractive share prices, we'll continue to use our cash accordingly. Operator: The next question is from the line of Robert Moskow with TD Cowen. Robert Moskow: I wanted to dig a little deeper into the clinical study that you're conducting on GLP-1 users and you say these are users who are following the Atkins nutritional approach. Can I assume that this means that you followed users who are on the Atkins diet? And if so, what's the next step, Geoff? Like what would you do with the results of this study to help you market the brand? How would you use it to help you retain distribution with retailers? Just a little bit more info on like what you intend to do with the results. Geoff Tanner: Yes. So the role of Atkins has always been to help people lose or maintain weight. And as we saw -- continue to see consumers turn to GLP-1 drugs to help them with this, 2 years ago, so a couple of years ago, we undertook a pilot clinical study to test whether Atkins could be a valuable tool or companion to people on the drug. So we had 2 groups of patients on -- who were taking the drug, one group using the Atkins diet and the other using a more traditional low fat diet. We just got the results back in last month. So it's still very early, but those results were very encouraging. Patients on the Atkins diet have taken the drug, tended to retain more muscle mass, which is a critical issue for people on the drug, tended to experience fewer side effects, few headaches, nausea with gas, and there were some other significant differences on metabolic outcomes, particularly for those with diabetes. But it was a pilot study, but nonetheless, very, very encouraging that Atkins can play an important role with a lot more to learn. What you will start to see, to your point, is us leveraging the study results and our New Year New You media, so starting in the next few weeks, you'll see us start to message around this, start to target around this. And literally, as we speak, because these results are very fresh, our teams are in front of retailers who are also trying to figure out how to meet the needs of GLP-1 patients. So over the next few months, our selling team will be out in front of the trade in front of retailers, talking to them about the results, talking to them about the importance of action. So it's early. It's a pilot study. With that being said, we're very encouraged and you'll start to see us execute against this over the coming months. Operator: The next question is from the line of Steve Powers with Deutsche Bank. Stephen Robert Powers: A couple of questions around planning assumptions, just going back to Quest Salty. The first one is maybe just give us an update. You talked about distribution gains generally in the forecast. Curious as to what your distribution outlook is on Quest Salty specifically? And if there are any gains embedded in the full year outlook, number one. Number two is just more generally on forecasting in that business. I think as I think about it, there are kind of competing factors on the one hand, favorably. I think there's a greater consumer awareness and consumer acceptance of kind of protein-based salty snacks, which is part of credit to your success. On the other hand, that has brought with it increasing competition from other smaller independent brands as well as increasingly from conventional brands looking at the category. So just curious if you step back and think about the -- those dynamics, whether that has changed your approach to forecasting in the salty business. Geoff Tanner: Steve, we could not be more pleased with our salty business, plus 40% in the quarter. Admittedly, we had some easier laps a year ago, but could not be more pleased. The core drivers are innovation. We've got new flavors, new forms, pack sizes, exclusives retailers, which are performing extremely well. We continue to build distribution, gain merchandising, displays across the store, away from home, gym, airports, hotels. And I'm not sure if you've seen our new campaign, but it's pretty heavily weighted towards salty. So those are the key drivers. As we look to the second half, we're very confident in the continued momentum of Salty. We have line of sight to new distribution. We have line of sight to significant merchandising gains. And part of this is because retailers view Salty as highly incremental to the category. And as a result, they're rewarding us with new distribution and new merchandising. So a lot of confidence in the momentum. As we think long term, I do want to remind that Quest is the pioneer of this segment. We built it from the ground up. It's been growing for a year at a high clip, and that reflects that we know we have a superior product. And really importantly, consumers trust Quest and trust our salty business has tremendous authenticity in the space. Salty is a $50 billion category. We only have 10% household penetration. Awareness is still relatively low. I've seen the multiyear pipeline. You should expect us to be looking at other forms of salty. We have no intention of taking our foot off the gas. Obviously, we've been operating under the assumption that competition is coming. The growth, the demand for this product just makes it obvious. But we're highly confident in the strength of our brand, strength of our product, our competitive moat from a supply chain perspective. And both near term and long term, we have tremendous confidence in this business. Christopher Bealer: Just want to add, Steve, to what Geoff said. Look, if you think about Quest as a brand and look at the areas that we're already building strong businesses, I think it's very important for me that Quest as a brand can absolutely play across the entire salty universe. Today, we have a business that's really an enormous chips business, but there's a lot of other areas in salty across the store where I strongly believe that Quest can build a meaningful business. And for that reason, that's one of the reasons we've been resourcing against that, both internally and with our co-manufacturers. Stephen Robert Powers: Yes, very clear. And I know we're late in the call. Just a quick last question for me, if I could. Apologies if I missed it, but just going back to OWYN. You mentioned in the remarks in the slides that if you think about the long-term path to growth that innovation in new categories will play an important role. I'm curious if fiscal '26 is too early to see some of that or if we should expect that as the year progresses? Geoff Tanner: It's a big opportunity for us. One of the -- if you remember, Steve, it's one of the reasons that we cited why we're so excited about OWYN was to be able to combine our very talented R&D organization and let them loose on OWYN. So there's a very strong pipeline. What I'll say is you should expect to see probably the first foray from us, I'd say, certainly this fiscal, we probably put the timing around that. I'm really excited about the opportunity here, yes, significant. Operator: Our final question is from the line of Tyler Prause with Stephens. Tyler Prause: RTD is becoming an increasingly competitive space. How should we think about growth within this part of your portfolio? And is this a unique subcategory where we could see consumption for Quest, OWYN and Atkins all positive this year? Geoff Tanner: No RTD is certainly competitive. It's not surprising. For a while, the category was somewhat supply constrained, I think that limited the extent of competition. Unsurprisingly, you're seeing some new entrants into the category. What I'd point out is the category is still growing 10% plus in RTDs, which is significant. When it comes to our brands, I'll start with OWYN, very uniquely positioned within that category. It's not just another RTD milk shake or chocolate, a strawberry flavor. It is positioned as the leading clean and plant-based proposition in the market, very differentiated and retailers see that, consumers see that. So I feel very confident. This clean movement, I think, is in the early innings, and we intend to write it as the leader. So I think from a perspective, OWYN is very differentiated. We've been very pleased with how Quest has performed in the space. Quest has the highest protein level at 45 grams, phenomenal tasting, which you'd expect from Quest. So a differentiated position there. And Atkins plays a very different job in the category. Atkins is about helping consumers maintain their weight. It's a different job, and I think a differentiated job, particularly when we start to leverage the GLP-1 findings where shakes could be a very important tool to consumers on the drug. So we believe that we have 3 very differentiated position -- differentially positioned brands inside a category that's still robust, still growing double digit. So we have a lot of confidence in the future growth here. Operator: At this time, we've reached the end of our question-and-answer session. I'll hand the floor back to management for closing remarks. Geoff Tanner: I just want to thank everyone for their participation today on today's call. If you have any follow-ups, please feel free to reach out to Josh, and we look forward to speaking with you again on our Q2 call in April. Have a good day. Operator: Thank you. This will conclude today's conference. You may disconnect your lines at this time. We thank you for your participation. Have a wonderful day.
Operator: Hello, and welcome to the Greenbrier Companies First Quarter 2026 Earnings Conference Call. [Operator Instructions] At the request of the Greenbrier Companies, this conference call is being recorded for instant replay purposes. At this time, I would like to turn the conference over to Mr. Justin Roberts, Vice President of Financial Operations, the Americas. Mr. Roberts, you may begin. Justin Roberts: Thank you, Gary. Good afternoon, everyone, and welcome to our first quarter of fiscal 2026 conference call. Today, I am joined by Lorie Tekorius, Greenbrier's CEO and President; Brian Comstock, Executive Vice President and President of the Americas; and Michael Donfris, Senior Vice President and CFO. Following our update on Greenbrier's Q1 performance and our outlook for fiscal '26, we will open the call for questions. Our earnings release and supplemental slide presentation can be found on the IR section of our website. Matters discussed on today's conference call include forward-looking statements within the meaning of the Private Securities Litigation Reform Act of 1995. Throughout our discussion today, we will describe some of the important factors that could cause Greenbrier's actual results in 2026 and beyond to differ materially from those expressed in any forward-looking statement made by or on behalf of Greenbrier. We will refer to recurring revenue throughout our comments today. Recurring revenue is defined as leasing and fleet management revenue, excluding the impact of syndication transactions. Before I turn the call over to Lorie, I would like to take a moment and introduce Travis Williams, Greenbrier's new Head of Investor Relations. Travis joined Greenbrier this week to lead the IR function. His background includes buy-side and sell-side analyst experience and most recently he led the IR function in-house at a publicly traded industrial tool manufacturing company. Please join me in welcoming him. Travis Williams: Thanks, Justin. Excited to be on board. Lorie Leeson: Welcome, Travis, and thank you, Justin, and good afternoon, everyone. Appreciate you guys joining us today. Greenbrier delivered good first quarter performance, exhibiting our disciplined execution and the resilience of our business. Our results demonstrate the strength of our integrated manufacturing and leasing model, continued progress on operating efficiency initiatives and determined action on the things we can control. As a result, meaningful earnings, strong liquidity and progress on our long-term strategic priorities were highlights in Q1. Our model is designed to outperform during a business environment like the current one, and our model delivered, producing what we describe as higher lows through the cycle and as reflected in our 15% aggregate gross margin this quarter. Customers across North America and Europe are circumspect about capital investments as they evaluate current freight volumes, ongoing trade policy considerations and improving rail service that has increased railroad velocity, reducing the near-term pressure for new rolling stock. These conditions impact the timing of new railcar orders, but do not change the underlying long-term replacement demand. In this environment, execution matters and Greenbrier's commercial team continues to perform well. We are competing effectively and securing high-quality orders despite intense competition. As the quarter progressed, order momentum improved, reinforcing our confidence in the durability of customer demand. Brian will provide more details in a few minutes. Trade and tariff policy remains an important consideration for our customers and the industry. While policy considerations influence the timing of customer decisions, it does not change the long-term fundamentals of the railcar replacement cycle or Greenbrier's competitive position. We stay engaged with customers and industry stakeholders and are winning business in this evolving landscape. Operationally, we're taking proactive steps to align our manufacturing footprint with current demand levels while continuing to invest in efficiency, cost discipline and process improvement. Production rates moderated slightly, and we adjusted headcount accordingly, primarily in Mexico, which allowed us to intensify our focus on overhead optimization and operational excellence. These actions are structural and position Greenbrier to respond quickly and profitably as the market evolves. In Europe, market conditions remain complex and performance was affected by operating inefficiencies as we continue to execute restructuring and rightsizing initiatives. We're confident that these actions will strengthen our European platform over time and drive improved competitiveness and profitability. Brazil continues to provide diversification within our portfolio. Economic conditions there remain relatively stable, customer engagement is steady and our operations delivered consistent performance. Our leasing and fleet management business continues to provide stability and growth. As we continue disciplined fleet construction and management, this business remains an important source of recurring earnings and through-cycle resilience. Turning briefly to capital allocation. Our priorities remain unchanged. We continue to deploy capital where returns are strongest maintain balance sheet strength and liquidity and return capital to shareholders. We opportunistically sold railcars from the fleet at attractive values, recycling capital, while contributing meaningfully to earnings and cash flow. Looking ahead, we are reiterating our fiscal 2026 guidance. And while near-term market conditions remain varied, our outlook reflects the improved foundation of our business, disciplined execution and the flexibility built into our operating model. We remain confident in our ability to navigate current conditions and position Greenbrier for long-term value creation. In closing, I want to recognize our employees for their continued focus, flexibility and commitment. Periods like this demand discipline and teamwork, and I'm proud of how the Greenbrier team continues to execute. Our integrated model, strong liquidity position and experienced leadership team position us well to manage the current environment and to capitalize as markets recover. And with that, I'll turn the call over to Brian, who will walk through our operational performance in more detail. Brian Comstock: Thank you, Lorie, and good afternoon, everyone. I'll briefly cover our operating performance for Q1, including orders and business activity in our manufacturing, leasing and management services units. Commercial activity strengthened late in the quarter, and we converted that into diversified high-quality orders in a competitive market. We remain focused on order quality and backlog mix prioritizing opportunities, where we offer differentiated value and can achieve attractive returns. We received global orders for approximately 3,700 railcars valued at roughly $550 million. Orders were diversified across regions and car types, led by tank cars and covered hoppers. Included in this figure were several specialty railcar orders with higher average selling prices, reflecting our ability to support complex and unique customer requirements. Backlog value was relatively unchanged. And we ended the quarter with a backlog of approximately 16,300 units valued at about $2.2 billion. As always, we remain focused on order quality and mix to support efficient production scheduling and attractive margins. Turning to manufacturing. We continue to proactively align production levels with current demand conditions and expect to modestly adjust rates further in the second quarter. Headcount reductions continued across North American manufacturing, primarily in Mexico, reflecting disciplined workforce alignment. Our management team is experienced and agile, and we continue to manage the business to efficiently navigate the current demand environment. At the same time, we are using this period to achieve greater structural efficiency and cost discipline. Overhead optimization initiatives continue to gain traction with teams identifying opportunities to streamline processes, reduce fixed costs and improve productivity. These efforts position our manufacturing platform to scale efficiently as demand recovers. The lease fleet performed at a high level with utilization nearly 98% strong retention and improving economics on renewals. The size of the fleet remained relatively stable as we recycled capital through opportunistic asset sales in a strong secondary market. We also optimized fleet mix, both in terms of credit quality and car tech composition. We expanded the use of Greenbrier's maintenance network for our lease fleet and drove other enhancements to the customer experience. Combined, these efforts support consistent execution and position the leasing business to continue contributing meaningfully through the cycle. In summary, our teams executed well in Q1. We aligned production with demand advanced efficiency initiatives, strengthened our backlog and continue to grow and optimize our leasing platform. These actions reinforce the durability of our operating model and position Greenbrier to navigate current conditions, while remaining well prepared for future market expansion. And with that, I'll turn the call over to Michael to discuss our financial results. Michael Donfris: Thank you, Brian. Revenue for Q1 was $706 million, essentially in line with expectations. Aggregate gross margin of 15% reflects lower production rates and deliveries in Q4, partially offset by continued strong margins in leasing and fleet management and disciplined execution across the broader manufacturing platform. Selling and administrative expenses were $11 million less than Q4 totaling $60 million. This was driven primarily by lower employee-related expenses. And in addition, Q4 included $3.1 million in European footprint rationalization costs. Operating income was $61 million, approximately 9% of revenue. Diluted EPS was $1.14 and EBITDA for the quarter was $98 million or 14% of revenue, representing a strong result and reflecting the benefits of disciplined execution, selectively recycling capital through fleet sales in a strong used equipment market and growing contribution from our leasing platform. For the 12 months ending November 30, 2025, our return on invested capital was 10% and continues to be within our 2026 target of 10% to 14%. As noted in our earnings release, effective September 1, 2025, we changed the methodology for allocating syndication activity, resulting in syndication activity being reflected in the manufacturing segment instead of leasing and fleet management segment. This change has no impact on consolidated results. Turning to the balance sheet. Greenbrier's Q1 liquidity has -- was the highest in the 20 quarters at over $895 million, consisting of more than $300 million in cash on hand and $535 million in available borrowing capacity. We generated $76 million in operating cash flow for the quarter, supported by solid earnings, proceeds from fleet sales and favorable working capital movements. Liquidity remains robust, reflecting disciplined execution, ongoing working capital management and a well-structured capital base. Now switching to capital allocation. We remain committed to responsibly returning capital to our shareholders through a combination of dividends and stock buybacks. Greenbrier's Board of Directors declared a dividend of $0.32 per share, this is our 47th consecutive quarterly dividend and reflects our confidence in the business. Additionally, during the first quarter, we repurchased about $13 million of common stock under our existing authorization. As of quarter end, approximately $65 million is available for future repurchases. We will continue to access this capacity opportunistically consistent with marketing conditions and our broader capital allocation framework. Now turning to guidance. We are reiterating our operating guidance and updating capital expenditure guidance for fiscal 2026. Our focus remains on driving profitability through operational efficiency increased recurring revenue and disciplined capital use. With our resilient business model and strong balance sheet, we are well positioned for continued performance and long-term value creation. Our guidance for fiscal 2026 is as follows: new railcar deliveries of 17,500 to 20,500 units, including approximately 1,500 units in our Greenbrier-Maxion Brazil. Revenue between $2.7 billion to $3.2 billion. Aggregate gross margin of 16% to 16.5%, operating margin between 9% and 9.5% and earnings per share of $3.75 to $4.75. Greenbrier's capital expenditures and manufacturing are projected to be approximately $80 million. And gross investment in leasing and fleet management will be roughly $205 million. Proceeds from equipment sales are expected to be around $165 million. I will point out, we are pursuing assets in the used equipment market in an opportunistic, disciplined manner and may end up at a higher investment level. Greenbrier delivered good financial performance in the first quarter and maintained a strong balance sheet and liquidity position. Our integrated business model, disciplined capital allocation and focus on execution position us well to navigate throughout the cycle and create long-term shareholder value. With that, we'll open the call for questions. Operator: [Operator Instructions] Our first question is from Andrzej Tomczyk with Goldman Sachs. Andrzej Tomczyk: Happy New Year. I wanted to start on the manufacturing deliveries and maybe we're just curious, if you could talk a little bit more detail on what visibility you currently have into the second half of this year as far as year-over-year delivery growth and when you might expect to see that? And then maybe just what's driving that between Europe and North America? Justin Roberts: Yes, Andrzej, it's good to hear from me. Hope you had a good holiday. This is Justin. Yes, we've got pretty good visibility with, I would say, most of our open space, as historically, we see it as in the summertime, so kind of the June, July, August time period. But leading into that, we do have pretty good visibility. And I think, I would say that we do see some opportunities for year-over-year growth in that time period, since we were kind of ramping down production last summer, and we'll be increasing production heading into our next fiscal year. Andrzej Tomczyk: Got it. That's helpful. And I know it's very early here, but I was just curious, given the recent news and events Greenbrier's thinking on maybe the potential medium- to longer-term impacts related to Venezuela any indirect or direct impacts on your manufacturing business that we should consider maybe that you guys have thought through? Brian Comstock: Andrzej, this is Brian. We don't see any impacts at all at this point from Venezuela. There's no -- there's no lap between what we do in Brazil or other areas. And so quite frankly, we don't think for our business, it will be impactful. Justin Roberts: And maybe longer term, Andrzej? I would say, broadly, a lot of -- if there is going to be additional kind of oil activity, it will be typically handled via pipeline typically. And any oil over -- via tank cars is going to be more of a short-term phenomenon. Andrzej Tomczyk: Okay. That's helpful. Maybe 1 more for me on manufacturing and then delivery environment. I'm curious as we sit here today, if you're seeing any incremental improvement or changes in the tenor of customer ordering behavior into December and January? And maybe in that same context, would you expect sequentially or what would you expect, I guess, sequentially in terms of deliveries 1Q to 2Q as well as the margin expectations throughout the year relative to the 11% you guys just did? Brian Comstock: Yes. I'll take the first part of that, and I think, Michael, you take the second part. From a customer perspective, I think in our scripts, we talked about how the order activity towards the end of Q3 had picked up and we're continuing to see that our Q4, and we're continuing to see that activity into Q1. December was unusually high for that period. It's typically a slower month. And we had a nice number of diverse deliveries come in, in December. So we're seeing it continue to tick up. Justin Roberts: Right. And I'll take the margin question. As we look across the year, we continued our guidance in aggregate gross margin. And we do see some variability quarter-to-quarter in margin, but we are looking at a stronger back half of the year versus the first half of the year. Andrzej Tomczyk: Got it. That's helpful. Maybe just shifting a little bit to the leasing side of your business. Are you able to share how lease rates trended sequentially 4Q to 1Q? And maybe also just remind us how much of your lease book is up for renewal this year? Justin Roberts: Yes. So I would say for the lease rates they've been, especially for more of the, I would say, specialty cars like tank cars lease rates on an absolute basis have been relatively stable. We continue to see strong renewal activity. And then on the more commoditized cars, lease rates have been pressured some for us, it's about maintaining our focus on discipline around pricing and returns focused. Then with regard -- go ahead. Brian Comstock: Yes. And I would add -- this is Brian, Andrzej. I would add that year-over-year renewals, we're still seeing double-digit increases on the renewal side. Justin is correct that we're seeing rates hold. But keep in mind, some of these renewals were done 4 or 5 years ago. And so we continue to see nice uplift in our renewals that are coming up as well. Lorie Leeson: And I'll just jump in as well to say that when we see more moderated demand for new builds, current market, that means the existing equipment becomes more valuable, more desire. So that's another thing that's adding to those renewal rates. Justin Roberts: And then on the kind of the cars in the fleet to be kind of renewed overall, we had about 1,500, 1,800 up for renewal as we entered the fiscal year in September, and we've successfully renewed kind of around 35% of that. So we're continuing to trend in the right direction there and feel pretty positive about the rest of the fiscal year. Andrzej Tomczyk: Understood. And then I guess just on the first quarter, there was the large gain, I think, $18 million roughly was more than you did in the entire year last year. Was curious what we should be thinking in terms of full year gains this year or maybe relative to the first quarter levels, if you could provide that? Brian Comstock: Yes. We did have an opportunistic gain in the first quarter, looking at the market. And we continue to look at that as the year progresses, we're really excited in terms of what that could do for us this year. Lorie Leeson: I guess, I'd just throw in that we're active in the secondary market, whether it's from trying to look for assets to add to our owned lease fleet that we want to grow, but also to take advantage, if there's something that's very accretive to our return on those investments. Justin Roberts: And Andrew, maybe just to take a step back and you think about, as you are managing a leasing business. Part of this is you're always taking a look at your portfolio concentrations, your build-out and things like that and really taking a look at, okay, so where do we maybe have a little exposure, what do we have in our backlog that we're building out and bringing it into the fleet. And so there's kind of this constant active management of the portfolio itself. And than when you're able to decide to sell assets and generate gains, you have an assumption around that. But sometimes markets give you a little more than what you expect. And sometimes, they don't give you as much as what you expect. But this quarter, we were pleased with where that laid out. Andrzej Tomczyk: Very clear. And maybe just as a follow-up on the leasing fleet itself and growth expectations. Should we expect maybe like high single digits? Or can you comment on the type of fleet growth that you guys expect this year in terms of the lease fleet? I think you did close to double-digit growth in 2025 and mid-teens in 2024 as you guys have pushed more into leasing. So I'm just curious what trajectory we should be thinking about over the near term, would be very helpful. Justin Roberts: Yes. I mean I think we would say that we're not going to give an explicit number because this is still a very active environment. But we do believe that we will grow this year probably in the single-digit range, maybe a little higher. It kind of depends on how a few different opportunities manifest. But ultimately, we are committed to growing the leasing business and kind of thinking about this from the long-term shareholder value perspective. Andrzej Tomczyk: Understood. And maybe just to close out for me to sort of higher level questions. On the tariff front, would you say that those are ultimately an incremental positive or negative to your business? And then the same question also goes for the potential for Class 1 rail consolidation. With Greenbrier be a proponent of rail mergers? Or would you rather sort of the merger not go through? Lorie Leeson: Sure. And I'll launch into these, and I'm sure that my colleagues will jump in and help out. When it comes to tariffs, I will say that thus far, it's been neutral to our financial performance, although the uncertainty created by the changing landscape in tariffs definitely has been a headwind or has our customers take a pause on committing additional capital for new railcars. So that has been an impact as well where there are tariffs on foreign sourced materials, it allows U.S. sourced materials to have higher prices. So that also has resulted in, I would say, a bit higher prices right now for railcars, which are primarily utilizing steel. So that can also be a consideration when you're thinking about an investment. So overall, I would say the dollar or percentage amount of tariffs has not had a tremendous impact. It's more the uncertainty to try to understand the operating environment and what those tariffs might do to supply chains and logistics as our customers are looking at where they're sourcing their materials and where their finished goods going to go and how are they going to be transported. That said, and Brian is shaking his head, so I'm saying I'm going to get this right. I think that most of our customers are coming to terms with the fact that we're just going to all have to live in a slightly more uncertain world. And we just have to get after running our business, and that's what we do day in and day out as deal with whatever is coming up and deal with that. Anything that you would change... Brian Comstock: No, I think you nailed it, Lorie, it's really at the end of the day, we've had no financial impact from tariffs, but it does continue to weigh on customers' minds and has been a little seized up, although pent-up demand. We're starting to see that release as we said, towards the end of the last Q and end of the first part of this Q. We're already seeing that start to release a little bit. So we're starting to find that equilibrium, I believe, between that pent-up demand and the tariff challenges. Lorie Leeson: Super. And then when it comes to railroad mergers, I try to stay really consistent with my message, which is anything that makes our industry stronger I am a proponent of. Anything that helps to increase the shift of transportation of goods off of highways and on to the rails. I think, is good for our business. So whatever it takes to make our industry a more efficient circulatory system for the U.S. economy. I am in favor of. I've been in this business long enough. I've seen a few of these mergers. They can be bumpy at times. And I'm sure the STB will go through an appropriate process to review it, and we will all just take it 1 day at a time. Operator: The next question is from Bascome Majors with Susquehanna. Bascome Majors: Maybe just to follow-up on some of the geopolitical angles that we closed with in the prior session here. The USMCA, how engaged are your people or industry organizations or internal or external obvious in that effort as that review comes closer and what are you hearing as far as how that may play out? And how do you feel about the exemptions that have been favorable for the no tariff impact on the railcars existing into 2027 and beyond. Lorie Leeson: Bascome, thank you for that question. I strongly am supportive of USMCA. I do believe, as I was saying that the rail network is a circulatory system of the U.S. economy, and I think the free flow of railcars across our border to the north and south is very critical, not just for the rail industry, but for the overall economy. So just like with everything and maybe as we each get a little bit older, we can look back in the past and say there might be opportunities to refine things and do things a little bit better. I think that we could all try to have continuous improvement as part of our vocabulary. But I don't think it needs to be totally upside down and redone. I think it's been working really nicely for a very long time, and I hope that, that's the conclusion that we come to on that. Bascome Majors: And maybe back to the guidance. Just want to follow some of the pacing comments on deliveries earlier. You talked about, I think, 4,500 or so deliveries for this quarter if you include roughly the run rate on Brazil, that would be kind of annualized to the lower end of your guidance. But I think you also talked about maybe taking production down a little bit in the second quarter and then raising it into next year and also mentioned some white space in the summer. So how do I bring all that together? Where do you have visibility to get kind of closer to the midpoint of the production guidance for the year, where do you need orders to come in and fill some of that white space? And how do you feel about inquiry levels and the level of certainty you need to get there? Brian Comstock: Yes. I think I can start out with that, Justin, and then maybe Michael can fill in. From the order perspective, Bascome, that white space is getting filled as we speak. And -- in fact, we're already making plans to ramp the back half of the year to some degree. So some of these head count reductions are temporary in nature, just as we get through the order book and we get to the more robust part of the cycle. So the white space itself is very limited at this stage. And in fact, in some of our more specialty type of cars, we are indeed going through the planning exercise of bringing people back. Justin Roberts: Yes. And I think Bascome, I mean, if you kind of look at basically kind of how Michael laid out the guidance, we do have a more of a ramp in the back half of the year. And I think at this point, we would say we have pretty good visibility on that. It's just a matter of assuming that the inquiries we have continue to translate into orders, which we have seen an improvement in that over the last few months. And then also barring any unforeseen events in the geopolitical front, which I'm not ready to place a bet on, but we do feel pretty good about the trajectory we're on right now. Lorie Leeson: And I'll just throw in on there. As they both said, of having additional order activity that means we're going to be bringing people back. We want to do that in a mindful way. We don't -- we've learned from the past that it's not good to bring back and try to ramp up too quickly, but we try to do that in a very, very mindful way. And I realized Bascome that I didn't answer the second half of your earlier question about engagement in U.S. MCA. And I will say that we at Greenbrier have been very engaged in submitting comments back on the review for USMCA. And I would be -- I will be encouraging all of the rest of the industry participants to get more engaged because it is very important. Bascome Majors: And last 1 for me, and then I'll pass it on. But if we think about the production cadence and rising visibility and to be able to ramp that back up in the second half of the year if the order conversions continue at the pace that's improved recently, is the manufacturing gross margin largely a function of the volume you're pushing through? Are there some issues with mix and pricing where that may not be sort of linear? Justin Roberts: Yes. And I think you've got it, Bascome. I think it's really a combination. It's not necessarily linear. And so there is a mix component to it. But there's also a production component and absorption of fixed costs and all those things combined as we look at the remainder of the year. Bascome Majors: As you do more volume, if you get to that increase in the back half of the year that you're shooting for, do you think that will be a lift on margins? Or is it really just more of a revenue story? Justin Roberts: Yes. No, I do think it will be a lift on margin from where we are right now. Operator: The next question is from Ken Hoexter with Bank of America. Ken Hoexter: So you kept your EPS outlook $3.75 to $4.25, but it looks like you have a $0.55 gain on sale this quarter, the $17.7 million which sounds like, Lorie, you said you're being opportunistic on some asset sales. So are you decreasing your EPS guide for the rest of the year given the gain on sale presumably to this scale was not in your outlook? Or is there something else adjusting in those numbers? Brian Comstock: Yes. Yes. And thank you for the question. Really, that was about a $0.30 impact to our earnings per share as we looked at it. And it is impacted by just when we're looking at the market and how opportunistic it is. So that shifted possibly between quarters as we look at it and that's why we didn't really affect our guidance. Justin Roberts: And 1 thing, just to clarify, I may have misheard Ken, but our EPS guidance is $3.75 to $4.75, which implies a midpoint of $4.25. Ken Hoexter: All right. That's what I meant, I might misread. But the -- so no change to that $3.75, $4.75, $4.25 midpoint despite the gain, does that -- I'm sorry, from that last answer, does that mean you were expecting these gains in your original target? Or is this -- I'm just trying to misinterpret or interpret the commentary. Lorie Leeson: Yes. Yes. So Dan, as we have a growing owned lease fleet and just like you see with other operating lessors, we will take advantage of opportunities within the market. And as we put together our guidance for FY '26, we did assume that we would be doing some transactions that would benefit EPS. Ken Hoexter: Okay. So can we presume then, Lorie, on that answer, then you've pulled forward all that opportunity? Or are there still a lot of opportunity going forward with these large game potential? Lorie Leeson: I would say that timing is difficult to predict. When we have a good transaction as much as we would like to perfectly slot things into each quarter in a lovely even smooth peanut butter way, it doesn't always work that way. And we will close on transactions as they present themselves and as our customers need to close on the transactions. That said, it's a strong market out there. So I'm not saying that we're done on doing transactions. We're looking at stuff that we might sell. We're looking at stuff that we might buy. So it's just going to be part of our business going forward. Ken Hoexter: Okay. And then -- you mentioned in the -- given the backlog, right, if I look at the new -- the cars out of the backlog, the 3,700, $550 million added, that's about $150,000 average ASP, which is up significantly from the [ $125,000 ], but even kind of going back the last few years, I don't know if we've seen a number that high. I think there was commentary in the prepared remarks that there was some higher value cars in there. Can -- is that a couple of cars that are just so highly valued. Can you just maybe walk through, I know, you never break out number of whatever it might be a specific type of tank car or whatever it is. But can you just kind of give us an idea what would drive something so high? Brian Comstock: Yes. Ken, it's Brian. At the end of the day, I don't want to give away too much sensitive information for our competitors. But we do have a number of units that have I'd say, fairly high ASPs. They're specialty cars for specialty type of service. It's 1 of the things that's unique to Greenbrier that we spent a lot of money in the innovation and R&D side of the house to perfect so that we could be in a position like this as markets come to us. And it's a market, I would say that's a growing market that we're looking forward to continuing to build into. Ken Hoexter: Do they have outsized margins? Or just given the components and specialty kind of similar margins to others despite the higher ASP? Brian Comstock: Yes. I prefer not to go into that level of detail. Ken Hoexter: Okay. SG&A jumped up to 8.5% or somewhere around 8%, 8.5%, which was similar to 4Q, but kind of above, I think, the guidance was somewhere in the 7.5ish type range, so maybe an extra $10 million. Is there -- are we -- were there costs added back in? Maybe just walk us through kind of what's going on in SG&A? Justin Roberts: As we set the guidance at the beginning of the year, we did say we're going to take about $30 million out year-over-year and so if I look at sequentially where we ended in the fourth quarter, we came down about $11 million. There's really nothing significant in that as a percent of revenue on calculation that I would look at. We're still targeting taking $30 million out year-over-year. Ken Hoexter: Okay. So was that higher than you would have expected? Justin Roberts: I think we would say the G&A was -- is trending in line with what we expected for the year. Maybe it's up a little bit in the quarter by a few million dollars, but not significantly. Ken Hoexter: So is that -- I'm trying to understand the impact on margins, right? So we're talking about 11% on manufacturing, but then higher SG&A. Was that timed because you added more people or to get more sales just walk us through what's driving that? Justin Roberts: I think the big piece is there's some additional translation and currency adjustments out of Mexico -- or not out of Mexico out of Europe. That, I would say, artificially changed kind of how G&A was tracking. We're not adding people. There's not G&A that is being grown. In fact, I think, if you looked at last year, we tracked -- we ended around $260 million and this year, we're going to be in the kind of $2.25 to $2.30 range is what we're guiding to. So pretty substantial reductions year-over-year. Ken Hoexter: Helpful. And last 1 for me, just is always the below-line stuff, Justin, if you can be any helpful in terms of how we should think about going forward. The minority was a positive versus a negative equity in loss of unconsolidated was negative versus a positive. I don't know, is there any ballpark how we should think about that below the line? Justin Roberts: I think -- probably our activity is -- well, I don't know, maybe we can take that kind of touch base on our follow-up calls. I think broadly, we're expecting to track where we were at in the prior year and kind of based on our preliminary guidance, earnings from unconsolidated affiliates, which is primarily Brazil, is going to be modestly positive throughout the year that would be accretive to earnings. And I'm not saying that to you, I have to say it out loud to myself to make sure I don't get myself confused. The earnings or loss attributable to noncontrolling interest is our partner's share of earnings in Mexico and in Europe, a negative of about -- or an earnings deduction of about $1 million. We do see that fluctuating throughout the year based on cadence of activity in Mexico, in Northern Mexico and in Europe. And that's -- I guess that's about kind of as far as we're going to go at this point. Lorie Leeson: Yes. I would say that if you were to think about where we're doing our operations and not what I still call minority interest piece, it's going to -- if our earnings are and margin are back half weighted, you're going to have a little bit more of that that's going to be going to our partners in the back half of the year. And yes, I think based on our comments, we expect Brazil to remain stable. We're having good performance down there right now. Ken Hoexter: Wonderful. All right. I think that's it for me. It looks like reiterating all your targets, right? So you're -- even with this 4,400, are you still looking for second quarter to decelerate from this fourth quarter? Or do you think we kind of hold -- is this your minimum value in terms of delivery -- quarterly deliveries. Brian Comstock: Yes. We really, really don't really give quarterly guidance. What we are saying though is we do expect the back half of the year to be a little bit stronger than what we're seeing in the first half of the year. So... Lorie Leeson: You can do the math. Brian Comstock: Yes. Operator: This concludes our question-and-answer session. I would like to turn the conference back over to Lorie Tekorius for any closing remarks. Lorie Leeson: Thank you, everyone, for your attention and your interest in Greenbrier. We appreciate it. And as always, if you have follow-on questions, I know you can reach out to Justin, but you'll quickly come to know Travis Williams. So we're excited to have and be part of the team. Happy New Year, everyone. Operator: The conference has now concluded. Thank you for attending today's presentation. You may now disconnect.
Operator: Good morning. My name is Elliot, and I'll be your conference operator today. At this time, I would like to welcome everyone to Root's third quarter earnings conference call for fiscal 2025. [Operator Instructions] On the call today, we have Meghan Roach, President and Chief Executive Officer; and Leon Wu, Chief Financial Officer. Before the conference call begins, the company would like to remind listeners that the call, including the Q&A portion, may include forward-looking statements concerning its current and future plans, expectations and intentions, results, level of activities, performance, goals or achievements or any other future events or developments. This information is based on management's reasonable assumptions and beliefs in light of information currently available to Roots, and listeners are cautioned not to place undue reliance on such information. Each forward-looking statement is subject to risks and uncertainties that could cause actual results to differ materially from those projected. Company refers listeners to its third quarter management's discussion and analysis dated December 9, 2025 and/or its annual information form for a summary of the significant assumptions underlying forward-looking statements and certain risks and factors that could affect the company's future performance and ability to deliver on these statements. Roots undertakes no obligation to update or revise any forward-looking statements made on this call. The third quarter earnings release, the related financial statements and the management's discussion and analysis are available on SEDAR as well as on Root's Investor Relations website at www.investors.roots.com. A supplementary presentation for the Q3 2025 conference call is also available on the Roots Investor Relations site. Finally, please note that all figures discussed on this conference call are in Canadian dollars, unless otherwise stated. Thank you. You may now begin your conference. Meghan Roach: Good morning, and thank you for joining us. I will begin with a summary of our results for the third quarter of fiscal 2025. For the quarter, revenue was $71.5 million, representing a 6.8% increase compared to the same period last year. Direct-to-consumer sales rose 4.8% to $56.8 million, and comparable sales were 6.3%, driven by strong traffic online and conversion in stores. On a 2-year stack basis, comparable sales growth stands at 12.1%. Partners and others also reported a robust quarter with sales increasing 15.3% due partially to earlier orders from our Taiwanese partner and strong growth in our B2B channel. Our direct-to-consumer gross margin was 65.4% and improved 140 basis points, reflecting continued progress in reducing markdowns, improving product mix and strengthening our supply chain discipline. Our adjusted EBITDA was $7.5 million compared to $7.1 million last year. And excluding the impact of the DSU revaluation, adjusted EBITDA was $7.6 million compared to $7 million last year, an increase of 7.3%. Overall, our Q3 demonstrates that our strategy is working. We delivered improved execution across merchandising, marketing and operations. We'll continue to invest in long-term health of the brand. The broader retail environment remained dynamic during the quarter, and we experienced unusually warm fall. Despite these conditions, our brand continues to resonate as evidenced by our strong sales and strong new customer acquisition during the quarter. Our performance reinforces the importance of Root's brand strength, heritage and commitment to high quality comfortable clothing that serves as differentiators in this market environment. Over the last year, we continue to strengthen our go-to-market process and our merchandising strategy has gained momentum. During the quarter, we delivered strong results across multiple collections, including our new Roam travel capsule, which features modern basics with technical product attributes and Cloud, our ultra-plush, minimal logo, sweatshirts and sweatpants. Style productivity has also improved this year, reflecting tighter assortments and more disciplined buys as well as our investments in AI-driven allocations. Each year, we are making measurable progress in enhancing our product architecture and elevating our offering. However, we continue to believe meaningful opportunities remain. Our brand building efforts remain a core driver of our long-term value and an important part of our multifaceted growth strategy. Q3 marketing efforts centered on new store openings in Vancouver and Toronto, our fall/winter product launches and our enhanced campus presence with the University of Toronto. These activations exceeded our expectations on engagement and traffic. In the third quarter, we also continued our testing in paid media with increased spending across the full marketing funnel. As we enter the fourth quarter and look to 2026, these earnings will help further fine-tune our marketing efforts and create more disciplined creative testing. We are looking closely at the impact of agentic AI and customer product discovery, and continuing to adapt to this changing landscape. We also saw strong storytelling for our brand ambassadors, reinforcing Roots as a brand that connects people to nature, community and a sense of belonging. Our omnichannel strategy continues to strengthen our connection with our customers with the goal of enabling customers to shop Roots wherever, however and whenever they choose. The 6.3% increase in comparable store sales in the quarter which is 12.1% on a 2-year stack basis, reflects the positive impact in the strategy and performance. In our retail channel, we saw strong conversion wins driven by improved product storytelling, disciplined inventory management, and refreshed visual merchandising, combined with enhanced sales associate training schedules. Our paid media efforts have also driven substantial traffic to the e-commerce channel, which we are focused on converting in the fourth quarter. In addition, increased personalization and search and product merchandising, the integration of wish list, more functionality such as filters and improvements in the shopability of our [ landing ] pages will support both revenue and the customer experience in the fourth quarter and beyond online. As our results highlights, our strategy remains consistent and focused. We are strengthening our core franchises, expanding into complementary categories and increasing the clarity and differentiation within our assortment. We are also elevating the brand to collaboration, heritage storytelling and more targeted marketing. We are also enhancing our omnichannel experience with a focus on convenience, speed and personalization, and we are driving operational excellence across the business. I would now like to comment on early Black Friday trends in the fourth quarter. We've seen good engagement with our products and marketing efforts with consumers responding positively to curated offers in our core franchises in different categories. Early in the holiday season, we continue to experience positive trends. Our Seth Rogan partnership has been resonating well with consumers who understand the strong alignment between our brands and have enjoyed the witty, light, holiday approach to the campaign. Before I conclude, I would like to thank Root's employees across Canada for their commitment and hard work and our customers for their ongoing loyalty to the brand. Roots is a brand with strong heritage, a clear purpose and significant long-term potential. We remain focused on disciplined execution and on creating long-term sustainable value for all stakeholders. With that, I will now turn the call over to our Chief Financial Officer, Leon Wu, for a deeper review of our financial results. Leon Wu: Thank you, Meghan, and good morning, everyone. The past quarter marks the fifth consecutive quarter of growth in top line sales, gross margin and profitability, while we continue to reduce our year-over-year net debt. The ongoing momentum reflects the collective efforts of our multipronged product, channel and marketing functions, working in lockstep to offer the best Roots experience to our global customers. I will now share some more details on the key elements of our results. Sales in Q3 were $71.5 million, increasing 6.8% as compared to $66.9 million in Q3 2024. The growth in our total sales was driven by both our direct-to-consumer and partners and other segments. Our DTC segment sales were $56.8 million in the quarter, growing 4.8% relative to $54.2 million last year. Our comparable same-store sales grew 6.3% in the quarter and 12.1% on a 2-year stack basis. The continued DTC sales growth reflects a strong omnichannel experience offered to our customers. We have seen a strong response to the investments made into our store renovations and data-enabled technology that offers an elevated and more personalized brand experience. This was further supported by the curation of new seasonal styles that amplified and complemented our core product offerings, an authentic marketing moment. As Meghan mentioned, these initiatives have contributed positively towards our traffic, conversion and customer account metrics underpinning our ongoing DTC sales growth. Our partner and other sales were $14.6 million in Q3 2025, up 15.3% compared to last year's sales of $12.7 million. The growth in this segment was driven by earlier orders by our wholesale operating partner in Taiwan for the upcoming holiday and spring selling season, a portion of which was fulfilled in the fourth quarter last year, as well as higher domestic wholesale sales of custom Roots branded products. Total gross profit was $43.4 million in Q3 2025, up 8.1% as compared to $48.2 million last year. The growth in gross profit dollars was driven across both segments and highlighted by the gross margin expansion in the DTC segment. Total gross margin was 60.8%, up 80 basis points compared to last year. Our Q3 2025 DTC gross margin was 65.4%, up 140 basis points compared to 64% last year. The DTC gross margin expansion was driven by growth in our product margins resulting from continued improvements to our product costing and lower discounting. The unfavorable year-over-year foreign exchange on U.S. dollar purchases in this quarter was offset by improvements in freight costs. SG&A expenses were $38.2 million in Q3 2025 as compared to $34.5 million last year, an increase of 10.6%. The largest increases in our SG&A expenses were driven by a combination of increased investments in marketing and higher personnel-related costs, along with higher variable selling costs resulting from stronger sales. As referenced over the last few quarters, we have increased our marketing investments in 2025 with the goal of supporting both in-year sales growth and long-term multiyear brand uplift. Proportionate to the size of the fourth quarter, which represents our largest selling period, we are expecting to invest an incremental $2 million to $3 million in marketing dollars in Q4 2025. The incremental spend will be across a range of initiatives across the full marketing funnel, balanced between top of funnel investments to build long-term brand equity with benefits through the future years and more immediate bottom funnel sales driving activities. We have seen great results thus far in how our marketing contributes towards brand momentum over the last few quarters. As we look forward, we are constantly reflecting on the results of each initiative, and we'll leverage the learnings from this year to refine our marketing strategy with the goal of maintaining momentum while focusing on the most effective and efficient initiatives. Additionally, SG&A increased by $0.7 million of higher noncash stock option expenses and costs related to changes in key personnel, $0.3 million as a result of higher U.S. tariffs on sales to U.S. customers as the U.S. duty-free de minimis exemption was eliminated in August and $0.1 million from the unfavorable revaluation of cash settled instruments under our share-based compensation plan, which is directly tied to increases in our share price. During Q3 2025, we generated $2.3 million of net income, down 4.5% as compared to $2.4 million last year. This equates to $0.06 per share in both years. Excluding the impact of our DSU revaluation expense headwinds resulting from our share price appreciation, our net income would have been $2.4 million, improving 1.5% compared to last year. Our adjusted EBITDA was $7.5 million, increasing $0.4 million or 5.3% compared to $7.1 million last year. Adjusted EBITDA would have grown by 7.4% without the aforementioned DSU revaluation impacts. The strong improvement in our profitability reflects the sales growth and margin expansion achieved during the quarter. Now turning to our balance sheet and cash flow metrics, which also reflects the strong results for the quarter. Our Q3 ending inventory was $66.6 million, increasing 10.3% as compared to $60.4 million last year. Approximately $0.7 million of the increase was driven by the higher U.S. dollar foreign exchange paid on our inventory. The remaining year-over-year increase in inventory was driven by improved inventory position ahead of the peak holiday selling period and higher in-transit inventory to support sales for the next year. Our Q3 free cash outflow was $4.6 million, improving from an outflow of $6 million last year. The year-over-year improvements in free cash flow were driven by sales growth and ongoing management of working capital, partially offset by higher capital investments during the quarter. Due to the seasonality of our business, we typically see cash outflows as we build up our working capital ahead of our peak season. Before generating larger cash inflows through the upcoming holiday selling period. During Q3, we repurchased 415,000 common shares for $1.3 million under our normal course issuer bid. As of the end of the quarter, we were eligible to repurchase up to 325,000 common shares under the current NCIB program, which is in effect until April 10, 2026. Net debt was $44.1 million at the end of Q3 2025, down 5.9% as compared to $46.9 million at the same time last year. Our net leverage ratio measured as net debt over trailing 12-month adjusted EBITDA was approximately 1.9x. With that, operator, you may now open the call for questions. Operator: [Operator Instructions] First question comes from Brian Morrison with TD Cowen. Brian Morrison: Meghan, you commented, you said in the transcript that you continue to experience positive trends. Maybe just -- I know you don't want to go into detail, but maybe just talk about the consumer behavior you've seen going into Black Friday and relative -- as you approach the holidays? Are you seeing any change in maybe the basket size or the AUR? And then lastly, is there any bifurcation of consumer you're seeing with respect to income demographics or by region? Meghan Roach: Thanks, Brian. Nice to hear from you. I would say, overall, the trends from a Black Friday perspective, I think, are really reflecting the overall economy that we see today, right? So I would say that from a consumer perspective, we're definitely seeing people shop earlier. So I think that Black Friday for a lot of people is pulled forward into early November. And I think we've seen a continuation of some of the discounting trends kind of post Black Friday, which reflects changes in the economic environment as we see today. Our consumer continues to be strong, and so we were happy to see those positive trends overall. I would say, fundamentally, the consumer continues during this time period to look for both uniqueness as well as deals and not something we've seen kind of year-over-year, that trend continues. And that's been a trend we've seen for the last number of years also. So I think fundamentally, the consumer is, as you've seen broadly from a market perspective, continuing to reflect the current economic reality and our consumer has continued to be positive, which is good for us. I think our product categories are unique positioned from a heritage perspective, comfort perspective. I think the fact that we have sustainability in our products now is very unique to us also. So we've been happy to see the positive reaction that the consumers have had to our overall product selection. And I think getting in front of those consumers also early as well as the right type of marketing has been helpful to us. Brian Morrison: Right. And you can see in store the uniqueness and expansion of the product breadth. I guess in terms of marketing, you addressed this on the call, but I think you said $2 million to $3 million additional in Q4. Maybe can you just talk about when you look forward to next year, I think you're still in the assessment phase, but is there -- maybe talk about the options? Is the plan to wean off marketing a little bit? Or do you maintain full steam ahead to further stimulate top line growth in order to drive operating leverage? Maybe just talk about how you're looking at that for next year. Meghan Roach: Yes, absolutely. So what I would say is I think we want to continue to trade through December. We still have quite a lot of the month left to go. Typically, at this point in time, we have kind of almost half of the quarter left. There's still a lot of time to go from that perspective. And I think the marketing efforts that we have put into the fourth quarter, we want to continue to evaluate those on a full year basis. That being said, I think when we look holistically at what we're trying to accomplish, obviously, this year, doing a bit more of a mix between top-of-funnel awareness building brand growth perspective, which will help us over a multiyear basis and then that short-term conversion driving activity. So that blend has obviously shifted a bit this year to have a little bit more of that top of funnel approach to it. So when we look into next year, really, what we're looking at is really making sure that we go through all the marketing spend this year, have a fantastic understanding of what generated return -- immediate return to us and what we think is important to drive longer-term value from a brand perspective. Roots is in a unique position because we do have significant awareness across the country. We have been 80% plus, in some cases, we see 90%-plus awareness, depending on the survey you look like from a brand perspective. So a lot of what we're attempting to do from a marketing perspective is really not to drive awareness to the brand, but it's really about making them aware of the things that we have today, how the brand has changed, the broad collection that we have and also, we're also looking at different channels. So if you think about the changes that are happening with the ChatGPT, the Gemini, the AIs of the world, obviously, making sure that we have the right investments put behind. Making sure our website, our brand broadly is searchable and findable on those platforms. It's really important to us. And so I think those are -- our marketing investments as a whole are continuing to reflect the changing reality of how you act in front of consumers. So I won't give you a direction in terms of what the marketing dollars look like overall for next year. But I would say that this year was definitely a year we were testing and learning across a multitude of different things. And so we will be tweaking our marketing overall from a mix perspective next year as we take those earnings and apply those to -- thinking about both short-term and long-term growth. Brian Morrison: Okay. That's helpful. And then last one, maybe, Leon, the gross margin, product cost, and it seems to be an ongoing strength here. I get the lower promo contribution to gross margin. But how are you achieving ongoing product cost? Is it sourcing? Is there more room to go? Maybe just comment on that. Leon Wu: Yes. I mean for the sourcing, we've really built out a robust process over the last few years in terms of understanding how we procure our products from overseas. And one of the main drivers of it is understanding with our vendors how we continue to maintain the quality of our products, but then source it with buying deeper. We're buying earlier to bring the product at a better cost. Another area that we have achieved a lot of the sourcing gains recently has been shifting where the manufacturer is coming from. So where there's more duty favorable countries to source from to bring into Canada. That is also helping us gain a lot of the margins. Brian Morrison: And is that a function of tariffs in the U.S. on to China as well? Leon Wu: No. So the tariffs for the U.S. that we referenced is just related to the U.S. e-commerce part of our business, which is a smaller part of our overall business. In Canada, we pay import duties to bring goods from overseas and that have slightly different tariff structures or duty structures than the U.S. But on the U.S. side, again, it's a small part of our business. Brian Morrison: Yes, no, I'll take it off-line. I think I was going somewhere else with that, but I appreciate it and look forward to seeing strength in the Q4 results and wish you both a prosperous holiday season. Operator: [Operator Instructions] We have no further questions. I'll now hand back to Meghan Roach for any final remarks. Meghan Roach: Thank you, everyone, for joining the call today. For those of you celebrating, we wish you a wonderful holiday season, and we look forward to updating you on our fourth quarter results in the new year. Operator: Ladies and gentlemen, today's call has now concluded. We'd like to thank you for your participation. You may now disconnect your lines.
Operator: Good morning or good afternoon, and welcome to the Vince Q3 2025 Earnings Conference Call. My name is Adam, and I'll be your operator today. [Operator Instructions] I will now hand the floor to Akiko Okuma to begin. So please go ahead whenever you are ready. Akiko Okuma: Thank you, and good afternoon, everyone. Welcome to Vince Holding Corp., Third Quarter Fiscal 2025 Results Conference Call. Hosting the call today is Brendan Hoffman, Chief Executive Officer; and Yuji Okumura, Chief Financial Officer. Before we begin, let me remind you that certain statements made on this call may constitute forward-looking statements, which are subject to risks and uncertainties that could cause actual results to differ from those that the company expects. Those risks and uncertainties are described in today's press release and in the company's SEC filings, which are available on the company's website. Investors should not assume that statements made during the call will remain operative at a later time, and the company undertakes no obligation to update any information discussed on the call. In addition, in today's discussion, the company is presenting its financial results in conformity with GAAP and on an adjusted basis. The adjusted results that the company presents today are non-GAAP measures. Discussions of these non-GAAP measures and information on reconciliations of them to their most comparable GAAP measures are included in today's press release and related schedules, which are available in the Investors section of the company's website at investors.vince.com. Now I'll turn the call over to Brendan. Brendan Hoffman: Thank you, Akiko, and good morning, everyone. We are extremely proud of our third quarter performance as we drove healthy sales growth across all channels and exceeded our expectations for both top and bottom line. Our assortments are resonating across both our women's and men's businesses. But most encouraging is the acceptance we have seen to the strategic price increases implemented this quarter as well as in the momentum in our DTC segment, given the enhancements we have made to the customer experience. In our women's assortment, which has the highest impact from tariffs, prices increased more than our overall average increase of approximately 6%, but units were nearly flat to last year, validating the quality and value of our product in the marketplace. Beyond the pricing actions, our teams have done an exceptional job in continuing to manage the evolving tariff environment. Our goods are flowing smoothly despite significant changes in sourcing and importantly, we've maintained our quality standards throughout this transition. With respect to customer experience, following the store renovations from earlier this year, we enhanced our e-commerce site in Q3 with a strategic site refresh, increased marketing support and the launch of dropship. Our e-commerce site refresh elevated the customer experience with more modern, creative elements and enhanced site merchandising. We are now using AI-generated video content to enrich product detail pages and introduce more service elements like our Cashmere care guide. This investment in our digital platform contributed meaningfully to our strong performance, and we're seeing the benefits flow through in both conversion rates and average order values. Our e-commerce site also significantly benefited from the marketing investments we made in mid-funnel marketing this quarter. Through this work, we grow triple-digit growth in site traffic late in the quarter and supported full price new customer acquisition as well. And at the end of the quarter, we went live with a new dropship strategy, which we believe will be a significant growth opportunity for us moving forward. In the first month since launch, we have seen significant increase in volume. Our initial launch focused only on shoes, but we have plans to expand to other categories, capitalizing on our partnership with Authentic Brands and the category expansion opportunities that provides. The dropship strategy allows us to not only offer more fashion-forward products that we might typically feel comfortable procuring directly, but enables us to showcase a more diverse assortment to our customer providing learnings on customer preferences that we may incorporate into our store channel as well. In addition to these initiatives, we opened 2 new stores this quarter in Nashville and Sacramento, following our successful store opening in Marylebone, London earlier this year, which continues to exceed our expectations. Moving to our wholesale business. We delivered solid growth versus last year, with some of this reflecting the timing benefits from the Q2 shipment delays that we discussed previously, as well as ongoing performance of key partners. We were excited to recently celebrate our 2025 holiday collection, along with our continued partnership with Nordstrom with an immersive experience in L.A. with Nordstrom's top clientele, Nordstrom's VP Fashion Director; and our Creative Director, Caroline Belhumeur. It was a great event to kick off the holiday season and highlight our holiday campaign, which celebrates our brand spirit and showcases connections through stories and gift giving with a 360-degree omnichannel strategy. Thus far, we have seen a very strong start to the holiday quarter, including record sales across the Black Friday and Cyber Monday weekend in our direct-to-consumer business. Given the strength of Q3 and the momentum we are continuing to drive, I am more confident than ever in the trajectory ahead for Vince Holding Corp., and the prospects we have to leverage our platform further to drive growth. We continue to successfully navigate the tariff challenges while maintaining the quality and brand integrity we are known for. We are beginning to reinvest in the business, particularly in marketing initiatives that we had pulled back on earlier in the year and we're seeing positive returns on these investments. The underlying fundamentals of our business remain strong. We're operating with disciplined execution, while positioning for growth. With that strong foundation and the momentum we're building, I'll now turn it over to Yuji to discuss our financial results in more detail and provide our updated outlook. Yuji Okumura: Thank you, Brendan, and good morning, everyone. As Brendan reviewed, we are very pleased with our third quarter performance as we saw momentum continue across the business, enabling us to begin to reinvest in key areas of the business. Total company net sales for the third quarter increased 6.2% to $85.1 million compared to $80.2 million in the third quarter of fiscal 2024. With respect to channel performance, our wholesale channel increased 6.7% and our direct-to-consumer segment increased 5.5%. As Brendan reviewed, part of the growth in wholesale reflects the timing of shipments, given the delays we experienced earlier in the year with tariff disruption. Our teams are doing an excellent job and continuing to manage our supply chain and our goods are flowing smoothly and expect to be back in line to normal course timing by the spring. Gross profit in the third quarter was $41.9 million or 49.2% of net sales. This compares to $40.1 million or 50% of net sales in the third quarter of last year. The decrease in gross margin rate was primarily driven by approximately 260 basis points due to the unfavorable impact of higher tariffs and approximately 100 basis points due to increased freight costs partially offset by 140 basis point increase due to favorable impact of lower product costing and higher pricing and approximately 110 basis points due to favorable impact of lower discounting. As Brendan reviewed, we are very encouraged by customers' response to our strategic price changes and our team's ongoing focus on tariff mitigation efforts. Given timing and mix of sales, we experienced less of a headwind than originally expected from tariffs during the quarter but expect these costs to ramp into the Q4. Selling, general and administrative expenses in the quarter are $36.5 million or 42.8% of net sales as compared to $34.3 million or 42.8% of net sales for the third quarter of last year. The increase in SG&A dollars was primarily driven by approximately $1.1 million related to compensation and benefits and $760,000 of increase in marketing and advertising costs as we reinvested into mid-funnel activities. Operating income for the third quarter was $5.4 million compared to operating income of $5.8 million in the same period last year. Net interest expense for the quarter decreased to $1 million compared to $1.7 million in the prior year. The decrease was primarily due to lower levels of debt under our term loan credit facility. At the end of third quarter of fiscal 2025, our long-term debt balance was $36.1 million, a reduction of $14.5 million compared to $50.6 million in the prior year period. Income tax expense was $2 million compared to 0 income tax provision in the same period last year. The increase is due to the impact of applying our estimated annual effective tax rate to the year-to-date ordinary pretax income. In the prior comparative period, we had a year-to-date ordinary pretax losses for the interim period, and as such, we did not record any tax expense for the same period last year. As a reminder, following the change in controls that earlier this calendar year, we have limitations to use of the NOLs that we did not have last year also impacting the cash tax expense comparison to previous years. Net income for the third quarter was $2.7 million or income per share of $0.21 compared to net income of $4.3 million or income per share of $0.34 in the third quarter of last year. The year-over-year decline in net income was driven by the increase in tax expense. Adjusted EBITDA was $6.5 million for the third quarter compared to $7.4 million in the prior year. Moving to the balance sheet. Net inventory was $75.9 million at the end of the third quarter as compared to $63.8 million at the end of the third quarter last year. The year-over-year increase was primarily driven by approximately $4.2 million higher inventory carrying value due to tariffs. Turning to our outlook. As Brendan discussed, we have seen a very strong start to the fourth quarter with a record holiday weekend sales performance in our DTC segment. Our outlook for the period assumes that this momentum continues with the growth in DTC segment expected to outpace our total net sales growth for the period, which is expected to increase approximately 3% to 7%. This guidance also takes into account potential shift in timing with respect to wholesale shipments given end of the year seasonality. In addition, we expect adjusted operating income as a percentage of net sales for the quarter to be approximately flat to 2% and for the adjusted EBITDA as a percentage of net sales to be approximately 2% to 4% compared to 6.7% in the prior year period. Our guidance for the quarter takes into account approximately $4 million to $5 million of estimated incremental tariff costs that we continue to expect to partially offset with our mitigation strategy. Given our year-to-date performance, and our outlook for the fourth quarter, we expect full year net sales growth to be approximately 2% to 3%. Adjusted operating income as a percentage of net sales to be approximately 2% to 3%, and for the adjusted EBITDA as a percentage of net sales to be approximately 4% to 5% compared to 4.8% in the prior year period despite incurring approximately $8 million to $9 million of incremental tariff costs compared to last year. This concludes our remarks. And I'll now turn it over to the operator to open the call for questions. Operator: [Operator Instructions] And our first question comes from Eric Beder at SCC Research. Eric Beder: Congratulations on a great Q3. I want to talk a little bit about some of the potential drivers here. So you have just started to roll out some of the licensed product, we've seen handbags and suiting in our store tours. I'm curious, you mentioned it also in your comments, where do you think that goes? And I know that the tariffs kind of slowed down the rollouts. What should we be thinking about the potential for that in 2026 and beyond? Brendan Hoffman: Well, I think it's -- I'm even more bullish now after the last month based on my comments on dropship. So what we saw with dropship with Caleres and shoes in the last 4 or 5 weeks, is truly spectacular. And so the opportunity to launch that on e-commerce in the spring on these other categories and then figure out how to better utilize that within the stores, in addition to obviously showcasing the product I think it has -- it can have a real impact on our business more than I was anticipating prior to the dropship launch. Eric Beder: And when you look at -- I know that you've been also looking at putting -- you put some COH denim into some of the stores. How should we be thinking about that potential opportunity to kind of collaborate with other our key fashion brands to kind of help both of you? Brendan Hoffman: Yes. That's something that we're going to continue to explore and prioritize. Very happy with the Citizens of Humanity collab. It also highlights the opportunity we have in denim. So whether we do that in-house, although that's a long haul or continue to do partnerships in denim with Citizens and look for other categories that perhaps ABG isn't licensing at this point. And we can bring to kind of round out our assortment. So that was another good win for Vince. Eric Beder: Great. And you opened up 2 new stores in new markets. I know it's very short. Could you give us a little bit of thought process? And then kind of what should we be thinking about -- I know that we pulled back on that a little bit this year just because of all things going on this year. But given the results here, what is the store opportunity kind of back on full swing for next year and going forward? Brendan Hoffman: Yes. I mean we're pleased with the way the Nashville and Sacramento have been received within the community. It's still early days. Also, we'll be monitoring what it does to our e-commerce business. I think we have 60 stores now between the outlets and full price. And I wouldn't expect that number to move much, maybe a couple more, a couple less depending on opportunities. We continue to be really pleased with our Marylebone store in London. So I'm going to see if there's opportunities in other parts of Europe, both to do business where we can be profitable like Marylebone and also provide some visibility for us in regions where we have a wholesale business and stores can just reinforce that. So we'll continue to monitor the direct-to-consumer opportunity led by e-commerce. But as I've always said, it's not an either/or with direct-to-consumer and our wholesale business. It's both. It's an and. And I think they just reinforce each other, and we saw that in Q3 and continue to see that in Q4. Eric Beder: Great. Congrats and good luck for the rest of the holiday season. Operator: The next question comes from Michael Kupinski from Noble Capital Markets. Michael Kupinski: And I'd like to offer my congratulations as well. Sales were obviously much better than what we were looking for. Were there any particular bottlenecks or limitations that could have delivered even better sales? And I'm thinking any inventory constraints for particular items, for instance? Brendan Hoffman: I mean, there's never a crystal ball. So you always -- there are certain things you wish you had a little bit more. But I think overall, we were in a good inventory position. Really working through the first half of the year, disruption from tariffs as we discussed. So as I'm doing my store tours, I'm not getting too much pushback from the stores about where they need more inventory. I think Vince also since I was here last, is doing a much better job with our logistics and operations, refilling the stores on a timely basis. So I think we have a good handle on that. Again, not to harp on it, but I am so excited about it, this dropship opportunity, which allows us to take full advantage of Caleres' shoe inventory. I mean that's a big deal because that's where we did have some holes in our inventory assortment because it's a little bit more difficult with our third-party partners to properly procure ahead of time. So this opens up a really big opportunity for us going forward, as I've been saying. But overall, the inventories, I think we're in a good position and help fuel the growth we saw. Michael Kupinski: And how much of the strong revenue growth was driven by price versus product volume? I know that you touched on that in your comments, but I was wondering if you could just expand on that. Brendan Hoffman: Yes. Well, I mean we are really pleased that the units held steady and actually grew at the higher price points. So we had anticipated given the price changes that we would see a little bit of erosion in our unit velocity. But so far, we haven't seen that. And the customer seems to be trading up with us. I don't know if that's because they're trading down from other luxury brands. And as those prices skyrocket, but our core customer continues to see us as a value. And as I said in my comments, women's was where we had to take the largest price changes. And the units held strong. So it was a win-win, and that's continued into all of it. So we'll continue to monitor that, continue to see if there's even a little bit more opportunity to push up price where we think the customer will react positively. But definitely a driver was the strength in the units. Michael Kupinski: And then given that wholesale and direct-to-consumer looked like revenues were -- the revenue growth were pretty much similar. But I was wondering if there was any divergence between the 2 channels in terms of product sales and particularly as you go into the fourth quarter. Brendan Hoffman: No. I mean we -- our e-commerce was clearly the big winner and driver when you look across all the channels. But overall, saw strength at the register with our wholesale partners. We continue to work with Saks Global to make sure that we're able to properly service their business while they go through their transformation. So that creates a little bit of noise. But overall, as we start December, the product is checking at the register everywhere. Michael Kupinski: Got you. My final question is, can you just talk a little bit about trends in freight costs. I know that I was just wondering if you negotiate annual contracts. And if you could just talk a little bit about what you're seeing there. Yuji Okumura: Yes, certainly. So yes, we are seeing freight cost increases. That's also partially due to the fact that we are changing sources as well of where we are sourcing the product. So it's really more the product of -- depending on the shift in timing, we're airing more stuff or certain pieces are taking longer in terms of distance wise to get here. So it's not so much of the actual inherent sort of freight contracts and the pricing related to that. It's really more along the lines of the timing of when we want to bring in the product, which method we're using to bring in the product. Operator: [Operator Instructions] We have no further questions so I'll hand the call back to the management team for any closing comments. Brendan Hoffman: Okay. Well, thank you all again for your participation today, and we look forward to updating you on our year-end results in the spring, and happy holidays to all. Thank you. Operator: This concludes today's call. Thank you very much for your attendance. You may now disconnect your lines.
Operator: Good day, and welcome to the AZZ Inc. quarter 3 Full Year Earnings Conference Call and Webcast. [Operator Instructions] Please note this event is being recorded. I would now like to turn the conference over to Phillip Kupper with Three Part Advisors. Please go ahead. Phillip Kupper: Good morning. Thank you for joining us today to review AZZ's third quarter fiscal 2026 results for the period ended November 30, 2025. Joining the call today are Tom Ferguson, President and Chief Executive Officer; Jason Crawford, Chief Financial Officer; and David Nark, Chief Marketing Communications and Investor Relations Officer. After today's prepared remarks, we will open the call for questions. Please note the live webcast for today's call can be found at www.azz.com/investor-events. Before we begin, I would like to remind everyone that our discussion today will include forward-looking statements made in accordance with the safe harbor provisions of the Private Securities Litigation Reform Act of 1995. Either nature, forward-looking statements are uncertain and outside the company's control. Except for actual results, AZZ's comments containing forward-looking statements may involve risks and uncertainties, some of which are detailed from time to time in documents filed by AZZ with the Securities and Exchange Commission, including the latest annual report on Form 10-K. These statements are not guarantees of future performance Therefore, undue reliance should not be placed upon them. Actual results could differ materially from these expectations. In addition, today's call we'll discuss non-GAAP financial measures, which should be considered supplemental, not as a substitute for GAAP financial measures. We refer shareholders to our reconciliations from GAAP to non-GAAP measures contained in today's earnings press release. I would now like to turn the call over to Tom Fergus. Thomas Ferguson: Thank you, Phillip. Thank you all for joining us today, and Happy New Year. After I provide a brief overview of our results and an update on what we are seeing across our segments, Jason will cover AZZ's detailed financial results, and Dave will discuss industry dynamics across our end markets. First, let me share a couple of important milestones. We achieved record sales of $426 million in the third quarter, surpassing any quarter in our company's history. And we had a record high trailing 12-month adjusted EBITDA of $358 million. These financial results reflect our unwavering commitment to execute on our disciplined strategy that focuses on driving growth and creating shareholder value. This quarter, we maintained our cash dividend of $0.20 per share, marking 63 consecutive quarters of consistently returning capital to our shareholders through cash dividends. Now turning to our third quarter results. We grew total sales by 5.5% and generated a robust adjusted EBITDA of more than $91 million. Metal Coatings delivered an exceptional quarter, with sales rising 15.7% year-over-year, fueled by higher volumes and strong demand from infrastructure projects. Segment EBITDA margins of 30.3% reflect an increased mix of larger projects in electrical, solar and transmission and distribution work, which tend to be more price competitive. Precoat Metals delivered sequential improvement over the prior quarter, though sales were down 1.8% year-over-year. This was primarily the result of continued softness in construction, HVAC and transportation markets. Meanwhile, food and beverage container demand reached new record highs, driven by new customer acquisitions and market share gains. This trend further underscores the accelerated shift from plastics to aluminum, which aligns with the ongoing ramp-up at our new Washington, Missouri facility. Overall, the increase in end market demand was driven by growth in infrastructure modernization, energy transition and industrial reshoring along with data center construction, integrated LNG power generation and renewable energy projects. These market sectors depend on galvanized steel and coated materials, areas where AZZ offers unmatched scale, coating solutions expertise, and exclusive technologies to deliver exceptional value to our customers. Our diversified portfolio positions us uniquely to seize project opportunities across multiple end markets. Dave will share more details on this in a moment. We continue to emphasize AZZ's proprietary ERP platform as a core differentiator within our business model. Our Digital Galvanizing System and coil zone platforms deepen customer relationships and reinforce our competitive moat while providing durable returns on invested capital. Operationally, the systems are margin enhancing through higher throughput, improved yields, better zinc utilization, improved administrative and production efficiencies and increased customer connectivity. Importantly, these benefits are achieved with limited incremental capital, making our technology investments highly accretive to ROIC, while also reducing waste and supporting more sustainable operations. Subsequent to quarter end, AVAIL completed the sale of a majority interest in its Welding Solutions Business, which they refer to as WSI. The transaction creates value for shareholders and further simplifies AVAIL's portfolio. Our joint venture partner remains focused on completing additional divestitures with only the Rig-A-Lite and a small portion of international WSI business left. With that, I will turn it over to Jason. Jason Crawford: Thank you, Tom. For the third quarter, we reported record sales of $425.7 million, representing a 5.5% increase from $403.7 million in the prior year period. The growth was led by our Metal Coatings segment, where sales increased 15.7% year-over-year, driven by higher volumes and infrastructure-related spending across our largest verticals. Although Precoat Metals sales improved sequentially from last quarter, sales were down 1.8% from the same quarter of the prior year, due to an overall weaker end market environment. Driven by lower volumes in construction, HVAC and Transportation, partially offset by residential reroofing and stronger food and beverage container sales. Within Precoat Metals, excess imported prepainted metal has worked its way through the market. And with tariffs likely to remain in place, we anticipate Precoat Metals will start to benefit from the replacement of prepainting metal imports. The company's third quarter gross profit was $101.9 million, or 23.9% of sales, compared to $97.8 million or 24.2% of sales in the same quarter of the prior year. Selling, General and Administrative expenses totaled $32.5 million in the third quarter, or 7.6% of sales. This compares favorably to last year's third quarter, which was $39.2 million, or 9.7% of sales, which included costs associated with severance and one-off employee retirement expenses. Operating income for the quarter was $69.5 million, or 16.3% of sales, a 180 basis point improvement compared with $58.5 million, or 14.5% of sales, in the prior year third quarter, due to operational improvements this year and nonrecurring items included in last year's third quarter results. For the third quarter, we reported a net loss in equity and earnings of $1.4 million. This was after recording $0.6 million post-closing loss adjustment on the previously announced divestiture of the Electrical Products business. Losses in the quarter from our AVAIL joint venture are primarily due to the excess overhead costs resulting from this divestiture. Compared to the third quarter of last year, equity in earnings were $8.6 million lower. With the sale of WSI in December 31, 2025, and progress in resizing AVAIL's overhead costs, we are forecasting equity and earnings from unconsolidated subsidiaries to be 0 for the fourth quarter of this year. Interest expense for the third quarter was $12.2 million, representing a $7 million improvement from the prior year. Driven by a combination of actions, including debt paydown, debt repricing and the introduction of the receivable securitization facility. The current quarter income tax expense was $14.5 million, reflecting an effective tax rate of 26.1%, compared to 26.5% tax rate in the prior year's third quarter. We do not expect the One Big Beautiful Bill Act to have any material impact on our income tax expense or effective tax rate for the year. However, it will reduce our cash taxes paid in 2026. Reported net income for the third quarter was $41.1 million, compared to $33.6 million for the third quarter of the prior year. AZZ reported adjusted net income of $46 million, which excludes the amortization of intangible assets of $5.8 million and the AVAIL equity loss adjustment of $0.6 million, our adjusted diluted EPS of $1.52. This compares favorably to the prior year's adjusted net income of $41.9 million and adjusted diluted EPS of $1.39, an increase of 9.4% compared to the third quarter of the prior year. Third quarter adjusted EBITDA was $91.2 million, or 21.4% of sales, compared to $90.7 million, or 22.5% of sales, for the same period last year. Turning to our financial position and balance sheet. Our strategy for deploying cash flow includes investing in high-return organic and inorganic initiatives, paying down debt, returning capital to our shareholders through our quarterly cash dividend and buying back our stock. During the third quarter, we generated cash flow from operations of $79.7 million. Capital expenditures for the quarter were $18.5 million, which included a combination of sustaining and growth capital. Stock repurchases for the third quarter were $20 million, at an average price of $99.28 per share, while cash taxes were higher in the quarter associated with the previously mentioned AVAIL joint venture gain offset somewhat by the impact of the One Big Beautiful Bill Act. We ended the quarter with a net debt position of $534.7 million and $337.1 million in available borrowing capacity, consisting of $336.4 million in the company's revolving credit facility, and $0.6 million in cash and cash equivalents. After paying down $35 million of debt in the quarter, our credit agreement net leverage ratio was 1.6x, which is within our previously announced target range of 1.5 to 2.5x. And finally, as Tom mentioned, over the same period last year, we increased and paid our quarterly cash dividend of $0.20 per share, up from $0.17 per share. With that, I'll turn the call over to David. David Nark: Thank you, Jason. Good morning, everyone. The U.S. infrastructure investment cycle, along with an intense wave of investments in generative AI and machine learning technologies, is in the early stages of driving demand for high-power density and advanced cooling systems. These hyperscale data centers require coatings that extend well beyond just structural steel and transmission poles. For example, these projects require specialized coatings for critical applications, including corrosion protection, aesthetics, functionality, fire safety and regulatory compliance. Massive data center investments are typically paired by necessity with co-located power generation and grid upgrades, which are multiyear construction projects. We expect these private and public colocation investments will reinforce a positive long-term secular trend benefiting both AZZ Metal Coatings and AZZ Precoat Metals. We also expect solar projects to remain strong as many of our solar customers have backlogs that extend well past the expiration of the current tax credits. These projects are focused on large-scale sites, including data centers being developed commercially that provide power for continuous high load requirements. Excluding data centers, nonresidential construction remains subdued in the quarter primarily driven by interest rate and lingering tariff-related uncertainty while residential construction was also soft. Despite this, we saw positive trends in the metal residential reroofing market as it continues to gradually take share from the asphalt roofing market. This helped offset a slower-than-normal storm season as no named hurricanes made landfall in the Continental United States in the current year. Looking ahead, most forecasts point to flat to regionally selective modest growth in construction through calendar year 2026. Finally, as we progress through our fourth quarter, it's worth noting that last year's fourth quarter was impacted by unusually wet and cold weather. Prolonged temperatures below 40 degrees, and gas curtailment actions by utility providers, led to a record number of lost production days in the prior year quarter, particularly in Texas. Therefore, we anticipate our fourth quarter may present somewhat easier year-over-year comparisons to last year's December through February period. With that, I will turn the call back over to Tom. Thomas Ferguson: Thank you, Dave. Turning to our fiscal 2026 guidance update. We have narrowed the forecast ranges for total sales, EBITDA and adjusted EPS. We anticipate that our sales will be in the range of $1.625 billion to $1.7 billion. Adjusted EBITDA will be in the range of $360 million to $380 million. And adjusted diluted earnings per share will be in the range of $5.90 to $6.20. And as Dave mentioned, we believe that last year's fourth quarter weather-related impacts will be less severe. Our strong financial and market positions enable us to capitalize on strategic growth opportunities while executing on our broader capital allocation plans. We expect to release fiscal 2027 guidance in the next few weeks for our new year starting March 1. Consolidation in the industry continues to present compelling opportunities, and we are currently evaluating several strategic tuck-in acquisitions that align with our playbook and expand our market reach in Metal Coatings and Precoat Metals. We continue to take a disciplined approach to M&A, targeting opportunities to drive sustainable growth and generate meaningful value for shareholders. Finally, I want to sincerely thank our AZZ team for their unwavering dedication, disciplined focus and the pride and passion they bring every day to deliver exceptional quality, service and value creation to our customers and other stakeholders. Now operator, we would like to open the call for questions. Operator: [Operator Instructions] The first question comes from Ghansham Panjabi with Baird. Ghansham Panjabi: I guess, first off, on the Metal Coatings segment and also Precoat. Can you just give us a sense as to how your order backlogs have shaped up in context of some of the complications of the operating backdrop with the government shutdown and so on and so forth? And just specific to the government shutdown, did it have any material impact on you in either of the two segments? Thomas Ferguson: I think as we've discussed typically on the Metal Coatings side, we really don't have much backlog. We've got -- but we do have a good forward look from our sales organization in terms of what our customers are -- what their outlooks are. So we feel really good at this point as we look at finishing the year. That's why unless weather gets really, really ugly as it did last year, we think Metal Coatings has the momentum and opportunities to have a really good finish to the year. So feeling really good about that, and it's both as we've mentioned, the big projects, lot of opportunities, whether it's data centers, whether it's solar plants, transmission distribution, a lot of the pulp business and towers. It's just all really active, particularly in a lot of the areas that we've got good capacity. On the Precoat side, much more of a mixed bag. I think -- didn't feel anything from the government shutdown to speak of on either side just to get that out there. But on Precoat, yes, they're more challenged with residential, commercial construction. They are getting -- benefiting from some of the data centers, a lot of painted metals on those. But -- and then in terms of roofing, it's more than conversions as houses are putting new roofs on. They're more and more of them are moved into metal, which is good for us, but it's not enough to offset the market -- call it the market headwinds. So -- and they don't really have backlog either, but they do have a lot of bare metal, and the bare metal is lower than at this time last year. So they're chasing stuff that's going to be quicker turn to maintain their sales levels. Ghansham Panjabi: Got it. And then specific to Precoat, Tom. I mean, obviously, a lot of distortions in order patterns last year with tariffs and the adjustments in imports and so on and so forth. Is the underlying operating environment worsening as we head into fiscal year -- into calendar year '26? Or is it just at a low point and there's no recovery on a consolidated basis given the ups and downs you -- across the business as you called out? Thomas Ferguson: No. I think you got a couple of things going on, some of which is in our control, some of which isn't. But I think we believe the markets have pretty much bottomed and stabilizing. And so we're seeing opportunities. And of course, we're going after more. We're winning some market share that's out there to offset the market softness. But -- and then we've got the Washington plant ramping up, and that is one of the areas where we are seeing opportunities in the container. And as we continue to talk about plastics converting to aluminum, that's just -- we probably couldn't have opened up new capacity for the container business at any better time. So we get pretty excited looking at next year and having a full year of run rate production at the new Washington site. Not to mention we've made some investments and are going to continue making investments at the St. Louis container site. So that's where we are excited, and we're chasing all of that we can find and have a good partner on Wash, MO and then other opportunities with other customers there. So that's where our focus is and then doing everything we can to convince customers to go with us instead of the competition. Ghansham Panjabi: Okay. Just one final one on -- I know you'll give fiscal year '27 guidance formally in a few weeks. But any sneak preview you can share with us as it relates to the variances that we should keep in mind as we finalize our estimates for next year? Thomas Ferguson: No, I think -- I think as I alluded to, Metal Coatings, we look at them finishing strong for the balance of this fiscal year. And even though they don't have backlog, they're stacking up some pretty good opportunities as we kick off going into next year. So we're feeling real good about that. Obviously, we've got a budget to get approved by our Board. So we'll do that in about 3 -- well, 2 weeks at this point, and then communicate as soon as we can put something together and get new guidance out. But yes, feeling really good. I like where we're positioned. I like what our teams are doing. I like the leadership teams we've got in place. And I like what they're focusing on. So I'm pretty enthusiastic. Operator: The next question comes from Nick Giles with B. Riley Securities. Nick Giles: Congrats on the strong results. It's especially nice to see both the buybacks and the debt reduction, but I wanted to go back to M&A. And I was just curious if you could give us some additional color around what kind of opportunities you're seeing out there today? Is it Metal Coatings versus Precoat? Single site or multisite? Thomas Ferguson: Yes, that's a great question. I think the M&A pipeline is very active. It's predominantly bolt-ons onesie-twosies, which is kind of -- I'd like to say it's in our sweet spot. We acquired Canton and just ramped it right up. It's our typical integration playbook, and bring it right up to our fleet margin levels and go grow it. So those are the kind of things we've got in the pipeline. I don't see us getting anything closed by the end of this fiscal year. It's just too many things going on and not that we're not focused on it and got some good -- the teams are active. But I'll be really shocked if I'm sitting here on this call at this time next year without a couple of wins on the board in talking about those onesie-twosie bolt-ons, which just -- we'd like to get a couple of them in the camp, or in the family so to speak. Nick Giles: Got it. Well, Tom, that's good to hear. Maybe switching gears. You talked about plastics to aluminum and Washington was extremely well-timed on that front. But aluminum prices have reached all-time highs in the U.S. And I know you don't directly feel the impact of that. You have the tolling model. But your customers might feel that impact. So I was curious if you've seen any changes in demand on that basis? Or if you feel the Precoat business has a sensitivity to aluminum prices? David Nark: Yes. Thanks, Nick. This is Dave. I'll take that one. We don't think that there's going to be much sensitivity to the aluminum just because when you look at the container market, in particular, there has been the secular shift to aluminum driven largely by people's more reluctance to drink things out of plastics, in particular, and the concern around microplastics. When you look at in the quarter, in particular, I think it's underpinned by the results of the segment. Our Consumer segment in particular, was up 11%. And when you take a look at the disaggregated sales. So we feel really good about what we're seeing. Wash, MO is ramping nicely, as Tom mentioned. We've got a great partner there and a lot of long-term prospects that continue to come our way. Operator: The next question comes from Eric Boyes with Evercore. Eric Boyes: Maybe first, how impactful to Precoat segment margins might the Washington, Missouri ramp, the 75% exit rate in fiscal 4Q be? And when might we hear about remaining capacity allocation there? Jason Crawford: Yes. Eric, it's Jason here. I can take that one up. Certainly, as we've previously communicated the margins that we expect from the Washington facility just based on the math of the equation of that product that we're selling are going to be complementary. So it is going to add a lot but tailwind to the margins that we see at Precoat. In terms of the additional capacity, we're solely focused on our partner at the moment, and ramping up capacity for that partner is coming through the cycle. And we're very pleased with where we're at, but we still got a lot of work to do and certainly a lot of work to achieve here in Q4. So it's really going to be into the early part to the mid part of next year before we really start to focus on bringing additional customers to that facility. Eric Boyes: Okay. Appreciate that. And then maybe second, and Dave, I think you alluded to it in the prepared remarks, but can you help us with how we should think about kind of quantifying the benefit of the favorable weather comp in fiscal 4Q? David Nark: Yes. As we mentioned, on a high level, when you look at last year, it was unseasonably cold and wet. We had mentioned last year, I think that we lost around 200 days of production collectively in the quarter. So I don't have the specifics in front of me right now, but we do believe that we're seeing better weather so far in the fourth quarter. Today, in Texas, it's going to be 80 degrees. So a far cry better than it was last year at this time. But we can follow up maybe after the call, and I can see if I can get you more detail. Operator: The next question comes from Adam Thalhimer with Thompson, Davis. Adam Thalhimer: Congrats on the record sales quarter. Can you update us on pricing in the Metal Coatings segment? I'm curious also how price might be impacting margins in that segment? Thomas Ferguson: Yes. We talked a lot about -- we try not to talk directly about pricing, since we do have some competitors on these calls. But when we're chasing large projects and when we talk about transmission, distribution, and solar, and data centers, they tend to be bigger projects, and so it just attracts more competition. So it will -- that's when we're talking about the mix because you're going to have -- not significantly, but you're going to have marginally lower margins on those big projects. And so they formed a bigger piece of our business. And we had opened up to that because we had decided that we were pushing the top end of our margins. And so we've kind of opened up the opportunities. Let's chase some -- hate to call it chasing the volume. But let's be more open to taking some of that -- those opportunities. And I think it's been good for us because we've got capacity. That's going to help us the balance of this quarter. It definitely helped us in the third quarter. But we're not getting out of control. It's -- we got a tightly controlled process on how we price projects. A couple of things others that hasn't been talked about, but we do have zinc continuing to go up in our kettles. We tend to push price as those costs go up. And we price it 41 plants on every given day. So I think the teams have demonstrated great discipline and yet going after opportunities with customers to build sustainable momentum. And -- so we're pretty excited at this point about what that team is doing. Adam Thalhimer: And -- either Tom or David could address this. But I am curious, you guys aren't the only ones talking about the data center is getting bigger in 2026 versus 2025. Just curious if you could flesh that out a little bit for us, and why you're focused more on it today? David Nark: Yes. I think as you look at the data centers and in my remarks, I was talking about, we're really excited about the number of opportunities within a data center that we touch. So it goes just beyond structural steel that's used for building foundations, and the structure envelope of the building, and then the related power coming into it. We do believe that Precoat will see some opportunities as those projects move further along. We've got customers on the Precoat side that make insulated wall panels for instance. And then there's a lot of coat specific work that's driving the need for increased metal and coated metal, whether it's galvanized or prepainted. So that's why we're bullish on the segment. It's a big segment. It's a growing segment and our share within it is expanding as well. Adam Thalhimer: Good. And last one for me. David, you brought up the metal roofing opportunity. Do you have any idea today what the share of metal roofing is for new construction and repair and remodel versus asphalt? David Nark: Yes, we do have some data on that. When you look at sort of the breakout in residential between new construction and replacement, it's just shy of 5% of the new construction market, is now embracing metal roofing. It's gone up about a point -- a full point since 5 years ago. And so we think that trend is going to continue. And then on the replacement side, it's a larger impact there. It's about 14% of the replacement market today. And growing at a faster rate, driven by a few things. One of them is building coats. It is more resistant to storm damage over time than asphalt shingle and also HOAs, which have historically been a little reluctant to embrace different types of roofing material other than asphalt are now loosening up their standards and embracing that as well. So we're very excited about it. Operator: The next question comes from Daniel Rizzo with Jefferies. Daniel Rizzo: Just to follow up on that last comment. Is there a particular region in a country where metal reroofing is more prevalent? You mentioned HOAs, I don't know when I think HOAs, I think of where my parents live, which is a kind of retirement places in Florida and Arizona. Is there any regional mix that's relevant? David Nark: Absolutely, Daniel. Yes, we're seeing a stronger concentration of that through the south in the areas that you mentioned. So Florida, in particular, as well as here in Texas, and all the way over to Southern California and Arizona are all markets that generally have a higher concentration of metal roof than in the northern climates. Daniel Rizzo: Okay. And I may have asked this before, but -- sorry, go ahead, I'm sorry, did you say something? David Nark: No, I was just going to say yes, they do well where we got more of a corrosive environment, or you've got a lot of sun. So they tend to hold up better. Daniel Rizzo: Okay. Okay. No, that makes sense. And then for the just kind of traditional non-resi construction, and maybe I've asked this before, but what's the lag between when you start to see some easing in credit towards -- a resi starting to rebuild and it kind of translates to demand for you guys. Is it immediate? Or is it like a 6-month lag? Or how should we think about it? David Nark: Yes. When you look at it and again kind of taking a look at just some of our sales data, we have seen -- in my prepared remarks, I talked about subdued construction on the non-resi side, and then the residential being down a little more significantly. So I think that as you move forward through the end of this year and into next year, the fact that there's been some rate movement already should be a positive for the market, and we should start to see the benefit of that sometime here and as we enter into calendar 2026 and our FY 2027. Thomas Ferguson: And I'd add on the residential side, it's more tracking to mortgage rates. But it's going to -- on a lot of these capital projects, it's a 6- to 9-month lag time in general. So -- and then -- but it's looking at the forward curve. So we're hearing more optimism out there, I guess, I'd leave it at that. Operator: The next question comes from Mark Reichman with NOBLE Capital Markets. Mark La Reichman: Just focusing on the Metal Coatings business for a minute. So the second quarter, the sales growth was 10.8% relative to the prior year quarter, and 15.7% third quarter year-over-year. And we did see the gross margin go down a little bit, 30% in the second quarter versus -- what was it, 30.9% and 29.8% versus 30.9%. You mentioned chasing these bigger projects, but could you maybe get a little more specific? Are there specific large contracts that kind of drove the big sales increase, and might you expect in 2027, maybe a little more moderation in the sales growth, but maybe a tick up in the margin? Or do you think these big projects are just going to continue? Thomas Ferguson: No, I think there's a couple of things here. So if you take typical transmission distribution, big poles, towers, it's -- it depends on where it hits -- which plants the project activities act. Some of our plants are built for big poles when projects come in different sections of the -- so this is a very temporary kind of thing. And we've invested a lot in our capabilities and capacities. So yes, as we get into next year, I expect that you'll see those margins hopefully improve as we've got some operational improvement activities. We've invested in kettle capacity. We've invested in specific things that will help us run some of these kinds of projects, or the bigger projects better. And then we've added more trucking so that we can move things in between our customers and our plants. And pivot things to the plants that are going to be more capable of running certain projects. So a lot of things that we've been doing this year to -- which is one of the reasons we did open it up, and we want to want to continue with that momentum going into next year. So yes, I would not expect to see double-digit growth quarter-over-quarter going in as we get into next year. I expect growth, and also expect us to be able to handle it with the margin profile, that kind of where we're at plus. Mark La Reichman: Then so you've done a great job reducing debt and repurchasing shares. Just on the dividend policy, have you kind of announced at a precedent with the increase in the first quarter dividend? I mean, is that kind of what investors kind of expect is maybe one increase per year? Jason Crawford: It's certainly, obviously, with the realignment of our debt in the AVAIL transaction in the summer. It gives us the luxury to readdress that and whether it be an annual basis or such like. It's certainly something that's on our radar. It's certainly something that we continue to consider and continue to take a look at. So given that profile, then it's certainly something that we will look at come up for this next cycle. Thomas Ferguson: Yes. And we are committed to being more regimented about looking at it consistently each year and -- and as we -- this is the time where we are putting the budget together, the plans together and talking about these things with our Board. So the timing is good, as Jason said, but we're committed to evaluating this annually and not having to go several years like it did this last time before we have an increase. Operator: The next question comes from Gerry Sweeney with ROTH Capital. Gerard Sweeney: Most of my questions have been answered, but I just had one quick question on Precoat. You implied that you think the segment has bottomed, but we also talked about some prepayment imports that are being at surplus. Are you able to bracket out how much that surplus was a headwind for the segment, and what we should be thinking about that on a go-forward basis? Thomas Ferguson: Yes, certainly. The thought process around about the prepainted metal imports is really correlating the data that we can see internally. So we can see internally the [ beer ] imports coming in and get a feeling for that and then translate it back into what prepainted import material is out there in the pipeline. So we've seen that filter through our system and filter through our customer systems to the point where less prepainted metal imports historically, up to this point in time, have not necessarily had any impact on our business. And our anticipation going forward is we start to see some of that benefit filter through. If you think about that prepainted metal import market, it's around about 10% of the U.S. market is fulfilled through that supply chain. It's down around about 35% this year, but it's gaining momentum in terms of how much it's down, obviously, it's down more as you get to the third quarter versus the first quarter. So it creates that market opportunity. And really, if you look at that prepainted metal import market, and who can serve that market, then there's only a couple of players that can really serve that market. And obviously, AZZ Precoat is one of the names at the top of that list. So it creates a nice opportunity for us as we start to look at our opportunities for next year. Operator: This concludes our question-and-answer session. I would like to turn the conference back over to Tom Ferguson, CEO, for any closing remarks. Thomas Ferguson: Thank you, operator. And thank you for joining us this morning. As you can tell, we're pleased with our results for the Q3. Feeling good about the full year. And then it's early, but getting excited about fiscal 2027, looking forward to announce some guidance for fiscal 2027, and then announcing our results in a few months. So happy new year. Thank you for joining us. Operator: The conference has now concluded. Thank you for attending today's presentation. You may now disconnect.
Operator: Greetings, and welcome to the Constellation Brands Q3 Fiscal Year 2026 Earnings Conference Call and Webcast. [Operator Instructions] As a reminder, this conference is being recorded. It's now my pleasure to turn the call over to Blair Veenema, Vice President, Investor Relations. Please go ahead, Blair. Blair Veenema: Thank you, Kevin. Good morning, all, and welcome to Constellation Brands' Q3 Fiscal '26 Conference Call. I'm here this morning with Bill Newlands, our CEO; and Garth Hankinson, our CFO. We trust you had the opportunity to review the news release, CEO and CFO commentary and accompanying quarterly slides made available in the Investors section of our company's website, www.cbrands.com. On that note, as a reminder, reconciliations between the most directly comparable GAAP measure and any non-GAAP financial measures discussed on this call are included in the news release and website. And we encourage you to also refer to the news release and Constellation's SEC filings for risk factors that may impact forward-looking statements made on this call. Before turning the call over to Bill and Garth, please keep in mind that, as usual, answers provided today will be referencing comparable results unless otherwise specified. Lastly, in line with prior quarters, I would ask that you limit yourselves to 1 question per person, which will help us to end our call on time. Thanks in advance, and over to your questions. Operator: [Operator Instructions] Our first question today is coming from Bonnie Herzog from Goldman Sachs. Bonnie Herzog: Hope you're doing well and happy New Year. I guess I had a question on your beer op margins. They came in a lot stronger than expected in the quarter despite the volume deleverage. So hoping you could talk further on some of the puts and takes behind this strength. And then thinking about your full year guidance, which you maintain, it does imply much more modest beer op margins in the fourth quarter, which I know seasonally is a lower quarter. But is there anything else that is expected to weigh on margins in this next quarter? Maybe aluminum, or if you could just talk through that? Garth Hankinson: Thanks for the question, Bonnie, and happy New Year to you. So first starting with Q3 margins. As you indicated, volume declines certainly were a headwind in the quarter. Additional headwinds in the quarter were tariffs, as you noted, logistics and then brewery maintenance. Offsetting those headwinds, we continue to make good progress against our cost savings initiatives. We had favorable pricing from the actions we've taken in both the spring and in the fall. And then there was a depreciation timing benefit that occurred in Q3, which was favorable on a year-over-year basis. As we think about -- or move to Q4, just to underscore what you said, it is our lowest quarter from a seasonality perspective, makes up about 20% of our overall volume. So fixed overhead absorption will be most amplified in this quarter. The depreciation benefit that we saw in Q3 will actually turn into a little bit of a headwind into Q4 as additional assets come online or are put into service. And then tariffs will be a further headwind in Q4, really related to a couple of factors, one of which you mentioned, which was aluminum and the pricing of aluminum which continues to be pretty strong. There is also the ongoing and as expected shift in product mix, so more to aluminum, from glass, and we'll see that in Q4. And then there's also a timing element to tariffs as to when the tariff gets accrued and goes into inventory and then when it gets released in the P&L. And that will be a bit of a headwind in Q4 as well. Operator: Next question is coming from Nadine Sarwat from Bernstein. Nadine Sarwat: Another one on beer margins, though perhaps with a longer-term perspective. So you called out a number of the factors in your prepared release and in your answer just now about the pressures that beer margins will face in Q4. So with that in mind, how should we be thinking about the 39% to 40% beer margins for fiscal '27 and '28 that you guided to back in April of last year? Is that something you still believe you can achieve? Should we be thinking of margins closer to where we were this year? Any color would be helpful. And then if I could just squeeze in one more on depletions. Nice to see that come in, I think, ahead of some expectations. Any color on exit rate or what we're seeing in December? Is there any sequential improvement or more of the same? Garth Hankinson: Thanks, Nadine. I'll take the first question and then Bill will take the second. But as it relates to FY '27 and beyond, as we said back in our Q2 earnings call, we'll provide more color on what our expectations are for FY '27 and beyond in our April earnings call. That's our normal cadence, if you will. It allows us to see how the rest of the year unfolds from a consumer perspective and from a macroeconomic perspective as well. So more to come on that. That being said, the guidance that we provided last April was given under a different set of macroeconomic conditions, and the macroeconomic environment has worsened since that time. So that will all go into our planning process and will be reflected in the guidance that we give in April. William Newlands: And, Nadine, relative to December, December came in roughly where we expected. It was fairly consistent with our expectations. For those of you who track the Circana/IRI data, you saw there was a very strong result against our business around the Christmas holiday. Noting, of course, that that's a great reflection of the strength of our overall brands and the brand health that exists for our brands. And therefore, we were quite comfortable coming out of December as the first month of our last quarter of the year. Operator: Next question is coming from Lauren Lieberman from Barclays. Lauren Lieberman: Want to talk for a second about capacity and CapEx. So in the slide deck, you reiterated the plans for 7 million additional hectoliters of capacity through fiscal '28. I think that implies sort of heavier CapEx in 4Q tied to Veracruz. I just wanted to maybe get an update on how you're thinking about the modular capacity build-out over the next couple of years, managing that against growth projections to support kind of what are really the optimal utilization levels. And particularly, when we think about the fiscal '26 volumetric pace is going to be lower than what you kind of originally thought back in April, to your point, under a very different macro backdrop. Garth Hankinson: Yes. Lauren, thanks for the call. So the approach on the modularity of the breweries is we'll continue with that approach going forward. As we've said over the course of the last couple of quarters, the way we'll manage that really is -- when we bring assets online, and we'll manage to bring -- or we'll manage through the capacity in that manner. What we've also said, though, is that when you're building capacity in a manner which we've been building capacity with long-lead items, you are making commitments to that spend. And our plan for this year is reflective of commitments that we've made on capacity expansion. But, again, we continue to monitor this and assess where the volume is expected to be. And, again, we'll bring the assets online when we can. And to the extent we can delay or defer CapEx, we will. But there's a lot of long-lead equipment that goes into a brewery, and those commitments have been made. Operator: Next question is coming from Rob Ottenstein from Evercore ISI. Robert Ottenstein: Great. Moving more to -- over to the brand side. The Pacifico brand has been an extraordinary success. It's still relatively small, but you've been working on it very diligently for 10-plus years or so. Just wondering how -- what you've learned about the brand over this time, how incremental is it, any tweaks that you see in terms of the brand positioning and the pressure -- the marketing pressure, investment pressure behind the brand for it to kind of get to what you think is its full potential, which my understanding is, is to be a very strong #3 brand in your portfolio. William Newlands: Yes, Robert. Pacifico, obviously, has been a tremendous success to date, much in the same way that Modelo initially developed in the west of the United States and then has progressively moved east to become the #1 player by dollars in the United States. Pacifico is doing a very similar approach. It's the #2 brand in the State of California today. It skews younger relative to our overall portfolio and really has resonated well with consumers. As you know, it's the #1 social -- #1 on social media in terms of share of voice, and it has gained 1.5 points in the on-premise. So you're seeing significant gains in that arena as well. So we continue to invest behind this brand. As you point out, we think it's going to be a strong #3 in our portfolio as time goes forward. And you should expect to see us continue to put significant emphasis on this as it builds its way across the country, similar to what Modelo did several years ago. Operator: Next question is coming from Dara Mohsenian from Morgan Stanley. Dara Mohsenian: So you mentioned mid-single-digit distribution growth for the beer portfolio in the quarter. Just as we look out to calendar 2026 post the spring resets, do you think it's realistic you can drive shelf space gains for your portfolio with macros where they are? Or is that less realistic just given the weaker velocity we've seen over the last year or so? And maybe also you can just touch on the beer category itself and what you're hearing from retailers as we think about shelf space for the category in the balance of 2026. William Newlands: Sure. Let's start with the distribution side. We continue to see distribution as one of our strongest opportunities going forward. Given that our portfolio gained share in 49 of the 50 states, we continue to earn additional distribution capability and distribution positions across the country. Now those will probably change some. You've seen a radical increase in distribution around Pacifico, going back to Robert's question a moment ago, as well as Victoria, which also has grown double digits for the most recent past. So we continue to see distribution as a significant opportunity going forward. Remember, Modelo itself, despite the fact that it's the #1 beer by dollars in the U.S., it still has 20% fewer PODs than the broader domestic players who we compete against. So there remains plenty of opportunity for distribution to be an important part of the future. That has been reemphasized by our Shopper-First Shelf, which has allowed retailers to recognize the opportunity to build a stronger section. And that will be a significant part of your category question, is as more people do Shopper-First Shelf, it will be better for the category and, as you would expect, on brands that are growing their share like ours are, it will be good for us as well. Relative to the beer category overall, it still remains challenged. And it's largely around the Hispanic consumer. 75% of the Hispanic consumers are very concerned about the socioeconomic environment and they're being much more careful about their spending patterns, spending much more on what you would call consumer essentials versus other categories. So I think that's going to continue to be volatile going forward. But this is where our focus remains on controlling the controllables, and that is distribution, that's price pack architecture, that's doing the right things to set ourselves up for a successful future. Operator: [Operator Instructions] Our next question is coming from Drew Levine from JPMorgan. Drew Levine: I wanted to follow up, again, on the beer margins implied for fourth quarter given the low single-digit absolute COGS increase for the year. Implies gross margins, I think, something in the 47% range. I understand that it is lower volume as, Garth, you well mentioned. But I guess maybe if you could sort of provide a little bit more context on the expected headwind from aluminum and depreciation that you mentioned, any sort of quantification there? I'm just asking because, I guess, last year in fourth quarter, volumes were down as well and, obviously, much stronger margin performance. So just on the margins, that would be great. And then another follow-up just on the depletions in the off-premise, I think were down 2.9%, ran decently ahead of where we saw both Nielsen and Circana end up in the third quarter. It's the second quarter in a row that's happened. So wondering what you're seeing in the independent channels, if it's just sort of a function of easy comparisons, or are you seeing any sort of encouraging trends in that channel? Garth Hankinson: Yes. So just to reiterate on the margins, what the headwinds were and, again, you noted that it is our low seasonal quarter. Just for clarity, again, it's 20% of our overall volume for the fiscal year. As I mentioned, depreciation, which was a benefit for us in Q3, will be an incremental headwind in Q4 because incremental assets are being placed into service. So that will be a headwind in the quarter. And then on tariff, as expected with tariffs, aluminum pricing has gone up, so the tariff has gone up. There's been an ongoing shift in our business, in our portfolio towards aluminum. That's continued through the fiscal year, right? So we'll see the impact of that in Q4. And then there is a timing element around tariffs, which is you incur the tariff when you bring it into the U.S., but then it doesn't run through your P&L until you sell it on. And so given the way tariffs have layered in through the year, there's going to be a higher tariff impact as expected in Q4. Another minor impact, headwind in Q4 is there were some expenses that we expected to incur in Q3 that had pushed into Q4. That's just timing. So a bit of a benefit in Q3 versus a headwind in Q4. William Newlands: Relative to your question related to depletions, I think a couple of things to keep in mind that you don't always see. Some of the regions have less tracked channel coverage, and those have been stronger, on-premise. A year ago, Modelo was #5 on draft, today it's #2. I already mentioned when I was answering Robert's question on Pacifico that we picked up significant share with Pacifico in the on-premise as well. So some of those areas that are not as easily tracked have gone in our favor, and that certainly has helped the depletion layout versus what some of the expectations were. Operator: Next question is coming from Gerald Pascarelli from Needham & Company. Gerald Pascarelli: Question for Bill. Just despite the continued macro pressures, your depletions have remained relatively consistent this year, just kind of down 2.5% to 3%, so not getting materially worse. Your beer business continues to outperform the category. It looks like scanner showed a little bit of an improvement in December. So just curious how you're thinking about a potential recovery, if at all, in your beer business looking out over the next year when you just consider some of the obvious tailwinds, the easier compares, the benefit of the World Cup, those types of things. Any color there would be great. William Newlands: Sure. Obviously, we're cautiously optimistic that we're on the sort of the plateau of where the business will be. But it's been really tough to judge. The volatility has been great. What -- so it's very hard to say that you've sort of hit the bottom. When you look at our omnibus study, we continue to see Hispanic consumers being particularly concerned. There seems to have been a little bit of uptick with the broader market community. And as I alluded to earlier, Christmas week was particularly strong for our business. But I think that's more reflective of when consumers are coming out and they're buying. They continue to buy our brands because of the brand health of those brands. There are some things, as you point out, next year, World Cup is a great example, where there will be things that are beer moments. And certainly, we believe our beers will help to support those beer moments. But it's very difficult to project at this point how this is all going to go. A lot of it is going to relate to what the -- how the consumer is feeling and how they're feeling about the sort of macroeconomic issues that exist today. Operator: Next question today is coming from Robert Moskow from TD Cowen. Robert Moskow: Thanks for the question. Unfortunately, it was also Gerald's question. But maybe if there's a way to think about it just quantitatively, your Hispanic consumer really started feeling the pressure in February of last year. You kind of see it in the data. And I guess what we're all kind of wrestling with is, once we lap that initial shock of restrictions on immigration policy, is it possible that it just gets a little bit less bad? So instead of mid-single-digit declines just theoretically with this cohort, since you're lapping the initial shock, it could be a little bit better than that? William Newlands: Well, we hope -- we assume that you -- we hope you're correct. That would be a lovely outcome. The thing that we consistently see, and as you know and we've said this in prior quarters, we track it by ZIP code. And with ZIP codes that have greater than 20% Hispanic representation, it still remains very challenging. That has seen some improvement in ZIP codes with less than 20% Hispanic representation, and you see a lot of volatility state by state depending on what is going on with immigration policy in particular markets. So all of those factors have been why it's been very difficult to predict, because you do have that volatility that goes on state by state, market by market. It's why we continue to talk about controlling the controllables. It's why we continue to talk about and put ourselves in a good position to win. It's why we have focused on the things that are working in our favor, things like Pacifico and Victoria, Modelo Draft, Corona Sunbrew, Corona Non-Alcoholic, all of which are working very well against our business and are positioning us not only to have near-term success, but for the long run as well. Operator: Next question is coming from Filippo Falorni from Citi. Filippo Falorni: Happy New Year. I wanted to ask on the beer pricing environment. You had 1.5% pricing in the quarter, but you have also some negative mix from package types. Can you discuss like how you're thinking that would evolve going forward? Should we still think this dynamic continues? And then maybe if you can touch on like some of the initiatives that you did with Modelo Oro and Corona Premier in terms of the price adjustments. Are you seeing a volume uptick as a result of the price adjustment there that could we see some more -- in some more other brands to try to respond to the macro environment? William Newlands: Sure. We continue to project 1% to 2%. We still think that's an appropriate level. As you know, it will vary higher or lower within that range depending on the market conditions that we face. But to your point, we are quite pleased with the initial work. As many of you know, during this past -- or this past calendar year, we adjusted Oro and Premier pricing to be more in line with the average price point the consumer was expecting for light beers. We're very pleased with what that looks like. Our trends on Oro and Premier have both improved, and we're pleased with that positioning. It also points to price pack architecture, which is also an important part of what we have done. We have added 7-ounce in a number of forms and formats in different states to, again, meet the needs of consumers who are concerned about price points because of their socioeconomic concerns and financial concerns that exist at the moment. Again, all of those things are trying to meet the consumer where they are today, and that process will continue going forward. Operator: Next question is coming from Peter Galbo from Bank of America. Peter Galbo: I maybe just wanted to ask a clarifying comment from your prepared remarks about the fourth quarter specifically. You talked about an expectation of year-over-year volume declines in the beer business to improve, I think, in the first sentence. And I just -- I wanted to clarify whether that is a shipment comment, a depletion comment, both potentially, but that we should still be expecting kind of a negative in the fourth quarter and whether it applies to both ships and depletes in beer. William Newlands: Garth will add on to what I'm about to say, but as we've made note -- we made note in our last quarter, we expect over the course of the last 2 quarters that ships and depletes will be basically equal. As you saw, there was some minor variation in this quarter. You would expect that to probably reverse itself next quarter. But over the course of the 2, third and fourth quarters, we expect depletes and ships to basically be exactly the same. Anything you want to add to that, Garth? Garth Hankinson: Bill, that's precisely right. And the comment was specific to billings, so to your point, yes, so that the second half of the year billings and depletions are largely aligned. Operator: Next question is coming from Bill Kirk from ROTH Capital Partners. William Kirk: So a different type of question. In December, President Trump signed the executive order pushing to reschedule cannabis. I guess if that happens, how would it impact how you think about your exposures to that segment? And then on the ban on intoxicating hemp and intoxicating hemp beverages, in some states, those have become kind of a real market. Do you think you'll benefit if those products go away, those intoxicating hemp beverages go away? William Newlands: Obviously, we have shares in Canopy that we still have available to us. And I think that could ultimately be interesting as that market develops. But we don't engage on a day-to-day basis in the cannabis business today. I think -- we have not seen a significant issue related to our beer business related to hemp. It has mostly been around ready-to-drink and ready-to-serve scenarios where there seems to be interaction there, and that seems to be where most of the interaction has come. But admittedly, consumers make choices around their disposable income and what -- where they choose to spend money. And therefore, as this develops, that's certainly something that we're going to be quite aware of and keep our eye on closely. Operator: Next question is coming from Michael Lavery from Piper Sandler. Michael Lavery: I was wondering if you could maybe just elaborate a little bit on how to think about World Cup. It's, as you pointed out, just a driver of occasions. But have you -- can you give a sense of maybe what you've seen in the past in terms of maybe a positive lift, or any changes to your spending approach? I realize you're not a sponsor. So do you still plan some ways to kind of spend additionally around it or just kind of benefit from the occasion momentum? How should we think about just what impact that might have both on the top line side and maybe your spending side? William Newlands: Sure. As you would expect, this is a big sporting element for the coming year. Sporting elements tend to be big beer moments. It's also a sport that overindexes in the Hispanic community. All of those things, therefore, overindex into our business. So we would expect, as the consumer engages with that event and the various games that will attest to those, that will have some incremental benefits for us. We will remain as diligent as we always are to get the right promotions and to get the right shelf presence and floor presence around that particular time. We'll also have in-game media, TV media. As you know, Modelo is the #1 share of voice and Corona is the #3 share of voice in traditional media. All of that will be done consistent with investing against sports, which has been the focus of our attention anyway. So we believe that has an -- that creates an opportunity for a strong window of time for beer generally and more specifically to us. Operator: Thank you. We've reached end of our question-and-answer session. And that does conclude today's teleconference and webcast. You may disconnect your lines at this time, and have a wonderful day. We thank you for your participation today.
Operator: Good afternoon, ladies and gentlemen. I would like to welcome everyone to the Gap Inc. Third Quarter 2025 Earnings Conference Call. [Operator Instructions] I would now like to introduce your host, Whitney Notaro, Head of Investor Relations. Whitney Notaro: Good afternoon, everyone. Welcome to Gap Inc.'s Third Quarter Fiscal 2025 Earnings Conference Call. Before we begin, I'd like to remind you that the information made available on this conference call contains forward-looking statements that are subject to risks that could cause our actual results to be materially different. For information on factors that could cause our actual results to differ materially from any forward-looking statements, please refer to the cautionary statements contained in our latest earnings release, the risk factors described in the company's annual report on Form 10-K filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission on March 18, 2025, quarterly reports on Form 10-Q filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission on May 30, 2025, and August 29, 2025, and other filings with the Securities and Exchange Commission, all of which are available on gapinc.com. These forward-looking statements are based on information as of today, November 20, 2025, and we assume no obligation to publicly update or revise our forward-looking statements. Our latest earnings release and the accompanying materials available on gapinc.com also include descriptions and reconciliations of financial measures not consistent with generally accepted accounting principles. All market share data referenced today will be from Circana's U.S. Apparel consumer service for the 12 months ending October 2025, unless otherwise stated. Joining me on the call today are Chief Executive Officer, Richard Dickson; and Chief Financial Officer, Katrina O'Connell. With that, I'll turn the call over to Richard. Richard Dickson: Thanks, Whitney, and good afternoon, everyone. We are very pleased to report third quarter results for Gap Inc. that exceeded our expectations across multiple measures, including net sales, gross margin and operating margin. We've done this by executing our strategic priorities with precision and consistency. The reinvigoration of our iconic brands continues to gain strength. Our playbook rooted in purpose, powered by creativity and executed with excellence is working. And it's bringing consistency to how we operate and clarity to how we win. The momentum in the business is clear from product design to storytelling, from store execution to digital engagement. The result is a company that's becoming more agile and performing with increasing confidence. On today's call, as usual, I'll provide an update on our third quarter performance and progress in the context of our 4 strategic priorities. Then Katrina will walk you through our detailed financial results and our financial outlook, after which we will open the call for questions. Let's start with financial and operational rigor. Gap Inc. comparable sales were up 5% versus last year, the highest quarterly comp in over 4 years. We were pleased to see our 3 largest brands, Old Navy, Gap and Banana Republic, posting strong positive comps in the third quarter, demonstrating the resilience of our portfolio despite a challenging quarter for Athleta. We delivered operating margin of 8.5%, which benefited from growth in AUR as customers responded well to our brand offerings. We continue to strengthen our balance sheet, ending the quarter with strong cash balances of approximately $2.5 billion. Turning to our next strategic priority, driving relevance and revenue by executing on our brand reinvigoration playbook. This playbook when applied with relentless repetition creates a powerful flywheel, which has resulted in 7 consecutive quarters of comp growth for our portfolio. Our largest brand, Old Navy, had an incredibly strong quarter, reflecting the brand's strength, consistency and continued momentum. Comparable sales were up 6% with the brand consistently gaining market share over the last 2 years. Customers responded to the compelling value proposition, resulting in healthy growth in average unit retail and notably across all income cohorts, which is encouraging despite widely reported macroeconomic pressure on the low-income consumer. Old Navy's consistent performance is being delivered by trend-right products, our strategic pursuit of category leadership and compelling storytelling. The quarter began with a robust back-to-school season, reinforcing its leadership position in kids and baby in the U.S. denim posted its highest third quarter volume in years with growth across the family. Women's and girls' showed particular strength driven by trend-right styles like barrel, wide leg and baggie fits. Active delivered impressive double-digit growth in the quarter with strength across the family. This demonstrates the strong customer response to the brand's distinctive value proposition in the active market and innovation, including new franchises like Bounce fleece. Today, Old Navy is the #5 active apparel brand in the U.S. and the #4 brand in the women's active space. As we begin to drive more growth through strategic partnerships that amplify our brand relevance, our latest Disney collaboration kicked off the holiday season with our Jingle Jammies collection, which is exceeding our expectations, driving excitement across the family and fueling strong performance in the broader sleep category. Another great example is our first designer collaboration with American Design Legend, Anna Sui. The collection brought high-fashion design to a broader audience, staying true to Old Navy's democratic and accessible brand promise. The campaign featured rising Gen Z artist, PinkPantheress and resonated across platforms. In September, we announced plans for a strategic expansion into the beauty category with a phased launch starting with Old Navy. As one of the fastest-growing, most resilient retail categories in the U.S. and customer insights that reinforce strong interest in the category, we see a clear and meaningful opportunity to grow in beauty. We recently expanded Old Navy's Beauty collection in 150 stores with select stores offering dedicated shop-in-shops and Beauty Associates. We intend to use this pilot to inform a thoughtful scaling strategy that will take us from seeding in 2026 to accelerating growth in the years that follow. Old Navy's third quarter performance reflects the strength of the team's work, which is clearly resonating. This brand continues to delight consumers and consistently deliver positive comps while reinforcing Old Navy's position as a brand that defines value, style and accessibility in American fashion. This gives us confidence as we move into Q4 and beyond. Now let's turn to Gap. Gap delivered another standout quarter, reinforcing the reliability of its execution and the compounded strength of our namesake brand. Comparable sales were up 7% on top of 3% comp last year, marking the eighth consecutive quarter of positive comps with growth in average unit retail, consideration, organic impressions and new customers, a clear signal that Gap's momentum is real, repeatable and resonating. The quarter was fueled by broad-based strength in denim, the centerpiece of our viral campaign, Better in Denim, featuring global group, Katseye. This campaign demonstrated the power of the playbook in action, featuring trend-right product, amplified by culturally relevant storytelling. With more than 8 billion impressions and 500 million views, Better in Denim culminated in a global cultural takeover and has become one of the brand's most successful campaigns to date, generating significant traffic and double-digit growth in denim. The results speak for themselves. Gap continues to accelerate, attracting a younger, highly engaged consumer, particularly Gen Z, who is discovering us while reinforcing loyalty with our core consumer. As Gap brand equity and relevance continues to build, the iconic Gap Arch logo hoodie is a great example of the brand reclaiming its place in the cultural conversation. During the quarter, we marked the 30th anniversary of the Gap hoodie with our first-ever Hoodie Day. It was a moment that energized our teams, drove connection with consumers and contributed to the notable strength in Fleece during the quarter. Our recent collaboration with Sandy Liang was another highlight, delivering strong results and continuing to position Gap as a platform for creative partnerships that drive relevance and new customer acquisition. For holiday, the brand is leaning into CashSoft, where you'll see continued innovation with extensions into new silhouettes, on-trend sets and vibrant colorways. Earlier this month, we launched our highly anticipated Give Your Gift Holiday campaign, a continuation of our effort to bridge the gap across generations through music, creativity and culture, featuring emerging artist, Sienna Spiro. Gap's execution of the playbook has been fantastic, and it's been exciting to see the brand building on their success quarter after quarter while continuing to drive distinction and relevance. It's a brand that knows who it is, where it's going and how to win, and we're looking forward to carrying that momentum into the holiday season. At Banana Republic, we continue to make steady progress. The work to strengthen its positioning, leaning into its heritage is paying off. Comparable sales were up 4% in the quarter, reflecting meaningful traction as the brand's reinvigoration takes hold. Growth was driven by continued progress in the harmonization between men's and women's. Men's elevated fashion designs featuring distinctive textures and fabrications continue to perform well. And we've seen notable improvement in women's as fit and product refinement are resonating, particularly in dresses and wovens. Building on the success of the brand's prior campaigns, the response to Banana Republic's fall campaign with David Corenswet was strong, breaking brand engagement records and fueling growth while expanding cultural reach and resonance. For the holiday season, Banana Republic is leaning into its distinctive position as the modern explorer brand. Our new campaign shot in the stunning landscape of Ireland, captures this essence well with our beautiful product featured in our travel-oriented storytelling brought to life through dynamic destination-rich content. This approach is driving stronger brand affinity and proving to be highly impactful with our customers. Overall, Banana Republic's third quarter results reflect meaningful progress and continued momentum. I'm optimistic the brand is well positioned as we head into the holiday season. Shifting to Athleta. Maggie Gauger, Brand President, has begun to make an impact in her first 90 days. She's taking quick and thoughtful action to begin to reorient the brand. This includes reorganizing the talent structure to align with her vision. The team is doing the right work, acting with speed and urgency to drive progress, but this reset will take time. Our focus is on positioning Athleta for long-term success and returning it to its rightful place as a premium aspirational brand. The brand is at the beginning of its reinvigoration journey. We aren't chasing quick fixes. We are taking a deliberate approach to position the brand for the long term. We're confident that the consistent application of our brand reinvigoration playbook anchored in purpose and heritage will guide Athleta forward. This is about returning to what made the brand great to begin with while reestablishing our clear and distinctive position in the active market. We're encouraged by the steps Maggie and the team have already taken, and we look forward to the continued impact of their leadership as Athleta's reinvigoration takes shape. As we head into the holiday season, our supply chain continues to power strategic advantages. The scale of our global network across sourcing, logistics and fulfillment gives us the flexibility and resilience to operate with confidence. Our long-standing vendor partnerships and diversified sourcing footprint are enabling us to move with speed and deliver newness at the pace of demand. We've introduced new automation and AI capabilities across our omni fulfillment network from robotic unloaders to advanced storage and retrieval systems, which have increased productivity by nearly 30% compared to just a few years ago. This enables us to meet peak demand with greater speed, agility and precision. With a fleet of about 2,500 stores globally and the largest specialty apparel e-commerce business in the U.S., we're positioned to serve our customers wherever and however they choose to shop this holiday season. Across Gap Inc., our teams are inspired and energized by the work we're doing, and you can feel it. The work we're doing together to drive the business continues to ignite real energy inside the company, creating a culture that's united, motivated and focused on execution. This is the culture that is carrying us into the holiday season, where our collective focus is clear: win with the consumer, deliver with excellence and keep building on the progress we've made together. In the fourth quarter, we remain focused on executing with excellence. Our Q3 and quarter-to-date performance positions us well for the holiday selling season and gives us the confidence to update our full year outlook, increasing net sales growth to the high end of our prior range and raising our operating margin. We look forward to finishing the year strong and creating a clear runway to the next phase of our transformation as we move into 2026, building momentum. I'll now turn the call to Katrina for a closer look at our financials. Katrina O'Connell: Thank you, Richard, and thanks, everyone, for joining us this afternoon. We delivered exceptional third quarter results, surpassing our expectations across multiple key metrics. Our strategy is working, growing brand relevance combined with operational and financial discipline drove our highest quarterly comparable sales performance in over 4 years, up 5%. We saw strong performance across the back-to-school and early holiday periods, underscoring the increasing resonance of our brands with consumers. With the playbook now in its second year, we're beginning to see a flywheel of growth take hold at Old Navy and Gap, with Banana Republic gaining traction. We exceeded our gross margin expectations with strong flow-through to our operating margin in the quarter, driven by rigor in the fundamentals. Average unit retail or AUR grew again this quarter, reflecting our compelling product offering and the disciplined execution across our teams. Our brand momentum, combined with our strategic supply chain actions, enabled a significant portion of the tariff impact on our margins to be mitigated. With the strength of our third quarter results and our quarter-to-date performance in mind, we are raising our full year 2025 gross margin and operating margin outlook with full year 2025 net sales growth now expected to be at the high end of our prior guidance range. I'll take you through the details of our outlook shortly. We are entering the final stages of fixing the fundamentals. Consistent progress on our strategic priorities has strengthened our position as we move into 2026, where we will focus on building momentum and creating new growth opportunities. Now turning to third quarter results. Net sales of $3.9 billion were up 3% year-over-year, exceeding our expectations with comparable sales up 5%. By brand, starting with Old Navy, net sales were $2.3 billion, up 5% versus last year, with comparable sales up 6%. It's exciting to see the brand winning in strategic categories like denim, active and kids and baby, supported by strong execution of culturally relevant marketing and partnerships. Turning to Gap brand. Net sales of $951 million were up 6% versus last year and comparable sales were up 7%. Relentless consistent execution of the reinvigoration playbook is fueling sustained momentum for the brand, clearly reflected in the Better in Denim campaign. Banana Republic net sales of $464 million were down 1% year-over-year with comparable sales up 4%. Our foundational work on the brand from elevated product to culturally relevant storytelling is resonating with consumers and drove the second consecutive quarter of solid performance. Athleta net sales of $257 million, decreased 11% versus last year and comparable sales were down 11%. We're focused on applying the playbook with rigor, beginning with the fundamentals as we work to reset the brand for the long term. And while we're eager for results, we are executing a phased plan that will take time. Let's continue to the balance of the P&L. Gross margin of 42.4% declined 30 basis points from last year, but exceeded our expectations. As anticipated, tariffs pressured overall margin levels. However, lower discounting resulted in increased AUR growth driven by the consumers' response to our relevant product and storytelling. Compared to last year, merchandise margins were down 70 basis points due to the estimated 190 basis point impact of tariffs. This implies roughly 120 basis points of underlying margin expansion. ROD leveraged 40 basis points in the quarter. SG&A increased to $1.3 billion, primarily due to the quarterly timing of incentive compensation and continued strategic investments. SG&A as a percentage of net sales was 33.9%, de-leveraging 50 basis points versus last year. Third quarter operating margin of 8.5% was down 80 basis points compared to last year, which includes an estimated 190 basis points of tariff impact. This implies roughly 110 basis points of underlying margin expansion. Earnings per share in the quarter were $0.62, a decrease of 14% versus last year's earnings per share of $0.72, primarily due to the impact of tariffs. Now turning to the balance sheet and cash flow. End of quarter inventory levels were up 5% year-over-year, primarily attributable to higher costs due to tariffs. Our disciplined inventory management resulted in slightly negative unit inventories, and we believe we ended the quarter with the right inventory composition. We continue to be rigorous in our approach to inventory for the balance of the year. As we shared on our second quarter call, we've tightened the way we purchase unit inventory to ensure maximum flexibility for various demand scenarios and to enable us to be more responsive to consumer demand. We expect to operate in line with our inventory principle of unit purchases positioned below sales. The last 2 years have been about fixing the fundamentals, which includes strengthening the balance sheet. We ended Q3 with cash, cash equivalents and short-term investments of $2.5 billion, an increase of 13% from last year. Net cash from operating activities was $607 million year-to-date, and our free cash flow of $280 million year-to-date demonstrates the rigor we have put into managing the business. Capital expenditures were $327 million year-to-date. With regard to returning cash to shareholders, in the third quarter, we paid $62 million to shareholders in the form of dividends, and the Board recently approved a fourth quarter dividend of $0.165 per share. Year-to-date, we have repurchased 7 million shares for approximately $152 million, achieving our goal of offsetting dilution. And while we've achieved our goal, as always, we remain opportunistic. Now turning to our outlook for fiscal 2025. I am pleased with the strength of our Q3 results and solid quarter-to-date performance, which are giving us the confidence to update our fiscal 2025 outlook. We've been operating against a dynamic backdrop for the last few years, and we're expecting the same for the fourth quarter. Our outlook assumes a relatively consistent macroeconomic environment, but acknowledges the potential for increasing uncertainties related to consumer behavior and global economic and geopolitical conditions. As a result, we continue to take a balanced view with our guidance and remain focused on controlling the controllables. Starting with full year 2025 net sales, we are increasing our outlook to the high end of our prior guidance range and now expect net sales growth of 1.7% to 2% year-over-year. Our outlook assumes ongoing strength at Old Navy, Gap and Banana Republic and a longer recovery at Athleta. Moving to gross margin. With our strong Q3 performance, we are raising our full year gross margin outlook. We now expect deleverage of about 50 basis points year-over-year, driven by an unchanged estimated annual net tariff impact of approximately 100 to 110 basis points. Excluding the impact of tariffs, this would imply underlying gross margin expansion of approximately 50 to 60 basis points versus last year. Turning to SG&A. We continue to expect SG&A to leverage slightly for the full year. As discussed on last quarter's call, we are driving continuous improvement in the cost structure of the company this year as we rigorously drive $150 million in cost savings in our core operations through efficiency and effectiveness. We remain committed to reinvesting a portion of the $150 million into future growth projects, including beauty and accessories as we pursue the long-term success of the company. A portion of these savings will also offset continued inflation. Now I'll turn to fiscal 2025 operating margin. We now expect an operating margin of about 7.2% for the full year, an increase from our prior guidance range of 6.7% to 7%. This continues to include the estimated net tariff impact of approximately 100 to 110 basis points. Excluding the impact of tariffs, this would imply meaningful underlying operating margin expansion of 80 to 90 basis points versus last year. Our income tax rate outlook for the year has increased to approximately 28% and primarily reflects the impact of changes in the amount and mix of our geographic earnings. This increase of 1 point versus our prior outlook of 27% represents an approximate $0.03 headwind to EPS. Looking to 2026, as we shared on our second quarter call, we do not expect the annualization of tariffs in 2026 to cause further operating income declines. And we now expect the majority of the mitigation to come from adjustments to our sourcing, manufacturing and assortments with the balance driven by targeted pricing. We continue to be mindful of price elasticity and remain focused on maintaining the overall value proposition for our customers. And while pricing is a lever to manage AUR, it's one of many we've been using to manage margin over time. Other levers include assortment mix, full price sell-through, promotions and inventory management. Our third quarter AUR performance and the momentum of our brands gives me confidence that our AUR growth plans are achievable. There will be a timing dynamic to the tariff impact on gross margin in 2026. We estimate a Q1 net tariff impact similar to Q4, followed by meaningful benefits from our mitigation efforts in Q2. The back half of 2026 should turn to a tailwind as our actions build, and we lap most of this year's tariff impact. In closing, our Q3 results reflect strong execution of our reinvigoration playbook, driving consistency and growth across our largest brands. Continued cost discipline is enabling reinvestment in strategic growth opportunities, while our scale and supply chain strength support ongoing tariff mitigation. When we perform with excellence, it builds confidence. Confidence fuels execution. Execution drives growth. This flywheel is the engine of our momentum. As we look to deliver this holiday season, we remain focused on operational excellence and advancing our ambition to become a high-performing company that delivers sustainable, profitable growth and long-term value for our shareholders. I'd like to thank the team for their commitment to excellence and delivering results in support of our transformation journey. With that, we'll open up the line for questions. Operator? Operator: [Operator Instructions] And our first question comes from the line of Alex Straton with Morgan Stanley. Alexandra Straton: Great. Congrats on a nice quarter. Maybe for Richard or Katrina, can you just dig in a little bit more on what drove such a strong comp acceleration at the Gap banner? And also how you think about sustainable comp level for that business over time? And then maybe for Katrina, just what surprised the upside versus your initial expectations on gross margin? Curious if tariffs played a role and how you think about steady state on that line item from here? Richard Dickson: Alex, thank you. First off, I think it's clear our strategy is working, and it is showing up in the momentum that we're seeing in our results. All 3 of our largest brands exceeding expectations, Navy up 6%, Banana Republic up 4% and Gap delivered another standout quarter with a strong comp of 7% and that's on top of 3% last year, and it represents the eighth consecutive quarter of positive comps for us. This consistency is setting new records for the brand, and it's reinforcing our confidence in its long-term growth trajectory, driven by compelling product assortments, partnerships and marketing have really resulted in growth across all income cohorts. We have seen more high-income consumers choosing Gap. And we really do believe that with the strong competitive position that we've taken between premium and value and the fact that we're bridging the generation gap, it's a really exciting time to see Gap continuing to accelerate. We have been attracting a younger, highly engaged consumer, particularly with Gen Z as they discover the brand. And it's reinforcing loyalty with our core consumer. So the performance in the quarter, which, as you know, was fueled by our broad-based strength in denim, the centerpiece of our viral campaign, Better in Denim featuring the global group Katseye, did incredibly well. I mean we generated more than 8 billion impressions. I think we had over 500 million views. It was the denim story everybody wanted to be part of. We increased our ranking in the denim category. Gap is now the #6 adult denim brand in the U.S., up from 8 last year. Collaborations are continuing to drive relevance and revenue with our latest collaboration this quarter with Sandy Liang, which was incredibly successful, again, attracting new younger customers to the brand. And it's exciting to see the brand just continuing to build on their success quarter after quarter, and we're looking forward to carrying that momentum into the holiday season and beyond. Katrina O'Connell: As it relates to -- sorry, I'm going to finish up, Alex, for you on gross margin. So for gross margin in the quarter, we did exceed our expectations in gross margin by over 100 basis points, and that was actually driven by an in-line expectation as it relates to tariffs. So tariffs of 190 basis points were as expected. But the out-performance in the quarter really came from standout performance, particularly at Old Navy and Gap and better-than-expected AURs as consumers really responded to our product and storytelling, which enabled us to have lower discounting in the quarter. Operator: And our next question comes from the line of Bob Drbul with BTIG. Robert Drbul: I was just wondering if you could expand a bit more on AUR trends, how you're managing AUR trends? And I guess just the growth plans that you've spoken about as you look forward maybe Q4, but even into '26. Richard Dickson: Thanks, Bob. We approach pricing as we always have. I mean we consider all the various inputs while maintaining our overall value proposition for consumers. And in Q3, as our brands continue to gain more relevance and the rigor that we put around inventory management, as that becomes more foundational, we are increasing our price elasticity, and we've been driving higher sell-through at full price. We did take select pricing in Q3 in select categories, denim, which saw double-digit growth and the strength of our execution is really resonating with customers, and we saw growth, as I mentioned, across all income cohorts. The sales were driven by both units and AUR. We had overall AUR improving versus last year. We saw particularly strength in Old Navy and Gap with customers that were really responding well to our style, the quality and the value, which we continue to advance. Banana Republic AURs also were strong. This is resulting in less discounting, better regular price sell-through, and it's giving us confidence that we can continue to drive AUR growth as we enter the fourth quarter. Operator: And our next question comes from the line of Matthew Boss with JPMorgan. Matthew Boss: Congrats on a really nice quarter. So Richard, could you speak to drivers of the top line inflection that you saw at Old Navy this quarter? Any change in momentum, early holiday? And relative to the consistency that you've now clearly shown at the Gap concept, I guess, how do you see Old Navy differentiated as it relates to the market share opportunity for that brand? And then, Katrina, just given actions that you've taken to the cost structure, how best to think about annual operating income dollar growth if low single-digit top line was the baseline multiyear moving forward? Richard Dickson: Matthew, thank you for the question, and thrilled to talk about Old Navy. We had an incredibly strong quarter, comps up were 6% with the brand consistently gaining market share over the last 2 years. It is the #1 specialty apparel brand in the U.S. And the performance this quarter really speaks to the brand's strength, consistency and continued momentum. Customers are responding to what Old Navy does best. We give great style at great value. We saw healthy growth across all income cohorts in AUR, it was driven by trend-right product, which, again, was amplified by compelling creative and better storytelling for our brands. We've been winning in the categories that we've been strategically pursuing with intent. And we've shared those along the way. Kids and baby, denim and active have all been driving the momentum. Active in particular, was a standout in the quarter. We delivered double-digit growth. And I believe it's underscoring the power of our value proposition and innovation. Differentiation as it relates to the market share opportunities that we see, we look at partnerships, Disney's partnership with us. We just presented Jingle Jammies, which was an incredible presentation across the family. It exceeded expectations. We just also introduced Anna Sui's collaboration with us, which was particularly meaningful as the first designer collaboration where we're bringing high fashion to a broader audience. All of this, while we're just beginning to expand the brand into Beauty, which, of course, is early days, but we see incredibly high potential opportunity for Old Navy for that category and the broader portfolio over time. So look, I'm thrilled with Old Navy's consistency in the quarter performance. And I actually am particularly excited about our holiday offering at giftable price points, and we are ready to execute with excellence. Katrina O'Connell: And then, Matt, as it relates to your other question, I would say, as you called out, we've done a lot of restructuring over the last few years. And then this year, we previewed that we're saving about $150 million in our cost structure. We are reinvesting a portion of that into future growth opportunities because we want to be able to seed this next phase, which we're saying is building momentum that we hope over time leads to accelerated growth. So balancing the savings with what we think are important investments for the long term. What I would say is this year, the operating margin that we've guided to of about 7.2% is really only modest deleverage compared to last year, and that's while absorbing 100 to 110 basis points of operating -- excuse me, of tariff impact, which does show the way we are managing the business with rigor, both through cost and margin improvements. As we look forward, we've also said that in 2026, we don't expect the annualization of tariffs to cause further operating income declines as we work hard to mitigate those costs. Once tariffs are fully reflected in the base, we do believe the consistency in our core, combined with top line benefit related to the high potential growth opportunities that we're seeding in '26 should provide sales growth that benefits operating income over time. So more to come on what that algorithm turns out to be, but we feel good about the work we've been doing, and we're certainly pleased with our results. Operator: Our next question comes from the line of Brooke Roach with Goldman Sachs. Brooke Roach: Richard, how do you feel about the store fleet today across brands and banners? Are there any investments that need to be made to fuel the momentum from a shopping experience perspective? And what does that mean regarding store fleet transformation, whether that's remodels or changes in store count as you look ahead into 2026? Richard Dickson: Brooke, thanks for that question. Stores are a really important way for customers to experience our brand. I mean they bring our product, storytelling and service to life in a way that digital just can't. With a company operating a fleet of about 2,500 stores, we are always optimizing our retail footprint. We're closing underperforming stores. We're repositioning some locations that are more relevant to our customers, and we evaluate new store openings. As you know, over the last several years, we've closed about 350 stores that were unprofitable. Last year, we closed about 56 stores across our portfolio. We expect to close approximately another 35 in fiscal '25 with the majority of those closures being specific to Banana Republic. I believe we're at a pivotal point right now where the fleet is really well positioned, and we've been testing new formats and experiences. Gap Flatiron in New York has been functioning for about a year with great learnings that we've started to expand across our Gap fleet with denim shops, new refresh shop here in San Francisco and a variety of others that are on plan. Banana Republic, specifically in SoHo and other locations that we've been refreshing with some great results and of course, Old Navy and Athleta up at [ bat. ] We continue to evaluate these tests and their performance and are getting more and more confidence in the revenue and relevance and the strong returns that they've been driving. We've begun to invest rationally and selectively in the areas that we think will drive the return that we're looking for. And we will continue to keep everybody posted as we look to the combination of repositioning our stores, refreshing must-win stores and again, looking to start to open up new stores where it makes sense strategically. Operator: And our next question comes from the line of Adrienne Yih with Barclays. Adrienne Yih-Tennant: Congratulations. Great to see the progress at the right time. Richard, my question for you is sort of a little bit higher level since you've come, there's such a focus on product and marketing, like the combination of the flywheel effect of those. How is the appointment of design and creative, specifically Zac Posen changed the complexion of creative thinking throughout the organization? And then the marketing piece of it, how has that kind of -- how does that complement kind of the product and creating that flywheel? Richard Dickson: Thank you, Adrienne, for the question. First off, let's just mention Zac. He's been an incredible addition to our leadership team. It's been almost 2 years ago now that he's joined and has brought significant impact on many creative aspects, I would say, both inside the company and beyond. Our objective collectively with Zac and by elevating the creative conversation across our brands, highlighting design and product as an incredibly important attribute to all of our brands has been working. I mean we've been culturally creating moments, curated moments where our brands and our products have taken center stage, not only to some extent on the runway, but on Main Street. And we're attracting talent as well to our portfolio that might not have considered a place like Gap Inc. or our brands prior. When we talk about marketing, which I also am pleased to talk about, we know marketing is a much more complex function today than it was in the past. And as you know, we've been working really hard at driving new narratives that put our brands back into the cultural conversation, and it's our job to be everywhere that our consumer is with the right creative messaging. I think it's obvious we're performing while we transform. We're driving digital dialogue messages with social media as the #1 platform for our consumers. Influencer content is among the most common product discovery methods amongst Gen Z and millennials, which we've been performing incredibly well with. We actually recently launched a cross-brand content creator and social media advocacy program last month, which you might have seen. We now also have a presence on TikTok as a shop and many more. And these methodologies are proving really impactful, but they also require higher quality accelerated amounts of creative. And lastly, we can't help but mention again, Katseye is a great example of that. I mean 8 billion impressions, 500 million views. This was a true cultural takeover. And I think it's another proof point in our playbook, and we believe we've got the means and the experiences and the brands to continue to be more effective and be more efficient in our spend as we've proven this methodology is working, and it will continue to propel us into the future. Operator: And our next question comes from the line of Dana Telsey with Telsey Group. Dana Telsey: Congratulations on the nice progress. Katrina, one for you, one for Richard. As you think about the tariff mitigation strategies, which seem to be effective, the pricing adjustments have seemed to become less and less. Is that the right impression? And how you're thinking about pricing going forward? And then, Richard, the acceleration in store sales is impressive. In your view of the consumer overall, how are you thinking about the consumer? Does it differ by brand, lower and higher income customer, whether it's Gen Z, millennial or baby boomer, how do you think the current feeling is in the attitudes towards merchandising? How do you think of consumer demand? Richard Dickson: Dana, thanks for the question. I think I'm going to jump in here and take consumer first, and then Katrina can follow up with tariff mitigation answers. First, I think it's really important to share, we're seeing consistency and strength in our customer behavior. As I mentioned, we're really proud that we're winning with all income cohorts. And you could see it with the strong differentiation within our portfolio. Together, we see equal growth across low, middle and high. And it's evidenced by our 2 largest brands, Old Navy and Gap. Now there is external data that points to, of course, the macro pressure on the low-income consumer, but our customers are finding our price value, our product, our styles. It's breaking through the competitive landscape, and we're winning. We're also doing this Dana, with less discounting. We've got better regular price sell-through, increased AUR, which is really indicating that our product is resonating. I think you could see it when you go into our stores, we're just telling better merchant-driven stories, and it is supported by incredibly relevant marketing. We're also excited to see that the high-income consumer is discovering our fashion, quality and value. And we think that is also being driven by the relevant narrative that we've been creating in the marketplace. So when I step back and I look at our portfolio competitively, I think our portfolio appeals to a wide range of consumers. It gives us greater flexibility in today's environment. When we look at our portfolio today versus even a few years ago, we are a much stronger portfolio of brands today. We're resonating with consumers. And it's our job on a day-to-day basis to create great product with great style and quality, exceptional value. And I think we will prevail in any marketplace if we stay consistent and true to that narrative. Over to you, Katrina, on tariffs. Katrina O'Connell: Sure. So as it relates to tariffs, we did do a slight amount of pricing in the quarter, but we really honestly, Dana, approach pricing as we always do. We look at all the various inputs really with an eye to maintaining the overall value proposition for our consumers. So we did take select pricing in select categories. I think denim is a really good example at Gap, where given the strength, we were able to take slight pricing and see double-digit growth in sales in spite of that. The strength of our execution, as Richard said, really is resonating with our consumers. And as Richard said, we saw sales come from both units and AUR in the quarter. I would say the bigger driver of the outperformance in the quarter and what we're seeing is less discounting and better regular price sell-through. And I think as Richard said earlier, that really gives us the confidence that we can keep driving AUR growth as we enter the holiday season. Operator: And our next question comes from the line of Lorraine Hutchinson with Bank of America. Lorraine Maikis: Just switching gears to Athleta for a minute. How do you feel about the level and content of the inventory there? And do you have a time line for when you think that sales could begin to stabilize? Richard Dickson: Lorraine, thank you for that question. We're not hiding from Athleta. It's a very important brand in our portfolio. We have been disappointed in the trend. But Maggie, our Brand President, has hit the ground running in her first 90 days, and she's balancing near-term priorities with, of course, the longer-term reinvigoration objectives that we have for the brand. As I mentioned, she's been building her leadership team to align with her vision, and she is truly setting the foundation for the brand's next chapter. A lot of work happening, editing the assortment, studying the consumer, evaluating our retail footprint and, of course, the overall customer experience. This is a reset year for Athleta, and our focus is going to be on positioning the brand for long-term success and returning it to a rightful place as a premium purpose-driven aspirational brand. We do believe Maggie and the team are taking the right steps, and we remain confident that Athleta will emerge as a brand that really does matter even more to women through product, trend and storytelling. We understand there's a lot of work to do, but we believe we've got the right leader in place to do it, and we look forward to continuing to update you as more news unfolds. Katrina O'Connell: And maybe what I'd add, Lorraine, on inventory is as we assessed Athleta in second quarter, given sort of the trend in the business, we did make some choices to lower inventory levels overall. And so we have aligned inventory for Athleta to this lower sales trend as we head in -- for Q3 and as we head into Q4. So we feel good about the levels and quality of inventory at Athleta, and we'll remain pretty prudent as it relates to Athleta until we start to see the product and the marketing get back to where we would expect it to be for this brand. Operator: And our next question comes from the line of Paul Lejuez with Citigroup. Paul Lejuez: Just to go back to the unit comments. Curious which brands you saw the greatest increases in units? And then I'm also curious on the inventory versus unit gap that you mentioned, what will that look like at the end of the year, the finish up fourth quarter and then into the first half of '26? Katrina O'Connell: Paul, I'm going to take the first one, but we had a lot of trouble hearing your second question. So apologies on that one. We're going to ask you to repeat it. As it relates to units, we were really pleased to see that as our brands are gaining relevance, combined with the rigor that we're putting into the business that we're seeing our elasticity improve, and we're getting higher sell-throughs at regular price. When we look at the units in the quarter, I would say units were aligned with where we see outperformance in the business, particularly at Old Navy and Gap, and we also saw AURs there as well. But I'm going to ask you to repeat again the second part because we couldn't hear you. Paul Lejuez: Sure. Sorry, Katrina. So the inventory dollars versus unit gap that you spoke of this quarter, curious what that looks like at the end of 4Q and then in the first half of next year. Katrina O'Connell: Oh, thanks. Sorry about that. So we continue to keep our units below sales as we try to keep within our principles of keeping inventory tight. We want to keep maximum flexibility so that we can respond in season to various demand scenarios. and be responsive to consumer demand. So as we think about end of quarter inventory, I would expect it to be similar to how we just ended Q3. Operator: And our next question comes from the line of Corey Tarlowe with Jefferies. Corey Tarlowe: Richard, I wanted to ask about the power of partnerships. And the reason being is I don't think that there's a retailer in the mall today that has done more partnerships in the time span that you've been at Gap to expand the aperture for the brand and to build, as you say, relevance in revenue. And I was curious about what you think strategically this means for the business ahead. And then the follow-up to this is how have the consumers responded to these improvements in the brand in the way that you've been able to say, remove promos on categories like denim at Gap? Richard Dickson: Okay. Corey, thank you for the question. First off, I think it has been a credit to the brands and teams that have followed the methodology that we shared with our playbook. And as part of the playbook and when we look at cultural relevance, collaborations help a brand drive relevance. It broadens its customer base and continues the drumbeat between its larger partnerships and releases. So it keeps topical in the context of the amount that we do and the timing that we do, do them. Now you have to really be authentic. It's not just a collaboration. It's a well-thought-out strategic partnership. To date, Gap brand, as you mentioned, we've launched over 13 collaborations. It continues to drive enormous excitement and attract new audiences to us. And they're very precise, and they need to be. They need to be win-win. And most importantly, they need to be authentic to the consumer. The collaborations that we've been doing, as I mentioned, are attracting new generations to Gap, but it's also, at the same time, reinforcing the brand to those who love us for years. This is, to some extent, a balance of art and science. The latest collaboration this quarter with Gap brand with Sandy Liang in the third quarter, it drove incredible engagement and overall basket. You asked about consumers responding in relation to it and how it affects our business. I mean more than 25% of the customers who shop these collaborations were new to Gap. And of those who shop the collaborations, 20% shop beyond the collab. So we see the attraction that these collaborations when done right, are generating for the brand. And then we -- by offering and showing other product, we're now establishing broader, bigger house files and more exciting relationships with our consumers. We just launched the Anna Sui collection with Old Navy, which is the first designer collaboration in Old Navy, incredible success, similar engagement, a really well thought out precise partnership, and we believe a sign of things to come. So again, laddering up. It's great credit to the teams across the brands for driving the playbook, executing it with excellence and really creating win-win collaborations for the consumer and our business. Operator: And our final question comes from the line of Michael Binetti with Evercore ISI. Unknown Analyst: It's [ Carson ] on for Michael. Katrina, probably a question for you. I appreciate the color on the wraparound effect of tariffs into 2026. But if we set tariffs aside, you had really nice underlying gross margin expansion in third quarter. The guidance implies pretty similar for fourth quarter. How much of that underlying expansion is from AUR versus other drivers? Because I think I've heard several times today, confidence in the AUR plan. So if that's a leading driver, is it safe to carry those impacts over into the next few quarters? Katrina O'Connell: Thanks for the question. So the way I would answer that is our margin strength in Q3 came from a combination of favorability in commodities, aided by some supply chain leverage that we got as well as strength in AUR. As we look to Q4, what you'll see is that the tariff impact to Q4 is similar to what we just experienced in Q3. And we're also still seeing the commodity benefits. But in Q4, we're trying to sort of stay balanced in our outlook. And so right now, what we have in is roughly similar promotions year-over-year so that we have room to compete in any environment. And so we'll obviously aspire to do better, but the upside that we saw in AUR from Q3 is not currently assumed in Q4. Operator: And ladies and gentlemen, that concludes our question-and-answer session. I will now turn the conference back over to Mr. Richard Dickson for closing remarks. Richard Dickson: Thank you, operator. This was an exceptional quarter, and I'm really proud of this talented team that continues to deliver quarter after quarter. As we look to finish the year strong, our team is fired up and our focus is clear: continue to execute with excellence and win with the customer this holiday. Thank you for joining us today. For those of you who celebrate wishing you a happy Thanksgiving, and we look forward to seeing you in our stores this holiday season. Thanks all. Operator: And ladies and gentlemen, this concludes today's call, and we thank you for your participation. You may now disconnect.
Ken Murphy: Good morning, everyone, and a very happy New Year. Thank you for joining us today for our quarter 3 and Christmas trading update. As usual, I'm here in Welwyn with Imran, and I'll start with a brief overview of our performance before opening the line for your questions. We are delighted with the way the customers have responded to our continued investments in value, quality and service. Group like-for-like sales grew by 2.9% over the 19 weeks, including 3.7% growth in the U.K. Customer satisfaction improved, and our U.K. market share is at its highest level in more than a decade, following 32 consecutive periods of gains. We set ourselves a challenging plan for Christmas, and we delivered in line with that plan. With over 2 billion products going through our tills and more than GBP 6 billion of sales in the 4 weeks to Christmas Eve, our teams right across the group worked hard to deliver the outstanding service that customers have come to expect from Tesco. I would like to start the call today by saying a huge thank you to them for delivering a Christmas we can all be proud of. Our performance builds on last year's successful results and reflects the strength of our core food offer. In a highly competitive market and with customers looking to make their money go further, we saw particularly strong growth in fresh food with like-for-like sales up 6.6% in the U.K. Running alongside familiar festive favorites, we launched 340 new and improved own brand Christmas products, including 180 in Finest. We recognize that for many families, the cost of Christmas can be a stretch. We did everything possible to make sure our customers got the best value from us. Starting with our fresh Christmas dinner for a family of 6 for under GBP 10, and just GBP 1.59 per person, it was even better value than last year. More broadly, our rate of inflation eased through the Christmas period and continues to be materially behind the market. We also invested in making the Christmas shop even easier for customers, including hiring over 28,000 additional colleagues. And with support from AI-powered scheduling tools, we offered more than 100,000 extra online delivery slots in the week before Christmas. Through better forecasting and planning, AI also helped us to deliver best-in-class availability and to optimize deliveries across our network. Customers continue to embrace Finest with sales growth of 13% in the U.K., including a 22% increase in our Finest party food range. Highlights included Christmas center pieces such as our Finest Turkey Crowns and Chef's Collection Beef Wellington as well as our curated Finest gifting range and a long list of award-winning products. We sold around 21 million Finest pigs in blankets, along with 2.5 million bottles of Finest Prosecco. We also saw strong demand for low alcohol options, including selling almost 0.25 million bottles of Nozeco. While Turkey retained its popularity, some customers opted for other meats this Christmas with sales of beef joints up 29%, making it the most popular alternative. Online remains our fastest-growing channel with growth of 11% across the 19 weeks. It was our biggest online Christmas, including our 2 busiest days ever. In the week leading up to Christmas, we delivered on average 2 orders every second. Whoosh also performed strongly with sales up 47% and more than 0.25 million customers trying it for the first time. Both in-store and online, customers benefited from additional value through Clubcard. Alongside thousands of Clubcard prices per week across a broad range of family favorites, we offered customers more personalized rewards, including gamified experiences with Clubcard challenges. Our retail media offering continues to engage customers and brands, including the return of sponsored Christmas Gratis now in their third year. The Tesco Media team continued to make great progress, and we were delighted to be named Media Brand of the Year at the Media Week Awards. In Ireland, we built on last year's strong performance and are now in our fourth year of market share gains with fresh food continuing to lead the way. With 5 openings in the period, including 2 large stores, we now have 190 stores in Ireland. We continue to roll out Whoosh, which is now available in Dublin, Galway and Cork. Booker performed well despite challenging market conditions, with increased customer satisfaction scores in both core catering and retail. Our wine and spirits specialist, Venus, continued to win new business. And in our symbol brands, Premier opened its 5,000th store. In Central Europe, our targeted price investments contributed to growth in both food and nonfood across the period despite a backdrop of subdued consumer confidence and increased competition. Value continues to be a key priority as customers seek to make their money go further, and we're determined to do everything we can to help. Earlier this week, we launched a new commitment to Everyday Low Prices on over 3,000 branded products, alongside our existing Aldi Price Match on more than 650 lines and thousands of Clubcard prices. Our strong performance this Christmas gives us the confidence that group adjusted operating profit will now be at the upper end of the GBP 2.9 billion to GBP 3.1 billion guidance range that we issued in October. We continue to expect free cash flow within our medium-term guidance range of GBP 1.4 billion to GBP 1.8 billion. So as we move to your questions, I just want to say another big thank you to all our colleagues for everything they did to help our customers to have a brilliant Christmas. Thank you all for listening, and I'll now hand back to Sergei. Operator: [Operator Instructions] Our first question is from Rob Joyce from BNP Paribas. Robert Joyce: So the first one, Ken, you referenced the easing food inflation over Christmas. Was that the entire driver of the slowdown versus 3Q? Are we seeing any sort of broader volume slowdown in the market? And do you think the overall market stepped down over Christmas? That would be the first one. And then the second one is probably a bigger question, but clearly guiding to a broadly flat EBIT this year after strong top line performance. What do you think needs to change for you or the market for you to be able to return to profit growth? Ken Murphy: Thanks, Rob. Happy New Year. Two great questions. Look, I think definitely, the very strong trading plan we put together contributed to the drop in the kind of overall market growth. And therefore, the easing of inflation was a material factor. There was also a step down in volume, even though we outperformed the market in terms of our volume growth, and we're really pleased with that consequentially. So I would say that our performance was pitched exactly right. It was an aggressive trading plan, but it was complemented with a fantastic product innovation pipeline and really consistent execution, both online and in stores. So for us, it's been a really pleasing performance. In terms of -- you're right, the guidance is broadly flat year-on-year. I think that's an exceptional performance if you think about where we started this year and some of the competitive activity that we responded to. What I'm really pleased about is how decisively we acted and how we got on the front foot and delivered very strong market share performance consistently across the year. And what's particularly pleasing, Rob, is that we didn't stop investing in the future. So we've been making substantial investments in our store estate, substantial investments in automation to keep our savings programs going, and even more importantly, making substantial innovation, investments in technology for the future. And so we've got a very clear strategy. We believe in the long-term possibilities for this business, and we're quite confident for the future. Imran Nawaz: And maybe if I could just add maybe 2 bullets from my end as well, Rob. Two things on the ability to upgrade the outcome for this year and continue to invest to continue the momentum and continue to protect the position of strength that we have, I think, is not a bad place to be. The second thing to your sort of longer-term question, it's important to go back to the performance framework that we did set out almost 5 years, and we really stick to, which is we are very clear that we want to continue to drive up customer perception, to drive up market share, which in turn drives up profit and drives up cash. And I think you've seen us do that year in, year out. I think this year was an exceptional year with an exceptional reaction to a competitor, but I think we stuck to our guns. We invested into the proposition. We invested into price and truthfully, being able to upgrade is a nice feeling, because it demonstrated that everything we've done really worked out well. Robert Joyce: And just a quick follow-up on that inflation point. Do you think -- is the inflation then more -- the slowdown more driven by your own investment in price relative to your sort of input costs? Or are you seeing input costs falling more broadly? And does the kind of -- I'm just looking at next year and thinking people have got -- markets got Estimates U.K. growing above 3%. Does that look a bit ambitious given the Christmas exit rate? Imran Nawaz: Look, let me take first the Christmas specific question. Look, Kantar calls around an inflation of around 4% or so, slightly north of 4% over the Christmas period. As Ken just said, we made conscious choices to invest. There's no other time when you've got so many customers in your stores and you build momentum. And if you look at our market share gains, our volume market share gains were even stronger than our value market share gains over 12-year records. And I think you get -- that pays back as you then go into Jan, Feb, March and April into the next year. So I'd say to you, it was a conscious decision to invest into value, which we saw pay off in the market share. Then in terms of next year's outlook, you know as well as I do that inflation is a driver of commodities as much as it is of stickier costs on payroll. All of those things are still to be worked out, and we'll see where we land when we talk to you in April. Operator: Our next question comes from Xavier Le Mené from Bank of America. Xavier Le Mené: A quick one actually on the market share. As you said, you've got the strongest market share ever for the last 10 years. But where potentially do you see your peers? Do you still think that you've got opportunity to grow your market share? Or are you more in a position to defend what you've got right now? Ken Murphy: So Xavier, we are always thinking offensively rather than defensively. That's our mindset. And we see it less about the market share per se and more about are we doing the right things for all our stakeholders and particularly our customers. So are we getting our value right? Are we getting the quality of the proposition right from a product point of view? Are we getting our execution right? And are we innovating and thinking about the future in ways that customers' trends and needs are adapting. And that's really where we focus all our energy. And then we look to market share as a measure of how successfully are we executing against that strategy. So we don't see any limits in terms of where we can take market share, but it is not a given. It's something that we have to work very hard to achieve. Xavier Le Mené: Right. And just one follow-up on actually Rob's question. Sequentially, you said you've seen a bit of a slowdown. It sounds like it's also market driven, but do you expect the slowdown to continue heading to '26, or do you think that potentially it's more a question of consumer confidence and hopefully, U.K. consumers getting a bit better going forward? Imran Nawaz: Look, I mean, I think when I look at consumer confidence this year, I would say it's mixed. But it's been mixed throughout the entire year, right? What you saw was people that are -- there's a cohort of groups that are, frankly, in a good place and feeling comfortable with their savings and their spending, and there's a group of people looking for value. I feel we saw that reflected. When you look at Finest's performance, in a way it's a reflection of the fact that people looking for value and quality at the same time were able to hit that. So I think our Everyday Low Price campaign that we're launching, again, hits the bull's eye on that. I think addressing all of those opportunities for those customers looking for value is the right way to go forward. Fair to say that as you -- the question behind the question is, was the market overall a bit softer over Christmas? I'd say yes, on a volume basis. The reality, though, also is because we really outperformed every single month over the last 19 weeks on a volume share basis, we were not really affected by that. And I think one proof point for me is the way we exited the year was very clean on stock. Then how it plays out next year, we'll obviously talk to you again in April. But look, one of the things that we do feel good about in this business is, and I think we've demonstrated that over the last 5 years is, we are very good at adapting ourselves to whatever the environment throws at us. And it's one of the reasons why we've put value at front and center of everything we're doing. Operator: We'll now take our next question from Manjari Dhar from RBC. Manjari Dhar: Just 2 questions from me, please. My first question is on supplier-funded promotions. We've seen them picking up over recent months. Just wondering how much higher could this go? And if it does continue to drift higher, does that change your approach for the Tesco business, maybe for your private label business? And then my second question is on the digital data opportunity. I guess how much further is there to go with Clubcard personalization and AI? And what sort of things should we be expecting this year? Ken Murphy: Thanks, Manjari. So I would start off by saying that kind of supplier-funded promotional penetration or participation is actually only returning to what it was pre-COVID. So it's not like it's wildly out of kilter with historical norms. That's the first thing to say. The second thing is that actually, as you saw from our announcement this week, we have reinvested a lot of promotional funding back into everyday low pricing through the extension of our low-price campaign from 1,000 to 3,000 lines. And that really is based on an insight from customers that say they need reliable low pricing during these months where money is tight and they're watching every penny. And so that is the first signal, by the way, that we are kind of -- we are responding to customers' needs in the moment. So I'm kind of relaxed about that, if you like. I think it's a normal... Imran Nawaz: And maybe to give you a number on that, just to give you a sense to underpin Ken's point, last year's promo percentage was around 33%, and this year was 34% over that 19-week period, which gives you a sense. There was a slight creep up, but not massive. Ken Murphy: Yes. It was artificially depressed during COVID, Manjari. So it was very hard to compare apples with apples. If I go to your second question, which is a very exciting question. It's a question we're really excited about. We don't see any limits to the opportunity around data and particularly the opportunity to serve customers better through data, getting to understand their needs better, responding much more dynamically, using AI to help us be there for customers whenever they need us. And we're investing behind that, and we'll continue to do so. And I think it will be something that you'll see continuous improvement from us over the next number of years. I think there's infinite possibilities. Manjari Dhar: Great. Maybe just a quick follow-up. Should we be expecting investment levels behind that overall group CapEx to slightly step up now as a result? Ken Murphy: Well, we've always been quite clear about our kind of breakdown of CapEx being kind of a 3-part logic, which is part 1 is where we're investing in our core estate renewal and the shopping experience. Part 2 is where we're investing in automation to support our Save to Invest programs, and Phase 3, which is all about innovation, technology investment for optimizing our proposition. And probably the greatest -- we've seen step-up investments across the board actually in all 3 areas. And that's been what's been behind our progressive increase in capital. And actually, as we've gone, we've kept a very close eye on return on capital employed, and that has also been improving over time. So we're very disciplined in how we spend our money. Imran Nawaz: Yes. And also what's really nice is, in the base, we've also reflected already increases year-on-year into our tech organization, because we know that this is an area of opportunity for both on the growth side, but also on the efficiency and savings side. Operator: We'll now move to our next question from Sreedhar Mahamkali from UBS. Sreedhar Mahamkali: Maybe 3 for me, if you don't mind. First one, in terms of improving price position versus the market statement and the comment in the statement, can you talk to us if it's been the case versus all operators as you see it, especially given one of your big competitors reset and continuing investment? That's the first one. Secondly, just trying to understand the new or renewed push on everyday low prices. A couple of questions there. Is this reallocating the promotional funding more to be fully behind Everyday Low Prices versus Clubcard Prices? How do you see the offer to the consumer changing in the round as a result of what you've been executing really well on Clubcard Prices already? And second one, sticking with Everyday Low Prices, is this first signal to us that 2026 is likely to be as big a year of investment as it was in 2025? Is that how we should read this? Ken Murphy: Okay. Thank you very much, Sreedhar. I think I'd start off by saying that our price position has strengthened over the year versus the market generally. And that I think more importantly, the sophistication of our pricing investment has improved through the technology investments we've made such that we focus on the lines that matter most to customers. So we're investing in value, but we're investing wisely and quite judiciously. And I think that is what has helped us to outperform the market. On your point around Everyday Low Pricing, I think that was a response to customer insight, which said they wanted more reliable pricing on everyday essentials in these key periods in January, February. And so we made a long-term commitment to, as you say, invest principally promotional funding back into Everyday Low Pricing. And you shouldn't read it as any more than us responding to a customer insight to give customers the best possible value in these early months of the year. And I don't think it's a signal of anything other than our intent to stay on the front foot from a value for money point of view in 2026. Imran Nawaz: Yes. I think one aspect, Sreedhar, that's important is we already have Everyday Low Prices on 1,000 SKUs. And what we're doing is because it worked so well, we're giving it more visibility, more color, and it's been expanded to 3,000 of people's favorite brands in the country. So from that level, it's also a confirmation of something working really well that we want to double down on -- or triple down on, I should say. Sreedhar Mahamkali: And in the round, I guess what I'm trying to understand is Clubcard Prices have been incredibly successful for you. Is this a recognition, to Ken's point, I guess, some of that needs to be more upfront shelf prices rather than Clubcard Prices. Is that how I should see it? Imran Nawaz: I mean, I think it's a continuous conversation depending on what customers are looking for, but I'd be very comfortable to say to you that as opposed to having only exclusive deals on Clubcard prices, we want to have more, as Ken said, more longer-term price fixes as we've been doing on Low Everyday Prices now rebranded. Operator: We'll now move to our next question from Clive Black from Shore Capital Markets. Clive Black: Also, very happy New Year. Very well done, by the way. Not an easy thing to deliver. The question I have is really around volume. First of all, why do you think volume in the Christmas period was a bit slower than you and maybe the industry expected? And in particular, do you think there are features around alcohol consumption and maybe diet suppressant drugs that are starting to kick in more noticeably in that respect? And then in terms of that volume, is that a key factor why you expect working capital -- or sorry, your free cash generation to come in with the existing guidance, which might mean that working capital is a bit of a flatter benefit year-on-year? Would that make sense? Ken Murphy: Clive, Happy New Year to you too, and thank you for your comments. I'll speak to the volume comment, and then I'll pass over to Imran maybe to talk about working capital. So I'd start off by saying that what was particularly pleasing about our performance is we outperformed the market on volume. I think it's fair to say that the market overall was a little bit softer on volume, but our outperformance was particularly important. And within that, I was particularly pleased with our fresh food performance. So speaking to your point about is there a little bit less alcohol consumption, is there an impact? I think there's a general impact from people wanting to eat and live more healthily. And for sure, within that, GLP-1 will be having an impact. But our fresh food sales at plus 0.6% were particularly strong. So my feeling is that whatever way this trend evolves, we're really well set up to take advantage of it. And we've been investing very heavily in our fresh food proposition over the last couple of years, and it has been the principal driver of our business, which we feel really pleased about. There's no doubt, as you saw from some of the stats that I shared on the call earlier that you are seeing a significant rise in low and no alcohol sales, but we respond to that as well. We have the products and the range to address it. And within our food range, we have a high number of high-protein products that are really well-suited to anybody looking to pursue that kind of diet. So we feel really well set for whatever trends are coming our way. But for sure, trends are emerging and we are keeping a very close eye on them. Clive Black: Sorry Ken. Just in that respect, Ken, are you therefore seeing -- sorry, are you seeing notable step back, therefore, in areas that are more exposed to change in ambient carbohydrates and the like? Ken Murphy: No, not really. I mean, we shifted an extraordinary amount of chocolate tubs over the Christmas period. So I think -- and I was a material contributor to that personally. So no -- the short answer is no, it's been really strong. Clive Black: Sorry, Imran? Imran Nawaz: Yes. No, absolutely. Just on your second question, I mean, just to reiterate what Ken just said, I mean, we -- and how it impacts cash, I mean, obviously, we were less affected by the market slowdown because if I look at Q3 and the Christmas period, we were growing volume every single month and outperforming on market share every single month. So that gives you a sense of it not being a real driver on working capital, because ultimately, volumes are positive. And more pleasingly, I could say that we're exiting very, very cleanly. Actually, I was very happy about that. I mean, we set up a very ambitious Christmas, and we delivered in line with that. And when you exit cleanly, it just helps you get momentum also into January, which is nice. In terms of cash flow, look, we had a very, very strong first half, over GBP 1.6 billion. As you know, typically, our cash flow is skewed towards the first half. And in the second half, you've got the payments out the door from all the supply you bring in for Christmas. So that phasing will play itself out as per normal. And as you know, our guidance on cash is that consistent range we've been giving, GBP 1.4 billion to GBP 1.8 billion. I know we've delivered always to the upside on that one. And so it's never stopped us from doing a good job, and the plan is to continue to do so. But as you also know, the working capital balances at Tesco are enormous. So just to give us a bit of flex in terms of any last-minute payments or receivables or anything like that, it gives us a bit of space to do that. But obviously, cash is important, and the plan is absolutely to continue to deliver within that range. Operator: Our next question is from Monique Pollard from Citi. Monique Pollard: Two from me, if I can. The first one, obviously, good market share gain, U.K. market share gains of 31 bps over Christmas. And from what I understand from the commentary from Imran, the volume market share gains over that period are even stronger than that. What I'd like to understand from customer feedback, the surveys you do, et cetera, are you able to give us some sense of how much of that you think is due to strong price positioning? And you mentioned your price position has strengthened versus the market this year, and you were aggressive in terms of inflation over the Christmas period. So how much of that is price positioning? And how much is things like investment in availability over Christmas, which is probably particularly strong versus particularly some competitors over the period and things like the store estate, staff in stores, et cetera, over that period? And then the second question is just me trying to understand that level of price investment that you've put in, whether some of that was seasonally specific to the Christmas period. As you mentioned, you never get that volume of customers in store and therefore, important to be on the front foot on price, or whether that is sort of something we should expect to be a bit ongoing? Ken Murphy: Right. Monique, so I think the short answer to your first question is that delivering the kind of market share performance we've delivered, not only over Christmas but right across the year, is actually a composite of great value, great quality, great execution. I think you'll have seen amongst some of our competitors that even if you drive a very strong value message, if you don't have the quality and the supply chain precision and the in-store execution to go with it, it's very hard to deliver the performance. So I would say that our market share performance has been a composite performance of everybody in Tesco across all the functions and departments doing their job really well and executing against the plan. So I think that would be the answer to the first question. The second question around price investment is that clearly, Christmas is the FA Cup final for retailers. So we all lean in very heavily to a very strong trade plan over Christmas. And it's also a chance for customers to reappraise your proposition, shop [ B2B ] for the first time and really like and appreciate what they see. So we work very hard from everything from product innovation through to hiring of nearly 30,000 extra people through to the very strong trade plan that we delivered. And that is quite a specific event. It doesn't necessarily mean anything for the rest of the year per se other than the fact that we will continue to invest appropriately. And I think as you saw from our announcement earlier this week, we acted against a specific customer insight for January, February, which said we needed to provide more reliable Everyday Low Pricing on a wider range of products. And so we've traveled our Everyday Low Pricing range to 3,000. And so what you can expect from us is that we will adapt constantly to insights from customers and react, so that we're giving them the best value and that's appropriate for the moment. Imran Nawaz: Another angle, Monique, as well to keep in mind is the perspective on channels. So when you look at where the market share gain came from over the Christmas period, we got it in large stores, which is great, because that's the key estate. But at the same time, that 11% growth we saw in online also led us to continue to gain market share in our online business, which was also great to see. And given the fact that we are over 36% market share in online, that gave us an extra benefit on market share as well. Operator: We'll now take our next question from Matt Clements from Barclays. Matthew Clements: First question was, you often give a very useful insight into the health of the U.K. consumer at your update. I was wondering if you could just talk us through how sentiment and spending evolved through the period, particularly around maybe November with the budget? And how do you think we're set up on consumer health into '26, government policy, et cetera? And then the second question was around Finest, which is compounding exceptional growth now. Any views on Finest into next year? I mean, particularly around the dining-out to dining-in trend? Do you expect that to continue? What's the innovation pipeline like? Anything on that would be helpful. Ken Murphy: Great. Thanks, Matt. So I think the first thing to say on consumer sentiment is that we've definitely seen that consumer sentiment is mixed. I think we have a section of the community that is in pretty good shape from a household budget perspective. And then we have a section of the community that is really struggling to make ends meet. And I think that is playing out overall in terms of how customers are shopping. They're very value conscious. At the same time, though, there is a significant proportion of households that are in decent shape financially, and they are looking for good value for money. And that, I think, is a big factor in what's driving our Finest sales. I think there is that trend towards eating in more and eating well, and that's driving our fresh food sales. And I think the consumer has shown great resilience in a lot of uncertainty. I think the budget is just one factor in a number of factors that's driving uncertainty. But we have seen a pretty resilient consumer in terms of their spending pattern and habits. And we continue to monitor it very closely. But we, to a certain extent, as long as employment remains strong, expect that resilience to continue. And Finest really is a subset of that. I think Finest, for us, is delivering on 2 fronts. It's responding to that trend of wanting to eat restaurant quality food in your home, but it's also responding to the fact that historically, Tesco would have undertraded in that particular meal occasion or mission. And I think what you've seen for us in terms of the amount of product innovation, the bravery to go deeper into distribution, to go into more and more different categories and cuisines has given us the confidence to really fight for fair share in that meal occasion. And so we still believe there's a lot of room for growth in Finest in the coming years. Operator: We'll now take our next question from William Woods from Bernstein. William Woods: Happy New Year. When you look at your success over the last 5 years, you've had great success with things like Aldi Price Match, Clubcard Prices, Finest, et cetera, and your peers have played catch-up. What do you think are the next levers that you can pull over the next 5 years to continue to innovate, continue to lead the market and gain market share? Ken Murphy: Thanks very much, Will. I think first and foremost, we would say that our strategy of focusing on the core basics and executing them brilliantly and consistently remains a fundamental pillar and foundation stone of our strategy going forward. The second thing I would say is that the building out of our proximity to customers in terms of their food needs is equally important. So what we've done in terms of extending our grocery home shopping, slot availability, the work we've done to build Whoosh into a really market-leading from a value point of view quick commerce model. The launch of F&F online are all contributing factors to getting closer to customers and making life more convenient. And then on top of that, we're working very hard to get really close from a data point of view to our customer base. And that is really starting to deliver results for us. And that, I think, is where the greatest opportunity lies is using data and insight to really get closer and closer to customers and anticipate and serve their needs, both digitally and physically. And we see clearly Clubcard at the very heart of that. And we also see dunnhumby as a clear source of competitive advantage to help us deliver that as well. And probably I should finish by saying something that's not necessarily the sexiest thing, but is absolutely critical, which is that we have an incredibly strong Save to Invest program. Imran has led this since he's joined the business. The step-up in our savings has been extraordinary from GBP 300 million a year to nearly over GBP 0.5 billion a year. And that shouldn't be underestimated in what it has allowed us to do in terms of stepping up capital investment, stepping up our investment in value without ever compromising on the customer journey. So they'd be the key pillars of what underpin our future growth opportunity. Operator: Our next question comes from Ben Zoega from Deutsche Bank. Benjamin Yokyong-Zoega: Just a couple of questions, follow-ups from my side. Firstly, on inflation, and secondly, on supply funding. So firstly, you say you've improved your price position against the market. I just wanted to ask, is this broad-based across competitors, or were there particular competitors that you'd call out as closing that gap against? And are there any particular product areas where you focused your price investments such as fresh foods? Secondly, on supplier funding, is it fair to say that the elevated levels of supplier funding in H1 has continued into Q3 and Christmas, particularly as the market turned more promotional? And are you able to comment on the levels of brand support behind the expansion of Everyday Low Prices? Imran Nawaz: Look, I mean, in terms of inflation and strengthening price position, I mean, we take a view, and we obviously have our own pricing strategy, and we have stuck to that since over the last 5 years. And look, we take a broad view that we want to continue to strengthen versus everyone. I mean, ultimately, the ultimate judge of how strong your price really is, is the customer. And the combination of Aldi Price Match, Clubcard Prices and now Low Everyday Prices, in our view, is the right combination, and it's made us stronger and stronger, and it's working well for us. And I would say to you, it's a broad-based strengthening across most of our competitors, which is good to see. Then in terms of promo intensity and supplier funding, look, the truth is, promo funding has gone up a bit. You saw that from the brands wanting to regain volume growth, which is good for us, because it comes under the banner of Tesco and Clubcard Prices. So we like to see that. That's a good thing. You will have noticed that the Low Everyday Prices is -- or Everyday Low Prices is brand oriented, which is good. Brands like to grow, and they can see that they have grown with Tesco online and in-store, and they want to continue to grow, and we have a great partnership with them. As ever, any campaign or events we run, there are always some investments from our side, some investments from the brand side, but you wouldn't expect me to give you some commercial details on the call here in terms of how we execute these. But suffice it to say, they are customer-centric and data-led. And clearly, the idea behind them is to continue to grow and gain share. Operator: And we'll now take our last question today from Karine Elias from Barclays. Karine Elias: Most of them have been answered, but just one final one. In the release, you mentioned, obviously, the competitive environment being as competitive as ever. Just broadly speaking, I think historically, you've called it more rational. Do you feel that that's still the case? Or perhaps there was some intensity going into Christmas? Ken Murphy: So the definition of rational is always a broad one when you're dealing with 10 to 12 different competitors who are all looking to win the basket from you. But I would say that the market intensity in terms of competition, pricing, et cetera, has remained strong since February last year. It didn't really change over Christmas. But I think what, and hopefully, you will have observed is that our response has been really decisive and really quick, and we have maintained that intensity throughout the year. And that's what really helped us underpin the very strong market share performance that you saw over Christmas. Operator: Thank you. That was the last question today. With this, I'd like to hand the call back over to Ken Murphy for closing remarks. Over to you, sir. Ken Murphy: Thank you so much, everyone, who's joined the call, took the time out. I know it's an incredibly busy day with a lot of announcements from various different companies. So we really appreciate you taking the time to join us. Thank you all for the excellent questions. I wish everybody a really happy New Year and a prosperous 2026, and I'm looking forward to seeing you all in April. Thank you. Goodbye.
Operator: Good day, and thank you for standing by. Welcome to the Richardson Electronics Earnings Call for the Second Quarter Fiscal Year 2026. [Operator Instructions] Please be advised that today's call is being recorded. I would now like to hand it over to your speaker, Ed Richardson, CEO. Please go ahead. Edward Richardson: Good morning, and thank you all for joining Richardson Electronics conference call for the second quarter of fiscal year 2026. We appreciate your continued support and interest in Richardson Electronics. Joining me today are Bob Ben, Chief Financial Officer; Wendy Diddell, Chief Operating Officer; Greg Peloquin, General Manager of our Power & Microwave Technologies and Green Energy Solutions Group and Jens Ruppert, General Manager of Canvys. As a reminder, this call is being recorded and will be available for playback. I would also like to remind you that we're making forward-looking statements that are based on current expectations and involve risks and uncertainties. Therefore, our actual results could be materially different. Please refer to our press release and SEC filings for an explanation of our risk factors. I'm pleased to report that Richardson Electronics has achieved 6 consecutive quarters of year-over-year growth. underscoring the progress we're making in executing our multiyear strategy. This growth reflects our continued repositioning toward higher growth end markets, and the expanding contribution from our engineered solutions. Equally important, these results are driven by the strength of our people. While investors are familiar with our senior leadership team, we've been intentionally investing across the organization to build depth, diversity and technical expertise throughout our ranks. I believe we have assembled one of the strongest and most motivated teams in the company's history, positioning Richardson Electronics for long-term sustainable value creation. Looking at our Q2 FY '26 results. Total sales were $52.3 million, up from $49.5 million in Q2 of last year driven by sales growth in our Green Energy and Canvys businesses. Operating income improved to $132,000 versus a loss of $667,000 last year. Within our GES business unit, we're very pleased with the year-over-year growth as well as sequential quarter-over-quarter growth. Both onshore wind and EV sales were up over the prior year in Green Energy segment, reflecting higher sales from existing customers as well as sales from new products and expanded customer base. Canvys revenue exceeded the prior year by 28% on improved demand from our medical OEMs. It's important to note that the sales growth was partially offset by the inclusion of our health care business in both the current year and the prior quarters. As a reminder, we sold the majority of our health care business in Q3 of FY '25. So this will impact our year-over-year comparisons through the end of Q3 this year. We also remain focused on managing expenses and improving inventory turns. Our cash position remains strong at $33.1 million providing us with flexibility to support both our ongoing operations and strategic growth opportunities. I'll now turn the call over to Bob Ben, our Chief Financial Officer; who will provide a detailed review of our second quarter results and capital positions. Following Bob's remarks, Greg and Jens will provide updates on our business units and then Wendy will follow up with the progress we are making executing again on our multiyear growth strategies. Robert Ben: Thank you, Ed, and good morning. I will review our financial results for our second quarter and first 6 months of fiscal year 2026 followed by a review of our cash position. Consolidated net sales increased 5.7% to $52.3 million compared to net sales of $49.5 million in the prior year second quarter. When excluding health care, for which the majority of assets were sold in January 2025, net sales increased by 9.0%. Please note that health care results, including prior periods are consolidated into the PMT segment beginning in fiscal 2026. This was our sixth consecutive quarterly year-over-year increase in sales. Second quarter net sales growth was led by a 39.0% increase in GES sales, driven by an increase in power management products. Canvys sales increased 28.1% and which primarily reflected higher sales in North America. Sales for PMT were 4.0% below the second quarter of fiscal 2025. Excluding health care, PMT sales were approximately flat. Consolidated gross margin for the second quarter was 30.8% of net sales compared to 31.0% during the second quarter of fiscal 2025. The slight decrease in consolidated gross margin was primarily due to lower margin in PMT and GES, partially offset by higher margin in Canvys. Operating expenses as a percentage of net sales improved to 30.5% for the second quarter of fiscal 2026 compared to 32.3% in the second quarter of fiscal 2025. Operating income improved to $0.1 million for the second quarter of fiscal 2026 from an operating loss of $0.7 million in the prior year second quarter. Net loss was $0.1 million for the second quarter of fiscal 2026 compared to $0.8 million in the second quarter of fiscal 2025. Net loss per common share diluted was $0.01 in the second quarter of fiscal 2026 compared to $0.05 in the second quarter of fiscal 2025. EBITDA for the second quarter of fiscal 2026 improved to $0.7 million versus breakeven in the prior year second quarter. Please note that EBITDA is a non-GAAP financial measure and a reconciliation of the non-GAAP item to the comparable GAAP measure is available in our second quarter fiscal year 2026 press release that was issued yesterday after the market closed. Turning to a review of the results for the first 6 months of fiscal year 2026. Net sales were $106.9 million, an increase of $3.6 million from $103.2 million in the first 6 months of fiscal year 2025, which reflected higher sales across our business segments, except for PMT. When excluding health care, consolidated net sales increased by 7.8% and PMT net sales increased by 5.2%. Gross margin was 30.9% of net sales which was a slight increase from the first 6 months of fiscal 2025. As a percentage of net sales, operating expenses for the first 6 months of the fiscal year improved to 29.8% from 31.1% for the first 6 months of the prior fiscal year. Operating income for the first 6 months of fiscal year 2026 was $1.1 million as compared to an operating loss of $0.4 million for the first 6 months of fiscal year 2025. The company reported net income of $1.8 million or $0.12 per diluted common share for the first 6 months of fiscal year 2026 versus a net loss of $0.2 million or $0.01 per diluted common share for the first 6 months of fiscal year 2025. EBITDA for the first 6 months of fiscal 2026 was $4.0 million versus $1.7 million in the prior year's first 6 months. Turning to a review of our cash position. Cash and cash equivalents at the end of the second quarter of fiscal 2026 were $33.1 million compared to $35.7 million at the end of the first quarter of fiscal 2026. Capital expenditures of $1.6 million in the second quarter of fiscal 2026 were primarily related to our manufacturing business, facilities improvements and IT systems versus $0.5 million in the second quarter of fiscal year 2025. We paid $0.9 million in the second quarter for cash dividends. In addition, based on our current financial position, our Board of Directors declared a regular quarterly cash dividend of $0.06 per common share, which will be paid in the third quarter of fiscal 2026. As of the end of the second quarter of fiscal 2026, the company had no outstanding debt on its revolving line of credit with PNC Bank. Now I will turn the call over to Greg, who will provide more details for our PMT and GES business groups. Gregory Peloquin: Thank you, Bob, and good morning, everyone. GES and PMT are key components of our multiyear growth plan. Coming out of FY '25, we had strong backlog. We launched several new products, expanded our customer base and advanced multiple development programs from beta testing to preproduction. This momentum continued into Q1 and into Q2. Building on this progress in Q2 of fiscal year 2026, GES grew to $8.3 million, a 39% increase over prior year and 14% increase over this year's first quarter. As we continue to see the amazing adoption of our Pitch Energy Modules for various wind turbine platforms with owner operators and other related power management products throughout the world. PMT sales were $35.2 million in the quarter a 4% decrease over prior year. This reflects a slight slowdown in the electronic device MRO business, offset by growth in the RF and Wireless Components business unit. Our GES strategy centered on power management applications. We've rapidly designed multiple products, secured patents and built a strong base of customers and partners. Our success is evident in our growing sales pipeline as we capitalize on numerous growth opportunities to support new power management requirements and significant energy transformation opportunities. Our Pitch Energy Modules and related wind energy products led GES quarter-over-quarter growth. We continue to gain market share by developing new products and solutions that are accepted by our customers, and the team is doing a great job expanding this program globally. We serve dozens of wind turbine owners operators including exclusive partnerships with the top 4 owner operators of GE wind turbines such as RWE, Invenergy, Enel and NextEra. We also saw growth from our new multi-brand PEM turbine platforms. We continue to grow this program internationally, expanding into Europe and Asia with new products for other turbine platforms such as Suzlon, Senvion, Nordex and SSB. We have now received orders from customers in Brazil, Australia, India, France and Italy in addition to our strong rollout in North America. We are entering the back half of FY '26 with solid momentum. We recently added key technology partners such as KEBA, Goshen and Wulong, who play critical roles in both wind power management and energy storage systems. Key initiatives include faster design to production cycles supported by a new design center in Sweetwater, Texas. Sweetwater has one of the largest concentrations of wind turbine and power management engineers in North America. Expanding our design team to accelerate and enhance design cycles prior to transitioning work to our world-class manufacturing and test group in LaFox, Illinois. This is one of our most critical strategic priorities underway. We expect to have the Sweetwater design center fully operational in Q3 of FY '26. We are also adding key people from the industry to help expedite growth. We are on schedule to complete our Illinois-based demo center in Q4 FY '26. This demo site will allow us to showcase our active BES solutions to potential customers. We are currently collaborating with numerous customers on BES systems that we can support with our current technology partners. In fact, we booked our first system at the end of December. Our GES products and technology partners support our niche product strategies as it appears federal subsidies will be harder to get under the current administration. Looking at our new ESS project and strategies, we are focused on sales in key states, and we'll continue to offer large subsidies such as Illinois, Massachusetts and California. We are also expediting our efforts to expand global market penetration of our power management products for Green Energy applications focusing on Europe and Asia. Currently, about 70% of our GES sales are in North America. Turning to Power & Microwave Technologies Group or PMT, which includes our Electron Device Group, EDG, and our legacy tube semiconductor wafer fab equipment business and the RF and Microwave Components Group, or PMG. In the quarter, we did see some sales growth, led by increased demand in our RF and Microwave Components business as we see growth in RF and wireless applications such as SATCOM and military applications, including radar and drone technology. While semi fab sales were flat in the quarter, we are encouraged by our customers' forecast indicating growth for the rest of the fiscal year. Looking ahead, we are excited about the strategic initiatives across PMT and GES, including our ESS program, global expansion of our key products and new technology partnerships. While we are navigating a higher degree of uncertainty associated with the impact of tariffs and market conditions, we are pursuing opportunities that may come from these disruptions. We are investing in infrastructure, expanding our design and field engineering teams and enhancing our in-house design and manufacturing capabilities. To support growing demand and innovation, our engineering teams continue to identify new customers and opportunities. Our global capabilities and global go-to-market strategy set us apart from our competition in power management, RF and microwave and green energy markets. We have developed a business model that combines legacy products with new technology partners and solutions allowing our growth strategy to deliver engineered solutions to a global customer base. This model differentiates us from our competition. We are working on these initiatives alongside marketing, our manufacturing design services to companies who need partners in the U.S. to manufacture, test and support products currently made in other countries. We acknowledge there are a lot of moving parts but we have successfully used our global resources, infrastructure and capabilities to mitigate the effect of these situations like this in the past. So in summary, we remain optimistic about our growing project-based business, even though it remains hard to forecast. We continue to increase our technology partners, design opportunities and engineering staff. We have a new technology partnerships that fill technology gaps. We have proven strategy of identifying opportunities in the multibillion-dollar markets we serve. As a result, we continue to feel FY '26 will be another growth year for both PMT and GES. And with that, I'll turn it over to Jens to discuss Canvys. Jens Ruppert: Thanks, Greg, and good morning, everyone. Canvys engineers, manufacturers and sells custom displays to original equipment manufacturers across global industrial and medical markets. It is our mission to deliver high-quality display solutions tailored to our customers' needs. Canvys reported revenues of $8.8 million in the second quarter of fiscal year 2026 an increase of 28.1% from $6.8 million in the same quarter of the previous year. Our gross margin as a percentage of net sales increased to 32.6% from 31.7% in the second quarter of fiscal '25, primarily due to product mix. The backlog at the end of the second quarter of fiscal 2026 remained strong at $38.0 million, providing a robust foundation for future business. During this most recent quarter, Canvys secured orders from both repeat and new medical OEM customers for a range of applications. Our primary focus remains on robotic-assisted surgery, navigation endoscopy and human machine interface HMI solutions for the control of medical devices. Furthermore, our solutions are widely utilized in various commercial and industrial applications. For instance, our products enhance passenger information systems in trains and buses and improve HMI technologies used in printing, vending, billing and packaging equipment. Our initiatives focus on increasing Canvys' visibility and market leadership by seeking new opportunities, building customer relationships and collaborating within the industry to drive growth. Looking ahead, while the business is still project focused and can therefore vary quarter by quarter, we are cautiously optimistic about improving demand in our markets. Positive indicators such as increasing request for quotes and encouraging customer feedback suggest steady growth. Our dedicated sales team continues to explore new opportunities while are focused on implementing strategic plans to ensure sustainable growth and deliver long-term value for our shareholders. I will now turn the call over to Wendy. Wendy Diddell: Thank you, Jens, and good morning, everyone. While the remainder of our health care business, including the manufacturer and repair of certain CT tubes is included in PMT, I want to continue providing key highlights as we go through this transition period over the remaining quarters of FY '26. As a reminder, we sell CT tubes exclusively to DirectMed as part of the January 2025 sale and distribution agreements. Over the last quarter, we continued to make excellent progress finishing production of our ALTA tubes. We should wrap this up by the end of third quarter of this fiscal year. We've also made good strides during the recent quarter repairing Siemens Straton Z tubes. We are preparing to launch the repaired Siemens MX series as early as the fourth quarter of this fiscal year. Given the health care transaction occurred in Q3 FY '25, Q2 and Q3 of FY '26 will continue to show unfavorable comparisons. However, the combination of completing the production of the ALTA tubes and expanding our Siemens program for DirectMed will result in an improvement to our bottom line beginning in FY '27. Switching to an overview of our multiyear strategy. We continue to focus on accelerating growth and improving efficiency. In the second quarter, we had significant growth in our Green Energy business unit, reflecting our ongoing investment in this sector and the benefit of new products generating revenue. Today, we are shipping our Pitch Energy Modules for nearly all GE manufactured turbines to an expanded customer and geographic mix. There are several additional products in development and test that should start contributing to revenue growth in calendar year 2027. We also continue to make progress developing a world-class battery energy storage design center at our LaFox facility. As we've mentioned before, the demand for battery energy storage continues to accelerate and our turnkey solutions and technology partners position us to capitalize on that growth. In the quarter, we added several projects to our pipeline, including one that closed end of December. Our made in America activities are also generating interest. We are utilizing existing customer and supplier relationships to promote our engineering and manufacturing capabilities here in the U.S. We've reached the quoting and prototype stage on several programs, primarily taking advantage of our PCB facility as well as our battery knowledge. This isn't a fast process but the upside of new programs will play a key role in fully utilizing our factory and resources. Finally, we are expecting stronger demand for our engineered solutions within the semiconductor wafer fab equipment market, well into calendar year 2026 and beyond. This growth is tied to the ongoing benefit of AI on equipment demand throughout the world. We are well positioned to benefit from growth in memory-related applications. This growth takes advantage of our existing resources and manufacturing facilities as well. We remain focused on efficiency and cash generation. The period of elevated inventory investment relating to a single critical supplier is nearing completion as that supplier prepares to exit production of powergrid tubes. We expect final inventory receipts of approximately EUR 1.5 million in the first quarter of calendar year 2026, after which inventory levels should normalize and cash conversion improve. This inventory provides product coverage through 2030. We have identified alternative supply sources with sufficient time to ensure continuity, quality and fulfillment of customer demand. Outside this area of growth, we continue to focus on controlling inventory and improving turns. We have also initiated a disciplined cost-controlled effort to explore the benefits of AI by creating an enterprise-wide AI steering committee. This effort is expected to create a road map focused on practical high ROI applications across our global operations. The goal is to drive efficiencies, improve decision-making and reduce manual workload while maintaining strong governance around security, data privacy and responsible AI use. Importantly, this initiative is designed to leverage our internal teams with clear milestones and tight scope controls, ensuring we capture meaningful benefits without significant incremental cost. Longer term, we remain focused on driving growth through a combination of organic initiatives and a disciplined approach to acquisitions. We continue to evaluate opportunities thoughtfully with an emphasis on leveraging our existing capabilities and global infrastructure to support sustainable growth. We believe our current strategic initiatives position us well to drive revenue and profitability over time while we remain patient and selective as we consider potential longer-term acquisition opportunities. I'll now turn the call back over to Ed. Edward Richardson: Thanks, Wendy. In closing, our results this quarter demonstrate the strength of our strategy and the resilience of our business model. It also reflects the talent of this management team to adjust to constantly changing market conditions. By sharpening our focus on repeatable sales, driving strong cash flow and building on our scale across power management and alternative energy solutions, we're positioning the company for long-term success. At the same time, we remain disciplined in our commitment to improving profitability. These priorities give us the confidence in our ability to deliver sustainable value for our shareholders, customers and employees as we move forward. We'll now open the call for questions. Operator: [Operator Instructions] Our first question will come from the line of Bobby Brooks from Northland. Robert Brooks: You mentioned how overall GES backlog declined, but that core backlog grew. Could you just discuss what would be considered core backlog versus noncore? Gregory Peloquin: Sure, Bobby. This is Greg. So the backlog -- so sales were up 39% and backlog was down $57,000. That's not too bad. You grow 39% your backlog only decreases $57,000. So when I talk about core backlog, we have the products that you and I have talked about, the Pitch Energy Modules and everything else. We also have a group of customers that are -- we're selling components into that are building Green Energy products. It's a much smaller portion of GES, but that's what we call the noncore and that book-to-bill was down. But if you look at the core business, which is 95% of it, the book-to-bill was 1.10 on 39% growth and of course, 15% above that. So we're very excited about the business -- core business that we talked to you about that you know about. Those are the products that are growing. Robert Brooks: Got it. That's helpful and really good to hear. And then maybe what's -- what's the right way to think about cadence of orders turning to backlog and then revenues within GES? Like are there certain product lines that can be booked and shipped inter-quarter? And that maybe was a dynamic that spurred the strong GES sales in the quarter? Gregory Peloquin: Exactly, Bobby. So as these products come out, they go from alpha beta to production, and then once that happens, you see we have new customers every quarter, new sales. And so that business is what led to the growth. And as you know, we're expanding that model, which is about 85% North America, expanding it into Europe. So we had wins in Europe that we booked and then wins in Asia that we booked. So that core business that we talk about that's growing quite heavily, and we continue to get new customers and backlog. So we're starting to understand what the annual usage is. And so we're trying to get ahead of the game and build products for stock. It's a guessing game. They do give us a forecast, but they're terrible forecast. So in Q2, we did ship a lot of product from stock. So that's a book-to-bill of 1. That's flat bookings or backlog, and that's where you saw it. So the team has done a great job working with these key customers, trying to develop their annual needs. And then when they come in for 1,000 units, just kind of out of the blue Bobby, I know a couple of those were able to ship from stock. So that's how it's working. And we're continuing to try to make sure we have inventories so we can ship from stock. But in a very positive way, we're seeing higher demand than what we're building. Operator: Our next question will come from the line of Anja Soderstrom from Sidoti. Anja Soderstrom: So I'm just curious with the GE approval list for the [ ULTRA1000 ], where do you -- and what kind of opportunity could that present? Gregory Peloquin: Say it again, Anja. For the what product? Anja Soderstrom: The [ ULTRA1000 ] for the GE approval list. Wendy Diddell: I think Anja is asking about the GE, where do we stand with GE getting approval for the -- for your ULTRA3000. Gregory Peloquin: Okay, yes. So... Anja Soderstrom: Okay. I am sorry, just mixed up. Gregory Peloquin: So Anja, we have GE approval. We're the featured product on their Internet site or their marketplace product. What -- we're not driving this. This is being driven by their customers. So NextEra and Invenergy has been pushing GE because they have a handful of sites where they're using GE services to do maintenance and service. And so all we need to do is have GE. We're going to send them some product, and they're going to try to literally blow it up. I mean it's all about what this product will do so they can improve it from a safety point of view. From a performance point of view and working in their turbines, that's already been approved, that's already done. So we've been going back and forth with an NDA. I've worked for a $30 billion big company -- for the $30 billion company before, and it just -- it takes time. So we have an agreed NDA. We signed it. We sent it back to them. We're expecting it back. But I will tell you, Anja, these people aren't waiting. In fact, we booked a large number of business that they said, you know what, will outsource this ourselves. We won't use GE services to install these Ultra3000s, which we've been buying for other sites for 3 or 4 years. So it really right now, I don't see it being a slowdown of any sort. We have more than enough business right now. It will be an upside. But I wouldn't doubt if they just say, you know what, we're not going to use your services to do our Pitch Energy Modules because these things are such a cost savings to these owner operators and they eliminate a huge problem that they have, I don't think they're going to wait for this. So this is being driven by GE's customers. We're just supporting it. But again, we finally have an agreed NDA because I'm not sending them any product without an NDA. We're going to send them products here this quarter, they'll test them, and then they'll say, okay, their service group can install these into the turbines. But it's interesting, some of these owner operators aren't waiting for them. They're just doing it themselves and installing it themselves or outsourcing it. Anja Soderstrom: Okay. That was helpful. And then what's kind of margin impact does the medical have. What kind of opportunity do you see there as you conclude that supply agreement? Wendy Diddell: Okay. So this is Wendy. Year-to-date, the overall hit to the gross margin in PMT has been almost negligible. It's about a 0% gross margin, so we're not experiencing a huge hit there. It's the addition of the SG&A. And on a year-to-date basis, while we're doing better than we anticipated with that, we still are losing money. As we mentioned in the call, we anticipate finishing up the ALTA tube production in the third quarter. And when we conclude that, and we're focusing then strictly on the repair of the Siemens tubes. We expect that to turn to a profitable bottom line contribution. So I'm estimating, we're estimating at this point that, that will begin in Q1 of FY '27, but we're going to do everything we can to pull that into Q4. Anja Soderstrom: And then you're sitting on some cash, and we expect cash flow to improve as you are finishing building up the inventory for the powergrid tubes. What do you plan to do with all the cash? Wendy Diddell: Well, I'll jump in first and then Ed and Bob can also contribute. The first thing we always remind everybody, Anja, the cash is spread out throughout the world. And I believe today, about 70% of it sits outside the United States in various legal entities. And that cash has to stay there. So while it looks like -- I mean, $33 million is a great number, and we're going to continue to focus on growing that. Please do remember that some of that is not in the United States. So we're going to continue investing in the growth initiatives primarily in the alternative or green energy solutions part of the business. We -- Greg mentioned the Sweetwater, Texas facility and improving our new product development cycle. We're looking at some additional both sales and engineering resources that support that business. So we really want to hold that money that we have in the United States for those type of investments. We are continuing to be very opportunistic and open-minded about small acquisitions. Those would be ones that would be easily bolted on. Again, focused primarily in alternative or power management and focused in areas where they bring in engineering or some type of product that is unique or exclusive to the market. So those are the areas where we're really holding our cash. Ed and Bob may want to add to that. Robert Ben: I can add to that. Anja, it's Bob Ben. Just to let you know, we do -- the cash that we have on hand that we're not necessarily using on a daily basis. We have invested in various money markets, and we're getting an average yield of about 4% right now, just under $10 million of our total cash is invested in that. And so we are doing that and that's what you see on the income statement as investment income, which is located in the other income section of our income statement. Anja Soderstrom: And then a last question in terms of the semiconductor. What do you see there? And do you still expect that to pick up in the second half of '26? Wendy Diddell: In the semi fab equipment market. Is that your question Anja? Anja Soderstrom: Yes. Wendy Diddell: Yes, absolutely. From all of our customers in that market segment, they are anticipating solid growth through the rest of calendar year 2026 and beyond. And we're starting to see some of that in our more near-term forecast. Operator: Our next question will come from the line of [ Chip Rui from Rui Asset Management ]. Unknown Analyst: I want to follow up on the semi question that was just asked. I mean it seems memory has gone from dead on arrival to the hottest thing out there. I know you've not exclusively memory on your both sides. But has there been a cadence shift with what your customers have talked about. I know last quarter, Ed said you would finally kind of work through kind of end customer inventory. Can you just give us a little bit more visibility on perhaps a cyclical recovery there? It seems you're still a little low from a revenue and earnings point of view, but historically a large contributor for the company. So kind of when you say there's a better outlook, is it inflected positively? Or are you still hoping it will inflect positively? A little more color on that would be great. Wendy Diddell: So I'll start on that, [ Chip ]. So as I mentioned, we're starting to see stronger forecast for our Q3 and Q4. Bear in mind that the forecasting is not always the best and it tends to bounce around a lot as we've been discussing really for the last couple of years. But we do see, again, across multiple customers within that channel their input to us is get ready. We are ready. We have the resources. We have the space. It's not going to cost us a lot of money in terms of realizing upside. I also want to point out that on a year-to-date basis, Q1, Q2, we're still up considerably over prior year's first 2 quarters. So we are cautiously to more than cautiously optimistic about Q3 and Q4, and we're ready. So I don't know if that answers your question, maybe you could follow up if you have anything more you want to know. Unknown Analyst: No, that's helpful. It's just -- I know it's up a little bit, but we're still -- it seems like the industry is gearing for a pretty big upcycle. And even though you're up, you're still nowhere near where you were a couple of years ago. So hopefully, it's some upside. And then I'll just make a comment on the buyback. I've never pushed you guys your buyback. I understand where your cash is globally. But everybody on the call was bullish across the board this morning from pitch energy, not only with GE to global, it seems semi is getting better. You've got new product development. It seems to me the enterprise is inflecting positively on multiple levels, yet your stock is once again down and the analysts are focused on backlog and sequential margin. I know you don't have a lot of cash, but $3 million or $4 million of that cash could be a couple of percent of your market cap. You also have an undrawn revolver, which would be in the U.S. My recommendation is carpe diem. I mean if there's a time to buy stock, it's when it's down and when people don't see the vision that you guys see. It seems to me if what you're saying comes to fruition, this is just an incredible opportunity. So I'll leave that as a comment. Wendy Diddell: Thanks, [ Chip ]. We appreciate the input. Operator: [Operator Instructions] Our next question will come as a follow-up from Bobby Brooks from Northland Capital. Robert Brooks: Could we maybe just discuss the growth initiatives that you guys launched a couple of quarters ago and kind of how those are progressing in a little bit more detail? Just curious to hear more on that. Wendy Diddell: Are you referring specifically to the made in America program or specific products under Green Energy? Robert Brooks: Just kind of broadly any growth initiatives that came -- that kind of step from the cash that you got from some of the health care business. Gregory Peloquin: I can talk a little bit about the PMG and the PMT and GES business. So as you know, Bobby, the growth initiatives were: one, to expand internationally, the product; two, implement our energy storage system program and continue to add new products. And all of those were successful in the past 2 quarters. So on the global expansion, as I think we've talked about, we now have orders and have shipped orders into Asia and Europe. We are coming out 3 new product -- I'm sorry, 2 new products in Q2 from our new Sweetwater design center that are already in beta testing with a couple of very large owner operators. So we'll introduce those and we fully expect to start receiving bookings for that. And on the ESS side, we rolled it out. We have technology partners. And in December, we booked our first order for energy storage system with the town or the city or city of Goleta, California for their water waste treatment facility. We will also be supplying the solar panels for that and the energy storage system. Through that process, it kind of confirmed that our niche approach going after utility and small -- comparatively small, very large to us, 2-megawatt type systems. That was booked in December. And we have a list of other ones that we're pursuing in quoting. These quotes are 10 to 15 pages a piece. But we're still very excited about our strategy in terms of technology partners that component business grew. Our Engineered Solutions business grew. We've added new products. And then the BES thing as we grow it, we really feel strongly, especially for the State of Illinois, once that demo center is in place and people can see it. See how it works and see we would train them and educate them on how to get all these rebates that the State of Illinois gives the best in the nation, even better than California. So those are our main initiatives, and we have traction. I'm not a patient person. It's never been one of my attributes of the few I have. But we continue to push, and we continue to every month, get some sort of success and a handful of indications that we have the right strategy, the right technology partners and a real niche that we found in these multibillion-dollar markets. Wendy Diddell: And Bobby, I would just add to that -- okay, go ahead. Robert Brooks: No, you go. You go. Wendy Diddell: I was just going to add in terms of other investment areas. When you look at our SG&A, you're going to see that's relatively flat. Our headcount is flat. What we're doing there is as we have normal turnover, we are reallocating those resources to the high-growth areas that Greg just went through. So you're not -- no one should expect a huge pop in the SG&A as a result of these investments. We've talked about the spend on the Thales inventory, and that should be ramping up. So that's one area where we've continued to spend some money. On CapEx, Bob mentioned in his script that we've made some necessary facility and IT improvements. We also added a second PC board layout facility here, which is playing in nicely with the made in America initiative that we launched a couple of quarters ago. So in general, I think what you're going to see is us moving some things around, again, rationalizing and gaining efficiency from a lot of the people and the resources that we already have. Robert Brooks: That's great to hear. And then just one clarification, Greg, in your opening remarks, you kind of mentioned some tailwinds in the PMT business and some -- and what seemed to be some headwinds in the business as well, like that occurred intra-quarter. Could you just expand or talk about that again and maybe expand on it a little bit more? Or -- and maybe I was missing the ball, too. Gregory Peloquin: Yes. I mean I don't know of any substantial tailwinds in PMT. We obviously have a good grasp on the semiconductor market. We have seen some strong revenue and bookings on the RF and wireless side. We're seeing -- and just a reminder, Bobby, at one time before we sold it, that group was up to $0.5 billion. So we know that market very well, and we have a lot of relationships, and we have probably some of the best RF and wireless suppliers in the world. And we're really seeing some traction again in the quarter from a tailwind point of view in the SATCOM and actually drone markets. And so that was a nice pickup for PMT anyway in terms of sales. It's lower-margin business. It's demand creation, but it's components are made by our technology partners. So that maybe is somewhat of a tailwind in terms of where we saw some upside in PMT and where we will see some upside going forward. Wendy, I'm at Mayo Clinic, everybody. I got -- I have to go a -- meet with my surgeon. However, the last time I was here it was 3.5 years ago with a hip replacement and a half hour after that surgery, I got a call from NextEra with a $10 million order. So I might stay here the weekend and see if I can pick something else up. All right, Wendy. Wendy Diddell: Thanks, Greg. Operator: Our next question will come from the line of Ross Taylor from ARS Investment Partners. Porter Taylor: A couple of quick questions. One, with regard to the semi-cap equipment space, have you guys built prebuilt product for that, it's something on your work in progress or your finished goods inventory line there that you've been -- because you've been preparing for this for some time. It seems that they have been a little slow getting the pull-through. Wendy Diddell: Ross, yes, we do that where we can. I think we've described the business before as being very high mix, low volume. So it's not the type -- it's not like the ULTRA PEMs or the ULTRA3000s where we can build them. It's all the same products. So we don't have the kind of inventory that maybe you envision of having thousands on the shelf ready to go. But we have good exposure and good track record in terms of what the demand is. And we are certainly doing everything we can to make sure that when those orders come in, they go out almost instantaneously. So little bit of a mixed answer there for you. Porter Taylor: Okay. And that's still should be -- historically, it's been -- think about your highest margin business. And I would assume that should you get back to more aggressive run rates, that would return. Wendy Diddell: It's a good business for us. Porter Taylor: Okay. Another quick question. Can you talk about -- give more color on the battery storage opportunities? And what kind of magnitude, what kind of time line are we looking at in that space because it's a fairly -- I mean, it seems to be a very important area we're seeing, whether it's AI data centers or quite honestly, just even factors or others given the nature of the grid. Wendy Diddell: So Greg, just dropped off, Ross, that would be an area for him to address. But what we can tell you is that his list of opportunities continues to grow. They range right now in size, magnitude anywhere between maybe $0.5 million on the small end to a couple of million or more on the large end. He is focused and the team is focused heavily in the industrial and commercial market, more of the let's look at it as kind of Tier 2, not the data AI centers per se. Those might be a little bit bigger than what we're planning to build. But it's an area where we've seen a lot of strong interest particularly in the states that Greg mentioned where the states are still providing a lot of incentives. But I don't think anybody can pick up anything and read anything without seeing the growth in energy storage requirements. So we fully plan to take advantage of that. And we'll try to bring some more color to that in the next call. Porter Taylor: Okay. And do you think -- one like philosophical, you and I've had this question, one of the things that this company has struggled with is it's historically been more of a project-based business. Do you see some of these things we're talking about here, becoming basically run rate businesses where we can kind of see a more steady annual flow through in top and bottom line? Wendy Diddell: I think you see that already. Certainly, you see that in EDG. We've talked about that. I think you're seeing it in the green energy piece with the wind. And I would expect that not only to continue to grow as we expand both the customer base and the geographic area that we cover. I think those -- I call those bread-and-butter items. I love them because to your point, they're going out on a regular cadence. Some of the train, the EV rail, the -- for example, the starter modules those will be more steady run rate. But we always are focusing on and trying to focus on products that will apply to a much broader market, not simply one customer or one program. Porter Taylor: And obviously, success there would be, I think, important. It would take away a lot of the volatility in earnings. And I will offer my comment on buyback. I think my position on it is well known. It's been voiced many times on these calls in the past. What I would say is, I can't believe that your Board doesn't think this company is worth substantially more than book value and you're currently trading at or under book with a substantial 20% of that being cash here or overseas? And so I know what I'd be saying if I sat on your Board, I'd be arguing that this company is worth a lot more than book, and you should be quite comfortable buying it back at under and even around book. So that's coming from, I think, from a long-term shareholder, but someone who really would love to see you guys start to actually become a little more proactive. Don't be so afraid of a tiny little level of debt. So I support the earlier comment that even going into your revolver to buy back $4 million or $5 million worth of stock would be, I think, greatly appreciated by the market and would be reflected in the share price. Operator: And our last question for today will come from the line of [ Brett Davidson ] as a private investor now. Unknown Attendee: I realize Greg has dropped off the line, but I'm hoping somebody can provide some level of update on the electric locomotive product lines and the manufactured diamond product lines. Wendy Diddell: All right. I'll start with that. So let's take the latter one first on the diamond. What we've seen there in that market, and I think again, everybody has read about is that, that market became very quickly saturated, oversaturated the synthetic diamond market. And as a result of that, we've seen a slowdown in the demand for those magnetrons that are used in the equipment that manufactures the diamond. When Greg referred earlier to some of the other elements of Green Energy Solution being down, that's one of them. So in that area, it's still out there. We're still selling them. It's just again, an overcapacity of equipment already on the market and certainly an overcapacity of the synthetic diamonds. All right, in terms of the EV rail market, I think Progress Rail recently put out some of its own press that they have recently shipped 2 of the large trains to Australia. So we're pleased to see that. You may recall in FY '23, we shipped a significant amount of batteries that are used in those trains. So we're going to sit back on the sidelines and see how those 2 trains perform in Australia and what that means for the future. On a more steady cadence basis, as I just referred to in my answer to Ross Taylor, is that we are now shipping on a regular run rate, the starter modules, and we expect to see some upside there. So in general, I would say that the EV rail market certainly is favoring more of a hybrid approach. This is outside of Richardson. This is the general market. More of a hybrid approach, but our starter modules, they are used in any train, whether it's diesel, electric or hybrid. So we remain optimistic about growth in that segment of the business as well. Operator: Thank you. And I'm not showing any further questions in the queue. I would now like to turn the call back over to Ed Richardson for closing remarks. Edward Richardson: Thanks, Victor. Well, thanks again for joining us today and for your questions during Q&A. We look forward to discussing our performance with you in April. And until then, please don't hesitate to call us at any time. Thank you very much. Operator: Thank you for your participation in today's conference. This does conclude the program. You may now disconnect. Everyone, have a great day.
Operator: Thank you for joining today's conference call to discuss Tilray Brands' financial results for the second quarter fiscal year 2026 ended November 30, 2025. [Operator Instructions] Now I'll turn over the call to Ms. Berrin Noorata, Tilray Brands' Chief Corporate Affairs and Communications Officer. Thank you. You may begin. Berrin Noorata: Thank you, operator, and good afternoon, everyone. By now, you should have access to the earnings press release, which is available on the Investors section of the Tilray Brands website at tilray.com and has been filed with the SEC and SEDAR. Please note that during today's call, we will be referring to various non-GAAP financial measures that can provide useful information for investors. However, the presentation of this information is not intended to be considered in isolation or as a substitute for the financial information presented in accordance with GAAP. The earnings press release contains a reconciliation of each non-GAAP financial measure to the most comparable measure prepared in accordance with GAAP. In addition, we will be making numerous forward-looking statements during our remarks and in response to your questions. These statements are based on our current expectations and beliefs and involve known and unknown risks and uncertainties, which may prove to be incorrect. Actual results could differ materially from those described in those forward-looking statements. The text in our earnings press release includes many of the risks and uncertainties associated with such forward-looking statements. Today, we will be hearing from key members of our senior leadership team, beginning with Irwin Simon, Chairman and Chief Executive Officer who will provide opening remarks and commentary, followed by Carl Merton, Chief Financial Officer, who will review our financial results for the second quarter of fiscal year 2026. And now I'd like to turn the call over to Tilray Brands' Chairman and CEO, Irwin Simon. Irwin Simon: Thank you very much, Berrin, and good afternoon, everyone, and happy new year. Thank you so much for joining us today. We delivered a strong second quarter marked by record results and a beat against analyst expectations in the face of strong headwinds. We recorded our highest ever Q2 net revenue of $218 million, achieved an adjusted EBITDA of $8.4 million, and a reported reverse stocks with adjusted EPS loss of $0.02, all while generating an adjusted cash operating income of $6 million. More importantly, the quality of our performance continues to improve. Highlights this quarter include a 51% sequential growth in the international cannabis revenue and a meaningful year-over-year improvement in both net income and free cash flow. We also continue to strengthen our balance sheet. We ended the quarter with approximately $292 million in cash and marketable securities and reduced our debt by approximately $4 million during Q2, leading to a strong net cash position exceeding our debt by almost $30 million. In a rapidly evolving global cannabis regulatory environment, particularly in the U.S., our liquidity and balance sheet strength remains a clear strategic advantage. Today, Tilray operates more than 40 brands in more than 20 countries. We are a global leader in cannabis trusted by patients, health care professionals and regulators worldwide. We are the #1 cannabis producer in Canada by revenue, the fourth largest craft beer brewer in the United States and a market leader in branded hemp wellness products across North America, where our high-protein hemp food portfolio holds a nearly 60% market share. Our Q2 results reinforces the momentum we discussed last quarter, improving fundamentals, sharper execution and increasing leverage from our diversified global platform across cannabis, beverage and wellness. Let's turn to our cannabis business, which is strategically positioned for its next phase of growth. While global cannabis markets continue to evolve, we believe the industry remains early in its long-term development cycle. The decision by President Trump to federally reschedule cannabis in the U.S. represents one of the most consequential regulatory shifts that the industry has seen in decades. Thank you, President Trump, if you're listening today. This is a moment Tilray has been preparing for methodically for years. And guess what, we are ready to go. We believe that cannabis rescheduling for Schedule III will lead the U.S. towards a federally compliant medical cannabis brainwork consistent with our other developed international markets, Tilray is positioned to act immediately. We already have the platform, regulatory experience, operating capabilities and leadership team in place with Tilray Medical U.S. to execute responsibly and to scale. Globally, Tilray Medical is expected to generate approximately $150 million in revenue on an annual run rate. We offer over 200 medical cannabis products, serving more than 500,000 registered patients worldwide. We have participated more than 25 medical cannabis studies and clinical trials conducted in the U.S., Canada, Australia, Argentina and across Europe with leading hospitals, physicians addressing conditions such as pediatric epilepsy, cancer-related nausea, PTSD, chronic pain, anxiety, essential tremors, alcohol use disorders, glioblastomas, cannabinoid impairment and driving performance. These initiatives reinforce Tilray's reputation as a science-driven evident-based medical cannabis company and they underscore the trust placed in us by health care professionals, patients and regulators globally. We also possess one of the largest banks of cannabis genetics, which we intend to study in order to support research on the endocannabinoid system and advance medical cannabis science further. Now let's turn to Q2 cannabis performance. Global cannabis revenue increased to $68 million, our high-margin international cannabis business led the growth, increasing 36% year-over-year and 51% substantially to $20 million, marking one of our strongest international quarters to date, and we fully expect this momentum to continue as we expand our global footprint. This performance is particularly notable given ongoing permit challenges, regular transitions in Portugal and Germany and continued price compression, especially in flower. I'd like to acknowledge and thank the international team for their focused execution under these circumstances. I also want to recognize our Canadian cannabis team for their expertise, support and supply contribution. Additionally, I appreciate the cooperation of Infarmed and the Portuguese regulators to facilitating improvements to permitting approval time lines. Looking ahead, Europe, particularly Germany, the U.K. and Poland represents a significant growth opportunity for us. Execution will be driven by operational disciplines, including process improvement, automation, cross-functional coordination and increased utilization at our cultivation facilities in Portugal and Germany and utilizing our Canadian facilities. Tilray operates one of the largest cannabis footprints in Europe which we're continuing to expand and our advantage lies in scale, speed to market data-driven decisions making and experience gained from our Canadian operation. Moving on to Tilray Pharma and our distribution business. As discussed last quarter, we're expanding our pharmacy reach in Germany, utilizing Tilray's Pharma expansive pharmacy network and salespeople and expect to triple our medical cannabis distribution footprint in fiscal 2026. We remain on track to achieve these objectives. In terms of Q2 performance, revenue grew by 26% year-over-year and 15% sequentially to $85 million, making it our biggest quarter ever, while improving our gross margins. The increase in distribution revenue in the period was driven by competitive pricing, portfolio optimization and increased focus on medical device sales. Looking ahead, Tilray Pharma is laser focused on enhancing operational efficiency to support its commercial expansion into 3,000 additional pharmacies through strategic partnerships. As medical cannabis continues to expand globally, Tilray Pharma is positioned to play a significant role in our overall growth by utilizing insights gaining through integrating our medical operations Tilray Pharma aims to strengthen its business value and create new growth opportunities within both the European medical market and the U.S. International markets remain one of Tilray's most compelling long-term growth drivers as we expect market opportunities, revenue, profitability continues to grow. In Canada, our cannabis business continues to reinforce its leadership position. During Q2, our adult-use medical sales channel, net of excise tax, grew to $46 million with recreational cannabis growing 6% in the quarter. Tilray continues to hold a leading market position in dried flower, non-infused pre-rolls, beverages, oils and chocolate edibles. Our disciplined approach to product mix, margin management and premium pricing has supported our strategic reentry into the high-growth segments as vapes and infused pre-rolls with a focus on accretive margins. In Q2, we advanced our innovation pipeline with the launch of Redecan Amped Live Resin Liquid Diamond vapes, addressing consumers' demand for the full spectrum of cannabinoids strain-specific terpenes that deliver an authentic plant profile. This product combines 80% of live resin with 20% of liquid diamonds, maximizing potency while maintaining natural flavor integrity. In addition, we entered the Quebec market with vapes with a Good Supply brand, rapidly achieving that top 3 SKU positions in the province while underscoring effective execution and strong consumer update. Operationally, we hit our highest quarterly volume in 2 years with over 5.5 million units shipped in Canada in Q2. We also completed our first harvest from our restarted outdoor cannabis grow in Cayuga, Ontario, exceeding expectations on the THC content. With this extra biomass, our cannabis cultivation capacity rises to 200 metric tons annually but this boost not only allows us to provide high-quality products at reduced costs and improve our profit margin, but also helps us expand into fast-growing markets, supplying both Canadian and international customers, including those in Europe to meet increasing global demand. The positive momentum of the past two quarters reflect the trajectory of Canadian cannabis business With the right product mix, healthy margins, we're well positioned to elevate this business in the second half of 2026 and beyond. With the reschedule of cannabis in the U.S. now is the time for Canada to modernize its regulation and secure its position as a global cannabis leader, including excise tax reform, marketing flexibility, health care integration and on-premise consumption. Without modernization, Canada risks becoming an exporter of raw products while value creation, intellectual property and long-term economic growth moves elsewhere. As a global policy accelerates, the choice is clear, modernized Canada's cannabis regulation to support economic competitiveness, consumer education, sustainable growth or risk being left behind in an industry Canada helped to create. Prime Minister Carney, I hope you're listening to this call, the Canadian cannabis industry has generated a significant amount of jobs, contribute billions of dollars in tax revenues of both federal and provincial governments. However, the lack of regulatory reform is resulting in Canadian producers redirecting their investments and attention towards international markets where excise tax can be circumvented. Given the declining spirits industry in Canada, excise tax should be reduced, cannabis drinks should be permitted in liquor stores and on-premise location, medical cannabis sales in drug stores with lower excise tax burden while boosting overall tax revenues as the industry grows. Turning to our beverage business in Q2. Beverage revenue totaled $50 million. We continue to make progress executing our integration and optimization strategy. We delivered $27 million in annualized cost savings in the first half of the year and remain on track towards our $33 million target. We're making meaningful progress in improving performance. However, there is more to be done as we continue to integrate our brands, streamline operations and optimize processes. We acquired brands with the understanding that significant improvements and comprehensive turnaround would be necessary. A process that is currently underway through our integration plan, we recognize this transformation will take time. And while we have not achieved all our objectives. We are on track and encouraged by the positive momentum gained so far. We look forward to the up-and-coming spring product resets with our retail partners and the introduction of some of the new innovations in the market. These changes are anticipated to have a positive impact on revenue in the fourth quarter. Our outlook may seem bullish but conviction is essential for success, which remains our primary focus revitalizing the craft beer category, making beer fun again, bringing people together, fostering meaningful connections and generating long-term value for our shareholders. We've established brands, breweries, a major distribution system. Tilray is here to stay and not going anywhere. Tilray aims to expand its regional national and global presence through strategic partnerships with leading U.S. and international brands. We expect to share more about this in the future but we believe these partnerships validate the strength of our platform and our strategic vision. This approach also position us for future opportunities, should cannabis THC drinks become federally legal in the U.S. We're ready to produce and sell as we're currently operating a leading THC beverage operation across Canada with over 45% of the THC beverage market share. Regarding our U.S. hemp-derived THC business, we continue to offer Fizzy Jane's, Happy Flower hemp-derived THC beverages with 5-milligram and 10-milligram formats through nationwide retailer partnership. Distribution includes, nature wine liquor grocery outlets across the country. While regulatory changes may affect HDD9 products after 2026, we anticipate compliant participation under new federal laws, if it happens. We're also pursuing international growth by expanding our beverage business into new markets worldwide, we're expect to leverage our future strategic partnerships. Our strategy for beverage abroad is evolving with an emphasis on craft beer and nonalcoholic drinks, including energy beverages that meet the demands of consumers in this expanding sector where brands such as HiBall, our clean energy drink, Liquid Love, our sparkling water brand. HiBall is set to launch in the U.K. in Q4, with the expansion plans also underway for the Middle East and Africa. Beyond nonalcoholic beverages and the energy drinks, we continue to explore opportunities to build on our global craft beer segment. Tilray recently participated in the American Craft Beer Expo in Japan and gain valuable insight which the team will pursue in the future. Rounding out our beverage strategy, we're also focused on expanding our nonalcoholic beverages in the U.S. and across international markets. our recent innovations, including non-alc beers under Montauk, 10 Barrel and our non-alc ready-to-drink canned beverages and distilled spirits, including Mock One. Within the spirits category, despite market challenges in Q2, we focus on enhancing our commercial strategy, resulting in a 9.2% increase in depletions across vodka, bourbon and gin with vodka leading by double digit for the quarter. While the Broncos seasonal release sold out rapidly, our ongoing efforts to remain focused on expanding product distribution to additional states and beyond. With 5 years experience in the beverage alcohol industry, we remain confident in our future trajectory as we continue to enhance operational efficiency. Now turning to our wellness business. We generated revenue of $14.6 million, driven by a strategic focus on value-added innovation including high-protein, superseeds, better-for-you breakfast products, better-for-you snacking and the continued success of our HiBall clean energy drinks. Within our ingredient sales business, we've expanded our range of offerings in hemp protein, hemp oil, helping us further develop our business in North America and Asia. Our hemp food business remains fully insulated from proposed hemp THC regulation as these products contain zero THC and are broadly distributed across mainstream retail. In closing, we are confident in Tilray's trajectories for the second half of fiscal 2026 and beyond with a diversified, scalable platform, improving fundamentals strong liquidity, regulatory tailwinds developing globally, Tilray is well positioned to capitalize on the next phase of growth across cannabis, beverage and wellness products. Thank you to our shareholders for your continued support and confidence in Tilray's long-term strategy. I will now turn the call over to Carl to walk through our financial results in more detail. Carl, are you ready? Carl Merton: Thank you, Irwin. Before I begin, please note that we present our financials in accordance with U.S. GAAP and in U.S. dollars. Throughout our discussions, we will be referring to both GAAP and non-GAAP adjusted results and we encourage you to review the reconciliation contained within the press release of our reported results under GAAP with the corresponding non-GAAP measures. This quarter, we are reporting record second quarter net revenue and strong year-over-year improvements in profitability, and we are reaffirming our full year 2026 adjusted EBITDA guidance. Net revenue for the quarter was a record $217.5 million. Revenue growth was primarily driven by strong results in our international operations, both international cannabis and Tilray Pharma. Additionally, Canadian adult-use revenue grew year-over-year. Cannabis net revenue increased year-over-year to $67.5 million during the quarter driven by a strong 36% increase in revenue from international cannabis and a 6% increase in Canadian adult-use cannabis. The continued year-over-year growth in our international cannabis business reinforces our view that Q1 results were temporarily affected by the timing of import and export permits. As a result, Q4 2025 and Q2 of this year provide a more accurate reflection of our ongoing performance expectations for the duration of the fiscal year. With the continued growth of international cannabis, we deliberately chose to scale back supply into the Canadian wholesale market in the quarter and redeploy that supply, along with new growth into the higher-margin international cannabis markets over the remainder of the year. Beverage net revenue for the quarter was $50.1 million. Beverage revenue was impacted by category-wide headwinds in the craft beer segment and our own portfolio optimization efforts under Project 420 where SKU rationalization and margin-focused initiatives continue to impact revenue. However, we expect spring retailer product resets to help mitigate industry trends. These upcoming changes should improve brand visibility and align product mix with consumer preferences, which we expect to benefit better revenue and gross margins in the fourth fiscal quarter. Wellness net revenue was flat year-over-year at $14.6 million based on our strategic focus on value-added innovation and continued growth in HiBall and the ingredient channel. Results were offset by challenges in the club retail channel, which we are addressing through targeted initiatives. Distribution net revenue increased 26% year-over-year to $85.3 million based on our focus on competitive pricing, the prioritization of high-margin SKUs and favorable impacts from foreign exchange. We believe our distribution business will continue to complement and strengthen our international cannabis segment as we grow both in tandem. In terms of contribution, cannabis revenue accounted for 31% of revenue, beverage revenue was 23%, distribution was 39%, and wellness accounted for the final 7%. Gross profit during the quarter was $57.5 million, and gross margin for the quarter was 26%, while margins increased in cannabis, distribution and wellness. Margin construction in the beverage segment negatively impacted the gross margin for the quarter. By segment, beverage gross margin reached 31% this quarter. While this represents a temporary decrease from last year, we are confident that the ongoing implementation of Project 420 will deliver significant improvements while also actively working on additional cost savings to improve overhead utilization as well as SG&A. As these initiatives progress and sales volumes recover, we anticipate stronger overhead utilization and a return to higher margins. Importantly, we remain on track to achieve $33 million in annualized cost savings from Project 420 by the fourth quarter of 2026, positioning our beverage segment for long-term success. Cannabis gross margin increased to 39% compared to 35% last year. The increase was due to a greater proportion of sales being generated in the higher-margin international markets but was offset by increased sales in lower margin price competitive categories in the Canadian adult-use market like vapes and pre-rolls. Distribution gross margin increased to 13%, up from 12% last year, while continuing to grow top line revenue. In wellness, gross margin rose to 32% from 31% as we successfully managed input costs and enhanced operational efficiencies. Our adjusted cash operating income for the quarter was positive $6 million which excludes the noncash impacts of amortization and stock-based compensation. Net loss for the quarter was $43.5 million, a 49% improvement year-over-year compared to $85.3 million or $0.41 per share compared to $0.99 per share. It should be noted that EPS was impacted tenfold by the reverse stock split and has been reflected in both periods. Adjusted EBITDA for the quarter was $8.4 million compared to $9 million last year. Cash flow used in operations was down to $8.5 million compared to $40.7 million last year. The $32.2 million improvement in cash used in operations was almost entirely related to reductions in working capital. We ended the quarter with cash and cash equivalents and marketable securities of $291.6 million, $0.8 million in digital assets and improved from a net debt position of approximately $4 million in the prior quarter to a net cash position of almost $30 million at the end of the period. Additionally, during the quarter, we also completed our ATM program in the market. Our strong cash position provides us with the flexibility we need to execute on strategic opportunities and take advantage of the changing regulatory landscape and we intend to work to further strengthen our balance sheet throughout the remainder of the year. Finally, we remain confident in our business, our strategy, and our opportunity, and we are reaffirming our 2026 adjusted EBITDA guidance of $62 million to $72 million. We can now open the call for Q&A. Operator: [Operator Instructions] The first question comes from the line of Bill Kirk with ROTH Capital Partners. William Kirk: On the intoxicating hemp bans for November implementation, is there anything Irwin that the industry can do to try to help improve the regulatory outcome? Is there any way to kind of extend the grace period, reverse the ban, carve-out particular categories? Like what can you do or what can the industry do to get a better outcome there? Irwin Simon: Thank you, Bill. Great question. As you know, this, for us, was a growing business and there is a lot of demand for these products. And we are working with some congressmen, senators, lobbyists to either extend the deadline or to change some of the regulatory that would have a regulated amount of milligrams, whether it's 5 or 10 milligrams and to be sold on a national basis. And I'll tell you, so far, I have a really good feeling because we're talking to the different associations other than Senator McConnell and whoever backed him, there's no one out here against this and thinks this is something that should be banned. The other thing, Bill, just the other thing, I mean, there's a lot of jobs that will be lost if this happens which is something very important too. William Kirk: For sure. Carl, you had some comments about holding back supply and shifting it into international markets. Am I hearing that right that, that would mean sales that could have been in this quarter simply come later? And is there a way to quantify how much was held back? Carl Merton: So what I said was that we held back from the Canadian wholesale market at lower pricing than what we did in the prior year. And so last year, we did about $5 million. We obviously have the inventory levels that we have that are on the balance sheet that we could have -- that we can redeploy into European markets over the next 6 months of this year. Irwin Simon: So it's just redeploying better margin sales, Bill, where we can sell it into Europe and get much higher margin for it than selling it into the wholesale market where we don't get the margins and in some cases, we're even selling to a competitor. So that's what it is. Operator: Our next question comes from the line of Robert Moskow with TD Securities. Xin Ma: This is Victor Ma on for Rob Moskow. Two for me, please. First, I wanted to ask about Canadian adult-use cannabis. Growth in the quarter was about 6%. How much of that was volume growth versus price mix? Did you gain market share in the quarter? And then second, can you give a little more color on what drove the substantial increase in distribution sales? Was there any timing benefit that was realized in the quarter? Irwin Simon: So number one, absolutely, there was not price. Some of it came from new distribution, if anything. It was a strike in British Columbia that ultimately hurt us. And we did gain a little bit of share, not a lot in the quarter. So it's demand. I think there's a lot we did in different markets. A lot of our new products started to roll out. And -- so that was the big reason from our growth, having supply. And I think just the team has done a great job. This is the highest quarter in us, in selling the units 5.5 million units that we sold in the quarter. So again, if anything, throughout the rest of the prior years, we saw lots of price compression. I think the good news is we're not seeing that price compression right now. But we're seeing demand continuously growing and we're seeing all the Tilray different brands growing in the marketplace. And again, what I'm talking about is all our products, it's our flowers, our pre-rolls, our edibles, our vapes, our infused vapes and our drinks. Sorry, in regards to CC Pharma, listen, I think CC Pharma has been part of Tilray since 2019, and trying to figure out what is the right position is one of our largest business. And we have the European team and with the growth and the opportunities in Germany have realized a couple of things. Number one, they're selling into pharmacies today. We're using the CC Pharma team to sell cannabis also into the pharmacy and also to deliver. The other thing is here, we're able, from our buying power and get better margins and demand for regular medicines, and we're seeing some great growth. It's the biggest quarter we've ever had with CC Pharma and some of the most profitable quarters we've ever had. So we're looking at how we really take this business for online. We're looking at how we're going to expand this business and take this model into other countries. And again, it's how we utilize the sales organization of CC Pharma or now named Tilray Pharma and using that organization to sell more and more cannabis into the drugstores that it sells into. Operator: Our next question comes from the line of Aaron Grey with Alliance Global Partners. Aaron Grey: First one for me. You mentioned the expectation for Tilray Global Medical to approach $150 million, I believe. So just any color you could provide maybe on the timing of that expectation. And then you also mentioned some commentary briefly regarding potential regulatory changes in Germany as well as pricing pressure. So could you help to maybe quantify how big a risk you're seeing from each of those potentially for 2026? Irwin Simon: So in regards to -- listen, I think from an annualized basis, right now, we're on a run rate for that $150 million, and that is both Canada and international markets, okay? And the majority of that is coming from international markets. In regards to regulatory change, I'm not seeing and not concerned with regulatory changes in Europe and Germany. And I think if anything, we like what has ultimately come out of the German government. And in regards to demand, we see more and more demand. As far as price compression, and you heard what I said before. And this is where Canada better watch out. When you look at a lot of the Canadian LPs, there's a lot more the Canadian LPs, there's Israeli companies. There's a lot more companies selling product today into Germany. But Tilray has been in Germany since 2019, 2020 with Tilray Medical. We are the only one or one of the only ones with a grow facility there. And we work very, very closely with the doctors in Germany. You heard what I said before about having Tilray Pharma, where we are vertically integrated from our grow with our salespeople and have our own distribution piece there. So yes, a lot of product coming into Germany, which forces price compression. But what they're going to realize is the quality of product, you get what you pay for. And I think that's what important is they recognize that the Tilray Medical products stand for quality. Aaron Grey: I appreciate that. Second question for me, just turning back to the Canadian market, we had some commentary. More broadly, I just wanted -- to give some color in terms of what are your expectations for growth within the Canadian market? Looks like we finished about mid-single-digit growth for 2025. So what's your expectation now for 2026? You talked about some of the strong volumes there. But it does seem like volume growth has tempered a bit despite pricing pressure stabilizing for the Canadian market. So I wanted to hear more about your expectations for growth in the Canadian market and if a slowdown in growth also led to your decision to shift some of that product international? Irwin Simon: Well, first of all, this slowdown of growth. I had a 6% growth, and I had the highest quarter ever in selling units, okay? I think one of the things we're looking -- continuously looking at is how we grow this to more and more profitable business, and we can sell tons of wholesale product, that's considered growth, but we're not going to do that. But what we're looking continuously at is how we're coming out with added value products and premium products. And today, we have a 50% share on our drinks, which continuously is growing and the demand in that marketplace. We also have the highest share of flower in the marketplace. We sell over 80 million pre-rolls. We sort of backed away from the vape category because of the margins and we're not making money on it. So I see the categories from us, if I get mid- to high single-digit growth, I'll be very, very happy in the Canadian market. Now with that, I got to tell you, Blair is on the phone, and he can jump in here any time. I have seen some of the best lineup of new products coming out that this company has ever had. And I think that's going to help, new products are key. The other thing is, listen, the quarter and that -- British Colombia had a strike and I think if other Canadian LPs decide they want to sell product in Europe is just going to be supply. Tilray today has close to 7 million square feet of grow in Canada and has the ability to grow 270 metric tons. I think the number in the quarter as we grew close to 200 metric tons. So we have plenty of supply. And not only that is we have supply an ample product available to ship internationally which is -- we're not paying excise tax and much higher margins for us. So the opportunities are there for us. Canada is a small country, but it's a country where cannabis is legal from a recreational -- from a federal standpoint, is the only country in the world. And there's more and more users are seeing the benefit of buying cannabis by going into federally legal cannabis stores. Operator: Our next question comes from the line of Pablo Zuanic with Zuanic & Associates. Pablo Zuanic: Look, let me start with CC Pharma. Maybe you can give more color on that business. I think in the past, you said that you reached 13,000 pharmacies. Now you're talking about tripling your distribution reach. I'm trying to understand that better. And also, if the new regulations in Germany, top delivery your CC Pharma reach could be a big asset in terms of pharmacy reach? Would you be willing to also sell other people's products besides Tilray Brands through CC Pharma? Irwin Simon: So number one, as I said, we've owned CC Pharma for -- since 2019, Pablo, and it was finding the right way to operate this business. And originally, we acquired it as part of tenders for Germany. And we've been a part of the German drugstore business in Germany since then. We have now changed a lot within CC Pharma where we've ultimately modernized, we've put money into technology there. We've taken labor costs out of there. We've been able to buy medicines and -- regular medicines from some of the pharmaceutical companies at much better prices and made some big investments. And I'll tell you, that is a big -- is where they're buying medicines and making sure we're buying them at the right price and selling them at less higher margins. So we have focused on that business. But back to your point, is today, we have the ability to win to more and more pharmacies. The CC Pharma or Tilray Pharma has its own sales organization. And you don't see today cannabis -- medical cannabis sales go through CC Pharma, it goes through our medical cannabis business internationally. So there is a big focus to use that sales organization to sell more and more cannabis -- medical cannabis in Germany. And with that, with the regulations and everybody has to go direct to a pharmacy, it can't buy online, there's bigger opportunities for us because more patients have to visit the pharmacy. The second question is would I sell other company's product? Great question. We're in the business to sell and make profit. But again, why would we want to sell someone else's products that we can deliver what the needs are for patients. But again, some patients may want some other competitors' products, and it's something we should look at from a standpoint, does it make sense for us to carry some other products, I don't know. And that's not something we've looked at, but it's something we definitely should look at. Pablo Zuanic: Okay. And then just a follow-up in terms of beverages. Obviously, this quarter, you had very strong performance in cannabis but a steep decline in sales in beer and profit margins. Maybe just give more color in terms of what is it that has not worked there? You talked about positive momentum, but the numbers don't show that momentum and why put so much hope on just the spring resets? I mean is it just about that? I mean more color would help. And then just long term, a reminder about your confidence that the beer business really fits your cannabis strategy longer term or they just play together, and we should think of them as a diversified portfolio anyway. Irwin Simon: So number one, there's many, many companies out there that have diversified business portfolios. And if you look at most companies, some have food, some have personal care, some have beverages. You look at Pepsi, they have snacks, they have food, they have drinks. If you look at other companies, they have personal care, they have food. So I think it's important to be a diversified consumer packaged goods company, which we are, and we're Tilray Brands. I come back and look at -- we got in the beer business in late 2020, COVID came along where our first acquisition of SweetWater and then multiple acquisitions. It's taken us time to integrate these businesses. We went from only 1 plant to 10 plants now we're down to 8. We went from only 1 brand to 18 brands. We went from probably being the 10th or 11th largest craft brewer now down to the fourth largest craft brewer. So there's a lot that's happened over the last 4 to 5 years. And with that, there's been a lot of integrations. And these brands that we bought from ABI and from Molsons, they were not some of the best-performing brands at the time, and it took some time to turn them around. So yes, I have a lot of confidence. Listen, beer is not going away. Beverages is not going away. And just like CC Pharma, here we are from a vertically integrated business, we have manufacturing, we have brands, we have a distribution. We have an infrastructure, salespeople. And it is taking probably some more time. And the other thing is at the same time, the industry has had its decline. But I'll tell you what, as you come back and see a lot potentially will happen in regards to Delta-9 and hemp infused drinks, and who are they looking at to be the leader in that, is Tilray because of our beverage business and our cannabis business. I say this, and I'm not making projections, but if I could sell cannabis infused drinks, in the U.S. tomorrow. If I look what I have a 50% share in Canada, and I multiply that from a 10x what I would have here it's $0.5 billion business for us here. And someday, we're going to be able to sell drinks in the U.S. infused with something and whether it's CBD and cannabis, in regards to President Trump new rescheduling, in regards to drinks that will get approved by the FDA for -- whether it's for anxiety, for pain, for sleep et cetera. So the infrastructure is there for future opportunities, which is important. But to the point, we're in the beverage business today. We're in the beer business. We're in the energy drink business. We're in the water business, we're in vodka seltzers business. And I'll tell you what. The other thing is this here, there's a lot of companies talking to us involved -- to get us involved with different aspects of beverages because of what we have and how we're vertically integrated. So yes, am I totally doing the dance with our results today, coming out of there? No. But do I feel good about what we will do with this business? And what we'll do with these brands? Absolutely, and what our strategy is. Unfortunately, it just is taking a little more time. And if you go back and look at the big companies, Molsons, ABI, Constellation Brands. They weren't created within 5 years. And it's basically 5 years and we're #4 within the craft beer business. A lot of brands have gone away in the craft beer business which gives more and more opportunities. So I am really bullish on the beverage business. And if you look at the supermarkets today and you look elsewhere, Beverage is the biggest category out there. And I think, Pablo, the big thing, we are not just depending upon the resets that are happening in the next 2 months, gaining share in C-stores, gaining share on premise, gaining share in general. And that's what I'm excited about. Pablo Zuanic: That's great color. Look, if I may, I want to squeeze one more if you don't mind. In your -- and just a short answer. In your press release, you talk about U.S. federally rescheduling cannabis. But I think my understanding and most people's understanding would be that if they reschedule, it will still be a state-by-state program. It will not be federally rescheduled. But I guess your interpretation that it will be federally rescheduled. And I think that's a big distinction. Do you want to just share some color on that, but just briefly? Irwin Simon: Our plan is what I've said, if a reschedule -- what we're focused on, and I think a lot of other companies are focused on recreation, we are focused on medical cannabis. And our plan is to leverage the infrastructure and expertise and know-how that we've developed that we got a $150 million business in Tilray today. And with that, our $300 million distribution platform is something that we utilize in Europe and how do we ultimately do that here. And again, engage with the outreach of the government, with the FDA and with our -- working with hospitals, working with research, doing clinical studies. And that's what we're looking to do there in regards to our U.S. entry into Tilray U.S. not looking at it today of how we do state-by-state from a recreational standpoint. And ultimately, what are we going to do. And we have so much research in pain, anxiety, cancer-related drugs, cancer anti-vomiting drugs, PTSD and taking that science and taking those -- and taking our genetics and strains and working with hospitals and potentially strategically aligning with a pharma company to execute that within the U.S. is what we're looking to do. Operator: The last question comes from Frederico Gomes with ATB Capital Markets. Frederico Yokota Gomes: Just the first question, just going back to the rescheduling comment there with potential rescheduling in the U.S. I'm just curious, does that change the way you see potential investments in the state legal cannabis businesses like you've done in the past with MedMen. Irwin Simon: Yes. It doesn't anything with the state. But again, as I said, Tilray is committed to invest in research. Tilray is committed to invest in clinicals, Tilray is committed to working with the FDA, DEA, is coming up with approved cannabis drugs that can be used and sold for some of the conditions that I mentioned before. But it's not state-by-state where we're looking at recreational. We are totally looking at this from a total medical standpoint. Frederico Yokota Gomes: Got it. And then second question, international cannabis. Could you help us understand outside of Germany, what are the main international markets you have right now? And do you anticipate any other international markets where we could see some sort of regulatory change near term this year that could lead to growth like we saw in Germany since April 2024. Irwin Simon: So listen, whether it's Poland, there's today Italy markets. There's the U.K. markets. We're looking at oils for France and Spain. And I will tell you this here, without going into names, and countries, there's a lot of stuff happening in the Middle East in regards to working with CBD and THC from a Middle East standpoint, there are some stuff and testing going on in India in regards to hemp and hemp infused THC products. So again, and I will say this here, and that's why I thanked President Trump from a rescheduling standpoint. Rescheduling cannabis from the Schedule I to a Schedule III has opened up the eyes and the legality a lot of other countries here. And I think that's what was important, too. Once the U.S. did it, there's a lot of other companies now are saying this stuff is not taboo. It's something that's really benefit and this can be really helpful in a lot of different diseases, and it can be very helpful as a medicine. Operator: Thank you. I'd like to pass the call back over to management for any closing remarks. Irwin Simon: Thank you very much, operator, and thank you very much for everybody joining us today. As you can see, there is a lot happening at Tilray. And as a diversified consumer packaged goods company that today sells products into the recreational cannabis market in Canada, sells medical cannabis in Canada, sells drinks in Canada, sells beverages in the U.S. spirits and our hemp-infused -- our hemp foods, our wellness products and then our international products with -- our international medical products and our Tilray Pharma. So there's a lot within Tilray today, there's a lot of science, there's a lot of research, there's a lot of genetics that we're doing. And as a 5-, 6-year-old company today that's really pulling this all together, and there's no one out there today that is diversified like us. One of our strengths is our balance sheet. It's -- we're in a net cash position. So we're able to invest in research. We're able to invest in trial. We're able to invest in clinicals today. So you can't look at us today as a recreational cannabis company. You can't look at us as just a beer company. And you've got to look at us today as a consumer company that looks at products and looks at different ways to help bring consumers together, help bring people together. And that is some of the stuff we're doing. At the end of the day, as you can see what we've done this quarter in regards to our profitability for our shareholders. And again, it's been 5 years and putting this together piece by piece, and there's a lot to do. The question asked by Pablo in regards to our beverage business. Yes, there's a lot to do in the acquisitions that we've done. And one of the proofs is here, look at the acquisitions we've done on cannabis as we put these cannabis facilities and brands together took out costs, integrated the businesses, and we're seeing the performance of that today. It's no different. We've really only got into the international cannabis business over the last year or so, and that's on the run rate to be a $100 million business. So there's a lot to do within Tilray. There's a lot of great assets within Tilray, whether it's facilities, whether it's brands, whether it's distribution, whether it's know-how. And there's a lot of AI coming into Tilray today to help us implement a lot of what's happening. I appreciate those that have stayed with us as shareholders, I know there's times you're frustrated and there's times probably I'm frustrated more than you are. But I do see a good path with a lot that's happening coming together. I got to tell you, we deal with a tough regulatory environment out there. We pay some of the highest excise tax in Canada and I hope Prime Minister Carney heard me how important this industry is for the Canadian market, the jobs that created the tax dollars, and we don't want to see this run away from Canada. I commend President Trump for rescheduling. He was the first President that really took this on. Everybody else sort of ran away from it. And it's up to us now to show what this really can do. So thank you very much for getting on our call today, and happy New Year to everybody. Operator: This concludes today's teleconference. You may disconnect your lines at this time. Thank you for your participation.
Operator: Greetings, and welcome to Torrid Holdings Third Quarter Fiscal 2025 Earnings Conference Call. [Operator Instructions] Please note, this conference is being recorded. I will now turn the conference over to Chinwe Abaelu, Chief Accounting Officer and Senior Vice President. Thank you. You may begin. Chinwe Abaelu: Good afternoon, everyone, and thank you for joining Torrid's call today to discuss our financial results for the third quarter of fiscal 2025, which we released this afternoon and can be found on our website at investors.torrid.com. With me on the call today are Lisa Harper, Chief Executive Officer of Torrid; and Paula Dempsey, the Chief Financial Officer. Ashlee Wheeler, our Chief Strategy and Planning Officer, is also present and will be participating in the Q&A session. Before we get started, I would like to remind you of the company's safe harbor language, which I'm sure you're familiar with. Management may make forward-looking statements, including guidance and underlying assumptions. Forward-looking statements may include, but are not limited to, statements containing the words expect, believe, plan, anticipate, will, may, should, estimate and other words and terms of similar meaning. All forward-looking statements are based on current expectations and assumptions as of today, December 3, 2025. These statements are subject to risks and uncertainties that could cause actual results to differ materially. For further discussion of risks related to our business, see our filings with the SEC. With that, I'll turn it over to Lisa. Lisa Harper: Thank you, Chinwe. Hello, everyone, and thank you for joining us today. I'll review our third quarter performance and provide an update on our strategic initiatives, including the enhancement of our product assortment, our commitment to the growth of our sub-brands, the expansion of opening price point strategy and execution on our store optimization plan. Then I'll turn the call over to Paula to discuss the financials. We are clearly disappointed with our overall performance this quarter. Despite some areas of strength, it was more than offset by missteps in our overall assortment mix that we are addressing head on with decisive corrective actions, and I'll discuss that shortly. For the quarter, while sales came in at the low end of our guidance, profitability was dampened by deeper promotional activity than we had planned, impacting our adjusted EBITDA. We delivered third quarter sales of $235 million and adjusted EBITDA of $9.8 million. I want to be clear, these results largely reflected execution issues that are within our control. Let me walk you through the factors that influenced our results. This quarter delivered strong performance in several key categories with denim, non-denim, dresses and intimates meeting our expectations, all generating positive comparable growth. However, this improvement was more than offset by missteps in our tops and jackets category. Tops represented approximately half of the year-over-year sales miss this quarter. Specifically, we shifted too heavily towards fashion-forward designs at the expense of our core assortments and established franchises. While innovation is important, the shift moved us too far from the functional replenishable items. Our customer feedback has been invaluable in guiding our course correction. We are successfully attracting and reactivating consumers who embrace our elevated fashion and lifestyle offerings across our sub-brands. However, our loyal long-standing customers continue to rely on us for their core ward drove essentials and their solution-oriented products and trusted fabrics with evolutionary rather than revolutionary style updates. Our denim category exemplifies the balanced approach we're implementing going forward. In Q3, we successfully integrated fashion elements while preserving our core franchise DNA, delivering mid-single-digit growth on top of last year's double-digit performance. This demonstrates our ability to innovate within our customers' expectations, and we're applying those learnings across all categories moving forward. We are taking decisive action to address these challenges with clear time lines and measurable outcomes. First, we've strengthened our merchandising foundation by implementing enhanced guardrails in our merchandising process and building a more robust assortment planning function. I'm personally overseeing both initiatives to ensure rapid execution and accountability. Secondly, we're actively addressing near-term assortment gaps. We've initiated chase orders for our key franchises, focusing on the core fabrications and silhouettes our customers expect in both knits and woven tops. These products will begin arriving in January, positioning us to see sequential improvement in knit and woven performance by the end of Q4 with accelerating momentum into Q1 2026. Looking ahead, we've completed a comprehensive review of our spring/summer 2026 buying strategy. We're rebalancing our investments to deliver the right mix across categories, fits, fabrics and end users, ensuring we meet our customers where they are while maintaining our innovative edge. These actions reflect our commitment to operational excellence and customer centricity. We have clear visibility into the path forward and confidence in our ability to return these categories to growth. Shifting to footwear. Our strategic decision to pause the footwall category in response to tariff-driven cost pressures was sound, but we underestimated the attachment rate impact. The loss of this anchor category resulted in lower overall basket sizes and transaction frequency, leading to what we estimate as an approximate $12.5 million in lost sales this quarter, of which $10 million was contemplated. The timing amplified the impact as October represents our peak boot selling season, which historically drives some of our highest attachment rates of the year. We've taken decisive action to quickly course correct. We reintroduced a carefully curated footwear assortment in mid-November and early performance has been encouraging. We've restructured our sourcing and SKU mix to mitigate tariff exposure while maintaining the category's ability to drive attachment. Based on what we're seeing, we expect to scale footwear back to historical sale levels of approximately $40 million in 2026, but importantly, an improved profitability given our more disciplined approach to the category. This positions us to recapture both the direct footwear revenue and the attachment-driven sales we lost during the temporary pause. Now turning to our strategic initiatives. We are focused on enhancing our product offering by expanding sub-brands and strategically introducing an opening price point strategy designed to increase market share through customer acquisition and increase frequency among our loyal customers. Our sub-brand strategy is working and is on track to deliver approximately $80 million in sales this year, attracting new, reactivating lapsed and increasing spend among our high-value customers. These lifestyle concepts offer unique collections that provide newness and excitement while broadening our customer base. Importantly, sub-brands create a halo effect, driving attachment rates to core categories and supporting customer reactivation through targeted community and influencer marketing. Looking ahead to 2026, we're implementing a more strategically balanced assortment architecture. Approximately 30% of our assortment offering will be opening price points, developed in close partnership with our merchandising design and product development teams to ensure we maintain our quality standards while delivering accessible value to customers. We are excited about momentum in our intimates business with 3 new bra launches planned for 2026, our first substantive bra introduction since 2019, representing significant innovation in this important category. Bras as a category drives strong customer acquisition and loyalty and engagement, and we believe there is significant runway in this business. On the marketing front, we are committed to a balanced approach with emphasis on both mid- and upper funnel awareness and acquisition as well as lower funnel conversion and retention. This includes increased digital media investment, a robust influencer strategy and several in-person activation. In 2026, you will see even greater expansion of these community and brand-building engagement efforts. Our popular model search campaign ran from September to November this year and was done through our digital channels, supporting a broader reach. We had an incredible response again this year, so much so that we selected 5 top models, one from each age demographic ranging from 18 to 50-plus, showcasing the range and relevance of our brand and community. Additionally, we have improved the value proposition of our loyalty program and our private label credit card, which drives significant expansion in customer lifetime value. We remain committed to our store optimization strategy, and I'm pleased to report we're executing exceptionally well against our plan. As consumer preferences continue to shift toward digital channels, we're proactively rightsizing our physical footprint to deploy capital more efficiently and enhance shareholder returns. Our execution remains on track. We closed 15 stores in Q3, bringing our year-to-date total to 74 stores, and we continue to expect approximately 180 closures for the full year. Importantly, we're seeing strong retention metrics aligned with our expectations that validate our approach. Customer retention from this year's closures is running in line with our expectations, demonstrating the strength of our omnichannel ecosystem, the success of our enhanced retention strategies, including multi-touch communication plans and our ability to successfully migrate customers to nearby locations and digital channels. With 95% of customers engaged in our loyalty program, we remain well positioned to effectively migrate customers to nearby stores and digital channels. The financial benefits are substantial and will accelerate as we move through this optimization. These closures are expected to contribute significant adjusted EBITDA margin benefit in 2026, while also generating significant free cash flow improvement that will provide increased flexibility for future strategic investments. Now I'll turn the call over to Paula to discuss the financials. Paula Dempsey: Thank you, Lisa. Good afternoon, everyone, and thank you for joining us today. I'll begin with a review of our third quarter financial performance and then provide our outlook for the remainder of fiscal 2025. While sales landed at the low end of our guidance, softer demand in our digital channel required higher-than-planned promotional activity, which has pressured adjusted EBITDA. At the same time, we continue to realize meaningful benefits from our store optimization initiatives, resulting in 11.5% year-over-year reduction in SG&A. We remain committed to disciplined inventory management and ended the quarter with inventory down 6.8% compared to last year. Net sales for the third quarter were $235.2 million compared to $263.8 million in the prior year. Comparable sales declined 8.3% and our tariff-related pause in the shoe category drove approximately 400 basis points to this overall decline as we temporarily scaled back while navigating elevated import costs in the category. Gross profit was $82.2 million versus $95.2 million last year. Gross margin was 34.9% compared to 36.1% in the prior year, reflecting higher promotions and deleverage on the lower sales base. SG&A expenses continue to reflect the disciplined cost structure we're building across the enterprise. SG&A was favorable by $8.6 million, resulting in $66.3 million for the quarter compared to $74.9 million a year ago. As a percentage of net sales, SG&A leveraged 30 basis points to 28.2%. This year-over-year improvement is a direct result of our multiyear transformation to structurally reduce operating expenses. Benefits from our store optimization initiatives and our focused approach to organizational prioritization are enabling us to reduce fixed costs. These gains reflect more than store closures alone. They represent a broader shift towards a more efficient, more variable cost structure designed to flex with demand, strengthen margin resilience and enhance free cash flow. As store optimization progresses, we expect further SG&A leverage and incremental liquidity benefits in fiscal '26. Marketing investment increased by $2.7 million to $15.7 million as we leaned intentionally into customer acquisition and brand visibility during the quarter. These investments support our long-term plan to strengthen top of the funnel, improve brand relevance and drive traffic. We continue to refine our marketing mix towards higher return channels with more personalized targeting and improved attribution. The timing shift of our model search event from Q2 to Q3 also drove this increase. This event continues to deliver high engagement and long-term customer loyalty. Net loss for the quarter was $6.4 million or $0.06 per share compared to a net loss of $1.2 million or $0.01 per share last year. Adjusted EBITDA was $9.8 million, representing a 4.2% margin versus $19.6 million and a 7.4% margin a year ago. We ended the quarter with $17.2 million in cash compared to $44 million last year. As of November 1, we had $14.9 million drawn on our revolving credit facility with approximately $86.2 million of remaining availability. Inventory totaled $128.8 million, down 6.8% from last year, reflecting both lower receipts and our reduced store base. Turning to store optimization, which remains a cornerstone of our multiyear transformation. During the quarter, we closed 15 stores and remain on track to close up to 180 stores in fiscal 2025. Customer retention from these closures continue to perform consistently with historical levels. The stores we're exiting are structurally unproductive and closures are aligned with natural lease expirations, minimizing exit costs. On a Q3 year-to-date basis, we have realized approximately $18 million in lower operating expenses from closing 74 stores this year and 35 total stores in the prior year, and these savings are already reflected in our performance. As we move through Q4 and complete the planned closures for fiscal '25, we expect even greater savings in fiscal '26, which will enhance our liquidity position. This initiative is both a structural realignment, reflecting where our customers increasingly choose to shop with about 70% of demand originating online and a proactive liquidity strategy designed to protect the business, strengthen our balance sheet and enhance the resilience of our operating model. Overall, we believe store optimization will deliver substantial adjusted EBITDA margin expansion in fiscal '26. We are updating our outlook for the remainder of the year to reflect third quarter performance and current trends. We now expect full year net sales in the range of $995 million to $1.002 billion and adjusted EBITDA in the range of $59 million to $62 million for the full year. Capital expenditure is expected in the range of $13 million to $15 million. In closing, we're executing a disciplined and deliberate transformation of our retail footprint. By taking advantage of natural lease expirations to rightsize our store fleet, we're structurally improving our cost base and strengthening the long-term health of the business. The combination of lower fixed costs, enhanced digital capabilities and a more productive store base is expected to drive sustainable margin expansion and generate meaningful incremental liquidity as we move into fiscal 2026. Now we will open the call to your questions. Operator? Operator: [Operator Instructions] Our first question comes from Janine Stichter with BTIG. Janine Hoffman Stichter: Could you elaborate a bit on some of the product missteps that you talked about? What cues are you getting from the consumer to tell you that this is where the challenge is and this is what needs to be fixed? And then you talked about the promotions being higher on the digital channel. Maybe elaborate on why that is or why you think that is and what you saw in the stores during the period. Lisa Harper: Thanks, Janine. It's Lisa. The merchandising missteps were very focused on tops, as we mentioned. So tops were about half of the total revenue miss for the quarter. Shoes were about 40% and then jackets because of their seasonal importance were about 10% for the quarter. So it's pretty -- we've talked through the shoe situation, which is a pause based on the tariffs. We've reintroduced shoes and boots recently are having a great response to them. We'll continue to build that business back up and recapture that revenue as we move into 2026. But for the quarter, the biggest miss and the biggest action was really focused around the tops category. What I would say from a merchandising miss perspective was the advocation of a couple of our core fabrications and core kind of entry point solution-based products for the customer. And so we've been able to chase that product very quickly. It's longer tops, more tunics, brushed waffles, super soft knits and Sally in the woven category. So it's very focused on a few fabrications, very focused on a few end uses. And because we are able to platform that fabric, we're being -- we're back into some of those businesses in the fifth week of December and throughout January and February in terms of receipts. So we expect to see improvement in those categories as we move into early first quarter as we'll have, I think, chased the bulk of what we feel is missing in the assortment right now. So what we've done to avoid that in the future is really enhance, although we have pretty substantive guardrails to this, this was a merchandising this was obviously very disappointing and frustrating for the organization for the quarter. And so we put enhanced guardrails around the process. We've put in a robust assortment planning, multifunctional approach to the categories, particularly. And we are just increasing oversight, and I'm involved in every step of that. I would say that as an organization, they were able to effectively kind of innovate and balance product assortments in all areas except for tops. So I would say that -- I would -- all areas except for tops and jackets. The benefits of that innovation and expansion to the core product is present in denim, non-denim dresses and intimates. And so those areas were able to positive comp. As we mentioned in the prepared remarks, they weren't able to offset the detriment of the tops miss. So if you think about the total miss for the quarter, I'll restate it, it's about 50% tops, about 40% shoes and related transactions with shoes and then about 10% in jackets for the quarter. And I'll turn it over to Ashlee to answer the promotional conversation. Ashlee Wheeler: Janine, I'd say that the accelerated promotional activity was in large part correlated to the miss in the top space. So as Lisa noted, in the absence of some of those core franchises, entry price point solution-based items and a swing into more highly novel or more fashion-oriented assortment. It put a little more pressure on promotional activity, AUR, for example, in the absence of those entry price point categories. That said, I think we've done a really nice job making sure that we're coming out of the season clean. So there are no inventory issues to speak of related to some of these missteps in assortment. Janine Hoffman Stichter: Perfect. And then maybe just one more for me. The full year guidance implies, I think, a mid-teens revenue decline in Q4. Anything you can share about where you're tracking quarter-to-date versus that guidance? Lisa Harper: Obviously, we are able to incorporate current performance into that guidance. We don't anticipate a recovery, substantive recovery in either tops or shoes for the balance of this quarter. We'll start to see some improvement in tops in first quarter. We'll still be -- have a drag in shoes as we go through the fourth quarter and the first half of next year. So contemplate -- all of that is contemplated into that guidance. Operator: Our next question comes from Brooke Roach with Goldman Sachs. Brooke Roach: Lisa, for a couple of years now, the balance of fashion versus basics and opening price point versus stretched product has been something that the business has been chasing. What's changing in the processes to ensure that you have both those opening price points and balance items in your assortment and planning architectures? And other than oversight, how do we ensure that this is something that's more systematic on a go-forward basis as we look into 2026 and beyond? Lisa Harper: Thanks, Brooke. I just called you by your last, I apologize. Thanks, Brooke. So I would say that the issue -- the overall issue and opportunity in this business was -- is about innovation and remaining relevant and commercial. That is balanced against the need of the customer and the request of the customer -- the focus of the customer on price point. And so as we go into first quarter of next year, we will be in terms of opening price point, close to 30% of sales and assortment associated with those categories of businesses that service our customer in terms of core products, solution-oriented, high quality at a price that she has shown us that she reacts to and values. That is built into the architecture, the assortment architecture as we move forward. It is something that we are -- have embedded in that process. Both sides of this are important. First of all, we have to move forward and remain relevant. I think that we've been able to do that with sub-brands. We've been able to do that in the categories that I mentioned before, denim, non-denim dresses and intimates. And the miss really is in the tops area, which had advocated and exited through merchandising direction to many of the core programs. Those core programs are bought and will be -- already have been planned to receive as we get into January receipts going into 2026 sales, and it's part of the assortment architecture. So the need for the business to move forward and innovate with product was important as our customer feedback had been that -- our styling was not keeping up with their demand. We've balanced that, I think, in every area, except for the misstep in tops, where we will be going into first quarter with a much stronger opening price point strategy across the board, but primarily the highest level of opening price point will be in tops as we move forward. It's built into the assortment architecture of the business. I don't know, Ashlee, do you want to add anything? Ashlee Wheeler: Brooke, I might add, if we take a look at the categories where we executed well in the third quarter, so denim as a proxy is a place where we stayed committed to the franchises that the customer knows us for, the Bombshell franchise, for example. We stayed very committed, but we expanded upon that, gave her more innovation through leg shape, wash treatment, finish. And that system has worked very, very well. It's worked well for us in dresses where we've stayed committed to end use covering every aspect of her life and been very focused on multi-end use, it's worked well. Tops where we misstepped in the third quarter, we did not do that, and we walked away from very critical end use and solutions. We have to get back and stay focused on the same balance that we applied in denim and in dresses to our tops category, which is the largest category of the business. Brooke Roach: That's really helpful. As a follow-up, have you seen any larger or outsized shifts in engagement among any specific income demographic or age cohort of your consumer? Maybe said another way, are you seeing any changes in the demographic makeup of your businesses which customers are engaging with you the best? Lisa Harper: In terms of customer demographics or income cohorts, performance has stayed consistent across all of those. What we observed in the third quarter, very different from previous quarters is our most loyal, our most engaged customers pulled back, and we saw that come through reduced frequency and fewer purchases in the tops departments in particular. Operator: Our next question comes from Corey Tarlowe with Jefferies. Corey Tarlowe: Leslie, can we just talk a little bit about the sub-brand momentum and any updates there as that's continued to build in the assortment and how you think about this quarter's results may alter or change the approach in the sub-brand strategy? Lisa Harper: Thanks, Corey. No change in the sub-brand strategy. I think that we have a clear winner in the [indiscernible] brand and think that, that will expand. Nightfall and retro are continuing to perform very, very well. Belle Isle is more -- we've identified it more as a first half brand than a back half brand. And so we'll be adjusting kind of the sales momentum associated with Belle Isle to be probably more 60% first half, 40% back half. And then we've introduced Tru in our active business, which we're very happy with the results there. And Lovesick is still kind of, I would say, in test mode. We don't have a lot of revenue associated with that as we move into next year as we're able to refine that assortment moving forward. I think in general, very, very pleased with the sub-brand momentum and expect it to continue to grow dramatically as we go into 2026. Corey Tarlowe: Great. That's really helpful. And then just a follow-up. Can we talk about the leverage profile and how that changes with all the store closures and what the perhaps new leverage profile might be as we think about easier lapse in 2026 and what that could mean from a margin perspective? Paula Dempsey: Corey, this is Paula. So as we think about 2026 with the store closures, what's going to happen is our profile will be more flexible from an expenses standpoint. So of course, less fixed expenses, and we'll have the ability to be more dynamic from that standpoint. I think from a gross margin, the profile may be staying closely the same to where that total enterprise is today. But what you're going to see is a substantial EBITDA margin expansion in 2026 with the store closures. So currently, we are seeing the store closure optimization work really well. We have delivered over $18 million of cost reductions this year alone. We expect that number to be much greater mid 2026 when we annualize 180 stores. And so that will also strengthen our liquidity substantially for 2026. Operator: Our next question comes from Alex Straton with Morgan Stanley. Alexandra Straton: Maybe for Paula, I think you said you expect significant EBITDA margin expansion next year. I'm not sure if I heard that right. But if so, can you just elaborate more on that and what type of level is in reach? And then just on -- as a follow-up to the sales guidance for the fourth quarter, worse pressure than the third quarter is what's implied. So is that reflecting what you've seen quarter-to-date? And what areas is that are getting worse from a quarter-over-quarter perspective? Paula Dempsey: So going to Q4 guidance, we are all in for Q4 guidance. So what you're seeing is essentially accounting for what Lisa had mentioned before, the miss in tops along with shoes. There is also a seasonality impact in our business typically in Q4. So it goes along with that seasonality impact. As we moved into fiscal '26 with store closures and EBITDA margin growth, what you're going to see there is, if you recall, a lot of these stores that we're closing, actually, most of them are very highly unproductive stores. So by closing them, we're essentially giving money back to the business through reductions in many items in the P&L, right? So such as store payroll or store occupancy, et cetera, et cetera, et cetera. So we're going to see a greater amount of savings from that standpoint. And just to touch base again, we're seeing retention, customer retention, sales retention from these store closures to be well aligned with our historical rates, which is a great sign for us. So everything is going really well from that standpoint. I would say as we are on track to closing up to 180 this year. And I think that's all we have from a store optimization at this point. Operator: Our next question comes from Dana Telsey with Telsey Advisory Group. Dana Telsey: As you think about the current merchandising adjustments that are being made, what are you seeing in the competitive landscape? Do you think of this more as an internal issue that Torrid needs to fix? Or is there changes in the competitive landscape and whether it's product assortment, price point or where your customer is going? Lisa Harper: Thanks, Dana. I do think there's a seasonal aspect to it. I think, obviously, a lot of this is self-inflicted driven by really advocating core products in the knit and woven top categories. I do think seasonally, there are a lot of options that other brands have extended sizes, and it's more sweat shirt-oriented, sweater oriented that are not as fit specific. We certainly didn't see this impact in the tops business in the first half of this year. So it really did accelerate as we go into third quarter. I think we have a real opportunity to build back with the opening price point strategies that we discussed and keep fabrications that our customer really values. More tunics in the mix, more kind of figure flattering solution-oriented products in the knit category and then more kind of wear-to-work and blouse business in the woven categories. But I do think that in the third quarter, there is an ability to choose tops among a broader range of retailers because just the seasonal impact of being less fit specific and more oversized. I don't -- while we -- to that end, we didn't see the degradation in any of our bottoms businesses, which are more fit specific or our dress business, which also we were able to have great representation of end uses and fit solutions. So I feel like it's isolated, very clearly isolated. I do think it could be -- could have been -- I don't have any data to really support it, but just broadly from a mindset, it could have had a larger impact because of the seasonal nature of the products in the knit and woven categories during the time. So again, quickly move to address it. When I think Ashlee mentioned earlier about our less frequency in terms of tops purchases in the third quarter, tops really are a frequency driver for us so that they don't buy denim as often or dresses as often, but they do buy tops more often. And I think that opportunity to by tops other places might have been enhanced by that timing. I do think anything that we've seen in terms of surveying with our customers, they're still very dedicated to Torrid. They're very interested in shopping at Torrid. They're still maintaining their strong relationship and our loyalty program continues to be very highly penetrated. So we have a lot of opportunity to communicate and connect with this customer and understand exactly what's missing. And as I mentioned, the one thing that continues to come up is opening price point that I would say we did have fits and starts with over the last several years, but very deeply invested and committed to based on the analysis and of our previous OPP programs and the expansion related to that. So I think we're going to be able to recapture her tops purchase in addition to maintaining the denim and dress purchase from her as we introduce -- reintroduce these core businesses at an opening price point. Did I answer the question, Dana? Operator: This now concludes our question-and-answer session. I would like to turn the floor back over to Lisa Harper for closing comments. Lisa Harper: Thank you for joining us today. We look forward to sharing the progress on the store optimization program and the remerchandising of our tops area as we join you for the fourth quarter and fiscal '25 conference call. Thank you. Operator: Ladies and gentlemen, thank you for your participation. This concludes today's conference. Please disconnect your lines, and have a wonderful day.
Operator: Hello. Welcome everyone to the 2026 First Quarter Earnings Call for Commercial Metals Company. Joining me on today's call are Peter Matt, Commercial Metals Company's President and Chief Executive Officer, and Paul Lawrence, Senior Vice President and Chief Financial Officer. Today's materials, including the press release and supplemental slides that accompany this call, can be found on Commercial Metals Company's Investor Relations website. Today's call is being recorded. After the company's remarks, we will have a question and answer session, and we'll have a few instructions at that time. I would like to remind all participants that today's discussion will contain forward-looking statements, including with respect to economic conditions, effects of legislation and trade actions, U.S. Steel import levels, construction activity, demand for finished steel products and precast concrete products, the expected capabilities, benefits, costs, and timeline for construction of new facilities, the expected benefits of recent acquisitions, the company's operations, the company's strategic growth plan and its anticipated benefits, legal proceedings, the company's future results of operations, financial measures, and capital spending. These statements reflect the company's beliefs based on current conditions but are subject to risks and uncertainties. The company's earnings release, most recent annual report on Form 10-Ks, and other filings with the U.S. Securities and Exchange Commission contain additional information concerning factors that could cause actual results to differ materially from those projected in forward-looking statements. Except as required by law, Commercial Metals Company does not assume any obligation to update, amend, or clarify these statements. Some numbers presented will be non-GAAP financial measures, and reconciliations for such numbers can be found in the company's earnings release, supplemental slide presentation, or on the company's website. Unless stated otherwise, all references made to year or quarter end are references to the company's fiscal year or fiscal quarter. And now for opening remarks and introductions, I will turn the call over to Peter. Peter Matt: Good morning, everyone, and thank you for joining Commercial Metals Company's first quarter earnings conference call. I hope each of you had a wonderful holiday season and a Happy New Year. Commercial Metals Company had an exceptional start to our fiscal year as we built on the strategic foundation laid in fiscal 2025, continuing to meaningfully and sustainably enhance our financial profile. The first quarter was one of the best in our company's history, serving as validation that our ambitious strategy is bearing fruit. Strategic actions taken over the last twelve to eighteen months, including the launch of TAG, organizational realignment in critical areas, and the onboarding of key talent and resources to support growth areas, are directly driving bottom-line improvement. We are confident there is much more to come, particularly with the addition of Commercial Metals Company's large-scale precast platform. Our strategic focus remains on transforming Commercial Metals Company into an even stronger organization with higher, more stable margins, earnings, cash flows, and returns on capital. Now let's jump into the first quarter results. For the quarter, Commercial Metals Company reported net earnings of $1.773 billion or $1.58 per diluted share. Paul Lawrence: Excluding certain charges, which I will take you through in more detail, adjusted earnings were $206.2 million or $1.84 per diluted share. Our consolidated core EBITDA of $316.9 million grew by over 50% from a year ago and nearly 9% sequentially, reaching its highest level in two years. Our core EBITDA margin of 14.9% likewise expanded both year over year and compared to the prior quarter. As outlined on Slide five, this occurred against a good market backdrop with stable demand, limited imports, rising long steel metal margins, and attractive project opportunities within certain construction segments. Though Commercial Metals Company certainly benefited from these constructive conditions, our results were meaningfully enhanced by solid execution that allowed us to capitalize on the opportunities we are seeing across our North American footprint. Let's review some highlights, starting with our North America Steel Group. Commercial Metals Company's mill network had a strong operational performance, which was critical to supporting customers in a relatively tight domestic supply environment and maintaining high levels of customer service. CAG initiative efforts, including the scrap optimization initiatives launched in fiscal 2025, contributed nicely to metal margin expansion. With the program now rolled out across all domestic mills, we are using less scrap per ton of steel produced and utilizing lower-cost scrap blends, increasing the metal margin on each ton. Last quarter, I discussed new commercial rigor in the way Commercial Metals Company approaches opportunities within its downstream fabrication business. The positive impact of this change is only just beginning to be reflected in our financial results, but we are seeing it more significantly benefit our average price in backlog, which represents the work that will be shipped in future quarters. Encouragingly, despite enhanced selectivity in the projects we accept, the volume in Commercial Metals Company's downstream backlog increased modestly year over year and sequentially. We believe this is at least in part related to Commercial Metals Company's ability to leverage its unique and comprehensive portfolio of capabilities to win projects, particularly those that require specialized reinforcing solutions or large-scale resource deployment. A recent example has been the success we have had in the LNG space, which requires highly specialized cryogenics, the reliability of a large fabrication and logistics network, and expertise in project management, all of which we provide. Strong execution helped our Construction Solutions business, formerly known as our Emerging Businesses Group, achieve a record first quarter adjusted EBITDA. Similar to our North America Steel Group, underlying market conditions were supportive, but our efforts to capitalize on these drove results to new heights. At Tenthar specifically, we are seeing several important commercial and operational initiatives gain traction. Our team has moved to deepen relationships with key customers, improving our visibility into their upcoming product demand. We have also positioned ourselves to better address market demand across a full spectrum of GeoGrid solutions. Our highest value products are experiencing strong demand from mega projects such as LNG investments, but we are also capturing more opportunities in mid and lower-tier portions of the market. Operationally, the Tenthar team is doing an exceptional job managing costs and increasing production reliability, ensuring that we have the product available where and when needed at a cost that optimizes margins. Our Commercial Metals Company Construction Services business achieved strong results during the quarter, with revenue growth outpacing the broader market due to several impactful initiatives to acquire new customers, gain share of wallet through more productive proactive outreach, and standardized pricing and service levels across the footprint. This is just a sampling of the initiatives that we are undertaking to drive our business from good to great. Our success reflects the strategic efforts of Commercial Metals Company's leaders to push their businesses to new levels of performance. I mentioned earlier that we capitalized on the supportive environment in the quarter. Let me provide a bit more color on what we saw. In North America, we experienced healthy, stable underlying demand for our major products. This, in combination with a well-balanced supply landscape, supported volumes and margins during the quarter. Shipments of finished steel were virtually unchanged year over year and down less than a percentage point from fiscal Q4, compared to a more typical 4% to 5% seasonal sequential decline. Consistent with our guidance, metal margins increased sequentially as we were able to capitalize on the summer price announcements. Downstream bid volumes, our best gauge of the construction pipeline, remained healthy and were consistent with recent quarters, with continued strength across key market segments, including public works, data centers, institutional buildings, and energy projects. We continue to see substantial pent-up demand, particularly within non-residential markets, a view supported by historic strength in the Dodge Momentum Index or DMI, as well as recent conversations with many of our largest customers who are increasingly bullish as they experience a large inflow of project inquiries related to energy generation, reshoring, advanced manufacturing, and LNG infrastructure. The DMI leads construction activity by twelve to eighteen months and increased by approximately 50% on a year-over-year basis in November, with the Commercial segment growing by 57% and Institutional by 37%. Even excluding data centers, a hotbed of growth in North America, commercial showed solid expansion, rising 36% from a year ago. Peter Matt: We remain confident that emerging structural drivers, including investment in U.S. Infrastructure, reshoring industrial capacity, growth in energy generation and transmission, the build-out of AI infrastructure, as well as addressing a U.S. Housing shortage, will support construction activity over the long term. As noted on Slide 10 of the earnings presentation, nearly $3 trillion of corporate investments were announced across related areas in calendar 2025. Commencement of even a handful of these related mega projects could provide a meaningful demand catalyst for Commercial Metals Company in the quarters ahead. Before I move on to our other segments, I would like to briefly update you on the status of the rebar trade case filed with the International Trade Commission or ITC back in June, alleging exporters located in Algeria, Bulgaria, Egypt, and Vietnam are guilty of dumping material into the U.S. Market. In December, the Department of Commerce provided a preliminary ruling against Algeria, finding that producers based in that country are guilty of dumping and subjected them to the maximum duty sought by the domestic rebar industry, which is 127%. While this margin rate could change once the Department of Commerce finalizes its investigation on Algeria in March, we are encouraged by the preliminary results and applaud the department's defense of fair trade. Preliminary rulings are expected in March for antidumping duty investigations covering Egypt, Vietnam, and Bulgaria. Turning to our Construction Solutions Group, current conditions are similar to those just described, with steady activity across most construction segments punctuated by a few hot areas like data centers and large energy projects. Our commercial teams continue to see encouraging signals regarding future activity, including healthy quoting levels and improved velocity of quote conversion to backlog. In addition to these broad indicators of potential demand, we are seeing an increase in attractive individual opportunities that require specialized reinforcement solutions, particularly among bridge and energy projects. Conditions for our Europe Steel Group softened modestly from the fourth quarter. Demand remained resilient on solid Polish economic growth, providing an outlet for healthy shipping volumes, but average price and margin levels were negatively impacted by the import flows. A portion of the price pressure experienced during the quarter may have been related to buyers of foreign material seeking to import product ahead of the European Union's carbon border adjustment mechanism or CBAM taking effect on 01/01/2026. We view this as a temporary overhang and expect prices in our primary markets to benefit from the launch of CBAM, which should increase the cost of some imports, particularly those that have historically been most aggressively priced. The green shoots we have noted in recent earnings calls continue to mature with more emerging. Recent market developments include signals of a coming recovery in residential construction activity driven by declining mortgage interest rates and a need for new housing stock. We are also more optimistic about the prospect of CBAM benefiting long steel pricing. Paul Lawrence: With greater clarity regarding the terms and implementation now available, our team in Poland believes the program could increase the cost of some imported long products by at least $50 per ton and help support overall market price levels. Wrapping up my comments on the quarter, let me dive more deeply into TAG. This is our enterprise-wide operational and commercial excellence program aiming to drive a permanent step-change improvement to our margins, earnings, cash flows, and ROIC. Fiscal 2026 will be a pivotal year as execution further permeates the organization and as the expected level of EBITDA benefit increases meaningfully. During fiscal 2025, TAG initiatives were primarily focused on domestic mill operations and logistics. This year, we are focused on operational initiatives in every line of business across each segment and are increasing our emphasis on key commercial opportunities. We are also targeting meaningful efficiencies in our SG&A expenses while maintaining our high level of performance. We are pleased with the execution on new initiatives so far in fiscal 2026 and have maintained solid momentum on programs launched in fiscal 2025, including the scrap optimization, mill yield, alloy usage, and logistics benefits that delivered approximately $50 million of EBITDA last fiscal year. Looking at fiscal 2026 and beyond, commercial excellence is a major opportunity where we see significant upside potential through achieving better margins and fuller value realization for Commercial Metals Company's industry-leading capabilities and service levels. For the mills, this comes in a variety of forms, including enforcing grade and size extras, applying appropriate premiums to pricing on special orders, and addressing areas of margin leakage such as delayed price implementation and freight recovery. It will also mean more definitive segmentation of our customer base with clear value propositions to the different customer segments and related commercial terms to ensure that all accounts generate acceptable margins. In our downstream fabrication business, we are pursuing enhancements to our margin structure through increased price discipline, a willingness to decline work that does not reach a suitable profit threshold, and improved terms and enforcement mechanisms in contracts. At the heart of our efforts is the ability to leverage Commercial Metals Company's unique capabilities and scale to achieve better margin outcomes on complex jobs that only a few fabricators can perform. Based on progress we are making across commercial and SG&A initiatives, I am confident that we will reach or exceed our ambitious goal of exiting fiscal 2026 with an annualized run rate EBITDA benefit of $150 million. In December, subsequent to the end of the first quarter, Commercial Metals Company closed on the acquisitions of CP&P and Foley, which is transformational for us, broadening Commercial Metals Company's commercial portfolio in a way that increases our value proposition to customers, meaningfully enhancing our financial profile and extending our growth runway. Based on our initial observations over the last few weeks of owning these businesses, I am even more confident regarding their potential to strengthen Commercial Metals Company and create meaningful value for shareholders. Both CP&P and Foley are excellent cultural fits for our company and have talented teams in place at every level of their organization, including very strong leadership groups that will remain in place and are fully aligned in executing Commercial Metals Company's strategic vision and delivering meaningful synergies. Discussions with Precast leadership regarding the business outlook for fiscal 2026 have been positive. Backlogs are at good levels, featuring solid volumes and attractive average pricing, which should support healthy shipment levels as we enter the spring construction season. The outlook for underlying demand is positive for our core Mid-Atlantic and Southeastern geographies, bolstered by the expected growth in data centers, manufacturing facilities, and stormwater management systems. We look forward to providing further details on our second quarter earnings call, which will include financial results for our Precast business within Commercial Metals Company's Construction Solutions segment. Having mentioned our Construction Solutions group a few times, I would like to highlight the reasons for renaming the segment. First, we believe that the title Construction Solutions better reflects the business composition of the segment, as more than 95% of the EBITDA will be derived from providing high-margin solutions to the construction market. Additionally, the new name more closely aligns with the strategic priorities of Commercial Metals Company, in particular, the aim to profitably grow our role in early-stage construction and build a commercial portfolio that makes us the preferred partner by our customers. Before turning the call over to Paul, I would like to recognize the efforts of our world-class employees. We have asked a lot of the team as we execute our ambitious vision for the future, and I am truly inspired by all that they have accomplished so far. Their efforts have been instrumental in laying the groundwork for years of success ahead, and I look forward to maintaining that momentum. With that, I'll turn the call over to Paul. Paul Lawrence: Thank you, Peter, and good morning. And Happy New Year to everyone on the call. As noted earlier, we reported fiscal first quarter 2026 net earnings of $177.3 million or $1.58 per diluted share compared to a net loss of $175.7 million and a net loss per diluted share of $1.54 in the prior year period. During the quarter, we incurred approximately $36.7 million in pretax expenses, with $24.9 million related to the acquisitions of CP&P and Foley, $3.7 million for interest on the judgment amount associated with the previously disclosed litigation, as well as an $8.1 million unrealized loss on undesignated commodity hedges. Excluding these expenses, which amounted to $28.9 million on an after-tax basis, adjusted earnings for the quarter totaled $206.2 million or $1.84 per diluted share, compared to $86.9 million and $0.76 per diluted share, respectively, in the prior year period. As a reminder, the prior year period included an adjustment for an estimated net after-tax charge of $265 million to reflect an adverse litigation verdict accrual. During the 2026, Commercial Metals Company generated consolidated core EBITDA of $316.9 million, representing a 52% increase from $208.7 million in the prior year period. Commercial Metals Company's North American Steel Group generated adjusted EBITDA of $293.9 million for the quarter, equal to $257 per ton of finished steel shipped. Segment adjusted EBITDA increased 58% compared to the prior year period, driven primarily by higher margin over scrap cost on steel products, resulting in an EBITDA margin of 17.7% compared to 12.3% in the prior year period. Financial results also benefited from continued improved operational performance at Arizona 2, as well as contributions from our TAG efforts. As Peter mentioned, we are driving continued gains from TAG initiatives launched during fiscal 2025 and have more recently rolled out commercial initiatives to improve margin capture. The Construction Solutions Group's first quarter net sales of $198.3 million grew by 17% on a year-over-year basis. Adjusted EBITDA of $39.6 million significantly increased by 75% year over year, driven by strong results from TENSAR and Commercial Metals Company Construction Services, as well as some improvement at Commercial Metals Company Impact Metals from the depressed levels of a year ago. TENSAR achieved its best first quarter financial performance under Commercial Metals Company ownership, benefiting from solid project demand, the positive impact of the sales initiatives mentioned by Peter, and strong cost management efforts. Commercial Metals Company Construction Services likewise profited from self-help measures that drove EBITDA improvement on both a year-over-year and sequential basis. Contributions from our Performance Reinforcing Steel division remained historically strong but declined modestly from recent elevated levels. Construction Solutions Group adjusted EBITDA margin of 20% improved by 6.6 percentage points compared to the prior year period. Our Europe Steel Group reported adjusted EBITDA of $10.9 million for the 2026, down from $25.8 million in the prior year period. The decline was driven by lower CO2 credit, which amounted to $15.6 million during the 2026 compared to $44.1 million received during the year-ago period. The reduction in the CO2 credit was a result of the credit generated for calendar 2024 being separated into two tranches, one of which was received during the 2025, the remaining amount was received in the 2026. By comparison, results for last year's first quarter reflected the entirety of the 2023 annual CO2 credit. Excluding the impact of energy cost rebates, adjusted EBITDA improved on a year-over-year basis on stronger shipping volumes and higher metal margins. Shipments grew by approximately 16% from the 2025 as a result of continued Polish economic expansion and reduced import flows from Germany. Metal margins expanded by $37 per tonne, largely driven by the same factors. During the quarter, our Polish mill underwent an annual maintenance outage, which incurred approximately $10 million of costs. The team did an excellent job starting up efficiently following the planned downtime and, similar to recent quarters, continues to effectively manage costs across the organization. I will now discuss Commercial Metals Company's balance sheet liquidity position as outlined on Slide 13 of the supplemental presentation. As of November 30, cash, cash equivalents, and restricted cash totaled $3 billion. This amount included approximately $2 billion in proceeds raised through a senior notes offering in November, most of which was earmarked to fund the company's purchase of Foley products. In December, we closed both the CP&P and Foley acquisitions, and payments of approximately $2.5 billion were made. The table on the left-hand side of Slide 13 provides an illustrative view of Commercial Metals Company's cash balance, net debt, and net debt to EBITDA, assuming both transactions had closed on November 30. As you can see, net leverage stands at approximately 2.5 times using combined adjusted EBITDA for legacy Commercial Metals Company and our newly acquired precast business. This is lower than the 2.7 times pro forma figure shared at the time of the Foley acquisition, with the reduction resulting from the increased EBITDA generation of our business. We continue to be confident in our ability to return to our net leverage target of below two times within eighteen months and will prioritize delevering in the quarters ahead. This effort will be aided by strong cash flow generation from the Precast platform itself, the wind-down of capital expenditures for the construction of Steel West Virginia, and the significant cash tax savings generated by the 48 program in the One Big Beautiful Bill. Additionally, we have reduced our share repurchases during the period of leverage reduction to amounts approximating our annual share issuance under our compensation programs. Subsequent to quarter-end, Commercial Metals Company increased the capacity of our revolving credit facility from $600 million to $1 billion. This will ensure a strong liquidity position to support the execution of strategic goals going forward. Using the same adjustments to our November 30 balance sheet to give effect to the precast acquisitions, also giving effect to the upsized revolver, estimated available liquidity would have been slightly over $1.7 billion. Commercial Metals Company's effective tax rate was 3.1% in the first quarter. Peter Matt: Looking ahead, we anticipate a full-year effective tax rate between 5% and 10% for fiscal 2026. As a result of several factors, including our 48C tax credit, bonus depreciation on our West Virginia mill investment, as well as accelerated depreciation on the assets of the acquisitions of Foley and CP&P, we do not anticipate paying any significant U.S. Federal cash taxes in fiscal 2026 or for much of fiscal 2027. Turning to Commercial Metals Company's fiscal 2026 capital spending outlook, we anticipate spending approximately $625 million in total. Of this amount, approximately $300 million is associated with completing the construction of our Steel West Virginia micro mill, as well as a handful of high-return growth investments within our Construction Solutions group, and approximately $25 million in our newly acquired Precast businesses. This concludes my remarks, and I'll turn it back to Peter for additional comments on Commercial Metals Company's financial outlook. Thank you, Paul. Turning to our outlook, we expect consolidated core EBITDA in the 2026 to decline modestly from first-quarter levels due to a normal level of slowdown within our key markets. This will be partially offset by the addition of Commercial Metals Company's recently acquired Precast businesses. The company will recognize several acquisition-related expenses during the second quarter, including transaction fees, debt issuance costs, and customary purchase accounting adjustments, each of which will be excluded from core EBITDA. Segment adjusted EBITDA for our North America Steel Group is anticipated to be lower sequentially due to normal seasonal volume trends and the impact of planned maintenance outages, while steel product metal margin is expected to remain relatively stable. Financial results for the Construction Solutions Group should improve compared to the 2026, with the contribution of the Precast business more than offsetting seasonal weakness across the segment's other divisions. Europe Steel Group adjusted EBITDA is expected to be approximately breakeven, with margin growth potential later in fiscal 2026 when the carbon border adjustment mechanism takes full effect. The first quarter marked an excellent start to fiscal 2026, and Commercial Metals Company is well-positioned to deliver strong results for the remainder of the year. Solid market dynamics, benefits of our TAG program, and effective operational execution are generating momentum in Commercial Metals Company's existing businesses. This will be supplemented by $165 million to $175 million of EBITDA contributions from approximately eight and a half months of ownership of the Precast businesses in fiscal 2026. Looking out longer term, I am confident that Commercial Metals Company will continue to create value for our shareholders as we remain focused on executing against our strategic initiatives, which we expect to deliver meaningful and sustained enhancements to our margins, earnings, cash flow generation, and return on capital. I would like to conclude by thanking our customers for their trust and confidence in Commercial Metals Company and all of our employees for delivering yet another quarter of very solid safety and operational performance. Thank you. And at this time, we will open the call for questions. Operator: Thank you. We will now begin the question and answer session. The first question will come from Satish Kasinathan with Bank of America. Please go ahead. Satish Kasinathan: Yes, hi, good morning and congrats on the strong quarter and as well as the closing of CP&P and Foley acquisitions. Based on what you have seen in the past three to five weeks since the closing of these acquisitions, can you maybe talk about some of the positive or negative surprises you have seen so far? And do you see any potential for acceleration of the three-year timeline to realize the announced $30 to $40 million in synergies? Peter Matt: Yeah. Thanks, Satish. Great question. Again, with the preface of this is early days, our ownership of this business, I would say that we have been really, very pleasantly surprised with everything that we've seen. And I wouldn't say there's anything that's really come up that we weren't expecting on the negative side. And I'd say there are a number of things that are on the positive side that we've seen. And let me just give you a little story from one of my trips. I went to a CP&P off-site, and it was a gathering of probably 100 folks from CP&P and then a couple of product experts from Commercial Metals Company. And two remarks I'd make that were, I think, super gratifying as a, you know, kind of new owner of the business. First is, in the room, you could have been in a room with Commercial Metals Company folks. The cultural affinity is outstanding. And that was super helpful to see because I think it's gonna make our integration efforts go well. Second was I noted that we brought a couple of Commercial Metals Company product experts and there was a tremendous amount of discussion around, you know, kind of different opportunities that we and CP&P have together and a lot of excitement around that. So that was also super encouraging because it kind of validates the part of our investment thesis. In terms of the synergies, we are, I would say, the work we've done so far leads us to believe that we're very confident that we can get the synergies. What I would say is that it's early to speculate on the timing, and I wouldn't want to accelerate what we've said in the past. But we're very confident that the synergies are there, if not more. Operator: Okay. Thank you for that. Satish Kasinathan: Maybe my second question is on the North American metal margins, which are currently at three-year highs. Can you maybe talk about how you see those margins sustain or improve in the coming quarters given the context that we have some new supply to come into the market? Peter Matt: Yes. Maybe I'll start on this going backwards and commenting on the new supply. So there's been a lot of talk about the new supply and yes, there is new supply coming into the market. I think we've been consistent in saying that we're not overly concerned by the new supply. And that's particularly true in the current context where you've got much lower imports than we've had in previous years. So based on the level of demand as it is today, we feel comfortable that the marketplace can absorb the new supply as it comes in. And if demand gets stronger, which we believe it will, then, I think it's fair to say that there's to be plenty of demand to absorb any new supply that comes into the market. So we feel good about that. Getting to your question on margins, so in Q2, we would expect mill margins, so our steel product margins to be flattish. And that is taking into account the fact that we do expect to realize all of the November $30 price increase. But we also have seasonally stronger scrap in this period and that will offset some of that. And in our downstream, we could see, I think we think it's going to be flat to could be slightly down given the kind of the raw material path through to the fabrication business. But as we go forward, I think the shape of the margins is really going to depend on a couple of factors. One is obviously the supply-demand that emerges in the marketplace. And the second is really our TAG initiative. And I think this is an important point to make on TAG because, you know, TAG is all about growing margins in a sustainable way across our business. And we expect that some of that TAG contribution is gonna come in the form of benefiting metal margins as we go forward. So we're very excited about that. And I think as we go into the back half, there has been a merchant price increase of $50 a ton, we should see a little bit of that in the second quarter, but really most of it is going to be in the back two quarters and any other pricing actions will really set us up for a strong back half of 2026. Satish Kasinathan: Okay. Thank you. I appreciate the color. Peter Matt: Thank you. Operator: The next question will come from Katja Jankic with BMO Capital Markets. Please go ahead. Katja Jankic: Hi, and a Happy New Year to everyone. Maybe staying on the more near term, so you expect seasonally volumes to be impacted by seasonality. But can you talk a little bit about what that means? Because it seems that so far we haven't really seen a material impact from seasonality. Peter Matt: Yes. It's a great point. We did have stronger volumes than we honestly than we expected in the first quarter. But going into the second quarter, we are expecting kind of typical seasonality. And remember, in the second quarter, we've got the winter conditions, construction slows down, and typically there's been going Q1 to Q2, there's a 5% to 10% decline, and we'd expect to be in that range. But I will acknowledge that, you know, the volumes have been stronger heretofore. Katja Jankic: And then maybe on the West Virginia mill, can you update us on what the ramp-up plan there is? Peter Matt: Yeah. We're super excited about that. You start one of these projects and it seems like a long way off and now kind of we're within six months of the startup. So we've actually started some of the cold commissioning already. The hot commissioning, which is, you know, the official startup is, as Paul noted, likely to begin or will begin in June. And we feel really good about it. And just to comment on West Virginia, you know, given the market conditions, we couldn't be bringing that on at a better time. But the other thing I think that really bears note is the fact that we are bringing this project in on budget. And I have to say hats off to the whole West Virginia team for the incredible capital discipline that they've shown in this project. You know, these are big dollar expenditures. We're spending over $600 million on this project. And there is a lot of examples of projects that are kind of over budget. And thanks to the discipline that everyone's shown, we've managed to bring it in and ultimately that helps us from an ROIC perspective, which is a critical objective for us to improve. Paul Lawrence: Got you. The only thing I would add to Peter's comments is just recall from a startup perspective, this is a rebar-only mill different from Arizona 2. And so typically, based on our other rebar-only mills and the fact that this is not near the degree of new technology being introduced as we did with AZ2, we would expect to ramp the operation up over the following twelve months once we meet that hot commissioning startup. Katja Jankic: Perfect. Thank you. Peter Matt: Thank you, Katja. Operator: The next question will come from Tristan Gresser with BNP Paribas. Please go ahead. Tristan Gresser: Yes. Thank you for taking my questions. The first one is on the old EBG division. If you can talk a little bit about the outlook for fiscal Q2, also, more specifically, what kind of seasonality usually do you see on the precast business? Is it fair to assume a normalized EBITDA quarterly run rate for Precast? And add a bit of, I mean, because TENSAR has been pretty strong as well. So I would assume maybe a bit stronger on that division, but yeah, we'd love to have your thoughts on that. Peter Matt: Yes. So thank you for the question, Tristan. So EBG, typically, there is, as we've said before, there is absolutely seasonality in that business. As we noted in the prepared remarks, a substantial portion of that, most of the lion's share of that is going into the construction market. So seasonality is definitely a factor in our Q2. It is the weakest period. And I should note that TENSAR in particular with ground stabilization is kind of the most seasonal as we look at that business from year to year. So I think you can expect normal Q2 seasonality in that. Precast, so in our Precast business, we think that will largely follow the seasonality that we have in our business overall. And what I mean by that is our steel business overall. Typically, you've got in the winter months, you've got a reduction in the amount of activity that you see, and we expect that to be the case too. So this is maybe not part of your question, but I'll go to it directly to say, we expect in the second quarter the Precast business to contribute about $30 million of EBITDA roughly speaking. Which will seem lighter and that goes entirely to seasonality. And as Paul noted in his comments, the backlogs that we're seeing are very strong. They're stronger than last year. And so we feel very good about the prospects for that business going into our ownership in 2026. Tristan Gresser: Alright. No, that's very clear. Going back to your prepared remarks on scrap sorting, how much of a benefit it's been, can you give us some numbers? And what you've been doing and how has it changed today versus what you used to do in the past? In terms of using less scrap and varying the quality of the scrap, any color there would be great. Peter Matt: Yeah. I'll start and then Paul can jump in with any additional comments. But I guess what I'd start by first saying is that in the past, we talked about the scrap optimization being, I think it was a $5 million to $10 million opportunity. And that has grown substantially. And I think the key point is that we started out in a couple of mills and now we're pushing it to other mills. So we're getting the benefit across our broader footprint. And there are two points, as you said, one is in the quality of the scrap. We've done a tremendous amount of work in the quality of the scrap and we've identified places where, for example, we're using a lot more shred than we need to use. So we can cut back on the shred and that obviously kind of reduces scrap costs and so forth. We've also done a tremendous amount of work on yield, and that has helped us a lot in terms of obviously using less scrap to produce the tons and sell the tons that we want to produce and sell. Paul Lawrence: The only thing I would add, Tristan, is, you know, as we've noted, what we achieved last year was approximately $50 million from TAG. And I would say those two initiatives, just given the dollars involved, Peter outlined, probably were near half of the realization that we had last year. And as Peter said, those were on, you know, piloting the initiatives in a few locations and growing throughout '25 and '26 and an incremental number of mills to get it across the entire platform. And so we are very excited about the opportunity of those initiatives to continue to contribute well to our business. Peter Matt: One thing that's maybe worthy of an additional comment vis-a-vis TAG is, and this goes for a lot of our TAG initiatives. What we found is that on something like scrap optimization, it started out in one mill. And then you start to see these real benefits in the mill. And, of course, every mill manager wants to run their mill as well as they possibly can. So there's been this kind of compounding effect as more of the mills take it on and bring it into full bloom. So and that's, I think, a characteristic of the TAG program in general. And one of the things that we're super excited about, we see a new initiative coming in and sizable new initiatives coming in. And we got to build charters and plans around these different initiatives. But you can see how this can be really a game-changer. And as we've talked about in the past, again, the goal is long-term sustainable margin improvement over what we would be otherwise, right? So if x was our historical margin, we want to be at x plus Y. And we're working internally on some tools to help you all define that, but we believe that there is through TAG the opportunity to make our business durably better. And I think that'll be a really important contributor to value. Tristan Gresser: Alright. That's very helpful and interesting. Thank you. Operator: Thank you. The next question will come from Alex Hacking with Citi. Please go ahead. Alex Hacking: Yes. Hi, thanks. Good morning. Happy New Year, everyone. I guess the first question, you mentioned increased commercial selectivity in rebar fab and part of that was about reducing risk. Has counterparty risk been rising and is there a reason why? Thanks. Peter Matt: Why reduce, so let me just make sure I understand your question. Why were addressing that point? Sorry, the question was, has counterparty risk been rising and why has counterparty risk been rising if it has been rising? Alex Hacking: Yeah. I wouldn't say it's been rising. I would say this is a risk that we have taken historically that we are looking to reduce in the portfolio. And where it manifests itself is, Alex, in our fabrication business and some of the contracts will be asked to do longer-term jobs. And a lot of times, those longer-term jobs can be at a fixed price. And of course, our raw material inputs can change. So you can get out two years or three years and there have been some instances with this company in the past and I'm sure others where you can get upside down on a project. And what we're trying to do is to reduce that risk by making sure either through proper escalators, proper indexing, that we are being compensated for that risk. So that again, it goes back to the ROIC point that in any environment, we are generating a good return on the capital that we've put in, which is substantial on a business like this. Paul Lawrence: And I just to reiterate, and make sure it's clear, you know, counterparty risk, we have historically never had an experience of significant counterparty risk and nor do we see that really going forward with the structure of how the construction contracts are written. This is all about reducing the risk, Peter said, around margin preservation and ensuring we're getting a good margin on the job. Alex Hacking: Oh, I get it. Thanks for the clarification. I guess I misinterpreted. And then on Europe, as you mentioned, the importance of getting ahead of CBAM. How do you have any idea, like, how long it could take for prices in Europe to stop benefiting from CBAM? Thanks. Peter Matt: Yeah. So again, it took effect January 1. And our read on the situation is for certain importers, the average impact on them could be €50 a ton. And for many of them, it could be higher initially because they have to be qualified to get to the €50 a ton. And before they're qualified, there's a default rate that's even higher. So this is going to play out over the course of calendar 2026. I think it's fair to say you've probably noted in the import numbers that there was a large pre-buy of incremental tons coming into Europe that probably before CBAM, excuse me, that will probably delay the impact of the CBAM credit that we should be getting. But I do believe by the time we get to the, we'll get a little bit of it in our second quarter and in our third and fourth quarters, we should see a substantial portion. And certainly, over the course of the year, the calendar year, it will roll in. The other thing to note is that in addition to the CBAM, there is also this safeguard mechanism that was renegotiated by the EU. And the safeguard mechanism, remember, that's effectively a quota system. And in the revised safeguards, the quotas are reduced by 50% and the tariffs for being above the quotas are increased by 50%. That should come into effect in the middle of the year and that should be only additive to the situation in Europe. And just to frame it a little bit for you, if you think about our production capability in Poland, and you think about the $45 million of CO2 credits we get, that's about $30 a ton above our breakeven operational performance today. And then add €50 to that, all of a sudden, start to get to numbers where we are running at levels at or above our through-the-cycle performance. So again, this is not something that's going to happen overnight, but in addition to all the other catalysts in Poland, I think it's reason for some real optimism. Alex Hacking: Thanks and best of luck. Peter Matt: Thank you. Operator: The next question will come from Timna Tanners with Wells Fargo. Please go ahead. Timna Tanners: Yes. Hey, good morning and Happy New Year. I wanted to tailor my questions to trade. So you talked about the CBAM implications helping pricing, but I think another aspect of CBAM is that it helps domestic producers in Europe perhaps take some market share. So curious about, you know, what volume impact you might see there? And then I have a follow-up on the U.S. Trade side. Peter Matt: Yep. I think that's a fair point that you're making. And I think there are some volume opportunities. We have been running at, I would say, a relatively good rate of production recently. So I think there is some volume opportunity for us. But I wouldn't say it's huge at this point. Timna Tanners: Okay, great. Second question on the U.S. Side, I know you mentioned, of course, Algeria, Bulgaria, Egypt, Vietnam. But if you look at the latest trade data, actually, imports are coming again from Turkey and from what I think Portugal and Spain. So just any thoughts on the Turkish side and also maybe Portugal and Spain keep more production domestic in that falls off. But it does seem like the other countries before you mentioned are already shrunk in terms of importance probably because of the filing of the case even before any decision. Peter Matt: Yeah. No. It's a great point. We've definitely seen some pullback in the imports from those countries. And I'll just remind you, and others that those countries in 2005, the trade case countries imported about 500,000 tons of steel into the U.S. So if there was an outcome that's anything like what we have on the Algeria case and a preliminary ruling, I think that's going to be really helpful in terms of keeping those imports out of the country. And remember on those trade cases, these are five-year terms before the sunset review. So it's quite a durable point. I think to your question on Turkey, we have noticed that Turkey has increased their shipments. We'll have to watch that. Again, in the context of overall imports today, not overly concerned about that. But again, we'll be watching that carefully to see to make sure that it to make sure that what they're importing, they're importing as a fair trader. Timna Tanners: Got it. Yes, seems like imports could take yet another leg down. But thanks for the color and all the best. Appreciate it. Peter Matt: Thank you, Timna. Operator: The next question will come from Bill Peterson with JPMorgan. Please go ahead. Bill Peterson: Yes. Thanks, everyone. Happy New Year, and thanks for all the color on the call thus far. I wanted to ask about AZ2, how the ramp has progressed during the prior quarter and what utilization you're running at? And then how should we think about operations and utilization ahead? Peter Matt: Yeah. AZ2, we've said in the past that this has been a challenging one. And my comments will cover that a little bit. But I think the important point is we reached profitability on EBITDA in the fourth quarter and we were nicely profitable in the first quarter too. And we expect to be nicely profitable throughout the year there. In terms of utilization rates, we exited last year at about 60%. We expect to demonstrate full run rate during our fiscal year 2026. But we don't expect to be at full run rate in 2026. And that is because we still have a number of merchant specs that we've got to perfect and that's going to take some time and it'll force us to run at, you know, kind of suboptimal utilization. But we feel good about where we are. There's still some challenges there to be clear. But the team has done an incredible job. And this is where I think the Commercial Metals Company team really shines because we have drawn people and expertise from all across our network to help us with this operation. And remember, the challenge is this isn't your grandfather's steel mill, so to speak, right? This is a very innovative steel mill. It will be a workforce in our portfolio, but there's a lot of new technology to make work. And the other challenge that we've had there, Bill, is just with kind of the people not from the vantage point of the people good, the people are great, but it takes some training to learn this. And so we've done a lot of work around training, and I think that's enhancing our reliability substantially and it will continue to do so as we go through the year. So hopefully that helps you. Bill Peterson: Yes, it does. Thanks for that. And then my second question, can you speak a bit more to the pricing profile of your downstream backlog and whether new order entry continues to be priced higher? What's in the backlog? And I guess to what extent is the commercial discipline TAG initiatives you spoke of earlier playing a role? Peter Matt: Yes. Absolutely. So we do continue to see prices improve in our downstream. So we have been really for the last couple of quarters putting new orders into the backlog at higher prices. So that continues and we feel good about that progression and actually kind of starting out the year, we've had a couple of new orders that have come in a really nice place. So I think we feel good about that. And again, demand in that business remains very solid. And so there's a lot of project activity and a lot on the drawing board. So we're optimistic about where things go there. Bill Peterson: Thanks again. Peter Matt: Yes. Thank you. Operator: The next question will come from Carlos De Alba with Morgan Stanley. Please go ahead. Carlos De Alba: Yes. Thank you very much. Happy New Year, everyone. So maybe just adding to the discussion on the new commercial approach in the fabrication business. How much of your business is already in this indexed format where you are able to maybe better protect your margins? And how do you see that evolving in the coming quarters in still not a big percentage of the overall business? Peter Matt: Yes, it's not a big percentage today. And the openness to it among the customers can vary. Right? So there are some DOTs, for example, that are more inclined to it than others. So we're working from a relatively low base on that, but we do see the opportunity to increase it and to open the dialogue with customers on indexation. And indexation is just one of the strategies, right? The other obvious strategy there is just proper escalation. And when you talk about commercial excellence, one of the things that we've been, I think, showing the team's done an amazing job on being more disciplined about this is in making sure that number one, we have proper escalators in place. And then number two, that we're actually enforcing those escalators as we go through, you know, kind of go through the period. So this is a journey, but the way we think about it internally is that over time, it doesn't make sense for companies like Commercial Metals Company to take this type of risk in the way that we've been taking it. And over time, we will work towards reducing that. And that will again contribute to higher margins through the cycle, higher returns, more consistent returns, all the things that we're pointing towards. Paul Lawrence: And Carlos, I would just add, you know, what we've spoken of is really around protecting the risk from a duration perspective. There's also recognizing the value that Commercial Metals Company brings from a reliability perspective. And I think that is also critical in terms of our capabilities and ensuring we get value for the service we bring. There's a tremendous amount of risk to a construction project that comes with all the subcontractors. Having a reliable partner as Commercial Metals Company is drives a higher value recognition. And we got to make sure we capture that. Carlos De Alba: That makes sense. And then what is the EBITDA margin that your $160 million to $170 million EBITDA guidance for CSG represent? And would you say that this guidance, this EBITDA guidance is somewhat conservative given that you're just starting to take over those assets? Peter Matt: Yeah. I mean, Paul, you can comment on the margin, but I would say, look, it's early days, right? And we're doing a lot of work on integration. As I said at the very beginning, we feel kind of good about what we've seen. But there's some adjustment that has to happen as you bring a new company into our company and so maybe we're being a little bit conservative, I think it's appropriate to be cautious and again, our goal with all of you and with all of our investors is to be in a situation where we are under-promising and over-delivering and that's what we're shooting to do here. Paul Lawrence: And as far as the margins are concerned, it'll be made up of the two buckets. Our existing business typically is in the high teens, call that 18% to 20% margin. We would expect that to remain there. And the Precast business to come up, the combination of the two entities to be in the 30% to 35% range from a margin perspective. So no change. Obviously, it's just a different mix going forward than what we've had historically. Carlos De Alba: Yeah. Great. Thank you, Paul. Yeah. I misspoke. A period $165 million to $175 million EBITDA guidance is not for CSG. It's for the Precast unit. Thank you very much. Good luck. Operator: Thank you. The next question will come from Mike Harris with Goldman Sachs. Please go ahead. Mike Harris: Yes. Good morning. Thanks for squeezing me in. Just one quick question on my part. When I look at the TAG program, I think last quarter, the expectation for the expected run rate annualized EBITDA benefit at the '6 was greater than 150. And now you're saying 150. So does that change just a function of timing? Or did you adjust your initiative list? Or just being conservative? Peter Matt: No. I don't think it was greater than 150. I think we have moved towards 150 as we've gotten more clarity on the opportunities in TAG. And by the way, as we've said in many other forums, this is just the beginning. Right? So it's not like 150 is the end. As we get more fidelity around this, we will share more. What we're really doing in TAG is we're trying to build durable margin improvement. So rather than throw lots of programs in that we haven't fully vetted or we haven't done the work to make sure that they deliver and they deliver in a sustainable way, we're proceeding a little bit more slowly. But I think the outcome will be something that's more lasting. Mike Harris: Okay. Thanks a lot for that clarification. Peter Matt: Thank you. Operator: The next question will come from Phil Gibbs with KeyBanc Capital Markets. Please go ahead. Phil Gibbs: Hey, good morning. Sorry if this question was asked earlier, but what is the typical seasonality of the North American business from a volume standpoint relative to Q1? Paul Lawrence: Typically, Phil, it's in the 5% to 10% range that we expect. Obviously, it's very much weather dependent and we've seen some inclement weather on the West Coast. Certainly, nationally, it's been pretty good so far, but we were only in the early innings of the winter. So typical is 5% to 10% and that's what we're guiding towards. Phil Gibbs: Thank you. And then in terms of integrating just baseline depreciation, I'm assuming you're going to have some write-ups associated with the Precast deals. I think your baseline for D&A was like $70 million or $75 million in Q1. So what should we be anticipating for Q2? Paul Lawrence: Yes, it's a great question, Phil. And as we have owned these businesses just for a short period of time and the complexity of some of the purchase accounting, we're not in a place from a D&A perspective, well, really, amortization perspective to provide guidance. There's a lot of intangibles associated with the businesses and they all have different valuation approaches and durations. And so what we know is cash flow, the cash flow of these businesses will be certainly very attractive as we outlined at the acquisition. We were able to achieve the financing at very attractive rates in November and excited about the conclusion of the financing. But as far as the accounting, we are not yet in a position to really provide much outline in terms of what the amortization will be. Phil Gibbs: Thank you. Paul Lawrence: Thank you. Operator: At this time, there appear to be no further questions. Mr. Matt, I'll now turn the call back over to you. Peter Matt: Thank you, Nick. At Commercial Metals Company, we remain confident that our best days are ahead. The combination of structural demand trends, operational and commercial excellence initiatives to strengthen our through-the-cycle performance, and value-accretive growth opportunities create an exciting future for our company. Thank you for joining us on today's conference call. We look forward to speaking with many of you during our investor calls in the coming days and weeks. Operator: Thank you. The conference has now concluded. Thank you for attending today's presentation. You may now disconnect.
Operator: Good day, and thank you for standing by. Welcome to the Roivant's Second Quarter 2025 Earnings Call. [Operator Instructions] Please note that today's conference is being recorded. I will now hand the conference over to your first speaker Stephanie Lee. You may begin. Stephanie Lee Griffin: Good morning, and thanks for joining today's call to review Roivant's financial results for the second quarter ended September 30, 2025. I'm Stephanie Lee with Roivant. Presenting today, we have Matt Gline, CEO of Roivant. For those dialing in via conference call, you can find the slides being presented today as well as the press release announcing these updates on our IR website at www.investor.roivant.com. We'll also be providing the current slide numbers as we present to help you follow along. I'd like to remind you that we will be making certain forward-looking statements during today's presentation. We strongly encourage you to review the information that we filed with the SEC for more information regarding these forward-looking statements and related risks and uncertainties. And with that, I'll turn it over to Matt. Matthew Gline: Thank you, Steph, and good morning, everybody, and thank you for listening. I appreciate all you dialing in. So not at all a quiet quarter for us and that we put out both the Graves' data and obviously, the Phase III data for brepocitinib in DM. So sort of just a tremendous moment of transformation for the business, but a relatively quiet earnings call as we're looking forward to getting everybody together in December for a more fulsome telling of where we are as a business, more about the future on our Investor Day on December 11. That registration link is live on our website. So look forward to seeing you all there. Today will be more of a review of what's happened in the recent quarter, and then we'll talk much more about the future when we get together in December. So looking forward to that. I want to start out on Slide 5, just by taking a short victory lap because it's been a pretty wild year for us. Obviously, starting with and probably most notably the VALOR data for brepocitinib in DM, which hit on all 10 ranked endpoints and just a phenomenal data set that we think is going to transform the lives of DM patients. So that NDA filing remains on track planned for the first half of next year, and it will be the first novel oral therapeutic in DM, if approved. We also put out data in this quarter from the durable remission sort of portion of the Graves' disease trial for batoclimab, which sets us up for the future there in our 1402 Graves' program. That demonstrated disease-modifying potential for 1402. And then we think earlier this year, we put out some data in MG and CIDP that we can do a pretty nice job of validating the deeper is better idea for FcRn from an IgG expression perspective. We also have initiated at Immunovant this year potentially registrational trials in Graves', myasthenia gravis, CIDP, difficult-to-treat RA and Sjögren's as well as a POC trial in CLE. So some really exciting progress there with IMVT-1402, which we hope will take us to a first-in-class in many cases and best-in-class, and we hope all -- in all indications potential. We got a favorable Markman ruling this quarter for Genevant in the Pfizer case and just overall continued progress in the LNP litigation, with the jury trial and the Moderna case scheduled for March of 2026. And our capital position remains very strong with $4.4 billion of cash, cash equivalents, which will get our current pipeline to profitability and support pipeline expansion and potential additional capital return, including the $500 million that we have currently authorized. On Slide 6, and we've been showing this slide for a while, but it just -- it feels realer and realer with each passing quarter, just a late-stage pipeline that we are really excited about with 11 potentially registrational trials and indications with blockbuster potential. Obviously, the first of those dermatomyositis now behind us, but many more to come, setting us up for a slide that we've been showing since June on Slide 7, which is just a stack 36 months ahead of us between multiple registrational data sets, first DM and NIU and brepo and then the beginnings of a long list of them in 1402, lining up for a series of launches, again, first DM and brepo and then NIU and brepo and then very shortly thereafter, 1402 across multiple blockbuster indications, including Graves'. So look, as I said, a moment of real change and transformation for the business. I think we recognize that. We're excited to talk more about it when we get together in December. It's something that the team internally is excited about. It's excitement that I hear from investigators, certainly and patients and docs in the DM landscape and from investors as well. So looking forward to the next leg of our journey here. I'm going to do just a brief recap of the 2 major data sets from the quarter. So I won't spend a ton of time on either of these because we've talked about all of them in this setting before, but they bear rementioning just because of how exciting both of them are. Starting with the brepocitinib VALOR data on Page 9. Again, we've gone through this all before, but VALOR succeeded with really highly significant, robust and consistent data across the primary and all key secondary endpoints with a nice clear dose response that sets us up for 30 milligrams to be the optimal dose here. Responses were rapid, deep, broad, clinically meaningful across the board, a statistically meaningful and clinically important delta to placebo on mean TIS with deep responses occurring quickly and across a range of endpoints, including muscle and skin. And as a reminder, on Slide 10, this is a patient population with very significant unmet need, and this is a story that has been underscored over and over again as our team has been out talking to physicians in the field after this data. This is a patient population that is significantly underserved by therapeutic options. 75% of these patients are on only either steroids or ISTs and are struggling to get well controlled. And many of them are requiring high doses of oral prednisone in order to be sort of be treated appropriately and are all looking for options or many of them are looking for options. Only a relatively small percentage, only 1/4 of the market is currently on other therapies at all. And of the ones that are, some of them are on very demanding IVIg regimens, multiple days a month, spent entirely in the infusion centers and others are on a series of off-label therapies, many or most of which have failed DM programs before, but are used simply because there are no better options. So we're getting a predictably enthusiastic response from all of the physicians we've engaged with on this data already and are obviously looking forward to continuing that as we go through the registration process in the coming year. Looking at Slide 11, again, a recap from before, but this is the primary endpoint. This is mean TIS. And this is a textbook picture from my perspective of positive clinical data, statistically significant at the high dose starting at the earliest time point, nice clear separation, nice clear dose response. And one thing that bears mentioning, and we said this we put the data originally, we had originally been focused on the steroid taper as a risk mitigant in order to make sure we saw a clear benefit from the drug against the background of not really placebo, but actually actively managed background therapy. And we did that. But the other thing we were able to show is a real dose response on steroid reduction as we were able to get a significantly greater portion of patients to lower steroid doses or off steroids on high-dose brepocitinib than on placebo. And I think that actually with the doc community has been enormously resident finding. It's something that the docs are really, really focused on DM getting these patients off high-dose steroids, and we are very excited that we were able to show this in the study, including as a part of at least one of the key secondary endpoints. On Slide 12, more than a 1/3, and this is the key secondary where we were able to really hit both the TIS improvement -- or the TIS, I should say, and a minimal or no steroid burden. More than 1/3 of brepo 30 patients were able to get to both major TIS responses and minimal or no steroid burden at week 52. So that's just a really exciting finding across the board. And more than half of patients were able to achieve a TIS40, a moderate TIS response with very low dose of oral steroids at the same time. So just a phenomenal outcome there on the combination of endpoints. On Slide 12, again, without going through them all, just a statistically robust data set, I'll say, with really low p-values across every secondary we tested benefit on muscle, benefit on skin, benefit on patient-reported outcomes like the HAQ-DI questionnaire on disability, just a terrific across-the-board outcome here. In terms of what's next year, I think everyone is clear. The NDA submission, we're moving as fast as we can. The only real gating item here was drafting, and it's ongoing right now. We expect to get a file in the first half. Data readout from that proof-of-concept study in CS that we have ongoing will be next year. And the NIU study, which is enrolling very nicely, is currently anticipated to read out or say, guided to the first half '27 around the same time as potential registration of brepo and launch in DM. And then we submit the sNDA for NIU shortly thereafter with potential further indications and so on to come. So that's brepocitinib. I'm sure we'll get some questions about it. And like I said, we'll talk more about that program and what it could represent commercially on the 11th. But suffice it to say, a tremendous quarter and something we're really excited to carry forward from here. Next up, I'll just recap the Graves' disease remission data that we put out earlier this quarter as well. Starting on Slide 16, with just a reminder, this is a very large patient population with a significant unmet need. And there's been -- I think this is an important point as people are doing their work here, a shift away from ablation over time as patients don't want to go through the surgical procedure or the radioactive iodine, but really a lack of new medical therapies that's left something like 1/4 to 30% of Graves' disease patients who are relapsed, uncontrolled on or intolerant to ATDs. It's just a very high proportion of patients who are unable to get well controlled. As a reminder, on Slide 17, this is a bad disease. These patients are at much higher risk of cardiovascular events, much higher risk of preeclampsia, 4x higher risk of preeclampsia and a 7x higher risk of thyroid cancer than the general population. So these patients are really sick or at a high risk of developing severe comorbidities. They often go on to develop thyroid eye disease, about 40% of patients go on to develop these eye symptoms, some of which get optic neuropathy and other issues that can be pretty significant for vision. And then there's a bunch of other complications here. 16% are diagnosed with thyroid storm, which has -- in patients with hospitalized for Graves' disease, 16% are diagnosed with thyroid storm, which has a 20% mortality rate. So again, potentially sort of very sick patients and again, a relatively high risk of thyroid cancer, including a high risk of progressive thyroid cancer. So disease that makes people quite sick. Again, more to come on the 11th, but just wanted to highlight that fact. And then on Page 18, in addition to being a severe disease, it's a disease affecting a lot of people. And so you've got every year, call it, 65,000 newly diagnosed patients, of which 20,000 of those wind up in that sort of refractory bucket. And then there's 880,000 diagnosed U.S. patients, of which 330,000 in the prevalent population are walking around in that intolerant or unable to get well-controlled bucket. So they're just a huge patient population with a significant unmet medical need. What we showed earlier this year in the batoclimab study is a pretty interesting result. We showed real disease-modifying benefit in these patients. Of the 25 patients who came in at baseline, as a reminder, the way the study worked, patients were treated for 12 weeks of high-dose batoclimab followed by another 12 weeks of low-dose batoclimab and were then followed for another 24 weeks off drug entirely. And what we saw is after that first 12 weeks, 20 out of 25 of those patients were responders to therapy. After dropping to low dose after another 12 weeks, 18 out of 25 of those patients were responders. And truly remarkably, after being off drug for a further 6 months, 17 out of the 21 patients we were able to follow up with at week 48 were responders to therapy. So these are patients who were uncontrolled on standard of care at the beginning of the study and 17 out of the 21 of them that we were able to follow up with remain responders to therapy, having been off drug for 6 months. So a pretty remarkable disease-modifying benefit. Of the off-drug responders on page -- of the off-drug responders on Slide 20, nearly half of them were fully off ATDs and over 75% of them were on only the lowest doses of ATDs or off ATDs. So not only were we able to deliver a disease-modifying benefit for patients who are uncontrolled on ATDs before, we were able to significantly reduce or eliminate ATD need for those patients. Now this was underscored on Slide 21, not just by the sort of clinical data on T3 and T4 and so on, which is obviously what's most important to the patients. But you can also see it in the TRAb reductions on Slide 21. And as you can see, as you'd expect for FcRn therapy, these patients showed a rapid decline, both in general IgG and in TRAb levels, especially on high dose. The IgG levels came back a little bit as you'd expect during the lower dose period. And then what is maybe unique to Graves' disease or at least unusual among FcRn indications is while IgG bounces right back when you come off therapy, the only time points on this graph are week 24 and week 48. But by week 48, these patients were effectively back at baseline from IgG. The vast majority of these patients still had basically sort of reduced or no TRAbs. And that is a pretty remarkable finding around the durability of the benefit here. On Slide 22, the next period is absolutely stacked for us in 1402 with data coming in a variety of indications, D2T RA and CLE next year, the second part of the D2T RA study as well as Graves' and MG in 2027 and then Sjögren's in CIDP after. One small update just to flag for today. The TED study remains on track to conclude this year. Our last patient last visit is very close to today. But we're going to hold off reporting the top line data from that first study in all likelihood until we see the top line data for the second study in the first half of next year. The evolving competitive landscape in TED and especially in Graves' disease has led us to take a more prudent path there. And so we're going to collect that data together and report it when we have it all. Moving on to the -- briefly to just a reminder of where we are in the LNP litigation, which I know some people are following. In the Moderna case, we are in a pretrial process around the narrowing of claims and defenses and around summary judgment, which is happening now, the judge is reviewing summary judgment briefings and there's sort of a calendar on the docket that we're hoping will take us through trial in March. The trial is scheduled for March and the first international proceedings are also expected in the first half of 2026. The Pfizer case is ongoing in discovery, and there was a favorable Markman ruling issued in September that certainly sets us up nicely for what we think we need to do from there. So I'll conclude before we go to Q&A with a brief financial update. Overall, a straightforward quarter from a financial perspective, loss from continuing operations net of tax of $166 and cash, cash equivalents of $4.4 billion with no debt on the balance sheet. And obviously, a share count reflective of the significant share buybacks we've done over the last 18 months. So a strong position overall that, as I said, is expected to carry us through profitability. We've got more of our financials in here and the catalyst sort of road map on Slide 28. But again, just a really exciting 6 months or 12 months behind us and a really exciting 12 months or 36 months ahead of us. So feeling great about where the business is, feeling great about the significant transformation in our profile that we've been through in the recent months and looking forward to carrying that forward from here. Once again, as a reminder, we have an Investor Day in New York City for those that can make it in person on December 11, 2025, that registration link is live. It's in the presentation we put up as well as on our website. I hope to see many of you there to round out the year and talk about the future. So with that, I'll say thank you again for listening. Again, a relatively quiet earnings call, but not at all a quiet quarter. And I will pass it back over to the operator for Q&A. Thank you, everybody. Operator: [Operator Instructions] Our first question coming from the line of Dave Risinger with Leerink Partners. David Risinger: Congrats on all the progress, Matt, and looking forward to the event on the 11th. So my question is, could you please comment on what we should be watching next with respect to Pfizer litigation? So specifically in international markets and then in the U.S. Matthew Gline: Thanks, Dave. I appreciate the question. And obviously, it's something that a number of people are watching. It's tough as always, to comment on ongoing litigation. I have nothing to say about any potential timing of any kind of international cases. Look, it's a busier moment coming up. I think there should be a sort of scheduling process for the Pfizer case underway, and we should learn more about the exact time line, including hopefully a trial date in the near future. And I think that's probably what I would be most watching out for in terms of what's public at this point is just getting that schedule together and progressing from here. Operator: Our next question coming from the line of Brian Cheng with JPMorgan. Lut Ming Cheng: Just 2 quick ones from us. How do you feel about argenx stepping into Graves' and whether that has any impact on your strategy of 1402? And then we have a quick follow-up. Matthew Gline: Thanks, Brian. It's a great question. And look, I think you heard my comment on the timing of the intended sort of production of the batoclimab TED data. Obviously, we're acutely aware of the competitive landscape in Graves' disease. And look, I think to make a gentle comment, whatever, imitation is the finest form of flattery. I think it's great to see others recognizing the importance of Graves' as a disease. It's great to see more people working on treatment options for these patients. Obviously, in our Phase II study, we studied both high and low-dose batoclimab, and we saw a great benefit to the higher dose batoclimab in the study. And then also, we reported in the past data breaking out the patients between that 70% cutoff below and -- above and below 70% IgG reduction. And we had 3x as many patients getting off ATDs at the above 70% group than in the below 70% group. So we think we should have quite a competitive profile there. But most importantly, to be honest, it's a big patient population. There's a lot of sick people. And I think a rising tide there will lift all boats. And like I said, argenx is a formidable company with a wide following and has done a great job of execution. And I know there's at least some people out there who find it, although it might be frustrating to us validating of our strategy that they're following in our footsteps. And so we'll always take it. Thanks, Brian. Lut Ming Cheng: Great. And just one quick one. So on the Investor Day next month, just curious if you can talk about what do you want investors to get out of the Investor Day? Is this more of a broader recap of your current strategy? Or do you think that there will be some unveiling of completely new data or a new strategic direction at Roivant? Matthew Gline: Yes. Look, it wouldn't be a fun Investor Day if I revealed all of it now. But I think most importantly, this is just -- it's a moment of huge transformation for our business. I think the type of investors who are now along for the ride are different. And obviously, a lot of other things about the business are different. So I think we want to make sure we're telling that story fully that we're helping people see the course from a commercial perspective, from a patient need perspective in these indications so they can see at least the reasons why we are so excited about these indications about the certain nature of the blockbuster opportunity. There might be some other new things we're able to share by then in terms of updates or other things, but we'll see where we're at in a few weeks here or a month. But I think it will be an exciting opportunity to get together and take stock of the business and to talk a lot about the future and the opportunities in front of us. Operator: Our next question coming from the line of Samantha Semenkow with Citi. Samantha Semenkow: Just for Graves', when thinking about the remission data, is there any way to tease out the impact of starting on the high-dose batoclimab in that study? And how much that actually contributed to the remission rates you saw? I'm just wondering if there's anything that you could share that you were able to tease out from the data when you analyzed it so as we think about the competitive landscape? Matthew Gline: Yes. Look, thanks. That's a -- it's a great question. And I do think we're going to, like I said, be a little bit careful about some of what we say here because of the evolving competitive landscape, and we're going to learn more about this from the hypothyroid TED patients and so on in that study as well. But look, I think in general, remission is about TRAbs getting normal for longer. And our view is that deeper IgG reductions are going to drive towards exactly that outcome. And so both in terms of the speed of responses that we saw in the bato trial and the depth of responses that we saw in the bato trial in terms of TRAb lowering, I think that's going to be a significant driver for us. So I think we feel good put this way about our level of IgG suppression in that program at high dose. Thanks. It's a great question. Operator: Our next question coming from the line of Yaron Werber with TD Cohen. Yaron Werber: Great. Maybe a quick question. We've been getting a few questions about the ongoing preliminary -- the summary judgment against Moderna with respect to the U.S. government involvement in the EUP -- I'm sorry, EUA and whether the government ever took "control" of the vaccines for distribution and whether that made them a commercial party and whether that impacts their involvement and as a result, would potentially provide Moderna some venue to make an argument. Any thoughts about that, if you can comment at all would be great. Matthew Gline: Yes. Thanks, Yaron. And again, as usual, it's difficult to comment in depth about an ongoing litigation, and it's ultimately going to be the judge's decision on the 1498 question. I'll point out that the 2 things that are worth keeping in mind. One is the Moderna case in the U.S. Moderna sales of COVID vaccines in the U.S. in total is a bit less than half of Moderna's total global COVID vaccine sales and Moderna's total global COVID vaccine sales are a bit less than half of the total, inclusive of Pfizer. And so -- and then what Moderna has claimed in their own briefings is that we asked for about $5 billion in damages in the U.S. case, and Moderna has claimed that a little bit less than half of those damages could be subject to 1498 in Moderna's view. And so I think you're talking about a little bit less than half of a little bit less than half of a little bit less than half of the total is the issue in summary judgment on 1498. Our position is pretty clearly laid out in our motions. And frankly, Moderna's position has also laid out in their motions. Obviously, we feel like we have a strong case to make here, but it's ultimately going to be up to the judge to determine. But I just wanted to sort of scope out the magnitude of the question as well. Operator: Our next question coming from the line of Prakhar Agrawal with Cantor Fitzgerald. Prakhar Agrawal: Congrats on the progress in the quarter. Maybe firstly, on Sjögren's disease. Recently, there has been a lot of excitement around Sjögren's market opportunity, especially with the recent data from Novartis' BAFF drug, ianalumab. Maybe you can contextualize how FcRns can differentiate on ESSDAI scores or other specific endpoints? And do you think you could be first-in-class in this indication? And secondly, just quickly on Brepo and DM, do you plan to apply for FDA's National Priority Voucher for Brepo? Matthew Gline: Thank you. Those are both great questions. Look, I think on Sjögren's, we are also excited about the market opportunity. It's a large patient population with a very significant unmet need and just a lot of people kind of going through it as it were. There have been a variety of therapeutic classes that have shown some benefit. Obviously, the in-class data was positive and the J&J data, in particular, showed that lower is better. So we think we have a real shot at best-in-class. We are working to launch as close to first-in-class as possible. I don't think we're here to commit that we'll beat our competitors. We obviously got a little bit of a head start on us, but I think we're trying to be kind of within a window small enough such that it shouldn't matter who comes first, and we can differentiate based on our profile. And I'll just say, I think, first of all, I think the Novartis data was positive, but probably left room for even better as I think have all of the Sjögren's data produced to date. And I think the FcRn data to date has sort of been competitive with other classes of drugs. And so if our deeper IgG expression yields a better benefit than other FcRns, I think we should have a truly important opportunity in the space. A lot of excitement about new therapies from KOLs and from our investigators. The unmet need is significant. The overall market is a significant number of patients. So it's a great place for us to be in our view. And then sorry, you asked about the CNPV program for brepo. We haven't said. Look, this is an orphan population with high unmet need. So I think we're thinking through all of the different ways we can get through FDA and out to patients as quickly as possible and thinking about the puts and takes of them all, but stay tuned. Operator: Our next question coming from the line of Corrine Johnson with Goldman Sachs. Corinne Jenkins: Maybe following up on an earlier question about competitive intensity in Graves' disease. I think it goes beyond argenx in terms of number of companies that have announced plans there. So how are you thinking about the kind of competitive clinical landscape that's evolving? And what do you expect to inform sequencing decisions in that space over time? And then maybe separately, just on business development. Curious if you could give an update on what you're seeing on that front. Matthew Gline: Yes. Thanks, Corinne. Look, I think the first question -- and obviously, we see the competitive landscape. Similarly, there's a number of people trying different things, which is exciting. It's exciting Graves' space. It's exciting to be there. One comment about that is, I think we've watched the myasthenia gravis landscape play out, and there's a lot of competitive intensity and a lot of new mechanisms and also that FcRn has been, a, a pretty undisputed king so far; and b, that the first FcRn to launch with the quality of that data has been a tremendous head start. And we think we've built something similar in Graves' disease, which is a market obviously a multiple of the potential size of the MG market. So we feel great about our position, both from a timing perspective as well as a mechanism. It's a well-understood mechanism, FcRn. And it's pretty exquisitely well suited to treating the biology of Graves' disease. So you think about some of the other mechanisms outside of FcRns have something in common with ATDs, which is that at high doses, they will cause patients to go hypothyroid, which is a miserable thing as well. And so I think one of the great things about FcRn biology is other than maybe for a very short period of time, because what you're really doing is getting at the root cause of the disease with these autoantibodies, you're not going to like cause the thyroid to react in the other direction sort of directly. It's not like a TSHR targeted mechanism or something like that. And so I think that will be a big benefit to FcRn. The other thing that I think is maybe underappreciated in some communities about FcRns is just how safe and well tolerated they are. And I think in a Graves' patient population, that is going to be an important fact that I think will be great for FcRns as a mechanism. So I think that those will all be sort of good guides towards FcRns being important and early line therapy for these patients who can't manage it with standard of care today. In general, as I said, I think lots of activity in the space is actually going to be good for everybody. These are docs who haven't run a lot of clinical trials. These are docs who haven't had a lot of new treatment options. And I think the more voices there are out there talking about this stuff, the better we'll be able to get out to the patient population. So thanks. It's a great question. And then you asked for BD update. Look, we remain extremely well capitalized. We remain very excited about the opportunities for pipeline expansion. We are incredibly excited about the things we currently have in our pipeline. And obviously, you hear that in our voice. You see that in the way that we're talking about our data. Obviously, we're thinking about indication expansion for those programs and then always looking in the world for programs, especially programs that are of a size and scale that can move the needle against the backdrop of our existing pipeline. And I think we've got some exciting ideas. Operator: The next question coming from the line of Dennis Ding with Jefferies. Yuchen Ding: We have 2, if we may. Number one is on Pulmovant. So you guys will have Phase II PH-ILD data in the second half of next year. I guess, how confident are you about the translatability from PAH to PH-ILD? And how should we think about that update? And what's the positive delta on PVR? And secondly, on the LNP litigation, I'm curious if you've done any work on what percentage of the U.S. doses were given to actual federal government employees as we think about a middle scenario for summary judgment? Matthew Gline: Thanks, Dennis. I appreciate it. Both great questions. Thanks for the question about Pulmovant. We're obviously super excited about mosli. Look, I think -- you have correctly identified the risk that exists in the mosli data that is we don't have data in the PH-ILD patient population, and that's sort of the nature of this study. In general, PVRs have translated well. And so I think that's an important backdrop fact between these indications. And where they haven't, it's mostly been, for example, because of the VQ mismatch issues associated with vasodilation in lung disease patients. And we think the format of mosli addresses that issue. So we are, I'd say, cautiously optimistic about that translation, but obviously, I feel a lot better when that Phase IIb data is in hand. And my hope is that we see pretty significant PVR reductions and pretty significant clinical benefit in those patients. So looking forward to that data in the second half of next year. That's another area where there's quite a lot of enthusiasm for the program and for new opportunities, especially with the overall growth from the prostacyclins in PH-ILD, leaving plenty of room for additional mechanisms. The other thing I'll point out is just the 38% PVR reduction we saw in pulmonary hypertension, even if PVR reductions are for some reason a little bit lower in PH-ILD, obviously, there's still a lot of room for a very significant amount of benefit for these patients. Your second question, what percent of doses given to federal employees? I don't think our best estimates of that are in any of our motions. But I think you can imagine, as you think about the number of federal employees that it's a relatively small percentage. Yuchen Ding: Got it. And if I can sneak one more in about the LNP litigation. Maybe remind us what's the status in terms of the OUS trials. We're not that familiar with the OUS process. So I guess, can you remind us how many cases you filed, which one is the furthest along? And can you get an initial decision in 2026? Matthew Gline: Yes. So thanks. It's a great question. In the case of Moderna, we filed a number of OUS actions, including in the UPC in Europe as well as in Canada and Japan and a couple of other places. Those litigations are all ongoing. There are important hearings in 2026. And the nice thing about some of these European jurisdictions is they can move quickly. So it is possible that we would get outcomes of various kinds within 2026 in some of those jurisdictions and obviously look forward to saying more when there's more to say. Operator: Our next question coming from the line of Yasmeen Rahimi with Piper Sandler. Dominic Risso-Gill: Congrats on a great quarter. This is Dominic, on for Yasmeen Rahimi. We just had a question going into the TED data. Could you help us understand what you're thinking about with the expectations for the studies that are reading out here soon? And what do you hope to see to consider development considering the competitive landscape? Matthew Gline: Yes. Thanks. It's a great question. We're looking forward to having that data relatively shortly for sharing it next year. Look, I think the competitive bar in TED is relatively high with IGF-1Rs being pretty efficacious. That said, they certainly leave room from a safety perspective, et cetera. And so I think we're looking to see data that makes sense in the context of the competitive landscape there. The other thing that I think -- and this is part of the reason why we're focused on the sort of competition in Graves' disease, I think we'll learn a lot about hyperthyroid Graves' patients from this study as well as the possible ways in which Graves' and TED might interact with one another. And so I think we're looking forward to the data from that perspective as well. We'll obviously make a final decision on a launch in batoclimab once we've got the TED data in hand and in consultation with our partner. Thanks. It’s a great question. Thank you. Operator: Our next question coming from the line of Douglas Tsao with H.C. Wainwright. Douglas Tsao: I guess, Matt, maybe as another follow-up on Graves' and TED. As you referenced, the 2 diseases are obviously sort of very interrelated with interplay. And I guess when we think about argenx, they will potentially come to market with VYVGART being both Graves' and TED hypothetically. Obviously, you have a big head start with 1402 in Graves'. So I'm just curious how you're thinking about potentially pursuing TED with 1402 versus, as you just noted, potentially thinking about batoclimab and the sort of disadvantage of maybe sort of coming at those dual markets with 2 different molecules. Matthew Gline: Yes. Look, thanks. It's a great question. And a couple of comments about this. One is it's -- we'll be speaking in the abstract now. We're going to know a lot more about the TED data that will inform the answer to this exact question, and we will be in possession of more information than anybody else will have at this moment in time on the sort of overall treatment landscape and on what FcRns can deliver. And so I think that will set us up really nicely to think about the possible options. They're totally different call point in terms of the physicians who treat these things and there are different stages of disease. And so I think they get treated at different times in different ways. And I think being able to talk to endos who are treating Graves' patients about the benefit in forestalling TED, for example, is an important potential thing to be able to discuss when we get to it. In terms of thinking about the sort of TED versus Graves' market dynamics, I'd say let's just wait and see what the TED data looks like, and then we can talk more about it. As a reminder, the Graves' population is meaningfully bigger and it's upstream of the TED population. And so I think there's a reason that was our first focus once we got into the clinic with 1402. Great question. Douglas Tsao: Okay. Great. And Matt, if I can, on a follow-up with brepo. Obviously, incredibly impressive results in DM. I'm just curious if you have given thought just given sort of somebody alluded to sort of the competitiveness in Sjögren's, have you ever thought of that as an indication because I think there is a mechanistic rationale and obviously, an oral option would be very attractive. Matthew Gline: Yes, thanks. I appreciate the question. Look, I think the short answer is, we have thought pretty exhaustively about possible indications for brepo. We have a number that we think are exciting beyond what we've talked about. I think if you look at the indications we've chosen so far, they've been indications where we can really chart a market-defining course. And I think there are maybe more to do in that story. But the short answer is there's an embarrassment of riches in terms of the indication set available for brepo, and we feel very privileged with the data we have in hand for what we've got. As a reminder, it has worked almost everywhere it has been tested. And so I think we feel like it's a great molecule and with a lot of great places to go. Thanks for the question. Operator: Next question coming from the line of Derek Archila with Wells Fargo. Hao Shen: This is a Hao, calling in for Derek Archila from Wells Fargo. I guess we have a question on brepo. We were at AACR. So very positive feedback from all the KOLs. So question is about really the competitive landscape. I guess we've seen VYVGART having data next year and the CAR-T is also starting their pivotal trials. How do you see the kind of the treatment paradigm evolve over the years? And brepo, do you have also plan to explore in other subtypes of myositis like [ IMNM and AS ]? Matthew Gline: Yes, perfect. So look, I think on the deal on competitive landscape, similar comment to, frankly, my comment in Graves', which is that I think it's a great opportunity to be able to get out in front of it. And obviously, first and foremost, it may be the easiest. And oral is always going to have a huge place. The majority of these patients are on oral therapy now. And so I think just like the overall profile that makes us unique. I'll say the CAR-Ts, that's not, in my opinion, going to play for the same patients mostly that we are. That's obviously a much different sort of intervention. And there's still plenty of open questions about benefit there. Look, I think that's also sort of a little bit about that landscape. FcRn could be a compelling option. Obviously, IVIg is used. But I'd say, first of all, it's good to have what we think of as a multiyear head start in DM. And we think the patient population that we have access to, given the nature of our therapy is really basically the entire DM patient population, which gives us a lot of room to go. So we think, again, similar to VYVGART and MG, we think we get to define that market and be the heart of it. And so I think that's all great. We also suspect that the data we have in DM specifically may be just the best overall, and that's the biggest part of the myositis market. Obviously, argenx is studying in other subtypes of myositis as well, and some of those may be more directly appropriate for an FcRn. As to your question about other subtypes of myositis for us, I'll just say again, we thought about a whole bunch of different places to go. There's a lot of exciting places to go, and we have an embarrassment of riches in terms of where we can take the molecule from here. Operator: Our next question coming from the line of Tess Smith with Leerink Partners. Thomas Smith: Congrats on the progress. Just with respect to the TED program and the competitive landscape, could you comment on some of the data we recently saw from the IL-6 class, whether you think Sat is approvable with that data set and sort of your expectations for batoclimab relative to those results? And then secondly, is there any update you could provide from the overseas study that you're running with 1402? And any sort of timing guidance for when we might see data from additional indications from that study? Matthew Gline: Yes, thanks. Those are, look, obviously great questions. I'll say, obviously, not our place to make comments on the approvability of other mechanisms. There was a notably high placebo response in the IL-6 study, which is something we've paid attention to. But overall, no specific comments on where that program goes from here. From a competitive landscape perspective, I think the competitive intensity in TED is real, as I said earlier. And the IGF-1Rs are efficacious, although they have safety and tolerability concerns associated with them. And so I think we're sort of focused on where we could play in TED. And then as we said a minute ago, thinking about Graves', an opportunity to impact the disease much earlier in its course. And I think that's an important thing to the way that we are approaching that with 1402. On the sort of second overseas study, look, I think we, obviously, at this point, have a number of large registrational programs running in 1402 that are big global studies. We continue to like the option of small, fast POCs overseas and feeding that information into bigger studies. If and when we have anything to share from those ongoing efforts, we'll share it. But mostly, it's being used to inform either indication selection or design decisions of the bigger studies. Operator: And our next question coming from the line of Brandon Frith with Wolfe Research. Brandon Frith: This is Brandon, on for Andy. Have you provided any analogs for the DM launch? And we're curious to know what to expect for the cadence out of the gate in longer term? Matthew Gline: Yes, perfect. Look, I think DM is an area with high unmet need, but also not a lot of novel therapies recently launched. So first of all, there aren't great analogs to look at, specifically in DM. And second of all, I think the appropriate course for any public company is to guide cautiously on launch speed and to say that we're going to do everything we can to get this drug out there and to get docs excited about it. And the thing that we're most confident in is that the overall market opportunity is large, that there is high unmet patient need and that when we get to peak penetration, there's a really big and exciting opportunity. Exactly how long it takes to get there, I think we're going to see is the answer, and we're going to do everything we can to make it as successful as we can. Obviously, the real value add is the stuff to get the long-term trajectory here right. So that's probably how I think about the launch. Operator: Our next question coming from the line of Sam Slutsky with LifeSci Capital. Gaurav Maini: This is Gaurav, on for Sam from LifeSci. So just a question on Graves' here. Based on all the market research done to date, as you compare the uncontrolled Graves' disease opportunity versus what FcRns have shown in the MG market, I guess, how do you size these up? How are you thinking about the opportunity? Is it bigger, smaller, similar as we think about MG for FcRns? Matthew Gline: I mean, look, it's hard to -- the MG market has been tremendous. And so I think it's hard to call it one way or another. But obviously, there's a lot of uncontrolled Graves' patients, and it's an exciting place to be. And I think we have a real opportunity to build something big. There's just lots and lots and lots of uncontrolled patients is the answer. The other thing I'll say is we'll talk more about the commercial opportunity in Graves' disease on December 11. And I think we're excited with what we see. And I think we can make -- I think the most important thing is there are hundreds of thousands of patients for whom we could make a meaningful difference and a lot of different ways for us to get into that market and establish different toeholds in places. And so we're looking forward to all of that. We're also learning, and I want to highlight this as an important advantage that we have from being first, so much about the Graves' opportunity by being out there with these docs enrolling patients in the study, looking out at what we're finding. And I think that competitive benefit is going to set us up really well to make sure we've got the right product on the market as well. Operator: There are no further questions at this time. I will now turn the call back over to Mr. Matthew Gline for any closing remarks. Matthew Gline: Thank you. Thank you, everybody, for listening this morning. Once again, a phenomenal quarter for us in terms of the results we delivered. And super importantly, looking forward to getting together on the 11th to talk about the future and address in further detail some of the very same questions we got on today's call. So I hope to see many of you there. And I hope you all have a great end to your year apart from that. Thanks very much, and have a good day. Operator: This concludes today's conference call. Thank you for your participation, and you may now disconnect Goodbye.
Operator: Good afternoon, and welcome to the Petco Third Quarter 2025 Earnings Conference Call. [Operator Instructions] Please note, this event is being recorded. I would now like to turn the conference over to Tina Romani, Head of Investor Relations and Treasury. Please go ahead. Tina Romani: Good afternoon, and thank you for joining Petco's Third Quarter 2025 Earnings Conference Call. In addition to the earnings release, there is a presentation available to download on our website at ir.petco.com. On the call with me today are Joel Anderson, Petco's Chief Executive Officer; and Sabrina Simmons, Petco's Chief Financial Officer. Before we begin, I'd like to remind everyone that on this call, we will make certain forward-looking statements, which are subject to a number of risks and uncertainties that could cause actual results to differ materially from such statements. These risks and uncertainties include those set out in our earnings materials and SEC filings. In addition, on today's call, we will refer to certain non-GAAP financial measures. Reconciliations of these measures can be found in our earnings release, presentation and SEC filings. With that, let me turn it over to Joel. Joel Anderson: Thanks, Tina, and good afternoon, everyone. Thank you for joining us to discuss our third quarter results, where I'm pleased to share that we delivered another profitable quarter in line with our plan. We've continued to strengthen the foundation of our operating model, improved retail fundamentals and position Petco for sustainable, profitable growth over the long term. We delivered sales in line with our outlook and meaningfully improved our profitability, increasing operating income over the last year by over $25 million, generating $99 million in adjusted EBITDA and more than $60 million in free cash flow. I want to thank our teams across the organization for their dedication, focus and execution on our transformation initiatives that are continuing to gain traction as reflected in our improvement in profitability and cash flow in Q3 and year-to-date. You've heard me talk about the importance of culture, and you will continue to hear that as a key theme of our transformation. When I joined Petco, we had a strong culture centered around pets first. The passion of our 30,000 partners was one of the many things that attracted me to joining. Over the last 9 months as a collective leadership team, we've been building on that culture in 2 ways. First, through reinstilling retail fundamental discipline, which is driving increased financial rigor and accountability, this is a testament to how the organization has embraced new ways of working with strengthened operating principles and was a large contributor to our results. Second, creating a culture that is playing to win. We are fostering a culture equally focused on operating discipline and a winning mindset. Last month, I had the opportunity to spend time with our support center and store leaders at our Leadership Summit. Together, we aligned on what our go-forward values will be for a reimagined Petco and what that means for our customers and our plans to execute on our [ One Petco Way ] vision. We are squarely in Phase 2 of our transformation which is centered on improving profitability and strengthening our foundation from which to grow. The success to date has fundamentally changed the way we think and work to continuously identify future areas of opportunity that will further unlock long-term value. At the same time, we are now strategically shifting resources towards Phase 3, a return to growth now that our bottom line has meaningfully been improved. Last quarter, I outlined the 4 pillars that support Petco's return to growth. First, delivering compelling product and merchandise differentiation; second, delivering a trusted store experience; third, winning with integrated services at scale; and finally, serving our customer with a seamless omni experience. Let me now provide you more specific color on each pillar. Starting with compelling product and merchandise differentiation. I view this in 2 categories. On the consumable side, we have improved shopability with higher in-stock availability, our customers rely on us to have everyday go-to product, better integrated assortment planning and merchandising teams have been created an improved in-store experience as well as online. On the discretionary side, we are focused on infusing a steady stream of newness in 2026 that complements our evergreen product assortment with more seasonal and trend-driven buys. Previously, there has been a said-it-and-forget-it mentality, which is not a very aspirational shopping experience and one that we are changing. As we look forward, we see significant opportunity to change our collective merchandise mindset from solely a needs-based business to also a wants-based business by overhauling our product offering and surprising our customers with unexpected ideas for their pets. A great example with the success of our online pilot, our new My Human product line was expanded into over 200 stores. This is a small milestone but exemplifies our team's focus and ability to lean into trend forward impulse purchases. Next, moving to a trusted store experience. Joe Venezia, our Chief Revenue Officer, who joined us just about a year ago, leads our operations and services team. Since joining, he has been focused on store simplification, standardizing processes across our fleet and taking costs out of our operations. He is now shifting his focus to additionally include revenue-driving KPIs like increasing transaction size, driving sales contests and increasing customer interactions. With our passionate partners, strong customer engagement and a full suite of services, we can create both a fun and convenient experience that pet parents are unable to get anywhere else. Our store partners are a unique differentiator for Petco. We benefit from having long time, passionate and knowledgeable partners that serve our pets and our pet parents. Our opportunity today is around making it easier to run our stores, freeing up our store associates to interact with customers and use what we call their superpowers of pet knowledge, improving these areas will make it easier for us to drive sales growth in 2026. Moving now to services at scale. Our nationwide wholly owned and operated services business continues to be our fastest-growing category and is our competitive moat, given its in-person nature, high barriers of entry and difficulty to replicate, a holistic ecosystem between grooming, owned hospitals, clinics and center of store can only be found at Petco. What especially excites me here is the opportunity we have with our existing assets. I think about it in 3 ways: one, improving utilization through increased staffing and appointment availability; two, improving engagement to enhance digital capabilities; and three, improving integration of services and center of store. With regards to veterinarian staffing, I'm pleased to share that we are ahead of our doctor hiring goals that we set at the start of the year with record high doctor retention. During the quarter, we also promoted 2 of our long-time leaders to chief veterinarians, reinforcing our commitment to growing our veterinary business. Simultaneously, we are fostering a culture of team development, top talent recruitment and execution of our strategic veterinary initiatives. All of this is foundational and is critical to increasing the utilization of our hospitals. Additionally, we are increasing access to care by strategically adding hours back on peak client demand and making appointments easier to book. We are standardizing processes across our fleet to secure in-store follow-up bookings. We are increasing efficiency for our refined grooming apprenticeship model, freeing up both appointment availability and increasing volume. And finally, we are enhancing online appointment scheduling to ensure we have better coverage and better flexibility for our customers. Clearly, Q3 has been a busy yet productive time for our services businesses. Let me spend a moment on improving integration between services, and center of store as the opportunity here may not be well understood. Historically, Petco stores and services operations were run relatively siloed which was a missed opportunity. There is a tremendous value unlock when better integrating our stores and services experience. I'll give you a simple example. Previously, our veterinarians did not have access to customer purchase data. We are in the process of fixing that. And in 2026, our veterinarians will be able to see purchase history and make more informed diet recommendations based on overall pet health and specific needs. Taking that a step further, the veterinarian will be able to direct the customer to the recommended product in store, or recommend a store associate to assist. This is a simple example but illustrates how increased integration of services in stores can create a better outcome for pets and improved experiences for our customers. Now moving on to our fourth and final pillar, seamless omni integration. Layered on to everything I just discussed are enhanced digital capabilities, a more compelling membership offering, and a frictionless digital to store experience to customers wherever they choose to engage. I'm happy to report we are on plan with our improvements -- and in fact, we are starting to implement some of these changes in Q4 of this year. For example, we are transitioning the way we buy media, beginning with better targeting and bidding strategies which we expect to drive efficiencies in our marketing spend as we continue to strengthen Petco's reintroduction of our tagline, Where the Pets Go. I'm pleased with the progress of the membership program, and we will begin live testing and pilot the program this quarter in a small handful of districts. Our focus on these 4 pillars will fuel our growth, which we still expect to see in 2026. In closing, as you can hear in my voice, this has been a productive quarter at Petco, and I'm pleased with the progress we continue to make on the commitments I outlined at the beginning of the year. As each quarter passes, we get better at celebrating amazing pet experiences, executing our strategies and delivering on our promises internally and externally. The initiatives planned for the fourth quarter will advance the Petco transformation, and I look forward to sharing updates with you in March. Ahead of the Thanksgiving holiday, I want to personally express my gratitude for our partners who puts pets first every day and boldly reflect who we are and what we stand for. Our Petco Love foundation has demonstrated our long-standing commitment to saving lives, finding loving homes for over 7 million pets to improve the welfare of animals. With that, I'll hand the call over to Sabrina to take you through the specifics of our third quarter results and outlook for the remainder of the year. Sabrina? Sabrina Simmons: Thank you, Joel. Good afternoon, everyone. In the third quarter, Petco once again delivered against our commitments while building a stronger foundation from which to grow. As we've discussed all year, strengthening the health of Petco's economic model has been our top priority. I'm pleased with our progress, as demonstrated in our expanding gross margin, expense leverage and operating margin expansion, not only in the quarter but year-to-date. In line with our outlook, which reflects our decision to move away from unprofitable sales. Net sales were down 3.1%, with comp sales down 2.2%. As a reminder, the difference between total sales and comp is driven by the 25 net store closures in 2024 and the additional 9 net store closures year-to-date. We ended the quarter with 1,389 stores in the U.S. Gross margin expanded approximately 75 basis points to 38.9%. Similar to the first half, gross margin expansion was primarily driven by a more disciplined approach to average unit retail and average unit cost, including stronger guardrails and more disciplined processes to effectively manage our pricing and promotional strategies. It's important to note that in this quarter, tariffs began to more meaningfully impact our cost of goods sold. Moving to SG&A. For the quarter, SG&A decreased $32 million below last year and leveraged 97 basis points. As we've discussed previously, our shift in mindset an increase in rigor around expense management is evident in our results. Savings were achieved across the board and especially in G&A areas. Notably, marketing spend was about flat year-over-year. Our expanded gross margin and expense leverage resulted in operating margin expansion of over 170 basis points. Adjusted EBITDA increased 21% or $17 million (sic) [ $17.3 million ] to $99 million (sic) [ $98.6 million ] and adjusted EBITDA margin expanded nearly 140 basis points to 6.7% of sales. Moving to the balance sheet and cash flow. Q3 ending inventory was down 10.5% while achieving higher in-stocks for our customers. We continue to manage inventory with discipline, which is one of the drivers of our improving cash profile. Free cash flow for the quarter was $61 million, and year-to-date was $71 million. Both the quarter and year-to-date were significantly above the prior year. Notably, year-to-date cash flow from operations has nearly doubled versus the prior year to $161 million. We ended the quarter with a cash balance of $237 million and total liquidity of $733 million including the availability on our undrawn revolver. And now turning to our outlook for the full year. We are once again raising our adjusted EBITDA outlook for 2025. We now expect adjusted EBITDA to be between $395 million and $397 million, an increase of roughly 18% year-over-year at the midpoint. For the full year, given we are entering the last quarter, we are narrowing our range for net sales and now expect net sales to be down between 2.5% and 2.8%. For the fourth quarter, we expect net sales to be down low single digits versus the prior year as we continue to execute on the initiatives we've outlined. We expect adjusted EBITDA to be between $93 million and $95 million. It's important to note that the impact of tariffs is sequentially more meaningful in Q4. Additionally, the significant progress we've made year-to-date against strengthening our economic model and improving our earnings profile has provided us the option to begin selectively investing behind the business where it may make sense as part of our ongoing efforts to set the stage for Phase 3, a return to profitable sales growth. With regard to other guidance items. For the full year, we expect depreciation to be about $200 million, net interest expense of approximately $125 million, about 20 net store closures and $125 million to $130 million of capital expenditures with a greater focus on ROIC. In closing, as Joel discussed, we're in a period of significant change, and I want to extend my deepest appreciation to all of our teams for embracing that change to deliver better outcomes for all of our stakeholders. With that, we welcome your questions. Operator: [Operator Instructions] The first question will come from Simeon Gutman with Morgan Stanley. Simeon Gutman: Let me -- I was intrigued by something you talked about some of the wants. Can you talk about -- can you frame what mix of the business is wants versus needs today and it may be far out there but what's the vision? And my guess is the wants aren't truly wants. I think it's -- given your background, there's probably some unique merchandising that's partially wants but curious how you can frame that and maybe tease it out a little. Joel Anderson: Thanks, Simeon. It's a great question. And yes, if you think about it in the traditional sense, consumables is traditionally a needs business. And it's the overwhelming majority of our business but even that business, Simeon, I think, has some elements to it that can be more of a want in principle. And what I mean by that, and I alluded to it in my prepared remarks, we've just had this said-it-and-forget-it mentality for our entire business. And if I just focus on consumables for a second, for example, in 2025, we our dog food business was largely all surrounded around 1 big episodic reset in the middle of the year. And we're really going to change that in '25, and as our big vendor partners come out with innovation, newness, different types of product, new flavors, cat extensions, we're going to roll that out in line with their timing, not our timing. So that's going to make more of a perception of wants rather than just needs in the sense that somebody walks in and -- is a sense of discovery and we just haven't been good at that in the past, Simeon. So I think the whole business has an opportunity to create more of a exploration throughout our store, not just our supplies business which is traditionally probably the way you were thinking there's an element to it in consumables as well. And certainly, when we get on the call in March, we'll go through that in more detail. I cut you off, Simeon. Simeon Gutman: No, I cut you off. My follow-up, it's related. You talked about integrating the store functions. You talked about wants versus need, and then there was a little bit of maybe forward investing, I think, Sabrina just mentioned. So if you -- and by the way, the business itself is getting close to lapping like whatever tough compares. It seems like it's naturally getting back to positive territory. So what kind of clicks or what's the priority among the things we heard where the top line starts to move or? Is it something we haven't heard yet? Joel Anderson: No, I don't think it's something you heard. I think, look, we're going to approach 2026 from the top line, the same way we approached 2025 from the bottom line. In 2024, we came out with the strategies that would fix the bottom line, and then we executed them in 2026 -- in 2025. We're doing the same thing for top line growth. I outlined 4 pillars. We backed it up with building blocks which I talked about many of them today. And then we're going to execute against those with the same rigor and discipline. And so it's not just to cross your fingers and hope. We've got plans around 4 pillars with a lot of building blocks for each 1 of them. And I'm really excited about all 4 of them. I alluded to some of them that we're already testing here in Q4 but all of them are making traction and some just take longer to implement than others but teams are all focused and we got a good plan. Operator: Next question will come from Oliver Wintermantel with Evercore ISI. Oliver Wintermantel: Joel, what is the realistic time line for comp stabilization? And which categories or customer behaviors would represent the biggest swing factors there? Joel Anderson: Yes. Look, I'm not going to get into 2026 today on this call and the timing of it. But certainly, what you should expect from me in March is to not only give you guidance for Q1 but we'll give you an outlook on the full year. But specifically, I can tell you all 4 of the pillars I went through today are getting traction. And -- so I would expect all 4 of them to contribute towards comp in 2026, and then we'll just outline the timing for you on the March call. Oliver Wintermantel: Got it. That makes sense. And then just on the free cash flow side, strong improvements there year-to-date and in the quarter. But how much of the Q3 working capital improvement is sustainable, and what financial or operational levels continue to support the cash generation for next year? Sabrina Simmons: Yes. I mean, I think we view cash flow and all of its levers as continuous improvement. So we certainly are focused on continuing on this path of generating strong free cash. The principal lever of core solver is net earnings. So we're going to continue to focus on our bottom line and growing net earnings. We'll continue to focus on inventory discipline. We're not done. We've made huge strides this year. in terms of rationalizing our SKUs and reducing our inventory compared to our sales which is fantastic. But I wouldn't say we're best-in-class in turns yet. We still have a lot of opportunity, so we'll be looking at that lever as well as all of our other levers to continue delivering on strong cash generation. Operator: Question will come from Michael Lasser with UBS. Michael Lasser: Can you size the magnitude of the potential investments that you would make in what form those are going to come in, whether it's labor, marketing or promotions? And are those investments necessary as you look to 2026 in order to drive top line growth. Sabrina Simmons: Well, maybe I'll just start, Michael, with the framework, and then Joel can chime in on how he feels -- he's looking at each one. What we've tried to do, and we're really pleased that we banked so much profit improvement through Q3. And this has afforded us, as I said, the option, and it's only an option to consider investing in areas that we think can drive improvements both in Q4, but also for our future. So everything you mentioned is on our plate of options certainly, marketing, certainly looking at labor. And sure, we'll always continue to look at promos to see if we can do them effectively in a way that brings value to our customer but also in a way that's very responsible as we continue to manage our margin expansion. Joel, do you want to... Joel Anderson: Yes. Yes, Sabrina, I think you nailed that pretty good. And when Michael, I look at the 4 pillars, we outlined. I don't think any of them as it relates to 2026 require any substantial step change from what we're doing today in terms of cash investment or a change in OpEx investment or something. It's really -- you take merchandise, like we're selling through our existing merchandise and we're buying into new. So that's really just a steady flow change and really don't see any episodic change in 2026 from an investment standpoint from the run rate we're already on today. Michael Lasser: I guess the question and the critical point is can Petco experience the same magnitude of the improvement in the profitability while reversing what seems like some market share losses this year and be on that path next year? Sabrina Simmons: Yes. If I'm hearing you, Michael, and I might want you to repeat the question, but we for sure, believe that investments are going to be necessary. Our whole focus and what I talked about all year long in terms of the economic model we're pursuing is delivering leverage on expenses. But as you know, if sales improve, you increase operating expenses and still deliver leverage. So we're very aware that we need to make some investments. That's why we're talking about in Q4, we may make some of those investments in advance of entering the new year because we've been able to bank so much profitability and leverage. And we will measure our success in meeting our goals and expanding margin and delivering expense leverage on a full year basis. That's another thing we always said, we never said every single quarter in the same way. It's on a full year basis. So that's why we've given ourselves the option because we know that the next phase will require investment and we are prepared to stand behind that in a responsible way that still delivers on our full year goal to deliver the model. Michael Lasser: Sabrina, could I just clarify? If we look at what the embedded EBITDA margin is in the fourth quarter versus what Petco has experienced over the last couple of quarters. It looks like the pace of improvement is going to moderate. Should we think about the magnitude of the potential investment, the option for investing would be the difference between what Petco has achieved over the last couple of quarters and what's implied in the fourth quarter? Is that how we should think about quantifying that potential investment? Sabrina Simmons: I think that's a fair framework, Michael. I would add to that, as we look to Q4, as I stated, remember, when we think about gross margin, there's more tariff impact. So that's just 1 factor. It's not enormous as we said all year. It's -- we're pleased that we're in a retail sector that doesn't have mountains of tariffs but it is an impact. So that's 1 factor. The second impact is that investment that we're talking about, and how much we will choose to do and how we'll manage through that in the fourth quarter. So yes, I think your statement, broadly speaking, is fair. Operator: Next question will come from Kendall Toscano with Bank of America Global Research. Kendall Toscano: Hopefully, you can hear me okay. I was just wondering if you could talk more about the impact of tariffs during the quarter. I know you mentioned they became more meaningful in 3Q but maybe not as much as you're expecting for the fourth quarter. But just curious what you saw in terms of COGS impact, if any, and then in maybe some categories where there was tariff impact on price? What did you see in terms of consumer elasticity? Sabrina Simmons: Yes. Thanks, Kendall. Just to go back to your statement. So the first time we saw a tariff impact flow through our P&L through cost of goods sold in any meaningful way is the third quarter because the second quarter has like, let's call it, de minimis, amounts of that. We had it on our balance sheet, we had an inventory buys but it wasn't flowing through COGS yet. The third quarter is the first quarter of that. And my only point was, in the fourth quarter, it becomes a bit more meaningful. So it's just a reminder that sequentially the tariff headwind is a bit more meaningful. But again, in the broad spectrum of things, it's a very manageable number which we've managed all year and have been revising guidance upward in the face of it. So I think that hopefully helps frame it up. We also know that it's mostly in the private label supplies area, as we've said in the past. So hopefully, that helps frame it up, too. Kendall Toscano: Got it. That's helpful. And then my other question was just in terms of some self-inflicted headwinds in the Services segment as you've deprioritized that program ahead of the planned relaunch. Just curious, as you're now getting closer to relaunching that in 2026, and it sounds like maybe starting to pilot it in the fourth quarter, what kind of tailwind would you expect to see on same-store sales growth or, I guess, just services growth? Sabrina Simmons: I think you mean our membership program? Kendall Toscano: Yes, that's what's I meant. Sabrina Simmons: Yes, that's what combined with services in the way we report services and others. So probably, Joel, if you want to start with the membership program and... Joel Anderson: Yes, because our paid membership rolls into there. But I think the more important thing to take away from that is -- and I alluded to it in my prepared remarks that we are on track with our new membership program. And in fact, here in the fourth quarter, we have begun live end-to-end testing in several markets. And so -- we really haven't seen any major glitches in fact, minor at best. And so that's a really good sign for us. We'll then take that to a few more markets and to roll out the new marketing attached to it and are still on track then for a rollout sometime in 2026 with the rest of the fleet. But membership so far has really come together nicely, and it's a really important element to our growth that's going to begin in 2026. Sabrina Simmons: Yes. And since you raised it, Kendall, on the services piece, I think you can see that, that continues to be not only a strategically important area for us but it's also an area of nice growth and continues to be. Operator: Next question will come from Kate McShane with Goldman Sachs. Katharine McShane: We wanted to ask a little bit more of a higher level question. Just your view on where you think the industry is now from a digestion standpoint where you think the industry can grow in 2026 if we do return to growth in '26 for the industry? And just what you may have been seeing out of the competitive set this most recent quarter as some of these higher tariff costs and prices have come through? Joel Anderson: Yes. Thanks, Kate. Look, overall, the competitive set really hasn't changed much from the last quarter. I would say, the -- what's changed is the consumer has been probably a little bit more cautious. I mean, obviously, with tariffs and political tensions and interest rates still high that's really been bogging down their outlook on the economy a little bit. But as far as the pet industry goes, it's been pretty stable, flattish in terms of growth I think the progress we've made on our digital side has really been promising and that will be very important to us as we turn to growth next year. But overall, we're positioned nicely. Our services business is -- Sabrina just talked about is already growing, and that is an area of growth in the pet industry, and then we'll layer in the focus we've made and the progress we've made on our digital improvements. But overall, it's pretty stable. Operator: Question will come from Chris Bottiglieri with BNP Paribas. Christopher Bottiglieri: The first 1 I had was just hoping to -- now the cash -- free cash flow profile has improved. How do you think about prioritizing the usage of cash? Is it continued debt paydown. Do you think about reaccelerate veterinary practices? Just curious how you think about that over the next few years. Sabrina Simmons: Yes. Our first priority would always be to invest in our business to sustain growth going forward. So that's definitely the priority. That said, we go back to our statement that we have a lot of assets on our books already that really are ramping up now, vet hospitals predominantly the #1 on the list that are already on our books that we are ramping up for better returns. So we don't have to make big capital investments in those, and we, in fact, you'll hear us talk about more in the Q4 call, Chris, we have a set of those that where we're going to focus on bringing utilization up in 2026 as well without any large capital investments. So I view this as really great news because it provides a nice path for return improvement while not having to invest a lot of capital in it. So of course, though, we'll be looking at pockets and areas as we move forward and we finalize what kind of remodel prototype we want to land on how we'll start to bring those into our system. But there's no huge big capital spend necessary in the horizon, likely to increase some in '26, but no big, enormous dramatic change overall in profile because we have these assets in our books where we're increasing utilization. Now beyond that, beyond that priority to first invest in our business, the second, of course, is we are always looking, as I stated, on the first call when I talk to you guys, we want to bring down our leverage on an absolute basis. We also want to bring down our ratio. We're doing a terrific job with the growth and profitability of bringing down the ratio. So it's quite remarkable. We started the year at over 4x debt to EBITDA. And if we hit the midpoint of our new guidance, we should be below 3.5x net debt to EBITDA. So quite a bit of progress. And indeed, we'll look to opportunities to even potentially do some opportunistic debt pay down. Christopher Bottiglieri: Got you. That's really helpful. And then your gross margins were, I think, down 20 basis points on the product line. Is that primarily that tariff headwind you're referring to? Or is it also somehow -- or is like -- is the elasticity offsetting the ticket increase and there's also a headwind on top. Just curious by like tariff headwinds that you're referring to there where it's manifesting? Sabrina Simmons: I have our merch margins expanded both in our products and services. Christopher Bottiglieri: Sorry, I meant quarter-on-quarter, not year-on-year. Sabrina Simmons: Oh, quarter-on-quarter, sure. Yes, I would say that is primarily a little bit of tariff headwind coming in. Year-on-year, though, we are up in both products and services. Operator: Next question will come from Steve Forbes with Guggenheim Securities. Steven Forbes: Joel, you spoke about services in stores coming together. And I guess my question is, can you help us frame up sort of how you guys see that opportunity internally, whether it be how spending per customer sort of evolves as they engage in services, if they're a store-only customer or vice versa? Like any way to sort of talk about how like the net sales per customer evolves as they broaden their engagement across the store? Joel Anderson: Yes. Look, look, I think any great bricks-and-mortar retailer has to define their moat, has to define what differentiates them from anybody else. And services is definitely 1 of our moats, right? It's 1 of our key elements that is really hard for any other pet retailer to replicate in the way we built out grooming, hospitals, vet clinics, dog walking, dog training, all those elements. And so that's obviously an area there for we've leaned in the most, and we've made incredible progress with our existing assets, utilization we've improved, engagement improved. And then what you're getting at is the integration with the center of store with product. And so -- what's key to all that, Steve, as I look to '26 is layering that in with a membership program that really helps us better understand the profile of each 1 of our customers, how many are you using services? How many use services and merchandise, how many are buying in-store and online. And you put all those elements together, it starts to create profiles of different customers. And we really see -- honestly, the better we get at services, the halo effect that has on the overall business just gets stronger because it's something that's hard for anyone else to replicate. So service is probably the area that we made the most amount of progress, pleased with the results we're seeing there. And you'll continue to see us talk about that and -- but that gives you a little color on how I see it playing out turning into 2026. Steven Forbes: And then maybe if I just do a quick follow-up on that. Is there any way to set the baseline here on just sort of what percentage of your customers today actually buy services or any sort of baseline KPI that we can sort of begin to track as we think about your progression in the business? Joel Anderson: Yes. Look, I think at this point in time, I'm not going to get into the specifics on it at that level of detail. I mean, I think the baseline KPI to track as we look into the future, it will be transactions overall and then let us manage it at the different elements we have to serve up to the customer. But services will definitely be a key component to it, Steve, as we keep growing. Operator: Last question will come from Zack Fadem with Wells Fargo. Zachary Fadem: Is there a way to quantify the impact of moving away from less profitable sales and deemphasizing the member program in Q3. As it seems like you expect your Q4 comp to step down a bit more. I'm curious to what extent you're expecting those items to also impact Q4? Sabrina Simmons: Yes. I mean I'll just start by -- it's a pretty broad range, Zack, the implied Q4, so we can land anywhere in that range. Clearly, what we've stated all year very consistently is our primary focus this year was around expanding our margins, walking those unprofitable sales and building this very strong foundation upon which to start sales growth in 2026. But Joel, I'll let you take it from there, if you want to... Joel Anderson: Yes. I think -- Sabrina, I think you nailed it. And I think I'd add to that, like you asked what's the impact? Well, the impact you're seeing quite clearly is we're growing pet EBITDA market share. And so while sales are down, EBITDA is up. So clearly, we -- I think we've done a really nice job of identifying which sales are really onetime transactions and our empty calorie as I call them, versus which customers we want to grow lifetime value and be with us for the long term. And so you've seen that play out quarter after quarter for us as sales have been down consistently low single digits but bottom lines continue to improve. So as each quarter goes by, we get better at identifying those, largely, getting them out of our base. And you layer in a membership program, more strategic media buying aspect and all that will start to lead towards improvement in the top line with the bottom line as well. Zachary Fadem: Thanks, Joel. And then just to level set as we look ahead to 2026, I mean the expectation is to return to sales growth. I'm curious how generally you would frame broader category performance in dog and cat food, supplies, services, et cetera, and then how you would layer in the impact of both your initiatives? And then net store opening and closings to kind of get to that total sales growth? Joel Anderson: Yes. Look, I think it's too early now to spell that out specifically for 2026. I mean, clearly, if you look at what we published, you can see the consumables and supplies are negative this year and we're getting growth in services. We expect a return to growth in consumables and supplies going forward. And what I've got to just outline for you or translate for you is what I laid out today in terms of 4 pillars, how does that translate into growth at what time and what period next year. But a lot -- what you guys can't see is all the progress we're making here internally. And then we just got to put the pieces together for you so you can help you think about your model. But we haven't -- I think I answered on a few questions before. We're approaching '26 the same way we approached '25, outline the strategies and then execute. And the team is just getting better at that as every passing quarter goes by. Sabrina Simmons: Yes. And Zack, just to emphasize what Joel is saying, for sure, I think your thinking is in line with ours, where you always look at what's your base sales build, then we layer on all the many initiatives, which Joel has been outlining and we'll continue to get more granular as we go into '26 but we have all of those building blocks on top of that base, and they layer on throughout the year. So what you can count on is it's a gradual ramp. And then the last thing I'll say as a little bit of a preview is we would expect fewer net closures in 2026 than we had in 2025. And again, the 2025 expectation is about 20 net store closures. Operator: This concludes our question-and-answer session. I would like to turn the conference back over to Tina Romani for any closing remarks. Tina Romani: Perfect. Thanks so much, Joel and Sabrina, and thanks, everyone, for your time. That concludes our call, and we hope everyone has a wonderful holiday. Operator: The conference has now concluded. Thank you for attending today's presentation. You may now disconnect.
Operator: Good morning. Thank you for standing by, and welcome to Buckle's Third Quarter Earnings Release Webcast. [Operator Instructions]. Members of Buckle's management on the call today are Dennis Nelson, President and CEO; Tom Heacock, Senior Vice President of Finance, Treasurer and CFO; Adam Akerson, Vice President of Finance and Corporate Controller; and Brady Fritz, Senior Vice President, General Counsel and Corporate Secretary. Before beginning, the company would like to reiterate its policy of not providing future sales or earnings guidance. All forward-looking statements made on the call are pursuant to the safe harbor provisions of the Private Securities Litigation Reform Act of 1995. Actual results may differ materially due to risks and uncertainties described in the company's SEC filings. The company undertakes no obligation to publicly update or revise these statements, except as required by law. Additionally, the company does not authorize the reproduction or dissemination of transcripts or audio recordings of the company's quarterly conference calls without its expressed written consent. Any unauthorized reproductions or recordings of the calls should not be relied upon as the information may be inaccurate. As a reminder, today's webcast is being recorded. And I'd now like to turn the conference over to your host, Tom Heacock. Thomas Heacock: Good morning, and thanks for being with us this morning. Our November 21, 2025, press release reported that net income for the 13-week third quarter ended November 1, 2025, was $48.7 million or $0.96 per share on a diluted basis compared to net income of $44.2 million or $0.88 per share on a diluted basis for the prior year 13-week third quarter, which ended November 2, 2024. Year-to-date net income for the 39-week period ended November 1, 2025, was $128.9 million or $2.55 per share on a diluted basis, compared to net income of $118.3 million or $2.35 per share on a diluted basis for the prior year 39-week period ended November 2, 2024. Net sales for the 13-week third quarter increased 9.3% to $320.8 million compared to net sales of $293.6 million for the prior year 13-week third quarter. Comparable store sales for the quarter increased 8.3% in comparison to the same 13-week period in the prior year, and our online sales increased 13.6% to $53 million. Year-to-date net sales increased 7.2% to $898.7 million compared to net sales of $838.5 million for the prior year 39-week fiscal period. Comparable store sales for the year-to-date period increased 6.3% in comparison to the same 39-week period in the prior year, and our online sales increased 11.6% to $142.9 million. For the quarter, UPTs decreased approximately 1.5%, the average unit retail increased approximately 4% and the average transaction value increased about 2.5%. Year-to-date, UPTs decreased approximately 1%, the average unit retail increased approximately 3% and the average transaction value increased approximately 2%. Our gross margin for the quarter was 48%, a 30 basis point increase from 47.7% in the third quarter of 2024. The current quarter margin expansion was a result of 40 basis points of leverage buying, distribution and occupancy expenses, partially offset by a 10 basis point reduction in merchandise margins. Our year-to-date gross margin was 47.4%, up 50 basis points from 46.9% for the same period last year. The year-to-date increase was the result of a 20 basis point increase in merchandise margin, along with 30 basis points of leverage buying, distribution and occupancy expenses. Selling, general and administrative expenses for the quarter were 29% of net sales compared to 29.1% for the third quarter last year. And year-to-date, SG&A was 29.5% of net sales compared to 29.6% for the same period in the prior year. The third quarter decrease was due to a 35 basis point reduction related to nonrecurring digital commerce investments made a year ago, a 35 basis point decrease in store labor-related expenses and a 5 basis point decrease in certain other SG&A expense categories. These decreases were partially offset by a 50 basis point increase in incentive compensation accruals and a 15 basis point increase in G&A compensation-related expenses. Our operating margin for the quarter was 19% compared to 18.6% for the third quarter of fiscal 2024. And for the year-to-date period, our operating margin was 17.9% compared to 17.3% for the same period last year. Income tax expense as a percentage of pretax net income for both the current and prior year fiscal quarter was 24.5%, bringing third quarter net income to $48.7 million for fiscal 2025 compared to 44.2% -- $44.2 million for fiscal 2024. Income tax expense as a percentage of pretax net income for both the current and prior year, year-to-date periods was also 24.5% bringing year-to-date net income to $128.9 million for fiscal 2025 compared to $118.3 million in fiscal 2024. Our press release also included a balance sheet as of November 1, 2025, which included the following: Inventory of $165.8 million, which was up 11% from the same time a year ago and $371.3 million of total cash and investments. We ended the quarter with $162.3 million in fixed assets net of accumulated depreciation. Our capital expenditures for the quarter were $11.1 million and depreciation expense was $6.2 million. For the year-to-date period, capital expenditures were $34.5 million and depreciation expense was $18.2 million. Year-to-date capital spending is broken down as follows: $30.4 million for new store construction, store remodels and technology upgrades and $4.1 million for capital spending at the corporate headquarters and distribution center. During the quarter, we opened 2 new stores and completed 6 full store remodels, 3 of which were relocations in new outdoor shopping centers. Additionally, post quarter end and during November, we have opened 2 new stores and completed 2 store relocation projects in advance of the holiday selling season, which brings our year-to-date count through today to 6 new stores, 17 full remodels and 3 store closures. For the remainder of the year, we anticipate completing 4 additional full remodeling projects. Buckle ended the quarter with 442 retail stores in 42 states compared to 445 stores in 42 states as of the end of the third quarter last year. And now I'll turn it over to Adam Akerson, Vice President of Finance. Adam Akerson: Thanks, Tom, and good morning. Our women's business continued its acceleration in year-over-year growth rate during the quarter, with merchandise sales increasing about 19%, which was on top of 3% same week growth a year ago. For the quarter, our women's business represented approximately 51% of sales, which compares to 47% last year. This growth continued to be led by the performance of our denim category with women's denim increasing approximately 17.5% and average denim price points increasing from $81.15 in the third quarter of fiscal 2024 to $86.95 in the third quarter of fiscal '25. This AUR increase continues to be primarily the result of strong growth in our Buckle Black Label, which has outperformed the total denim business, along with strong growth of other higher price point national brands. Complementing our strong women's denim selection, our team continued delivering compelling trends and fashions for our guests, for the quarter, we achieved growth across all women's merchandise categories with the most notable growth in knits and sweaters, casual and fashion bottoms and accessories. In total, average women's price points increased about 6% from $49.95 to $53.05. On the men's side, we were pleased to see growth for the second consecutive quarter with men's merchandise sales up about 1% against the prior year, representing approximately 49% of total sales compared to 53% in the prior year. This growth was also led by our men's denim category, which was up about 1% for the quarter. Average denim price points increased from $88.10 in the third quarter of fiscal '24 to $88.15 in the third quarter of fiscal '25. In other categories, we saw nice performance in both our short and long sleeve tees business in a variety of lifestyles as well as strong selling of our vests, jackets and accessories. For the quarter, overall average men's price points increased approximately 2.5% from $54.30 to $55.70. On a combined basis, accessory sales for the quarter increased approximately 7.5% against the prior year, while footwear sales were essentially flat. These 2 categories accounted for approximately 10% and 4.5%, respectively, of third quarter net sales, which compares to 10% and 5% for each in the third quarter of fiscal '24. For the quarter, average accessory price points were up approximately 3.5% and average footwear price points were up 4.5%. Also on a combined basis, our kids business continued its strong growth trend, increasing approximately 22% year-over-year. This continues to be a category where our teams are excited to keep building the business and selection for our guests. For the quarter, denim accounted for approximately 46% of sales and tops accounted for approximately 29%, which compares to 46% and 29.5% for each in the third quarter of fiscal '24. As previously mentioned, with strong selling and trends in many of our brand styles, our private label business decreased as a percentage of our total mix for the quarter. For the quarter, private label represented 47.5% of sales versus 48.5% for the third quarter of fiscal 2024. And with that, we welcome your questions. Operator: [Operator Instructions]. Our first question comes from Mauricio. Mauricio Serna Vega: This is Mauricio Serna from UBS Research. First, maybe could you speak on a high level what you're seeing on the health of the U.S. consumer coming into the holiday season. There's been some talks about maybe some pressure on the lower income consumer. So I was interested in hearing from your side, what have you been seeing? And then also, could you speak about the denim business? I think you talked about the momentum in women's being up 17%. What do you -- how do you -- how are you thinking about the sustainability of this growth? And maybe could you talk about what you saw in men's denim demand over the quarter? Dennis Nelson: Thank you for the question. On the consumer, we haven't seen a big change in our stores. I mean the team and guests seem excited about our product response. There's probably a slight caution in some as our units per sale are off very slightly. But overall, we feel good about it. And if the guest is excited about the product and the quality we have, it's been going pretty well. The ladies denim business continues to be excellent. There's still a lot of variety of styles and fits. We've added some of our branded sources to the mix, which has added some higher price points, have been good for the business. And our fashion brands and our private brands continue to sell well. So we're optimistic about the gal's denim business throughout the rest of the year. On the men's denim, our private label brands are consistent and doing well, having good sell-throughs. We haven't seen as much from other brands adding to the private brands mix, but feel our denim business is solid in men's as well. Operator: There are no further questions in queue. [Operator Instructions]. Okay. It looks like we have another question from Mauricio. Mauricio Serna Vega: Great. Just on the other thing that I wanted to ask was the merchandise margin. It was down 10 basis points. Maybe could you elaborate on what were the puts and takes behind the merchandise margin trend in this quarter? Thomas Heacock: Thank you, Mauricio. This is Tom. Yes, merchandise margins were down 10 basis points for Q3 and up 10 basis points for Q2. So I think if you look year-to-date with everything going on with tariffs, we feel really strong about where we're at from a merchandise margin perspective. And we've been operating at a high level of merchandise margins for a long time and have continued to improve that. So both Q1 and Q2 were all-time highs merchandise margins and we were off just a little bit in Q3. So I feel really good about where we're at. The biggest drivers are really -- Adam called out the decrease slightly in private label business with some of the brands performing really well, especially in women's denim. That's the biggest driver probably of the shift this year and especially Q2 compared to Q3 and then a slight increase in costs with tariffs and other flow-throughs. Operator: There are no further questions in queue. [Operator Instructions]. Okay. It looks like there are no further questions. I will now turn the call back over to Buckle for any closing remarks. Thomas Heacock: Thank you for your participation today. It will be a quick call, but I wish everyone a wonderful weekend and a wonderful holiday season. So thank you for joining us today.
Operator: Good morning. My name is Jeannie, and I will be your conference operator today. I would like to welcome everyone to the TD SYNNEX Fourth Quarter and Full Year Fiscal 2025 Earnings Call. Today's call is being recorded and all lines have been placed on mute to prevent any background noise. After the speakers' remarks, there will be a question and answer session. If you would like to remove your question, press 1 again. We request that you limit yourself to one question to allow time for other participants to ask their questions. Thank you. At this time, for opening remarks, I would like to pass the call over to Nate Friedel, Head of Investor Relations at TD SYNNEX. Nate, you may begin. Thank you. Good morning, everyone, and thank you for joining us for today's call. Nate Friedel: With me today is Patrick Zammit, our CEO, and David Jordan, our CFO. Before we continue, let me remind you that today's discussion contains forward-looking statements within the meaning of the federal securities laws, including predictions, estimates, projections, or other statements about future events, including statements about our strategy, demand, plans and positioning, growth, cash flow, capital allocation, stockholder return, as well as our financial expectations for future fiscal periods. Actual results may differ materially from those mentioned in these forward-looking statements as a result of risks and uncertainties discussed in today's earnings release, in the Form 8-Ks we filed today, in the risk factors section of our Form 10-K, and our other reports and filings with the SEC. We do not intend to update any forward-looking statements. Also, during this call, we will reference certain non-GAAP financial information. Reconciliations of GAAP to non-GAAP results are included in our earnings press release and the related Form 8-K, available on our Investor Relations website, ir.tdsynex.com. This conference call is the property of TD SYNNEX and may not be recorded or rebroadcast without our permission. I will now turn the call over to Patrick. Patrick? Patrick Zammit: Thank you, Nate. Good morning, everyone, thank you for joining us today. We are pleased to report another set of record results that complete an outstanding year for our organization. Over the full year, our business excluding HIVE increased its gross billings in the high single digits year over year, while improving both its gross margin and operating margin profile. Additionally, Hive grew its gross billings double digits, and well above our expectations, and has made further progress expanding its set of offerings and diversifying its customer base. Turning to the fourth quarter, our non-GAAP gross billings of $24.3 billion represented an increase of 15% year over year, or 13% in constant currency, and non-GAAP diluted earnings per share of $3.83 represented an increase of 24% year over year. Both of these established new records for our company, demonstrating the value of our diversified business model, the successful execution of our long-term strategy. Within TD SYNNEX, excluding HIVE, our momentum continued with gross billings increasing 10% year over year, and gross profit and operating income each also increasing by double digits. Hive experienced another strong quarter, with gross billings increasing by more than 50% year over year, and ODM Centimeters gross billings increasing 39% year over year, driven by sustained broad-based demand in cloud data center infrastructure from our hyperscaler customers. HIVE's operating income also grew meaningfully year over year, and continues to become a larger portion of our overall mix. Our results reflect its strength across all regions and key technologies. North America continued to grow steadily supported by demand across each of our key customer segments, prioritization of increased security requirements, and ongoing shifts towards complex, multi-cloud architectures. Europe grew faster than we anticipated, as customers prioritized infrastructure software, PC device upgrades, modernization of aging infrastructure, despite the slower macroeconomic backdrop. We've seen over the last few quarters, Asia Pacific and Japan remain a key growth engine, driven by rapid cloud expansion, PC device upgrades, accelerating AI development, and strong demand from fast digitizing economies across the region. Lastly, our growth story in Latin America remains encouraging, delivering double-digit top-line momentum with strong engagement across our and customer base. Our performance is a direct outcome of executing on the strategy we outlined at investor day. As we enter 2026, we are sharpening execution around four focus areas that will define what we want to be known for. We will start with omnichannel engagement. Through disciplined investments in our partner-first digital portal, we've built a frictionless interface that meets customers wherever they transact, and simplifies the experience end to end. By pairing seamless digital engagement with our personalized relationship-driven support, our highly skilled teams help customers navigate complexity, and move beyond transactions, earning the role of trusted adviser and forging long-term partnerships. We enhanced our partner-first digital bridge functionality in Q4, with a new AI assistant that enables customers to transact in a self-service mode 24 by 7 in their working environment. This enhancement transforms how our customer sales teams access and act on information to support their end customers in real time. Our customers have already tested that the new capability has saved employees in sales and product procurement operations multiple hours per day. The industry is also recognizing our strength in this area. During the quarter, we were awarded UK iCloud Marketplace of the Year by CRN. We received this honor due to the differentiated quality of our platform, along with our leadership in customer enablement, and technical training. Helping our customers navigate what has been a transformative year in this space and ultimately accelerating growth throughout our cloud portfolio. The next strategic pillar is specialized go-to-market. Our collection of specialist approach combines deep technical expertise with a deep understanding of our customers' go-to-market strategy and needs. This dual competency accelerates technology adoption, and positions us as a growth catalyst for vendors and customers. It's a differentiated capability that strengthens stickiness and expands our wallet share in high-growth segments. Our Q4 accomplishments within this pillar include winning a global security RFP, that will enable us to expand our portfolio in existing geographies with large enterprise customers, is a segment that has not historically purchased through TD SYNNEX. We have chosen due to our global presence and deep security specialization as well as for our ability to unlock substantial cost savings for the vendor while still improving customer experience. Expect these customers will increasingly leverage our broader product and service portfolio over time, enabling them to consolidate spend, and capture additional growth in the market. Our emphasis on specialization has been recognized by our vendors as well. In Q4, Cisco named TD SYNNEX as distributor of the year globally, as well as regionally in The Americas and EMEA. These awards reflect how our specialization deep alignment with Cisco, and innovation across markets consistently deliver real business outcomes for our customers. Our next pillar is focused on delivering best-in-class enablement. We accelerate time to market by equipping our customers with advanced training certification programs, enablement tools, and precise resources and expertise tailored by technology, and customer segments. This approach reduces ramp-up time strengthens customer capabilities, and drives faster adoption of high-value solutions. Which ultimately improves productivity and expands our share of wallet. During Q4, we announced AI game plan, a new customer-led workshop experience designed to help their sales teams translate AI opportunities into real-world business outcomes for their end customers. Are just at the beginning, and we continue turning our vast data lake and algorithms into industry-leading scalable digital services that enhance experiences lower costs, and unlock new revenue and efficiency opportunities for our existing customers. These strategies work in concert to support and substantiate our final strategic pillar, expanding our brand visibility. Our brand promise making IT personal, describes our role as an indispensable partner in the technology channel. We aim to be visible, personal, and influential at every stage of the customer journey. Reinforcing trust and driving loyalty. This sustained presence amplifies our market relevance and underpins long-term growth. By bringing our strategy to life every day, across these four pillars, we are continuing to strengthen our competitive position as the strategic business partner that our partners can rely on to create more opportunities that deliver sustainable long-term growth. Moving to HIVE. We continue to experience sizable growth benefiting from broad-based demand for cloud data center infrastructure, across our hyperscaler customers. And we believe that we are very well positioned to continue to get more opportunities that showcase our ability to support a wide breadth of programs for our customers. Our customers are turning to us for, among other things, our production flexibility, favorable US footprint, ability to co-develop complex solutions, and secure supply chain. These differentiators position us to continue to be a trusted partner in the assembly and deployment of complete rack-level systems across all market environments, through time. Looking ahead, I am bullish on the long-term value proposition of HIVE and IT distribution. We believe the untapped market opportunities in front of us in both businesses remain substantial as we aim to service a greater portion of the overall IT market through time. Now I will pass it to David to go over the financial performance and outlook in more detail. David? David Jordan: Thanks, Patrick, and good morning, everyone. We're pleased to report a strong close to our fiscal year with fourth quarter results that exceeded the midpoint of our guidance across all key metrics. Gross billings increased 15% year over year reflecting broad-based strength across both distribution and highs. Our gross operating margins expanded year over year driven by a combination of operational efficiencies favorable mix, and disciplined margin management. Non-GAAP earnings per share increased 24% year over year delivering meaningful value for shareholders and underscoring the strength and value of our business model. Moving into the details. Our endpoint solutions portfolio increased gross billings 12% year over year due to continued demand for PCs driven by the ongoing Windows 11 refresh and sustained demand for premium devices. Which has continued to be a tailwind. Globally, PCs have now increased double digits for four consecutive quarters, and we expect continued momentum heading into the initial months of 2026. Our advanced solutions portfolio increased gross billings by 17% year over year and 8% year over year when excluding the impact of HIVE. Driven by meaningful growth in cloud, security, software, and other strategic technologies. Hive, which is reported within the advanced solutions portfolio, increased more than 50% year over year primarily due to strength in programs associated with server and networking rack builds. In the quarter, there was approximately 29% reduction from gross billings to net revenue, which was in line with expectations. Our net treatment as a percentage of billings continues to remain elevated versus the prior year, primarily driven by a higher mix of software within distribution and increases in certain hive programs. As a result, net revenue was $17.4 billion up 10% year over year and above the high end of our guidance range. Gross profit increased 15% year over year to $1.2 billion. Gross margin as a percentage of gross billings was 5%. Which was flat year over year. Non-GAAP SG and A expense was $698 million or 3% of gross billings, Our cost to gross profit percentage, which we define as the ratio of non-GAAP SG and A expense to gross profit was 58% in Q4. An improvement of approximately 100 basis points year over year, demonstrating our progress toward managing costs as a percentage of gross profit down over time. Non-GAAP operating income increased 18% year over year to $497 million Non-GAAP operating margin as a percentage of gross billings was 2.04%, representing a five basis point improvement year over year. Interest expense and finance charges was $88 million, an increase of $1 million year over year. Our non-GAAP effective tax rate was approximately 24% compared to 21% in the prior year. Total non-GAAP net income was $313 million and non-GAAP diluted earnings per share was $3.83. An increase of 24% year over year and another all-time high. For TD SYNNEX. Free cash flow was $1.4 billion driven by strong earnings growth and meaningful improvements in our cash conversion cycle quarter over quarter. This also brings our annual free cash flow to $1.4 billion which was well ahead of our expectations. FY '25 marks the third consecutive year that we have generated annual free cash flow of over $1 billion demonstrating our commitment to sustainable cash generation. Within the quarter, we returned $209 million to shareholders with $173 million in share repurchases and $36 million in dividend payments. In total, we returned $742 million to shareholders this fiscal year bringing our cumulative return to shareholders over the last three years to over $2.2 billion This is approximately 61% of our free cash flow during that same time period within the medium-term range of 50% to 75% outlined at our Investor Day. Underscoring our belief in the strength of our business and the commitment to creating long-term shareholder value. As of November 30, we have $1.2 billion remaining on our share repurchase authorization. Net working capital was $2.9 billion down approximately $300 million from the prior year. Our gross cash days were twelve days, a two-day improvement from the prior year which I'll talk more about shortly. We ended the quarter with $2.4 billion in cash and cash equivalents and debt of $4.6 billion Our gross leverage ratio was 2.4 times and our net leverage ratio was 1.1 times. You'll note that our cash position was elevated at year-end. This is the result of two primary factors. First, we successfully completed a new debt issuance during the quarter which will be used to pay off $700 million of debt that matures in August 2026. Additionally, as you'll see in our working capital, our teams across both distribution and Hive did an outstanding job driving cash flow and made meaningful improvements toward optimizing the return on capital for both businesses. At the same time, it's important to remember that the balance sheet is a snapshot at a single point in time. At year-end, we had a few large receipts come in just before period end that would have normally fallen into the next quarter. We estimate Q4 benefited a few $100 million, which will normalize in FY 2026. Going forward, we continue to be laser-focused on generating sustainable free cash flow and improving our return on invested capital. For the current quarter, our Board of Directors has approved a cash dividend of $0.48 per common share. Will be payable on 01/30/2026. To shareholders of record as of the close of business on 01/16/2026. Moving on to our outlook. For the '6, we expect non-GAAP gross billings in the range of $22.7 billion to $23.7 billion representing an increase of approximately 12% at the midpoint. Our outlook is based on a euro to dollar exchange rate of 1.16. Net revenue in the range of $15.1 billion to $15.9 billion which translates to an anticipated gross to net adjustment of 33%. Non-GAAP net income in the range of 243 to $283 million non-GAAP diluted earnings per share in the range of $3 to $3.5 per diluted share based on a weighted average shares outstanding of approximately 80.1 million. We are anticipating a cash outflow in Q1 in part due to typical seasonality of the business and due to the timing impact that benefited Q4, which we described earlier. We expect that our cumulative free cash flow over fiscal '25 and fiscal '26 will be in line with our medium-term framework, of 95% non-GAAP net income to free cash flow conversion. While we are not providing full-year guidance today, our long-term outlook remains consistent with the multiyear compounded annual growth rates that we outlined at our Investor Day earlier this year. We'll remain focused on delivering against that financial framework we've shared with you which includes stable growth, margin expansion over time, consistent cash generation, and deploying capital where it maximizes long-term value creation within our capital allocation framework. To close, we're proud of what we've achieved this year, strong financial performance, disciplined execution, and continued progress against our strategy. We're entering fiscal twenty-six with solid momentum, a healthy balance sheet, and a clear set of priorities that support durable growth. We'll remain focused on operational excellence and delivering long-term value to shareholders. With that, we'll open up the call for questions. Operator? Operator: Press star, then the number one on your telephone keypad. We request that you limit yourself to one question to allow time for other participants to ask their questions. If there is remaining time, you are welcome to re-queue with additional questions. Your first question comes from the line of Keith Housum with Northcoast Research. Please go ahead. Keith Housum: Good morning, gentlemen, and thanks for the opportunity here. Obviously, outstanding growth in Europe and Asia Pacific, especially Asia Pacific and Japan there. As we think about that growth here that's happening, guess, you talk about perhaps how much of it is market growth versus your ability to take market share and then second, how sustainable are some of these growth rates that we're seeing going forward? Patrick Zammit: Okay. Thanks, and good morning. So in FPGA, we for sure, we've experienced very nice, high double-digit growth. As you know, our share in the region is relatively low. So we are investing significantly in the region to gain share and grow of a market. So when you look at, the results, for sure, we gained significant share. We're also positioned in countries, especially India, where, as you know, the growth of the market is significantly above the average of the region. And the team is focused on product segments, vendors, and customer segments which should make the growth sustainable for the long run. So very, very pleased, very proud of the team. And very confident for the future. The only thing I would add is that it's not only the growth in sales. We're also experiencing an over-proportional growth in operating income in the region as the team is investing, but also keeping a good cost discipline. David Jordan: Great. And how about for Europe? Because Europe, obviously, was better than we would expect. You can say the macro conditions you have there. Patrick Zammit: So just, so we got some market data. Europe, the European market grew let's say, mid, mid-single digit, slightly better even than North America. But for sure, we had, our outstanding performance. We continue to gain significant share in the region. Have a strategy which is very well executed. Again, we are going after technologies, vendors, and customer segments. Where we can enjoy higher growth in the market. And that's what you are seeing in the results. David Jordan: Great. Thank you. I'll get back in queue. Nate Friedel: Good luck. Keith Housum: Bye. Your next question comes from the line of Ruplu Bhattacharya with Bank of America. Please go ahead. Ruplu Bhattacharya: Hi. Thanks for taking my questions. Patrick, you reported strong 15% growth in billings for 4Q and are guiding 12% billings growth for 1Q. How are you handicapping any end market demand destruction from higher component costs like DRAM and NAND And one for David, can you just update us on the CapEx spend for year as well as any investments planned for HIVE for 2026? Thank you. Patrick Zammit: Yes. So good morning. Thanks a lot for the question. So again, the guidance for Q1 reflects what we see from the regions, from the BUs, I can confirm that the memory price have increased dramatically, and what we are seeing already is an increase in ASP on a series of product families, especially PCs, servers, storage, So the ASP increase is on one hand, the tailwind in the short term. What would be interesting to see is what will be the impact on the volume going forward But again, specifically for Q1, the guidance reflects the result of the bottom-up exercise with the regions and the forecast is done by technology by country. So David Jordan: And, Ruplu, the only thing I would add is when you think about total CapEx, for TD SYNNEX, we're probably planning for a similar level of CapEx in '26 relative to '25. And that would include the investments needed to support Hive's continued growth. Ruplu Bhattacharya: Can I just clarify, have you actually seen any demand destruction from higher component cost and is that factored into your guidance? Patrick Zammit: So specifically, I haven't seen it. And, again, what is reflected in the guidance is the outcome of our bottom-up exercise. Ruplu Bhattacharya: Okay. Thank you for the details. Operator: Your next question comes from the line of Eric Woodring with Morgan Stanley. Please go ahead. Eric Woodring: Hey, guys. Good morning. Thank you very much for taking my question. And Patrick, I'm going to stay on the same line questioning there as Ruplu, which is just, can you maybe ask it a different way? Can you maybe help us understand what you're seeing in terms of any potential pull forward in either the November or the January just with customers wanting to get ahead of future pricing increases for any of those kind of memory exposed products you just mentioned, PC servers, storage, smartphones, and just how you might think more broadly. I know you're not guiding to fiscal twenty-six, but just how you think that this dynamic could have an impact on either revenue or profit seasonality for the year? Thanks so much. Patrick Zammit: Okay. So let me start with the broad forwards. So it's difficult to assess, but very pretty confident that we haven't had any I would say, material brought forward in the last quarter. Now, again, what's going so the Q1 guidance reflects the what the countries are seeing in the read in their region, and, again, for PC servers, and storage, If I look at the overall year, so the tailwind for us is clearly the increase. As you know, I mean, when, the vendors increase, their prices, we usually pass it through to the market. So no concerns, on the margin quality. On the demand, tailwind related to the ASP increase, And then what's going to be interesting to watch is what will be the impact on the volume. And, as you know, the elasticity will be different by product category. And probably the category which is going to be the most sensitive is PCs, But we have a very, very low position on consumer PCs. We primarily focus on commercial PC So I'm relatively confident that here, the elasticity should be, relatively low So I continue to be relatively optimistic about the prospects of the PC market. Let's not forget that the refresh is not over. There is I mean, it started a little bit later than expected, so we should continue to benefit from it. In the next quarter. And then when you look at storage and server, I think here, again, the elasticity related to the price increase should be relatively low. So again, on the demand, I think the demand is going to be driven by other considerations, the need for customers to, embrace AI, upgrade their servers. I mean, there's a server refresh happening as we speak, and it's not over. Again, I think on the demand, relatively, I should say, cautiously optimistic. And then the ASP increase should, should help. Operator: Your next question comes from the line of David Voigt with UBS. Please go ahead. David Voigt: Great. Thanks, guys. Maybe 1.5 for David. So David, you mentioned in your prepared remarks free cash flow cumulatively for 2025 and 2026 is going to be consistent with the long-term framework. Of 95% of net income. Given kind of the mix of business going into fiscal twenty twenty-six, it sounds like netted down is going to be a bigger portion of that based on the guide at least for Q1. Can you talk through kind of the mix of the revenue that drives that netted down effect? And then what sounds like a decline in free cash flow, even million of payments in Q4 that was pulled forward in '20 versus '25. David Jordan: Sure. So good morning, David. When we in our prepared remarks, we said we expect cumulative free cash flow across '25 and '26 to be within the 95% Got it. Historically, our business consumes cash in the first half and generates cash in the second half. What you saw in Q4 is we had a really, really strong cash flow quarter. And so some of that will normalize as we go into Q1. So we still feel really good about generating cash for the full year, but we do expect an outflow in Q1 that will ultimately, be recouped as we work through the balance of the year. And it's not it's not as much mix driven per se as it's just the additional cash that we generated in Q1 that will be Normalized or sorry, that we generated in Q4 that will be normalized in Q1. Operator: Your next question comes from the line of Adam Tindle with Raymond James. Please go ahead. Adam Tindle: Okay, thanks. Good morning. I wanna just acknowledge, Patrick, the strong return on capital, primarily great working capital management. But if I looked at the margin side of things, it does look like some of that is being a little bit suppressed, and you talk about investments in Hive. I wanted to ask about that. This has been an ongoing theme. I wonder if you could maybe just recap some of the prior investment decisions that you made in Hive and the outcomes that lead you to invest further, in Hive including, you know, any potential further new customers, for example. And for David, as we kind of, you know, look at this in the model, if you could maybe help us quantify or break out the investments in Hive. Is it you know, gonna increase throughout the year? Are we sort of at the right run rate? You know, what does this look like, you know, throughout, fiscal twenty-six? Thanks. David Jordan: So maybe I can start, and Patrick, chime in. So in the prepared remarks, we talked about HIVE grew meaningfully both billings and profit. And so I wouldn't impute that there's a margin issue. In terms of investments in we continue to invest in HIVE. So Patrick talked about we've invested in leadership. We've invested in the engineering team. We've invested in some additional capabilities within the site. We have enough capacity to support our current demand. And we'll continue to make investments to ensure Hive can truly be an end-to-end go-to player for tier one hyperscalers and others. And so we feel very good about how the business is performing, the investments we've made, and the prospects going forward. Operator: Your next question comes from the line of David Paige with RBC Capital Markets. Please go ahead. David Paige: Congrats on some really nice results here. Just a quick follow-up on Hive. The 50% growth. Is that come evenly split between ODM and Centimeters or both the customers? Or maybe just a little bit more details around the growth there? Thank you. Patrick Zammit: Yes. So good morning. So we had so as you know, we have our ODM Centimeters business. That one, grew very nicely. In line, if not slightly better than the pace of the market. And then we had a very strong, also quarter with, let's call it, supply chain, cut by division. As you know, this is a more lumpy opportunistic business. It's a service we render, so it highly dependent on what the customers are asking for. And in Q4, we had a very strong quarter. And, better than expected. So that's how I would summarize the sales growth for the quarter for Hive. Thank you. Operator: Your next question comes from the line of Joseph Cardoso with JPMorgan. Please go ahead. Joseph Cardoso: Maybe another follow-up on the Hive business. I just wanted to touch on, like, the progress that you're making with Hive relative to capturing additional share with your existing large customers there and perhaps what you're seeing from a portfolio or kind of the products that you're shipping there towards mix moving more towards AI servers networking racks, storage racks, and the opportunity to onboard potentially a new large customer beyond the two that you have today. Thank you. Patrick Zammit: Yes. Good morning. So again, I mean, we mentioned it at, in the prior calls. We continue to invest to expand the capabilities and capacity of Hive. And so we are very active in bidding on new programs, with our existing customers and potential new customers. I would say that, thanks to the investments we've made, especially in engineering, and some of the differentiators of HIVE in the market. Mean, we are seeing, we are making very good progress on, on winning some new programs and potentially new customers. I would say that, those programs take some time to ramp. So, again, when you look back at the our Q1 guidance, it reflects what we have as forecast for the next quarter. But going forward, yes, I would say we continue to make good progress and are confident about the prospects. Operator: Your next question comes from the line of Austin Baker with Loop Capital. Please go ahead. Austin Baker: Hey, guys. Thanks for taking the question. Just really quick, I guess, would love to understand how margins you view margins for Hive kind of going forward. Are they improving, normalizing as volume scales? And then lastly, how do you feel about the visibility for high programs today versus maybe this time last year? David Jordan: So I can take that one. We feel pretty good about the overall margin profile of TD SYNNEX. When you think about what we laid out at Investor Day was a couple of things. We want to grow operating profit faster than billings, and so we're constantly looking for ways both within Hive and within our distribution business to focus where we can make additional margin. And so, again, we feel very good about that business. Patrick? Patrick Zammit: Yeah. I would just add that, when I look at the pipeline and I compare it to where we were last year, I think we are in very healthy position. And, again, that's what is reflected in, in our Q1 guidance. Operator: Your next question comes from the line of Vincent Colicchio with Barrington Research. Please go ahead. Vincent Colicchio: Yeah, Patrick. Another good quarter on PCs. Just could you give us an update on your thinking in terms of what inning we're in here? Patrick Zammit: Yeah. So good morning. Thanks a lot. Yes. So as far as the game Q4, for PCs, broad-based, primarily driven, from commercial, So going forward, as I mentioned, I think that the refresh is not over. So, that tailwind should continue again in 2026. And we have also the weight of AIPCs who have a slightly higher ASP that should continue to be so there's still a lot of potential for upgrading the PCs and make them AI compatible in the market. So that should be a tailwind. We talked about the memory price increase impacting the ASP of the PCs, that should be gained a tailwind. And then you have the uncertainty related to the price on the demand. But, again, the fact that we are primarily focused on the commercial PCs, I mean, I think we are in a slightly better position than we would have a high weight of consumer PCs. So I would say for next year, I'm continuing to be confident about the prospects of the PC market. again, back to the guidance for Q1, I mean, the various assumptions have been taken into account. And are reflected in the guidance. Vincent Colicchio: And did AIPCs perform incrementally better this quarter? Patrick Zammit: to nicely increase. Yeah. It continues to the weight of AIPC continues So that's a positive. Vincent Colicchio: Thank you. Operator: Your next question comes from the line of David Voigt with UBS. Please go ahead. David Voigt: Hey guys, I just wanted to ask a follow-up, David. On the netted down impact, it looks like there's a big tick up in Q1. That's what I was trying to understand also. Is it mix driven? That's gonna be a bigger headwind to your revenue conversion, kind of can you talk about what's going on there from a netted down effect in the guide? David Jordan: Yep. And sorry. I missed that part of your question. That's my fault. No worries. So all good. Gross to net gross to net increased in Q4, and we've got an increase in to Q1. There's a couple of dynamics. One, strategic technologies continues to become a bigger portion of our business. A lot of that business is software, which, as you know, is netted. Additionally, within Hive, there are a number of programs that are also net. And as the mix changes, that does influence that metric. And so if you think about how we set Q1, that's probably an assumption of kind of the run rate gross to net that we expect for FY '26. Hopefully, that helps. David Voigt: And that would suggest that software and Hive continues to grow as a portion the overall billings pie. That a reasonable takeaway? David Jordan: Exactly right. You're right. David Voigt: Great. Thank you. Operator: There are no further questions at this time. I will now turn the call back over to Patrick for closing remarks. Patrick Zammit: So thank you, everyone, for joining us. I want to close by emphasizing that we'll remain committed to profitable growth and free cash flow generation. Our strategy is designed to ensure that every step forward strengthens our business and supports greater long-term value creation. With our reach, our people, our unique capabilities, and our momentum, we are confident in our ability to continue to succeed. Thank you, and have a great day. Operator: That concludes today's conference call. You may now disconnect. Have a nice day.
Operator: Greetings. Welcome to Helen of Troy Limited Third Quarter Fiscal 2026 Earnings Call. At this time, all participants are in a listen-only mode. A question and answer session will follow the formal presentation. Please note this conference is being recorded. I will now turn the conference over to Ann Racunis, Director of External Communications. Thank you. You may begin. Ann Racunis: Thank you, operator, and good morning, everyone. Welcome to Helen of Troy's Third Quarter Fiscal 2026 Earnings Conference Call. The agenda for the call this morning is as follows: I will begin with a brief discussion of forward-looking statements. Scott Azel, our CEO, will then share his thoughts and areas of focus. And Brian Grass, our CFO, will provide an overview of our financial performance in the third quarter and our expectations for the full year fiscal 2026. Following our prepared remarks, we will open up the call for Q&A. This conference call may contain certain forward-looking statements that are based on management's current expectations with respect to future events or financial performance. Generally, the words anticipates, believes, expects, and other similar words are words identifying forward-looking statements. Forward-looking statements are subject to a number of risks and uncertainties that could cause anticipated results to differ materially from the actual results. This conference call may also include information that may be considered non-GAAP financial information. These non-GAAP measures are not an alternative to GAAP financial information and may be calculated differently than the non-GAAP financial information disclosed by other parties. The company cautions listeners not to place undue reliance on forward-looking statements or non-GAAP information. Before I turn the call over to Scott, I would like to inform all interested parties that a copy of today's earnings release can be found on the Investor Relations section of the site by scrolling to the bottom of the homepage. The earnings release contains tables that reconcile non-GAAP financial measures to their corresponding GAAP-based measures. I will now turn the conference call over to Scott. Scott Azel: Thank you, Ann. Good morning, and happy New Year, everyone. I appreciate you joining our call. We delivered third quarter results in line with our outlook, reflecting disciplined execution by our global associates who have driven progress towards stabilizing the business despite a challenging external environment. While I'm encouraged by our Q3 progress, we remain fully focused on sharpening our priorities and executing as we fix the fundamentals and improve our performance trends. Recent trends reinforce our view that consumers are being selective. We continue to see a bifurcated economy. Robust spending from high-income households while lower middle-income consumers face significant inflation in essentials like rent, food, and insurance, making them increasingly cautious with discretionary purchases. Regardless, we need to win, and I know what's required. We will invest in our brands. We'll invest in innovation. And we'll invest in talent to restore this business to growth. And some of the initial steps we're taking to restore our business are reflected in the revised outlook for Q4 and the balance of the fiscal year, which Brian will outline shortly. First, I'm energized by the product innovation underway and the upcoming launches in fiscal 2027. We're investing in strengthening brand loyalty through storytelling, to deepen our connection with the consumer and advancing our commercial execution capabilities. These initiatives reflect our commitment to consumer engagement, growth, and delivering value for our stakeholders. Over the past four months, I visited offices around the globe, spoke with hundreds of associates and customers, conducted a comprehensive review of operations, technology capability, financial performance, and external benchmarks. These experiences have given us a fresh perspective, challenging the team to think more critically about long-term value drivers. My biggest takeaway, enthusiasm for our brands is strong. Partners, associates, and customers all want us to win. These conversations reinforce my commitment to improving how we operate, sharpen our priorities, and amplify our focus on consumers. Building on organizational changes put in place last summer, we've made strides to prepare for success. In October, I outlined four priorities: reenergize our brands and our people, adapting our structure to put the consumer at the center, strengthen the portfolio for predictable growth, improve asset efficiency while maintaining shareholder-friendly policies. This is informing our direction as we complete our FY '27 annual planning process and will inform our go-forward strategy. FY 2027 will be the first big step towards our future. More to come in the coming months. As a brand company, we win and lose with the consumer. And growth is our scoreboard. We will make bold choices, embrace new thinking, and learn from past decisions while minimizing disruption. Our growth priorities are clear. Staying true to our north star of the consumer, invest in brand building and editing and amplifying our focus, and execute with excellence. By fully leveraging the talent and skill sets that already exist. By keeping the consumer at the center, we sharpen priorities and move from slow and complex to fast and agile. Teams are untangling complexity to enable faster decision-making closer to the consumer as we speak. A growth priority is product innovation. I'm inspired by the passion, commitment, and expertise of our teams. I believe we can drive new product development by better understanding our consumers, allocating resources, and accelerating time to markets. Brands of our size can't do everything, but we must be focused and sharp as we drive separation from our competition. Each business will have a distinct strategy centered on two to three priorities. Making these tough choices will bring greater clarity to our brands, for employees, consumers, and investors. As we reposition the business, we plan to direct resources in a disciplined and targeted manner towards the most impactful opportunities and innovative ideas, allowing them to incubate and take hold. This will both strengthen our portfolio and drive momentum of those products and brands that have the best opportunities for growth. Not just for this quarter or next fiscal year, but for the long term as well. To fund these investments and decisions, and position us for long-term sustainable growth, we plan to stay focused on maximizing operational and balance sheet efficiency. A key ingredient of our success will also be the power of our organization to fully leverage talent and skill sets that already exist in the building. We recently welcomed back a key member of my leadership team to reignite the power of one. This is the plumbing that enables the work to be done more effectively at Helen of Troy. It's a common language of systems and processes and people. We must balance short-term performance and long-term aspiration. This work starts with my global leadership team and will be cascaded throughout the organization. We will continue to emphasize working capital efficiency and balance sheet health and productivity. A good example is the recently announced amendment to our credit agreement, which extends the leverage ratio holiday and updates the interest coverage ratio definition. These changes give us greater flexibility to navigate the evolving trade and external landscape. We look forward to sharing our fiscal 2027 outlook in April and plan to outline our long-term growth strategy in 2026. And now I'd like to briefly touch on quarterly business segment performance. Overall, net sales outperformed our expectations. Home and outdoor and beauty and wellness sales declined 6.7% and 0.5% respectively, while international sales fell 8.1%. Olive and June continues to outperform our profitability expectations delivering nearly $38 million in sales. While I am not satisfied with these overall results, I'm encouraged by some of the highlights across our portfolio. These give me confidence we can learn and replicate across our portfolio and execute. Our ability to grow and capture market share is a product of leadership choices and operational excellence. We plan to be more intentional on our agenda and sharpen our execution. Highlights include, we grew Osprey, Oxo, and Olive in June. We exceeded Olive in June internal expectations. We increased organic B2C revenue by 21%. And we delivered $29 million of free cash flow despite $58 million in tariff drag. Across our portfolio, we're delivering exciting innovation. In the home and outdoor segment, we launched Osprey and Hydro Flask cooler collaboration, combining Osprey's legendary carry technology with Hydro Flask leak-proof insulation for ultimate performance. Osprey also introduced a mountain-bound series of winter luggage, crafted with nanotube fabric for rugged, highly water-resistant protection for ski and snowboard gear. Hydro Flask delighted families with the Eric Carle collaboration, featuring the iconic Very Hungry Caterpillar in our insulated kids' bottle. OXO expanded its top baby-led weaning suite and added new tot and coffee SKUs at our top partners. This month marks the debut of OXO's Trident series cookware, which provides superior heat distribution and high-performance cooking without the hassle of cleanup. In beauty and wellness, Olive and June continued to introduce trend-right collections tied to holidays and events, including the Be Bold collection, Halloween designs, and festive holiday stickers. After quarter-end, Olive and June launched a playful collaboration with Peachy Babies, combining nails and slime for the most satisfying collab yet, along with products for kids and tweens, which is seeing strong early success at top retailers. For cold and flu season, Honeywell introduced two fresh new style Allergen Plus HEPA certified air purifiers, a three-in-one for large rooms and a tabletop for smaller spaces. These innovations, along with many more coming to market, give me increasing confidence we're focused on the right things to improve our business. I believe we can win for our consumer through innovation and marketplace execution. This allows us to return to revenue leadership, strong margins, and robust cash flow. But we know it won't be a straight line. We're making tough choices to invest in our future. We build our platform for growth and improve our financial profile through better operating leverage while we create greater competitive advantage across the portfolio. With that, I'm gonna turn it over to Brian to walk through the financial results and outlook. Brian Grass: Thank you, Scott. Good morning, everyone, and happy New Year. Today, we reported third-quarter net sales and adjusted EPS results in line with our expectations. I would like to thank our associates for their hard work in achieving our financial objectives for the quarter in what continues to be a challenging environment. Operationally, we made headway on improving our go-to-market effectiveness, leaning in on innovation for more product-driven growth, focusing on the fundamentals, and putting our brands back at the center, fully leveraging their unique strengths. Scott mentioned several new innovations in the market, and I'm excited by new launches planned for the coming year. There is renewed energy across our organization, reinforced by the culture work Scott mentioned. Our third-quarter results reflect progress towards simplifying operations, sharpening priorities, and increasing agility. But we know much more improvement is needed, and we continue to take decisive steps to position Helen of Troy for sustainable growth. On tariffs, we advanced mitigation strategies, including supplier diversification, SKU prioritization, cost reductions, and price increases. The majority of our price adjustments are now in place, but we are still navigating some parts of the market where we achieve less than full pricing realization due to stop shipments we believe are necessary to support consistent adoption of price increases by our retail partners, primarily impacting the beauty and wellness segment. We expect some residual impact from stop shipments to carry into the fourth quarter, which I will touch on later in my remarks. Year-to-date, gross unmitigated tariffs had a $31.3 million impact on gross profit, with the full-year impact expected to be in the range of $50 million to $55 million. We now expect less than a $30 million tariff impact on operating income for the full year, net of mitigation actions, up from our prior expectation of approximately $20 million, primarily driven by delayed timing of pricing realization. We remain on track to reduce our cost of goods sold subject to China tariffs to between 25% to 30% by 2026. Our diversification and dual sourcing strategies are reducing long-term supply chain risk, helping to insulate us from further policy changes or other geopolitical impacts. Turning to our results, consolidated net sales decreased 3.4%, favorable to our outlook range and a sequential improvement compared to the first and second quarters of the year. Organic net sales declined 10.8%, approximately 3.3 percentage points or $17.3 million of the organic revenue decline was driven by tariff-related revenue disruption, which includes the pause or cancellation of direct import orders from China, changing dynamics within the China market, and the impact of stop shipments referred to earlier. Home and outdoor net sales declined 6.7%. We saw strong demand for travel, technical, and lifestyle packs, strong holiday orders from brick-and-mortar retailers in the home category, and incremental revenue from tariff-related price increases, offset by softness in insulated beverageware, lower online sales in the home category, and lower overall closeout channel sales. Beauty and wellness net sales decreased 0.5%. Organic beauty and wellness sales declined 13.9%, approximately 4.5 percentage points or $12.9 million, driven by tariff-related disruption. In beauty, hair appliances and prestige liquids were impacted by soft consumer demand, competitive pressures, the cancellation of direct import orders, and lower closeout channel sales. Wellness was unfavorably impacted by lower international sales due to evolving dynamics in the China market, pricing-related stop shipments referred to earlier, and a below-average illness season. These headwinds were partially offset by a strong contribution from Olive and June of $37.7 million. Consolidated gross profit margin decreased 200 basis points to 46.9%, primarily due to the net unfavorable impact of higher tariffs and a less favorable inventory obsolescence impact year over year. These factors were partially offset by the favorable impact of Olive in June and lower commodity and product costs exclusive of tariffs. SG&A ratio increased 160 basis points, primarily due to the acquisition of Olive in June, higher outbound freight, higher annual incentive compensation expense compared to the same period last year, and unfavorable operating leverage. Lower gross profit margin and a higher SG&A ratio resulted in a consolidated adjusted operating margin decrease of 370 basis points to 12.9%, consisting of a decrease of 650 basis points for home and outdoor and 120 basis points for beauty and wellness. The declines were driven primarily by the net unfavorable impact of tariffs, higher incentive compensation expense, and unfavorable operating leverage, partially offset by margin accretion from Olive and June in the beauty and wellness segment. We incurred higher interest expense due to higher average borrowings driven by the Olive and June acquisition, higher inventory carrying costs due to tariffs, and higher CapEx spend as we make supplier transitions out of China. Higher interest expense was partially offset by lower adjusted income tax expense, resulting in adjusted EPS of $1.71. Inventory ended at $505 million, which includes $35 million in incremental tariff-related costs year over year and incremental inventory from the Olive and June acquisition, compared to $451 million at the same time last year. Debt closed at $892 million with $325 million in revolver availability. Our net leverage ratio was 3.77 times, compared to 3.54 times at the end of the second quarter. The increase in our leverage was due to lower trailing twelve-month EBITDA, driven primarily by higher tariff costs. The unfavorable cash flow and balance sheet impacts of tariffs on our outstanding debt balance. Year-to-date free cash flow was $29 million, which includes $58 million of incremental cash outflows for tariff payments and the cost of supplier transitions out of China. Now I'd like to turn to our annual outlook. We've tightened our range on the top line to $1.758 billion to $1.773 billion, with home and outdoor net sales of $812 to $819 million, compared to our previous expectation of $800 to $819 million. Beauty and wellness net sales of $946 to $954 million, compared to our previous expectation of $939 to $961 million. We lowered our adjusted EPS expectations to a range of $3.25 to $3.75, driven by less than full pricing realization, consumer trade-down behavior, and less favorable mix, higher trade and promotion expense, and the preservation of investments in our people and brands to build revenue momentum and more favorable operating leverage going forward. We expect the full-year GAAP SG&A ratio in the range of 38% to 40%. Expect a full-year adjusted effective tax rate in the range of 13.4% to 14.7%. Inventory is expected to be $475 million to $490 million at year-end, which includes an estimated $39 million of incremental costs from tariffs. Our outlook includes the ongoing impact from changing dynamics in the China market, lapping of tariff-related order pull-forward in 2025, and residual stop shipments to support consistent tariff pricing adoption. We expect modest improvements in direct import orders and select programs shifting to warehouse replenishment. Overall, we expect retailers to continue to closely manage inventories. Despite a recent uptick in flu incidents, overall incidents for the full season and upper respiratory illness in particular, are tracking well below both last year and the trailing three-season average. The retailer inventories look to be sufficiently stocked during the remainder of the fourth quarter to supply demand should illness continue to increase. Given the challenging operating environment, we expect margin pressure to persist through the fourth quarter, reflecting consumer trade-down, a more promotional environment, a delay in achieving full pricing realization, and cautious retail behavior. While we remain focused on cost control, we are preserving key strategic investments in support of our people, new product innovation, stronger brand loyalty, and better commercial execution. As we transition back to growth mode, we expect to have a bias towards revenue improvement over cost reduction in order to recapture our operating leverage. Before I conclude my remarks, I want to direct your attention to the investor presentation posted to our website, which contains additional information and perspective on our third-quarter results and our outlook for the remainder of the year. And with that, I'll turn it back to the operator for Q&A. Operator: Thank you. We will now conduct a question and answer session. If you would like to ask a question, you may press 2 if you would like to remove your question from the queue. And for participants using speaker equipment, it may be necessary to pick up your handset before pressing the star keys. We ask that you please limit to one question and one follow-up question and requeue for additional questions. Our first question is from Rupesh Parikh with Oppenheimer and Company. Please proceed. Rupesh Parikh: Thanks for taking my question. So I guess just going back to some of the top-line trends and the performance of your brands, it's helpful color in terms of the brands that are actually growing. But just curious, as you look at some of the declining categories, where there's beverageware, hair appliances, etcetera, where you are with, you know, in the progress and turning around these brands? Scott Azel: Good morning, Rupesh. Yeah. Thank you. Good question. First, yeah, we are very encouraged by our results on the brink green sheet brands like Osprey, Olive and June, OXO, Braun, and Pure. They continue to meet and exceed our internal expectations. We have work to do in the area that you identified, and we are focused on that. Everything from innovation on bringing new products to markets that are in the kitchen or kinda in the lab as we speak. Making sure we've got the right commercial triangle in place, which is a combination of marketing, operations, and commercial excellence. And then making sure that we're providing the right resources to the right opportunities that are gonna create the right value. So, that's our methodical approach. We feel very confident in the work that we're doing. As we said in kind of our pre-recorded remarks, our performance will not be a straight line. Some of our brands will move at a much faster rate. The ones that you identified, we're working on aggressively. Rupesh Parikh: Great. And then I guess my follow-up question just to help frame, you know, where we are right now. So as, you know, as you look at your earnings guidance this year, is there any way to say whether you believe that maybe that's the bottom in earnings power? I don't know if there's any insight at this point or is it helping us frame how to think about next year and whether we can take this year's guidance as maybe a baseline to build upon? Scott Azel: Yeah. What I'd say is this, and I'm definitely gonna let Brian opine on it, maybe more specifics. The bottom line is this company's done probably a pretty good job of trying to get its cost structure in place the last several years. But our focus right now needs to be around growth, and that means we gotta invest in innovation, brand building, and marketplace excellence in terms of how we execute. And that's what you're gonna see we're investing in in quarter four. As well as we talk about our long-range plan, which you'll see the first big steps in FY 2027. It will be about growing the top line responsibly but growing the top line and making sure our brands are winning. As well as managing against our earnings power. Brian, anything to add? Brian Grass: Just a little bit to say. We're shifting our focus to revenue improvement versus cost reduction. And we think the benefit of operating leverage is gonna be greater than any benefit we can get from trying to just purely cut costs. You know, that takes a little bit more time, but that's a much more effective and sustainable strategy, and it's gonna be better for the long-term health of the business. So we're making a bit of a pivot. Hopefully, you can hear that. And our focus is gonna be on revenue improvements and revenue growth first and then, you know, growth and profitability will come after that. Rupesh Parikh: Great. Thank you for all the color. I'll pass it on. Our next question is from Bob Labick with CJS Securities. Please proceed. Bob Labick: Good morning, and happy New Year. Thanks for taking our questions. Scott Azel: Hey, Bob. Hey. Bob Labick: So, you know, one of the focuses one of the key things you're focused on is the, you know, return to consumer-centric innovation and, you know, obviously, you've had that in the past. Maybe, you know, was it deemphasized? Why was it deemphasized as kind of part of the question. Then the next thing is how long does that take? And so, like, you know, when should we see, you know, that reemphasis translate into the top line? Because as you said, your scorecard's gonna be returned to revenue growth. And the shift back to consumer-centric. How does that play out? What are you actually doing more specifically now than you didn't do last year, and how long does it take to flow through? Scott Azel: Bob, this is Scott. Good question. I can only give you a headline on the past because I wasn't here. But, you know, the bottom line, you know, I've seen companies go through different transitions. Some they think that they can that brands are in a better place than they are or they can misread the market I don't know. But I know this going forward that if I've traveled the globe, and I spent time with teammates and I've analyzed our brands, that, you know, we have a 30% to 40% of our portfolio that has innovation and opportunity to grow faster, going to invest in them as we speak, and you'll see the benefits of that in quarter four as well as in FY 2027. Have a number of our brands in our portfolio that have been underinvested in, have not been organizationally set up for success, have for whatever reason missed the mark on the consumer, that we're working on the renovation steps as we speak. To get them in a position to bend the curve. Bend the curve means to stabilize the business, as we go into FY '27 and grow further in FY '28 and beyond. But the net is we would expect that you're gonna see an improvement in our business quarter four on as we go forward as we come through and talk about our FY '27 plan. But the key is, as Brian said and what I said earlier, is there is a bias towards healthy brands and growing and winning in our categories first. And also then delivering value as we do that. Bob Labick: Okay. Great. And then, you talked about a bunch of, you know, I guess, new releases and I'm looking at the investor presentation right now. Can you maybe focus us on a few of the major releases or milestones of, you know, of key brands that should, you know, be more meaningful than not. So, you know, things for us to judge on success next year and not trying to, you know, pin you to a quarter for return to growth, but just really what are the kind of, you know, big releases that you think should move the needle and we can watch in 2026, calendar '26? Scott Azel: Yep. Bob, as you know, I can't speak on, you know, a specific future, innovation that's not out in the public domain. But what I can say is brands like Osprey, Olive and June, Braun, OXO, just like the performance we've had in the most recent quarter, we expect that to continue. And as we funnel resources to these brands that I believe do a lot more now, you're gonna see a lot more acceleration against them. I don't know if I'm really getting to your question of, like, a very specific launch. That's happening in the future, but that's our focus. I don't know, Brian. Yeah. I can add a little in without getting too specific. Brian Grass: I mean, we have things teed up in Hydro Flask that allows us to play, as you and I have talked about, Bob, kind of in, you know, the areas where we wanna reach the consumer, but we believe it's right for Hydro Flask to play in. And it's not all areas, but we have a strategy there. We're excited about that. We have some category adjacency plans. It's Hydro Flask too that we're excited about, and those will be coming out soon. You know, in the brands that Scott didn't mention where, you know, we've got more green shoots, we've got exciting innovation going on there, and that includes Pure. That includes Vicks, and that includes Honeywell. So, you know, the point I'd like to make is innovation wasn't lost in all of our businesses and all of our brands. We had brands that were doing that well, Osprey, OXO. And Olive and June, some of the others, but it was a little bit lost in some of these other brands that we're talking about. And we have strong plans and strong innovation in the road map that is already in the process of being developed. And so it's not like we're starting today on those development plans. They're well underway, and they'll be coming out soon. And it's, you know, it's the accumulation of all of them. There's not, like, one big launch that really does it. It's really making sure that all your businesses have it and have a strong pipeline so that there's no gaps. Just had a little bit too much of gaps in the past. Bob Labick: Okay. Got it. Thank you very much. Operator: Our next question is from Peter Grom with UBS. Please proceed. Peter Grom: Thank you. Good morning, everyone. So two questions for me, and I'll just start with this. But I guess I was just hoping to get some perspective on what you're seeing from a category standpoint. I think there's a lot of cross currents that are driving the top-line trends that we are seeing in your results. If you strip out all of the noise, do you have a view on kind of where underlying demand in your categories is trending today? And then I guess just looking ahead, there seems to be some optimism on the U.S. consumer, tax refunds, etcetera. So just kind of curious do you think that some of these things could drive some sequential improvement in category demand following what's been, you know, very challenging few years here. Scott Azel: Well, I'll take the first stab, Peter. First of all, absolutely. When I step back, from the standpoint that, even in the most challenging times, brands that have tight brand propositions, relevant innovation, and connect with the consumer, meeting them where they are, have a way to continue to win. And like brands like Osprey, Olive and June, OXO, Braun, Pure, in our portfolio. You know, they will do well or when the consumers are in a better place. The other brands in our portfolio that have not performed over where they need to be, they have nothing but upside opportunity to bend the curve through better innovation, more focused storytelling, and an organization set up that enables them to be close to the consumer and execute with excellence. Which today we're not doing and we will do better. You'll see that a little bit in our outlook on Q4 of why we're not pulling down our revenue. But you're also gonna see that as you look at FY 2027, what we expect going forward in terms of improving our performance from a top-line standpoint on a broader range of brands beyond the ones we have today. Brian Grass: I'd just add, Peter, that I think, you know, the question you're asking is a good one, but it's hard to answer. Like, in the moment, there's a lot of things in the market related to higher pricing, price increases, and things like that. And, you know, the consumer has been resilient up until this point. I think the key is how will they respond to kind of this next phase of inflation and pricing in the market, and we'll have to wait and see. But we have plenty of category growth in some of our categories. We have some that are decreasing, but we also have plenty of them that are increasing. And so we're gonna lean into that. Peter Grom: No. That's super helpful. And then I guess just a follow-up on just kind of the 4Q outlook and just kind of the big divergence on the bottom line versus the prior outlook? Because Scott, to your point, the sales are kind of in line with your prior outlook. So can you maybe speak to the moving pieces where things are playing out differently than what you would have expected? And I guess this is maybe asking Rupesh's question differently. Know we'll get 27 guidance enabled. But I guess, would you say there's a 4Q dynamic is more one-time in nature? Or are there things investors should be extrapolating, you know, from this leisure exit rate out to next year? Scott Azel: I'll take the first part and let Brian opine on it. First of all, as you look at Q4, I think of it like kind of a wedge. This is the beginning. We want to invest in our brands for growth. I want the word growth to be a part of what we're about, and it's responsible growth. And what we're doing is we believe that we can grow the top line if we make the investment against new product innovation, better storytelling, getting our organization with the consumer at the center, we can bend the performance. And you're gonna see a little bit of that in Q4, and you'll see a lot more of that big steps forward as we go into FY 2027. But, you know, as far as outlook long term, of course, we're not ready to publish that. I don't know if Brian can share any more color or texture to that. Brian Grass: I can give you some good perspective on Q4 and then, you know, give you some dimensionality of how to feel about going forward from that. And I just say to tag on to what Scott was saying, you know, our conclusion is more of the same. It's gonna get us where we wanna go. We've been trying to cut our way to better performance over the last two to three years, and it's not sustainable. And we're at a point where it's gonna be very difficult to continue to do that. We're shifting our focus to revenue improvement versus cost reduction. To get better operating leverage. That's gonna take more time. And I think in the short term, you're gonna see more pressure on the bottom line as we look to lift the top line. And then once the top line is lifting, it makes solving the bottom line much easier and much more healthy. With respect to the fourth quarter in particular, there's a slide on Page 14 in the investor presentation, which will give you an illustration. The main driver in the change is really unfavorable pricing realization. So in the third quarter is when our pricing was really implemented. And compared to our original expectations, we did not achieve we've got basically leakage versus what our original expectations were both in realization of the price increase margin that we wanted to gain and stop shipments that we're in the process of implementing to enforce uniform pricing adoption. And we think that's crucial in getting price increases to stick. They have to be uniformly adopted. Otherwise, it doesn't work. And the other thing I'll note is that pricing leakage drops straight to the bottom line. It has so it has an outsized impact on the bottom line versus the revenue impact. And so be aware of that. We also built in the expectation of higher consumer trade-down because we are seeing that. And a less favorable mix. We and I mentioned some of this in my remarks. We also assume higher promotion expense and margin compression as we look to tighten up our balance sheet. And really get our inventory levels in the right place. And we expect that to occur in the fourth quarter. And then the last point I'd make or last two points, while we believe overall retail inventory is healthy, there were a couple areas where we had inventory that was higher than we would have liked. And so we built in the assumption that that's gonna rebalance in the fourth quarter. And then the last point is we're preserving key investments in our people, innovation, and brands. And actually want to reinstate some of what we cut in the first three quarters of the year. And so we're gonna make those choices for the fourth quarter so that we can get to this revenue improvement, you know, and better operating leverage as we go forward. So that's a little bit of and I would say, look. There's gotta be some continuation of investment back into growth as we go to fiscal 2027, but we're not prepared to give you anything specific with respect to fiscal 2027 at this time. Peter Grom: Okay. That's helpful. And lastly, maybe just quickly, you know, a lot of focus on this call around the top line getting these brands back to healthy levels of growth. And so, Scott, I'd kinda be curious as you've kinda dug in and started to study this business more over the last several months. Is portfolio optimization part of that exercise? Or do you kind of see the same opportunity across the entire brand portfolio? Scott Azel: Yeah, Bob. Great question. You know, I'd say this. We're always, you know, as we do our strategic review let me back up. You know, I've been here four months. I focused on four areas that I think about the last four months. And one of which has been job one, which is kind of what how do we get their aspiration looking out for the future? And then what are our big steps in FY '27? As a part of that process, which we kicked off in the last thirty days, which you'll see more of it in the coming months, is looking at our portfolio, but fundamentally, as I talked about earlier, we have 30% to 40% of our brands that have, you know, upside opportunity given investment and given the right focus. And we're gonna kinda step down on them, step down in a good way, push them forward, then we have a number of our brands that we have to evaluate what is the right model going forward. How do we invest, what's the right operating model. There's so much opportunity there. And then, like, any company, we're always gonna be evaluating our portfolio over the next, you know, as we look at our strategic plan, on what brands are best fit and which ones don't. But at this point, I don't have any specific answer on that. Bob Labick: Great. Thank you so much for all the color. I'll pass it on. Our next question is from Susan Anderson with Canaccord Genuity. Please proceed. Susan Anderson: Hi, good morning. Thanks for taking my question. Maybe just a follow-up on the innovation front. I guess, I was curious are there certain areas such as, you know, maybe the most underperforming areas that you're gonna touch first, or is this something where you're just kinda gonna touch all areas of the portfolio? And then in beauty, I guess, you know, that industry obviously has seen growth the entire time. So just kinda curious what you think kinda went wrong there and what you need to do to kinda turn Drybar around whole on the liquid side and fixture side. And then I'm not sure if I heard, but did you say how Pearl Smith performed in the quarter? Thanks. Scott Azel: Yeah. First of all, yep, Susan, thank you. From an innovation standpoint, we can't run at every innovation equally. So if we just cannot do that, we've gotta be really smart about it. And we have several brands that I would say today, can do a lot more, can grow a lot faster with the right level of support. And we're gonna make sure as we go in FY '27 that they get what they need. And then we have a number of brands that call that are in the post phase of renovation that need work. Any work from everything on getting sharp on the consumer, sharp on the product pipeline, sharp on the structure to support the brand in the marketplace. And we're gonna do that work. So as I expect our growth curve going forward to be not a straight line, we're gonna have parts of our portfolio growing very at a faster rate, and then some parts, we're just trying to stabilize. We go into FY '27. Specifically around beauty, we've got an opportunity. We got we got some work to do in that area. And I can tell you this, the team is on it. They've gone through a big reset moment in the last twenty-four months. FY '27, we should see some improvement, but it'll be much more around stabilization and clarity of future than being in the green bucket of high growth, which we're getting from things like Olive and June. Osprey, and Braun, etcetera. I don't know, Brian, you have anything you wanna add. Brian Grass: I just say on Pearl Smith's, I mean, we're not giving that level of detail. Pearl Smith didn't have the best quarter in terms of our shipments in the quarter, but I wouldn't say that's indicative of the health of that business. Susan Anderson: Okay. Great. And then maybe just a follow-up. I guess, if you could talk about kinda how you're thinking about your leverage. I guess, where would you like it to go longer term? And, I guess, you know, I guess, how long do you think it would take you to reach that goal? And then maybe just a follow-up on, you know, kind of the portfolio and potentially rationalizing some of it. I guess, do you think there's opportunity there maybe even to help pay down quicker some of your leverage? Thanks. Scott Azel: Yeah. I'll take the first step, and Brian can step in. You know, in addition to I know you've growth, which I fundamentally think is a job one for Helen of Troy, and we have that opportunity against our brand. In addition to that, going as you'll hear in our plan forward, getting our balance sheet healthy and driving operational efficiency will also be kind of an in tandem strategic priority for us that we're gonna be focused on. I'll let Brian talk more about the leverage ratio. But specifically around the portfolio, I mean, just I've been doing this world of kinda running portfolios of brands for many years and always reevaluating the portfolio mid, short, mid, and long term. And I'd say in the short term, you know, we're gonna be focused on how do we bend the curve and improve our performance from our green brand and through and as well as our renovation brand. I think midterm and long term, we'll be looking at what is the right portfolio for Helen of Troy, and how does that create the long-term value for the company. We're not at a position today to or I'm not I'm not holding back right now that I have a specific specific brand and I'm like, oh, it shouldn't be there because we're doing the hard work of saying, how do we drive the right strategic plan for the company? And we're just not there yet. But, it's definitely something we will be considering and that she will wrestle with as we do the work. Do you have anything you wanna add on the leverage ratio piece? Yes. Sure. Go ahead. Go ahead. Let's turn it over to Brian. Brian Grass: Yeah. I just say, look. We have a base plan that we feel really good about in terms of our leverage and our ability to bring leverage down. We've got a big opportunity to tighten our balance sheet and make it more productive. We've been working on that, and we're gonna double down on that area of focus. That's you heard some of my comments earlier about inventory. We're gonna tighten up our inventory, which will produce a lot of cash, and we're gonna put that to work to pay down the debt. We also have some longer-term assets that we can look to monetize and we can consolidate from three distribution centers to two. That's gonna take a little time, but that's on our mind. So I would say that that's the base plan and plan A that we're kinda working first. But as Scott said, we're always, you know, thinking about divestiture, and I'll tell you, we get inbound interest on some of our brands. You know, on a regular basis. I think our focus is more on the plan A at this point while we're maybe thinking about and working on the plan B of divestiture. Divestitures are very distracting. They take a lot of work, and you can put all that work in and to the end, and you don't get the value that you're looking for. And you may not be successful. We have to be very choiceful about the ones that we're going to invest that level of work and time into. And I think Scott needs time to build his growth strategy and really look at this. And then once we've done all that and done that assessment, then I think we're better prepared to say we wanna focus on, you know, x, y, or z. So that's how we think about it. Susan Anderson: Okay. Great. That was very helpful, you guys. Thanks for all the details. Good luck in the New Year. Operator: Thank you. Our next question is from Olivia Tong with Raymond James. Please proceed. Olivia Tong: Great. Thanks. Good morning, and happy New Year. Based on the innovations you're planning for next year, do you think you find a revenue rebase in FY '27 or perhaps when do you think you can omit the commentary around the recovery not being linear? I know it's unlikely you'll provide a lot of building blocks for fiscal '27, but there are quite a few exogenous issues that hit this year. Both on revenue and profitability, most notably, obviously, the tariff hit. So what are the incremental hits that we should be thinking about after tariffs begin to enter the base in the late spring? Brian Grass: Yeah. I mean, Olivia, the first part of your conversation was, you know, kinda when do you think we'll inflect on it from a revenue perspective, and I wanna address that. And I think Scott, you know, can also address a piece of it. But then I think you're also saying, look. You had some exogenous headwinds during the year that you don't have to repeat as you go into next year, and I would agree with that sentiment. We had a lot of disruption in our revenue, you know, related to tariffs and direct imports and China dynamics. That is stabilizing. We still have work to do to ensure that we can recover all of that revenue base as we go into next year, and I'm not making a commitment on that at this point. We're doing the work, and we're trying to recapture all that revenue. And I think it's definitely no matter what. It's a definite building block year over year because we already know that some of that's back in our base. But whether we can get all of it is still an open question. So I, you know, I can't tell you to what extent at this point, but it's a work in process. And, yeah, the tariff situation is better. I think the hopefully, what you're hearing from our commentary though is that benefit that we're gonna get from things like tariff stabilization and they reduce the rate, and, you know, we now have pricing in the market. They're even talking about refunds potentially with the Supreme Court. We wanna put that back into the business to make sure that we have steady, consistent, reliable revenue growth. And then I think the algorithm on the profit improvement comes in. But that's gonna take a little bit of time. We're gonna focus on revenue first. We get that strong. Everything else kinda takes care of itself. But I don't expect that immediately. We gotta get the revenue back first, and then we're gonna two-step it to the profit. Olivia Tong: Got it. Maybe if I could double click on that about what you think is a potential steady-state operating margin for the company. Do you think you can get back to double-digit EBIT margin over time? If so, what sort of needs to happen to get there and what's your view on timing of that? Brian Grass: Yeah. I do think we can get back to that. But, again, hopefully, it we're not gonna time warp back to margins from three years ago. That's not the way it's gonna work. We're going as we get to revenue improvement first, then revenue growth, then we'll use the operating leverage to have some kind of an algorithm that delivers on profit growth to a degree, but we're gonna over-index on the revenue piece of it. So I don't wanna give you a specific margin at this point, but what I will tell you is we will once we get back to revenue growth, we will have an algorithm that produces margin expansion. And, you know, if it's two points of revenue growth, then it's probably 20 bps of margin expansion. If it's five points of revenue growth, maybe it's 50 points of revenue expansion. But just to be clear, that's a couple steps away. We have to get to revenue improvement first, then consistent revenue growth, then we'll focus on margin expansion. Olivia Tong: Got it. Thank you. Operator: We have reached the end of our question and answer session. I would like to turn the conference back over to management for closing remarks. Scott Azel: Thank you very much, everyone. With renewed enthusiasm across the company, we're ready to leverage our portfolio and return to sustainable, profitable growth. Our path to our aspiration is becoming clear. This leadership team is determined to show sequential improvement across our business in the coming quarters. We will do this by staying focused on our North Star, which is keeping the consumer at the center of everything we do. By realigning our commercial triangle of product, sales, and marketing, we are reinvigorating brand building and strengthening retail operation execution. Our teams are energized. We're ready to fully leverage our diverse portfolio of leading brands to get us back to a path to growth. Thank you for participating today. We look forward to speaking with many of you at the ICR conference and the virtual CJS conference next week. Have a good day. Operator: Thank you. This will conclude today's conference. You may disconnect at this time, and thank you for your participation.
Operator: Answer session will follow the formal presentation. As a reminder, this conference call is being recorded. It is now my pleasure to introduce Lisa Fortuna, from Financial Profiles. Miss Fortuna, please go ahead. Good afternoon, everyone. Welcome to the Simulations Plus Fourth Quarter Fiscal Year 2025 Financial Results Conference Call. Lisa Fortuna: With me today are Shawn O'Connor, Chief Executive Officer, and William Frederick, Chief Financial Officer of Simulations Plus. Please note that we updated our quarterly earnings presentation which will serve as a supplement to today's prepared remarks. You can access the presentation on our Investor Relations website at simulationsplus.com. After management's commentary, we will open the call for questions. As a reminder, the information discussed today may include forward-looking statements that involve risks and uncertainties. Words like believe, expect, and anticipate refer to our best estimates as of this call and actual future results could differ significantly from these statements. Further information on the company's risk factors is contained in the company's quarterly and annual reports and filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission. In the remarks or responses to questions, management may mention some non-GAAP financial measures. Reconciliations of these non-GAAP financial measures to those most directly comparable GAAP measures are available in the most recent earnings release available on the company's website. Please refer to the reconciliation tables in the accompanying materials for additional With that, I'll turn the call over to Shawn O'Connor. Please go ahead. Shawn O'Connor: Thank you, Lisa, and welcome, everyone. We closed fiscal 2025 with strong execution across the business. Delivering on the full-year guidance we set in June. Revenue grew 13%, adjusted EBITDA grew 8%, and adjusted EPS grew 8%. Demonstrating resilience and operational discipline a year marked by significant market volatility. Importantly, 2025 was also a strategic reset for Simulations Plus. We completed our transition to a unified operating model aligning product and technology scientific R&D, strategic consulting services, and business development. Into a single client-focused, functionally oriented organization structure. This shift is already improving how we prioritize build, and deliver. For our customers, and positions us to move faster for the opportunities ahead. The external environment remained challenging throughout the year. Client budgets were pressured by broader pharmaceutical headwinds, including the threat of tariffs, and most favored nation pricing implementation, which created real disruption starting midyear. As we move toward calendar 2026, we're seeing early signs of stabilization. Large pharma has clearer visibility into pricing frameworks. Biotech funding has improved modestly. And our clients have entered their budgeting cycles with more confidence. Proposal activity and conference engagement have both strengthened. That said, we believe uncertainty will persist in the overall environment in the near term. Despite these challenges, the momentum behind biosimulation continues to accelerate. Our biopharma and regulatory partners are scaling their internal model-informed development capabilities investing in data curation, and digital infrastructure, and increasingly incorporating AI into modeling workflows. The convergence of cloud computing AI, and model-informed drug development is reshaping how the R&D teams within our biopharma clients operate. And our validated science puts us at the center of that shift. We started laying the groundwork for this future with the release of GastroPlus 10.2 earlier this year. And we'll continue with portfolio-wide updates in fiscal 2026. As our customers expand their internal biosimulation capabilities, they are turning to partners who can deliver scientific rigor, integrated workflows, and AI-assisted efficiency. All grounded in regulatory grade and scientifically validated models. Our product vision directly aligns with these needs. Connecting advanced science cloud scale computation, and AI-driven services into a unified ecosystem that supports teams through discovery, through clinical development, and commercialization. Taken together, these trends reinforce the long-term demand for our solutions and our leadership in the field. What we are hearing consistently from clients is that biosimulation is no longer a set of point solution tools. It's becoming the backbone of how R&D organizations operate. Teams want faster cycle times stronger interoperability, and AI-assisted workflows that reduce manual effort while preserving scientific rigor. They want systems that help them organize their data, standardize their modeling approaches, and deliver reproducible results for regulatory submission. This is exactly where our strategy is headed. Over the past year, we have been building toward an integrated product ecosystem that combines three strengths Simulations Plus can offer. Validated science, cloud scale performance, and AI that is grounded in regulatory grade modeling. In fiscal 2026, that strategy comes into focus. Across Gas Group Plus, Monolix suite, AdmetPredictor, our QSP platforms, and proficiency we are enabling advanced science continuous investment in the scientific engines trusted by global regulators leading R&D teams. A connected ecosystem interoperability across products, powered by the Simulations Plus Cloud, to support end-to-end modeling workflows from discovery through clinical develop. AI-driven services, tools that enhance data curation, accelerate simulation, interpretation, and streamline regulatory compliant reporting. AI and human collaboration, copilots and reusable modules that improve efficiency, consistency, and delivery times for scientists and consultants alike. These enhancements are not abstract concepts. They are tied directly to customer pain points and to the direction the industry is moving. And importantly, they position us to bring new capabilities to market with greater speed and cohesion than at any point in our history. We look forward to sharing much more detail about this integrated product strategy at our virtual investor day in January. Including the road map that unifies our scientific engines cloud infrastructure, and AI capabilities into a modern interoperable biosimulation ecosystem. With that, I'll turn the call over to William Frederick. William Frederick: Thank you, Shawn. To recap our fourth quarter performance, total revenue decreased 6% to $17.5 million. Software revenue decreased 9% representing 52% of total revenue, and services revenue decreased 3%, representing 48% of total revenue. Fiscal year total revenue increased 13% to $79.2 million. Software revenue increased 12% representing 58% of total revenue, and services revenue increased 15%, representing 42% of total revenue. Turning to the software revenue contribution from our products for the quarter, discovery products, primarily Admet Predictor, were 18%. Development products, primarily GastroPlus and Monolix Suite, were 77% and clinical ops products primarily proficiency were 5%. For the fiscal year, discovery products were 17%, development products were 75%, and clinical ops products were 8%. We ended the quarter in fiscal year with 311 commercial clients achieving an average revenue per client of $94,000. And an 83% renewal rate for the quarter. For the fiscal year, we achieved average revenue per client of $143,000 and our renewal rate was 88%. During the quarter, software revenue and renewal rates continue to be impacted by market conditions and client consolidations. Specifically, ADMET predictor declined 10% for the quarter compared to the prior year and grew 5% for the fiscal year. GastroPlus declined 3% for the quarter compared to the prior year, and grew 1% for the fiscal year. Monolix suite grew 3% for the quarter compared to the prior year, and grew 14% for the fiscal year. Our QSP QST solutions grew 22% for the quarter compared to the prior year, and grew 26% for the fiscal year. Proficiency declined 63% for the quarter and grew 206% for the fiscal year, with the prior year reflecting January revenue following the June 2024 acquisition? Shifting to our services revenue contribution by solution for the quarter, development, which includes our biosimulation solutions, represented 77% of services revenue and commercialization, which includes our MedCom services, represented 23%. The revenue contributions for the fiscal year were 76% and 24%, respectively. Total services projects worked on during the quarter were 191 and ending backlog increased 28% to $18 million from $14.1 million last year. Overall, we have a healthy pipeline of services projects and we continue to expect at least 90% of the backlog to convert to revenue within the next twelve months. Services revenue for the quarter declined compared to the prior year as expected and grew 15% for the full year, primarily due to the addition of the MedCom business. Specifically, PVPK services declined 10% for the quarter compared to the prior year and 14% for the fiscal year. QSP services declined 50% for the quarter compared to the prior year and 26% for the fiscal year. PKPD services grew 18% for the quarter compared to the prior year, and 5% for the fiscal year. 70% for the quarter and 622% for the fiscal year, with the prior year reflecting only fourth quarter revenue following the June 2024 acquisition. Total gross margin for the fiscal year was 58%, with software gross margin of 79% and services gross margin of 30%. On a comparative basis, total gross margin for the prior year was 2%, the software gross margin of 84%, and services gross margin of 30%. The decrease in software gross margin was primarily due to an increase in the amortization of developed technology with the acquisition of proficiency and higher amortization expense for capitalized software development costs related to the release of GastroPlus in May 2024. Turning to our consolidated income statement for the fiscal year, R&D expense was 9% of revenue compared to 8% last year, reflecting our continued investment in product innovation. Sales and marketing expense was 15% of revenue compared to 13% last year deliberately supporting initiatives to drive growth across our expanded portfolio and increase market awareness. G&A expense, excluding nonrecurring items, was 25% of revenue down from 28% last year. Total operating expenses including a noncash impairment charge of $77.2 million were 148% of revenue compared to 53% last year. Other income was $1.4 million for the fiscal year compared to $6.3 million last year, primarily due to a decrease in interest income and a decrease in the fair value of the earn-out liability. Income tax benefit for the fiscal year was $4.7 million, compared to income tax expense of $2.5 million last year and our effective tax rate was 7% compared to 20% last year. We expect our effective tax rate for fiscal 2026 to be in the range of 12% to 14%. Net loss and diluted loss per share for the fiscal year, including the $77.2 million noncash impairment charge were $64.7 million and $3.22 compared to net income of $10 million and diluted EPS of 49¢ last year. Adjusted diluted EPS was $1.03 this fiscal year, compared to 95¢ last year. Fiscal year adjusted EBITDA was $22 million, compared to $20.3 million last year at 28% and 29% of revenue respectively. Moving to our balance sheet, we ended the year with $32.4 million in cash and short-term investments. We remain well capitalized with no debt and strong free cash flow to continue to execute our growth and innovation strategy. Our guidance for fiscal year 2026 remains the same as we provided in October. Total revenue between $79 million to $82 million year-over-year revenue growth between 0% to 4% software mix between 57% to 62%, adjusted EBITDA margin between 26% to 30%, and adjusted diluted earnings per share between $1.03 to $1.10. We also anticipate first quarter revenue to be approximately 3% to 5% lower than the same period last year. Our fiscal year and first quarter guidance assumes a stable operating environment with market conditions in FY '26 expected to resemble those at the close of FY '25. Should market conditions improve and our clients increase spending in FY '26, we will be poised to respond. I'll now talk turn the call back to Shawn. Shawn O'Connor: Thank you, Will. As we look ahead to fiscal 2026, our thirtieth year as a company, We're energized by the opportunity in front of us. Simulations Plus is evolving from a set of pioneering modeling tools into a unified ecosystem supporting discovery, development, clinical operations, and commercialization. Our acquisitions our investment in science, and our integrated operating model have expanded both our reach and our impact. What remains unchanged is our core purpose. Helping our partners bring safer, more effective therapies to patients through science-driven innovation. What is changing and accelerating is how we deliver on that mission. With validated scientific engines, expanding cloud capabilities, AI-assisted workflows, and a coordinated road map We're positioned to support our clients with more speed, consistency, and interoperability than ever before. We look forward to sharing more about this strategy our product road map, and the next phase of our evolution at our virtual investor day on January 21. We're excited to give you a deeper look at how our ecosystem comes together and how it will create value for clients, investors, and patients worldwide. Thank you for joining us today. And with that, we'll open the call for questions. Operator: Thank you. Will now be conducting a question and answer session. Before pressing the star keys. Our first question comes from Jeff Garro with Stephens Incorporated. You may proceed with your question. Jeff Garro: Afternoon. Maybe start by asking about the demand environment I was hoping you could give us an update on recent trends and some of the underlying factors that can translate to bookings and revenue like RFP volumes? Pipeline development and SLPs win rate? Thanks. Shawn O'Connor: Yeah, Jeff. Thanks for thanks for the question. Yeah. I can give, you know, global metrics of the have been cited often. Certainly, an uptick in biotech funding, is a positive. So another funding, announced today, up modestly from where it's been over the last six to twelve months. Continued funding in that sector would support that element of our business, which is about 25% of our client base or revenue drive is out of the On the large pharma side, mixed bag mostly positive. But sporadic, you know, challenges from some of the large pharma in their encountering a program success or failure. But certainly an uptick there. We've we've we've come out of our heavy conference window of time. With our clients. And, boy, budgeting activity for next year seems to have some momentum. I'm cautious about that. There was momentum there last year, and, no surprises came after the first of the year. So, feel very positive in terms of the discussions we're having with customers setting up the proposals and budgeting activity for for next year, it it looks pretty good. And so we enter our fiscal year, '26 here, on on good footing. Being cautious, watching for an evolving marketplace where, you know, certainly, announcements often, you know, cause pause in the in activity of our clients, but, mostly mostly bright lights. Jeff Garro: Great. I appreciate all those comments. And and then the follow-up, know, I I don't wanna get too far ahead of ourselves in front of the Investor Day, but I am curious on the feedback for the GastroPlus release that's been infused with some AI capabilities. And and what that might mean for for that key product as well as demand for AI infusions and and other products. You know, you you hit the the the kind of macro details. We'd love to hear about the how the innovation plan is starting to to impact your client discussions even at an early state. Shawn O'Connor: Yeah. It is it is early stage. You know, the announcement of GastroPlus was followed with webinars and some training and, visibility provided to clients. Much visibility prior to its delivery is many of our clients participate, in, the development programs and provide input during the course of its activity. And, you know, the responses have been positive. They're digest it. We're seeing a lot of evolution in terms of our clients and their internal IT infrastructure and many of the cloud and AI capabilities that are being released now will fit into those new ecosystems that they're building internally. And, so initial response is good. As with most releases in in our space. Their adoption and installation in our clients. It's fit into their timetables and process. But I think everyone is looking for ways to leverage, AI capabilities Our clients are very focused in terms of their data management internal to their organization that feeds the analytical tools that we provide them, and, so great excitement in terms of they're seeing that, our platforms are staying ahead of the curve in terms of functionality that, they're looking to deploy, in the coming months and years. Jeff Garro: Sounds good. Thanks for taking the questions. Shawn O'Connor: Sure. Thanks, Jeff. Operator: Our next question comes from Matthew Hewitt with Craig Hallum. You may proceed with your question. Matthew Hewitt: Good afternoon. Thanks for taking the questions. Maybe first up, you know, and you've touched on this a little bit, but so you had most favored nation pricing. You've had tariffs. You've had, a soft funding environment, and it's seems like we're getting either clarity or improvement in all three of those Is there anything else that would result in large pharma being cautious, or is it just more confirmation on those three buckets, and that's when start to see kind of the the increase in in spend. Shawn O'Connor: Yeah. I mean, there's there's a a number of factors there, and it's you know, anecdotal with each client in their own specific PACSAT in terms of their drug programs and know, top top line patent expirations. Each each entity has their own know, guidepost that they've got to, you know, manage and strategize around and they'll respond. I mean, generally, it's an industry that responds to, its budgeting cycle. So, budgeting for the calendar year '25 is in place, not not changing, and now they're looking at '26 and putting budgets in place there. So there's sort of a know, more positive there. It doesn't necessarily translate to discord, but they're budgeting into into next year. You know, I think that we we all we all check our you know, phone periodically to see if been a tweet today or or not. So there's there's still that cautiousness. And, you know, foreboding of what what what may happen tomorrow. But, yeah, generally, you know, I think outlook is positive. Momentum into, the budget preparation. For '26 is is positive, and know, I think if we get, you know, some quarters in a row without any surprises that tend to you know, put a shock wave into the system. If we see a few quarters without that, then I think that confidence grows and and spending gets more firmly committed. Matthew Hewitt: Got it. And then maybe the the follow-up to that is, you know, if we do see the improvement, and you see a ramp in bookings and backlog, do you feel like you've got the right headcount now to support a higher revenue base at least over the near term, or do you feel like, know, depending upon how things shake out, you might be in a situation where you're having to backfill some roles that know, given the kind of the reductions over the past two years. Thank you. Shawn O'Connor: You know, the software side of the business is, leverageable in terms of, immediate needs to that are created to have business upticks. If it upticks, you know, there's not an immediate need in terms of people side, it's certainly a fair question on the service side of our business. And, you know, we feel very comfortable with the the capacity we have now, its utilization. Supporting, the guidance we've given into into '26 if that side of the business, accelerates, more quickly than we're you know, planning for, our ability to grow that capacity. Is much better today than it was in the past. When, the resources were a little scarcer and in terms of the scientific profile that did this type of work. You know, our we made our reduction in force last year with a little bit more confidence that, hey. If we if we need to step up in terms of, our team there, that we can do so. Relatively timely and supportive business volumes increasing. So I think we're well positioned today for our business in '26 as anticipated. It's a accelerates, our ability to meet that demand is what we should be capable of doing so. Matthew Hewitt: Got it. Thank you. Operator: Thanks, man. Our next question comes from Scott Schoenhaus with KeyBanc Capital Markets. You may proceed with your question. Scott Schoenhaus: Hey, team. Thanks for taking my question. Shawn, I wanted to ask about the guidance. It's reiterated, obviously. Maybe parse through if anything has changed underneath that guidance. I believe, you know, there was some caution around the services side. Software was sort of, there was headwinds in the first half. Mostly related or I think partly related to proficiency growth, comps, but that that eases in the second half. Maybe just walk us through if anything has changed on the background of the guidance and maybe parse through the first quarter guidance that you just spoke about on the prepared remarks? Thanks. Shawn O'Connor: Sure. No. I mean, in a short interval, since we delivered the guidance in October, you know, nothing significant has changed underlying the assumptions underlying that we, you know, entered fiscal year twenty six, you know, having, you know, post our adjustment back in June, July time frame, bringing down our guidance for the back half of the 2025 time frame. We achieved that back end fiscal year twenty five guidance, which reflected a little bit of stability in terms of the flow of revenues both on the software and, and and service size. Hope side is albeit at a reduced reduced level. We see some progress on an absolute dollar basis moving into excuse me, the first part of the the year, you know, normal seasonality pan or patterns exist. First quarter is not our most robust quarter for renewals. Most of those are timed in the second and third quarter or at least the peaks. In those two quarters. And in the first part of the year, we've got reduced levels of proficiency revenue contribution both in software with a proficiency platform as well as med communications service revenues that their comparable time frame in '25, those were their most, you know, highest revenue contribution post acquisition, and so some challenging comps there. So as we we indicated, three to 5% first quarter revenue below the comparable year in the first quarter. That fits into our 0% to 4% growth for the year. And so no no change in in in ex expectations or or assumptions underlying. The guidance we provided. And then, does your guidance assume any biotech end market recovery? And then, also, I know that there were some degree of cancellations baked into the guidance. Has sounds like the that the biotech environment, you know, is still cautiously optimistic. What would it take you to you know, view the cancellation projection or caution for the full year what would it what would what would it have to take for you to, sort of moderate your expectations there? Thanks. Shawn O'Connor: Yeah. I mean, two components to your question there in terms of biotech funding. You know, it if if it continues, it certainly will will will prove a a a positive in terms of contributing both on the software and and and consulting sides. You know, there's there's not an immediate translation in terms of funding today. And purchase order, issued tomorrow. They're it depends on the circumstance of the stage of, that particular funded biotech's programs where they are in the development timeline to, you know, driving what type of services I can support them. You know, obviously, if if it continues in a positive way here that we'll bring back that cyclin that contributed, certainly a a greater percentage of revenue on revenue growth you know, back a year or two, three years ago when it was relatively robust. Funding environment by type contribution to our revenue flow was growing at a much steeper rate than than than it has of late during the funding trough, if you will. And as we've projected into '26. We've now projected a significant uptick in the biotech funding leading to uptick in in biotech revenue contribution in '26. So that would be a a a potential potential upside. Second part of your question in terms of cancellations. You know, certainly in the cancellations can be two different things. I'm not sure what you were pointing to, but you know, we've had some consolidation in terms of our software renewals. Acquisitions that had led to one on one not equaling two in terms of two clients that have consolidated in terms of their renewal. You know, that, you know, that that is you know, an ongoing thing that, we've always experienced. Encountered, from quarter to quarter. It's was a little bit higher in the back half of fiscal year '25. Certainly keeping an eye on our client base in that regard. We've got no known cancellations of any magnitude that you know, are on the horizon in '26. Acquisitions that have been announced, with the effective date, down the road. Nothing nothing out there visible at point in time, but, you know, we we have in the past always had those. Doubt, though, there will be some of that into the future. Cancellations will also occur on the service side in terms of the programs that you know, are sometimes just delayed but, sometimes canceled, if the bad readout comes and the program is, is is curtailed. You know, we we had to significant one in the back half of twenty five that impacted us, relatively unusual. Circumstance, both in terms of its, well, in terms of its magnitude size of contract there. You know, no no standout risk of that nature in our back right now. But no doubt, there there will be, programs that have bad readouts and delays that will occur out of the contracts that sit in backlog. You know, are forecasting process of metering out when that backlog revenue will be taken to revenue certainly includes a discount factor, a risk factor that know, those delays will occur, and we believe we've been cautious in terms of an estimate of that impact in our assumptions underlying our guidance going forward. And, again, that that'll always be be there. We're in the business of helping our clients. Curtail programs, quicker, if their predictive outcome is not high. So, that's something that will always occur in our business. We just need to be adapted managing around them, which, in fact, we did very well in the fourth quarter. That large cancellation we had put a very large gap in our fourth quarter service schedule there. And the team did a very good job of replacing or reallocating resources to other projects that were current and and able to be worked on. Our sales team did a good job of closing business in the quarter, but could be started in the, in the quarter. And, you know, the silver lining there, the that was also all done with a pretty good flow of bookings. During the quarter. So our backlog was not depleted in that group. Seen an increase in backlog year over year. And so on the on the cancellation side, yeah, it will continue to occur into in the twenty sixth. That's a normal part of our business. We've implemented discount factors in our our forecasting at the sort of levels coming out of the the back half of the year. Maybe potential upside if if those slow down with that. Scott Schoenhaus: Thank you. Very helpful. Operator: Our next question comes from Max Schmock with William Blair. You may proceed with your question. Hi. It's Christine Rains on for Max Smock. Good afternoon. Thanks for taking our questions. First one, I imagine it touches on the answer for the previous question a little bit, just in terms of large pharma consolidation. But we noticed that the renewal rate in software remains below previous years and last quarter on a fee basis. So hoping you can provide some context on what it was on an account basis in the fourth quarter. And what factors are weighing on renewals and just kind of if and when we can expect renewals to return to the the 90% ballpark. Shawn O'Connor: Yeah. Good question. You know, we encountered renewal on fee step down into the high 80s, mid 80s, really driven by a couple three, maybe four impactful consolidations that hit us in the in the back half the year, the third and fourth quarter. Driving that down The the other element in there is that while while our clients you know, are generally not, reducing, their staffing and modeling and simulation and that, if you will, ties to the amount of software, the number of seats, if you will, that they're licensing from They in this, you know, constrained budget in environment, they they do take a very close look at configurations and, while, you know, reducing the number of platforms that they're licensing from us or generally the seats for them. You know, they do look at, hey. The modules that are associated with each seat and platform. And can they know, save some money there? And so, you know, we saw a lot more scrutiny of that nature, you know, in the back half of of twenty five, also contributes to that renewal on fees number coming down a bit. Hey. You know, it'll it'll it'll drive back towards 90 as we see you know, the absence of as many, cancellations I think having gone through their scrutiny on a module by module basis last year, the potential for that impacting the renewal rate this year is less. We've done that once, and you know, we'll have we'll have done that review and and filtered out things, but maybe they don't need as many of these modules or those modules. I think that will will help improvement going forward as well. And the other the other factor will be, you know, price increase. All things being equal, the renewal on on fees percentage is also impacted by the uptake of our annual price increase which has been a bit more aggressive this year than it was last year. And so that should have a positive effect on on renewal on fees rates as well. Christine Rains: Got it. That makes a lot of sense. And just one on margins for us, Given, the number of moving pieces on the cost side, hoping you can walk through what is baked into your EBITDA margin guide for gross margin overall and in software versus services. And then just broadly, any color you can give us on your EBITDA margin cadence over the course of fiscal 2026 maybe similar to the revenue guide, you gave in terms of down or up in the in q January imagine down. But anything you'd give would be helpful. Thanks. Shawn O'Connor: Yeah. From a from a, you know, kinda overall perspective, you know, we we come in and as we're looking at quarter to quarter on the expense side comparisons, are reduction in force contribute We announced the $4 million impact from the reduction in force million a quarter starting in the fourth quarter. So the '26 guidance anticipates that benefit when you're looking looking year over year over year there. Secondly, in know, a world in which, you know, your top line growth is you know, zero to 4% where we're at, or at, you know, that does not give a lot of leverage in terms of EBITDA in an environment where you've got other expenses that inevitably are gonna rise in terms of the, you know, the the computation increases for your staff on board and medical benefits and things like that. So our guidance in terms of adjusted EBITDA, 26% to to 30% adjusted EBITDA. Shows a little bit of improvement to see some greater improvement than that. I think we need to see some get back to where we were in terms of top line growth at 10% or above. Our expectation is still targeted at 35%. EBITDA, and I think our ability to get there does exist. It'll it'll need some time or some upside to the top line guidance that we've we've provided the this next year. Christine Rains: Great. Thank you. Operator: Our next question comes from David Larsen with BTIG. You may proceed with your question. David Larsen: Hi. Can you talk a little bit about the, the proficiency asset? I think you said in the fourth quarter revenue was down fairly substantially. I guess, can we just talk about why that is? Is it the software business or the service business? And what's driving that? I think it was down was it 63% year over year in the the quarter? Is that right? Shawn O'Connor: Yeah. Was saying 63% in terms of the proficiency platform. On the, on the software side. Services were commercial MedCom, services from the Proficiency acquisition were up 70% for the quarter. So the two contributions of revenue from the acquisition on the software side, as we've indicated. In the back half of fiscal year 'twenty five. The clinical trial starts and other factors. Have shown a a slowdown in that side of side of the Medical communications has been impacted somewhat, but, you know, still still growing quite nicely in there year over year. Was much higher in terms of fourth quarter. Their first quarter contribution last year versus this year. David Larsen: Okay. And and can you just remind me what percentage of proficiency revenue is software? Shawn O'Connor: It's, j I don't have the exact percentage. I don't know well if you've got it, but generally, it's about 40% software, 60% service or something of that nature? William Frederick: Okay. Yeah. We've definitely included in the investor deck kind of the percentage of total software revenue and percentage of services revenue that the proficiency software contributes towards in the medcom business, really integrating it as we sell the solution across the entire ecosystem. David Larsen: Okay. And then for for the one q revenue guide, I think that's through November. So you probably have very good visibility into that. Still a year over year decline. Is it I mean, in order to meet your full year guide for fiscal twenty six, I would I mean, you're gonna have to see some ramp up in bookings. I mean, do you do you have how much visibility do you have into that? Is it I mean, are those deals booked? Any sense for what percentage of the software or service revenue is under contract Shawn O'Connor: Yeah. Like like like any period, obviously, you know, our our earnings release here on December 1 is, later given the change in reporting status and whatnot. It gives us an ability to you know, re reaffirm our guidance for the year with good visibility, obviously, into first quarter here. And so that is all tracking to those numbers. Yeah. I think the you know, dynamics of the quarter by quarter contribution fiscal year twenty six here, shows better year over year growth percentages. But the absolute dollar revenue uptick, if you will, on a quarter quarter basis is pretty consistent. Given our seasonality. You know, first and fourth quarter, lower end software and whatnot. And the percentage growth is really impacted significantly by you know, the strong first and second quarters we had in '25 and the weak third and fourth quarters. That we had in in 25% say percentage growth dynamic that, will show a a big step up in the back half of the year. It isn't quite as big a step up when you look at it on an absolute dollar basis from our starting point coming out of the back half. Twenty five. David Larsen: Okay. Thanks very much. I'll hop back in the queue. Operator: Our next question comes from Constantine Davides with Citizens. You may proceed with your question. Constantine Davides: Thanks. Sorry, I just want to clear something up. Am I right to infer that you're 2026 guidance contemplates an extension of recent renewal trends kind of in the low to mid-80s. I just want to be sure I heard that right. Shawn O'Connor: It does. I would say, you know, it does in the sense of the the consolidations, you that sort of activity. As I mentioned earlier, we we have implemented a more impress more more higher price increase, this year. And so that, you know, you know, on a year to year consistency basis, that that contribution to the renewal rates, and our revenue guidance is, is baked in there. Constantine Davides: Got it. And then Shawn, you you guys talked about the strength of the balance sheet as well as cash flow. And I guess two questions on that. One is what's a good way to think about cash flow in fiscal twenty six? And then I I know you kind of always talk about being on the hunt for interesting assets. And just wondering if you can talk about your level of interest in terms of assets in your core markets, a newer market like clinical ops and and even the potential for a transaction outside of those markets. Thanks. Shawn O'Connor: Yeah. You know, cash flow, runs the seasonality pattern of our of of our revenue, driven by that seasonality of when our clients renew, and that drives the revenue into the core quarter buckets. You know, our outlook there is, you know, robust as it as it has been even in our challenging times. Cash flow is very positive. And turning to acquisition side of your question, Yeah. Our our, you know, scoping of opportunities out there No change in expectation that we will as we have in the past. Continue to grow through both organic contribution as well as acquisitions. Into our future opportunities exist in the two landscapes that we operate in primarily '26, '25, I say, was would be characterized as a year of integration of our large proficiency acquisition, '26 should give us an opportunity to take a look at how we can, you know, get to the next acquisition if you will in our in in our history. Operator: Our next question comes from Brendan Smith with TD Cowen. You may proceed with your question. Brendan Smith: Great. Thanks for taking the questions, guys. Maybe just quickly expanding on some of the earlier questions here, but can you speak to really how we should be thinking about pricing flexibility that you all have and and I guess maybe any plans at this point to lean into some of that next year, especially as some of the AI capabilities roll out across the platform? I'm really just trying to, you know, understand a little bit to what extent the 26 guiding includes any of those pricing assumptions kind of versus new customer ads, expansions of existing customer licenses? And just really what kind of levers we should think about that could kinda drive us closer to flat versus 4% or even more within that framework next year. Thanks. Shawn O'Connor: Yeah, Vernon. Good question. Yes, our pricing is a little bit more aggressive than it is, pardon parcel with the know, upgrades and new platform AI and cloud capabilities that are planned to be delivered during the course of the year. The monetization of that functionality comes through a combination of separately priced modules and some of that technology integrated into the base platforms, which supports a more price increase this year. The stickiness of the product has been such that we have and do raise prices on an annual basis. And when we've delivered significant improvements to the platform, we've sought to share the benefits of that with the with with clients, if you will, in terms of more aggressive pricing. Much of the AI, certainly the automation components of it will provide them greater efficiency and make their organizations that much more productive in modeling and simulation and therefore, a price increase is justified. So in these are sharing the wealth there a bit with them. How much of that is baked into our guidance going forward. You know, it's it's you know, keep in mind that it's, the answer is it's baked in, but discounted at a couple of different steps of the way. There's always a yield to a price increase. You don't get full price increase from every single one of your customers out there, and, and as well. It's filtered through the course of the year when when licenses are are renewed. And so it's it's paced and discounted, I guess, if I can use that phraseology. Price increase on the service side is you know, it it in an environment like this where there are fewer shots on goal, meaning there are fewer projects that are offered up in in the marketplace, makes for a little bit more price competition in that in that space. So while there inevitably is some price increase in terms of the standard hourly rates of our our staff and whatnot. We've, anticipated a a a very competitive still market to remain. In fiscal year twenty six. So I wouldn't say that any of what we normally do on a pricing basis from the service side there's no no step up. Baked into the guidance on the service side. Brendan Smith: Okay. Got it. It makes a lot of sense. Thanks for that color. Thanks, guys. Shawn O'Connor: Cheers. Take care. Operator: This now concludes our question and answer session. I would like to turn the call back to Shawn O'Connor for closing comments. Shawn O'Connor: Well, thank you again for joining our call and and your interest in Simulation Plus. On December 11, we'll be attending the TD Cowen third Annual Diagnosing Tomorrow: Tools and Technologies for the Next Decade. In New York. During the week of January 12, we'll be attending, the JPMorgan conference in San Francisco. And hope to see many of you at either of these, on the calendar coming up in the near term here. Other than that, appreciate your interest, and, take care. Operator: Ladies and gentlemen, thank you for your participation. This concludes today's conference. Please disconnect your lines and have a wonderful day.
Wendy D. Kelley: Good day, and welcome to the WD-40 Company's first Fiscal Year 2026 Earnings Conference Call. Today's call is being recorded. At this time, all participants are in a listen-only mode. At the end of the prepared remarks, we will conduct a question and answer session. Please press 1 on your telephone keypad. Please make sure your mute function is turned off to allow your signal to reach our equipment. If at any time during the conference, you need to reach an operator, telephone keypad. I would now like to turn the presentation over to the host for today's call, Wendy Kelley, Vice President, Stakeholder and Investor Engagement. Please proceed. Thank you. Good afternoon, and thanks to everyone for joining us today. On our call today are WD-40 Company's President and Chief Executive Officer, Steven Brass, Vice President and Chief Financial Officer, Sara Hyzer. In addition to the financial information presented on today's call, we encourage investors to review our earnings presentation, earnings press release, and Form 10-Q for the period ending 11/30/2025. These documents will be made available on our Relations website at investor.wd40company.com. A replay and transcript of today's call will also be made available shortly after this call. On today's call, we will discuss certain non-GAAP measures. The descriptions and reconciliations of these non-GAAP measures are available in our SEC filings as well as the earnings documents posted on our Investor Relations website. As a reminder, today's call includes forward-looking statements about our expectations for the company's future performance. Actual results could differ materially. The company's expectations, beliefs, and projections are expressed in good faith but there can be no assurance that they will be achieved or accomplished. Please refer to the risk factors detailed in our SEC filings for further discussion. Finally, anyone listening to a webcast replay or reviewing a written transcript of this call, please note that all information presented is current only as of today's date, 01/08/2026. The company disclaims any duty or obligation to update any forward-looking information as a result of new information, future events, or otherwise. With that, I'd now like to turn the call over to Steve. Steven A. Brass: Thanks, Wendy, and thank you all for joining us today. Today, I'll start with an overview of our sales results for 2026 and then provide an update on the progress we've made against certain elements of our four by four strategic framework. Then Sara will dive deeper into our first quarter performance, review our business model, give a brief update on the divestiture of our home care and cleaning business, and review our outlook for fiscal year 2026. After that, we'll open the floor for your questions. Today, we reported consolidated net sales of $154.4 million, representing a 1% increase compared to last year. Let's take a closer look at these results and unpack what's driving our performance. Maintenance products remain our primary strategic focus, representing approximately 96% of total net sales for the quarter. Net sales for these products reached $148.9 million, a 2% year-over-year increase. While this performance came in below our long-term growth targets, we remain highly confident in the strength of our growth trajectory for both the fiscal year and longer term. As you know, we go to market through a combination of direct operations and marketing distributors. Our direct markets accounted for 83% of our global sales during the first quarter and maintenance products grew by 8% in those markets, in line with our long-term growth targets. The softness we saw in the first quarter was primarily due to timing-related factors within our marketing distributor network, not a decline in end-user demand. Marketing distributors represent about 17% of our global sales, and typically exhibit greater quarter-to-quarter variability. These markets offer significant long-term growth potential but can be more volatile period to period. As I shared last quarter, we anticipated the Q1 pullback, particularly in Asia Pacific, as distributors managed inventory levels. I'll provide more detail on Asia Pacific performance shortly. We remain confident in a strong rebound later this fiscal year. The second quarter is already off to an excellent start with solid growth across all three trade blocks. We have visibility into a number of upcoming initiatives, giving us confidence in delivering a solid fiscal year result. I'm also pleased to report that our gross margin continues to strengthen. In the first quarter, we reported a gross margin of 56.2%, which is an improvement of 150 basis points sequentially from the fourth quarter and 140 basis points compared to the first quarter of last fiscal year. Gross margin, excluding the impacts of the gas assets we currently have held for sale, was 56.7%. Sara will share more detail about our gross margin in just a few minutes. Now let's talk about first-quarter sales results by segments starting with The Americas. Unless otherwise noted, I'll discuss net sales on a reported basis compared to the 1st Quarter Of Last Fiscal Year. Sales In The Americas, which include The United States, Latin America, and Canada, was $71.9 million in the first quarter, an increase of 4% compared to last year. Sales of maintenance products were $68.6 million, an increase of 5% or $3.2 million compared to last year. The bulk of this growth was driven by higher sales and maintenance products in The United States and Latin America, which increased 312%, respectively. In The United States, sales of WD-40 Multi-Use Product increased following a modest price adjustment in 2026. But this was partially offset by lower volumes due to the timing of customer orders. In Latin America, higher sales of WD-40 Multi-Use Product were primarily driven by expanded distribution and successful promotion activity. In Mexico, maintenance product sales were also positively impacted by higher sales of WD-40 Specialist, which increased 14% primarily due to increased online retail sales, new distribution, and increased demand primarily in The United States. Home care and cleaning product sales declined 18%, reflecting our strategic shift toward higher-margin maintenance products alignment with our four by four strategic framework. In total, our Americas segment made up 47% of our global business in the first quarter. Now let's take a look at our sales in EMEA, which includes Europe, India, Middle East, and Africa. Excluding the impact of the home care and cleaning we divested in 2025, net sales of $58.7 million, an increase of 5% or $2.8 million compared to last year. This growth was driven primarily by a 27% increase in WD-40 Specialist sales fueled by heightened promotional activity and successful new product launches in key direct markets. Sales of WD-40 Multi-Use Product in EMEA remained relatively constant. We continue to see strong trends in many of our direct markets. However, the increased sales in our direct markets were fully offset by softer performance in EMEA distributor markets, primarily due to the timing of customer orders reflecting the inherent variability often experienced in our distributor markets. While distributor sales declined in aggregate, India was a standout delivering a $1.4 million increase. In total, our EMEA segment made up 38% of our global business in the first quarter. Now on to Asia Pacific. Sales in Asia Pacific, which includes Australia, China, and other countries in the Asia region, were $23.9 million, a decrease of 10% or $2.7 million compared to last year. Sales of WD-40 Multi-Use Product were $18.3 million in the quarter, a decrease of 12% compared to last year. Although segment sales declined in the first quarter, we achieved strong growth in China, where sales increased 8% over the prior year. This performance was driven by expanding distribution and effective promotional initiatives. These gains were fully offset by lower sales of WD-40 Multi-Use Product in Asia distributor markets, where sales decreased by GBP 3.3 million or 33%. As noted earlier, this was primarily driven by the timing of customer orders as distributors that heavily participated in promotional activities during 2025 adjusted to more typical inventory levels. This performance was anticipated and factored into our fiscal year 2026 guidance. Importantly, we continue to expect a strong rebound later in the fiscal year. In Australia, sales of maintenance products remain constant. Home care and cleaning product sales, remain a strategic focus for us in Australia, declined by 5% compared to last year, primarily due to the timing of customer orders. In Asia Pacific, sales of WD-40 Specialists were up 2% in the first quarter due to higher sales volume from successful promotions and marketing efforts in Australia and China. In total, our Asia Pacific segment made up 15% of our global business in the first quarter. Now let's talk about our Must Win Battles. Amos Win Battles focused on accelerating revenue growth in maintenance products. Starting with must-win battle number one, lead geographic expansion. In the first quarter, sales of WD-40 Multi-Use Product reached $118 million, decreasing 1% compared to last year. While this performance does not align with our long-term growth objectives, we've made excellent progress this quarter in many key markets. With strong sales growth of $1.4 million in India, $1.2 million in Mexico, $900,000 in Iberia, and $800,000 in China. At 72 years young, we captured only 25% of our global growth potential for our flagship product. We estimate the attainable market for WD-40 Multi-Use Product to be approximately $1.9 billion compared to fiscal year 2025 sales of $478 million, leaving an opportunity of roughly $1.4 billion to nearly quadruple current sales. Capturing that growth simply means continuing what works. Expanding brand awareness and distribution across 176 countries and territories. All occasional soft quarters are part of the journey, they don't change our strategy, our long-term opportunity, or our positive outlook. Next is must-win battle number two, accelerating premiumization. Our second must-win battle is to accelerate the growth of premium formats of WD-40 Multi-Use Product. Innovation drives this strategy. We design products like Smart Straw and Easy Reach, with end users at the heart of every decision. This end-user-focused approach strengthens brand loyalty, supports gross margin growth, and deepens our competitive advantage. In the first quarter, sales of WD-40 Smart Straw and EZ REACH when combined up 4% over the prior year. Premiumized products currently account for approximately 49% of WD-40 Multi-Use Product sales, leaving considerable room for continued growth. We target a compound annual growth rate for net sales of premiumized products of greater than 10%. Our third must-win battle is to drive WD-40 Specialist growth. When we introduced the WD-40 Specialist alongside the WD-40 Multi-Use Product, not just adding variety. We're strengthening our brand, capturing new segments, and offering end users more choice without diluting what makes our core brand iconic. In the first quarter, sales of WD-40 Specialist products were $22.5 million, up 18% compared to last year. We estimate the global attainable market for WD-40 Specialists to be about $665 million with only 12% of that potential realized to date with roughly $583 million in growth opportunity ahead. We target a compound annual growth rate for net sales of the WD-40 Specialist at greater than 10%. Our fourth must-win battle is to Turbocharge Digital Commerce. Our digital commerce strategy is a catalyst for growth across the business. Not merely a channel for online sales. It plays a vital role in advancing each of our must-win battles by increasing brand visibility, improving accessibility, and driving deeper engagement with end users across global markets. In the first quarter, e-commerce sales increased 22%, primarily driven by strong sales of WD-40 Specialist in The United States. Now let's move to the second element of our four by four strategic framework, strategic enablers, which emphasize operational excellence. Today, I'll provide an update on strategic enablers one and three. Our first strategic enabler is to ensure a people-first mindset. At WD-40 Company, we've long held the belief that first you build the people, and the people build the business. We strive to be an employer of choice for all employees and their best selves to work. In November 2025, we completed our latest employee engagement survey and I'm proud to share that we've been able to increase our employee engagement index score to 95%. A new record high for our organization. Additionally, 97% said they actively collaborated, shared knowledge and ideas, and drove better results. These results underscore how global collaboration accelerates our success and reflects our bold ambition to become a world-class global learning organization. Our third strategic enabler is achieving operational excellence in the supply chain. Profitable growth depends on a supply chain that's optimized, high-performing, and resilient. This enabler has been key to expanding gross margins through cost reduction initiatives such as packaging improvements, logistics efficiencies, and strategic sourcing. In the first quarter, we delivered global on-time performance of 97.6%. Even while we continue to increase production capacity to support our must-win battles. Our global supply chain team also made strong progress in engaging with key suppliers and advancing our responsible sourcing policy. With that, I'll now turn the call over to Sara. Sara K. Hyzer: Thanks, Steve. Today, I'll offer insights into our business model, highlight key takeaways from our first-quarter performance, and provide a brief update on the planned divestiture of our Home Care and Cleaning business in The Americas. Today, we are reaffirming our full-year 2026 guidance. While our guidance ranges remain unchanged, I will provide some additional color on our outlook. Let's start with the big picture. While our first-quarter results were below our long-term growth targets, we did expect to get off to a slower start this year. And we believe we are set up for a strong year. We have numerous activities scheduled in the back half of the year giving us confidence that we will be at the mid to high end of our guidance ranges. Our results can fluctuate quarter to quarter, driven by the timing of promotional activity and customer order patterns. WD-40 Company is built for durable value creation. Driven by brand strength, operational discipline, and a culture of continuous improvement. This foundation positions us for sustained growth and strong stockholder returns for decades to come. And with that, let's start with taking a closer look at our business model. Our business model is a strategic tool we use to guide our business. It is built around three core areas: gross margin, cost of doing business, and adjusted EBITDA. In the near to midterm, we continue to evaluate each component of the model within a range, allowing us to adapt while staying aligned with our long-term objectives. Because our business model is based on revenue, quarter-to-quarter variability in sales can lead to fluctuations in its performance. We will begin with gross margin performance, which continues to be strong, building off our solid recovery in fiscal year 2025. In the first quarter, our gross margin was 56.2%, up from 54.8% in the first quarter of last year, representing an improvement of 140 basis points and was most significantly impacted by the following favorable factors: a 110 basis points from lower specialty chemical costs and lower CAM costs, and 60 basis points from higher average selling prices, including the impact of premiumization. These positive impacts to gross margin were partially offset by higher filling fees, primarily in EMEA, which negatively impacted our gross margin by 50 basis points. Gross margin in The Americas rose to 90 basis points, from 50.4% to 53.3%, driven by higher average selling prices and by lower specialty chemical costs and lower can costs. Gross margin in EMEA increased 90 basis points from 57.8% to 58.7%, which was mostly driven by the favorable impact of foreign currency exchange rates partially offset by higher billing fees. While still well above our 55% target, gross margin in Asia Pacific decreased slightly by 70 basis points, from 59.6% to 58.9%, primarily due to decreases in average selling prices linked to changes in sales mix. We're very pleased with the trajectory of gross margin. But external risks like cost volatility, tariffs, and inflation remain part of the landscape. To mitigate these and strengthen margins over time, we're driving initiatives such as supply chain cost reduction, premiumization, new product introductions, geographic expansion, and asset divestitures. These levers reinforce our confidence in our gross margin's long-term potential. Now turning to our cost of doing business, which we define as total operating expenses plus adjustments for certain noncash expenses. Our cost of doing business is primarily driven by three areas: strategic investments in people, global brand-building efforts, and freight expenses associated with delivering products to our customers. Investing in our future remains a top priority. While our long-term goal is to keep the cost of doing business within a 30 to 35% range, we're making strategic investments to drive sales growth and enhance operational efficiencies. These investments strengthen our foundation and position us for sustained growth. We also need time to absorb the loss of revenue associated with the home care and cleaning divestitures. Revenue growth is a key driver of our cost of doing business ratio. With a slower start to the year and continued investments to fuel long-term growth, our cost of doing business temporarily moved above our target range. For the quarter, the cost of doing business was 40% of net sales, compared to 37% last year. Our first quarter typically carries higher expenses due to essential planning meetings and increased travel, which are critical for setting our strategic direction for the year. I view this quarter's cost of doing business as an anomaly. And as we execute our strategies to accelerate top-line performance, we expect this ratio to improve over the course of the year. In dollar terms, our cost of doing business increased $4.6 million or 8% compared to last year. Changes in foreign currency exchange rates had an unfavorable impact of $1.3 million this quarter. The majority of the remaining increase, $2.8 million, was driven by higher employee-related expenses, including additional headcount to advance initiatives in our strategic framework and strengthen our information system. In addition to higher travel and meeting expenses this quarter over the prior year. Advertising and promotional expenses decreased slightly year over year. As a percentage of net sales, A and P spend was 5.3% this quarter, compared to 5.5% last year. While we are currently tracking below our full-year guidance of around 6% of net sales, we have brand-building initiatives planned for the remainder of the fiscal year, which we expect will bring A and P investment in line with our fiscal year guidance. While we always seek cost efficiencies, scale, not cost-cutting, is what will move us toward our long-term cost of doing business target. As revenues grow, we expect the cost of doing business to trend toward 30% to 35%. With sales growth being the key driver of improvement. Turning now to adjusted EBITDA. Adjusted EBITDA as a percentage of sales is a key measure of profitability and operational efficiency. Our 20 to 25% target range for adjusted EBITDA margin is a long-term aspiration. However, we continue to believe we can move adjusted EBITDA margin back to our midterm target range of 20% to 22% once we have absorbed the loss of revenues associated with the home care and cleaning divestiture. Divestitures. In the first quarter, our adjusted EBITDA margin was 17% compared to 18% last year. Adjusted EBITDA is a critical component of our business model. With our low debt capital light structure, much of it converts to free cash flow, enabling consistent stockholder returns and long-term value. Now let's turn to other key measures of our financial performance. Operating income, net income, and earnings per share in the first quarter. Operating income declined 7% to $23.3 million in the first quarter. While net income fell 8% to $17.5 million. On a pro forma basis, which excludes the impact of the home care and cleaning products divested and those classified as held for sale, operating income and net income would have declined 45%, respectively. Declines in operating income and net income were primarily driven by softness in top-line sales, which we are expecting to bounce back over the course of the year. Decreases were also driven by higher SG and A expenses compared to the prior year. Diluted earnings per common share were $1.28 in the first quarter compared to $1.39 last year, reflecting a decrease of 8%. Our diluted EPS reflects 13.5 million weighted average shares as outstanding. On a pro forma basis, EPS would have decreased 5%. Now let's review our balance sheet and capital allocation strategy. We maintain a strong financial position and healthy liquidity, supporting a disciplined capital allocation strategy that drives long-term growth and delivers consistent cash flow and returns to our stockholders. Annual dividends will continue to be our priority and are targeted at greater than 50% of earnings. On December 10, our Board of Directors approved a quarterly cash dividend of $1.2 per share, an increase of more than 8% over the prior quarter. This reflects the board's confidence in future cash flows and underscores our commitment to returning capital to stockholders through consistent dividends. During the first quarter, we repurchased 39,500 shares of stock at a total cost of $7.8 million under our share repurchase plan. We have approximately $22 million remaining under our current repurchase plan, which expires at the end of this fiscal year. We have accelerated buybacks and plan to fully utilize the remaining authorization, reinforcing our strong conviction in the company's long-term fundamentals. Our focus remains on accretive capital returns that reflect confidence in the enduring value of our stock. Finally, before I move to guidance, I would like to provide a brief update on the household divestiture. We continue to make progress on the sale of our America's home care and cleaning product brands. Our investment bank continues active discussions with multiple potential buyers. Although there's no certainty of a deal, we remain optimistic, and I will provide further updates as appropriate. So let's turn to FY '26 guidance. As a reminder, we issued this year's guidance on a pro forma basis, excluding the financial impact of the Home Care and Cleaning brands. Currently classified as assets held for sale. While the exact timing of the transaction remains uncertain, we believe this approach will provide investors with clarity on the direction of the core business, and help minimize the noise surrounding the transaction. While first-quarter sales results were below our long-term growth targets, as we mentioned, we anticipated a slower start to fiscal 2026. The softness was driven by timing factors within our marketing distributor network, not by a decline in end-user demand. All indicators point to a strong rebound later in the fiscal year. Accordingly, we are reaffirming our guidance today. With the visibility we have into numerous activities already scheduled for the back half of fiscal year 2026, we are highly confident in delivering results at the mid to high end of our guidance ranges. For fiscal year 2026, we expect net sales to be between $630 million and $655 million after adjusting for foreign currency impacts. A growth of between 5-9% from the pro forma 2025 results. Gross margin is expected to be between 55.5-56.5%. Advertising and promotion investment is projected to be around 6% of net sales. Operating income is expected to be between $103 and $110 million, representing growth of between 5-12% from the pro forma 2025 results. The provision for income tax is expected to be between 22.5 and 23.5%. And diluted earnings per share is expected to be between $5.75 and $6.15, which is based on an estimated 13.4 million weighted average shares outstanding. This range represents growth of between 5-12% over the pro forma 2025 results. This guidance assumes no major changes to the current economic environment. Unanticipated inflationary headwinds and other unforeseen events may affect our view of fiscal year 2026. In the event we are unsuccessful in the divest of The Americas Home Care and Cleaning brands, our guidance would be positively impacted by approximately $12.5 million in net sales, $3.6 million in operating income, and 20¢ in diluted EPS on a full-year basis. That completes the financial overview. Now I would like to turn the call back to Steve. Steven A. Brass: Thank you, Sara. In summary, what did you hear from us today on this call? You heard that sales in our direct markets grew 8% in the first quarter in line with our long-term growth targets. You heard that this increase in sales was partially offset by softer sales in our marketing distributor network relating to timing-related factors, not a decline in end-user demand. You heard that sales of WD-40 Specialists were up 18% in the first quarter. You heard that sales in the e-commerce channel were up 22% in the first quarter. You heard that after seventy-two years, we've kept only about 25% of our global growth potential on our core multi-use product, leaving roughly $1.4 billion in opportunity to nearly quadruple current sales. You heard that in the first quarter, our gross margin was 56.2%, up 150 basis points from the fourth quarter and 140 basis points from the same period last year. You heard that we've been able to increase our employee engagement index score to 95%, a new record high for our organization. You heard that we've accelerated buybacks and plan to fully utilize our remaining authorization, reinforcing our strong conviction in the company's long-term fundamentals. You heard that our board approved a quarterly cash dividend of $1.02 per share, up more than 8% from last quarter, and this increase reflects strong confidence in our cash flow outlook and our ongoing commitment to stockholder returns. You heard that we are off to a strong start in the second quarter with solid growth across all three trade blocks. And you heard that reaffirmed our guidance ranges. With the visibility we have into numerous activities planned for 2026, we're highly confident in delivering results at the mid to high end of our guidance ranges. Thank you for joining our call today. We would now be pleased to answer your questions. Operator: Ladies and gentlemen, if you would like to register a question, your signal to reach our equipment. If your question has been answered and you would like to withdraw your registration, please press 1 again. One moment for please for the first question. Our first question comes from the line of Mike Baker with D. A. Davidson. Please proceed with your question. Michael Allen Baker: Okay. Thanks. I'll have a few. Let me start with Sara, you said you said let me get the exact quote. All indicators, point to strong, results. So what if you could give us more detail on what these indicators are. And then the guidance so mid to high end of the full year range, Is that more bullish than when you originally gave the guidance? I could be wrong, but I don't remember you. I remember you giving a range on the fourth quarter, but not necessarily planning to mid to high end. So can you help me on that? Thanks. Sara K. Hyzer: Yeah. Sure thing, Mike. Nice to hear from you. So yeah, as we sit here today and look forward into the back half of the year with the activities that we have locked in place, we do feel highly confident in being able to get to that mid to high end of the range. And that really is just coming from the, you know, promotional activities that we have scheduled, and that we've been able to lock in even since year-end. So we're feeling really good about where The Americas is going to be landing the year. And some of the very variability will also be driven by Asia Pac's recovery in the back half of the year. So while they had a slower start, particularly in the marketing distributor markets, you know, when we're starting to look at the recovery starting in Q2, but most mostly that recovery will come in the back half of the year. Michael Allen Baker: Okay. And to follow-up on that, the, are you sounds like second quarter is off to a good start. It it Can we say are we specifically seeing a recovery in those Asia distributor markets? Or, I guess you sort of just said it. It sounds like it's maybe starting a little bit, but it's more in the back half. But but can we are are we seeing a recovery yet? Those Asia distributor markets? Steven A. Brass: Hey, Mike. It's Steve. So, we are. We're already seeing that beginning of Q1, and that's our expectation. So, we had a relatively softish Q1 overall. Q2, you're going to see stronger results, but then the real power comes in the back half of the year. And so as Sara is alluding to, we're going to have a US year like we haven't had in quite a while, a really strong year in The US, and that's the foundation. Are you European direct markets performing very, very well and we expect that to continue. It's really about those Asia distributor markets and that kind of Q4, Q1 kind of impact with that beginning to recover beginning in Q2 and then into the back half. And also our European marketing distributor markets recovering also. Michael Allen Baker: Got it. Let me sneak in one more. The buybacks, I so last year, bought back $12 million. I think at one point, you had said you expect it to double. Be about $24 million. But now you're saying you you expect to go through the entire, 30 another another $22 million this year. That that's more than a double, I think, if if my math is correct. Yep. Yeah. So so that's a more confident moment. Is that fair to say? Sara K. Hyzer: Yes. It's fair to say, Mike. That is good math, and, yes, I think we as as as soon as the window opened up, we the buybacks and really just have it phased to utilize the entire I think, just under $30 million availability up through the end of the fiscal year. Michael Allen Baker: Got it. Awesome. Thank you. Appreciate the time. Thank you. Steven A. Brass: Thank you. Operator: Our next question comes from the line of Daniel Rizzo with Jefferies. Please proceed with your question. Daniel Rizzo: Hey, you guys mentioned taking reducing supply chain costs. I was just wondering if you can provide color on what specifically you guys are doing. I mean, are you I don't know, multi-sourcing more or or, yeah, just which is the steps you're taking? Sara K. Hyzer: Yeah. Sure. So we a couple years ago, we actually invested in not only a head of global supply chain, but also head of global sourcing. And so there's been some new thinking around how we source supply, and we started with cans. So some of the can reductions or the can reductions that you're starting to see impact the business in the back half of last year and into this year is really the result of a different way of thinking about sourcing more globally. And the next phase of that is going to be moving into to to the specialty chemicals area. So there are concrete actions that we are taking to look at how and where we are sourcing our raw materials from. In addition to that, there's a lot of activity happening on the supply chain side around how to take costs of the miles traveled for our costs out of or miles traveled for our product. Cost out of the system, along with a fresh look at the distribution network, particularly in The United States and making sure that we are the distribution center sorry. Making sure that we're taking a look at how we're where our distribution centers are situated. Again, with the idea of trying to reduce the mileage that our products are traveling. So there are structural changes that are in the works. Some of that won't impact the business until FY '27 and beyond, but we're really excited about the work that the supply chain team has really taken on in the last couple of years and starting to see that come to fruition. Daniel Rizzo: So with the increase in the distribution centers, would that suggest maybe that there's some come some CapEx spend or some sort of spend to kind of just include improve your footprint in different in various regions? That's my first question. And two, given these moves, is I I know your guidance is 55% gross margins, but it seems where we are now and maybe even a little above is is is annually achievable or sustainable for over the long term. Sara K. Hyzer: So I'll address the CapEx piece. Since it's a completely outsourced model, a lot of the investments, if we do have to make investments, are happening by our third-party providers. We may at times help supplement the cash investment that they have, but a lot of that doesn't qualify as CapEx from our perspective. So think our guidance of 1% to 2% from a maintenance CapEx standpoint is still going to be a very good target that we'll be landing within. And then secondarily, and of course, as I answer the CapEx question, I'm blanking on the second part of the question. I was just wondering given all the moves you're making with reducing costs fine. Operator: Yep. Okay. Sara K. Hyzer: Yeah. The 55%. So, I mean, we're sitting above 55% right now. I hate to commit to something over the long term as we are always subject to oil availability and just specialty chemical variability. But we are continuing to find opportunities for us to take costs out of the system. And so we believe you can see in the guidance this year, we believe that there's opportunities for us to get margin accretion even this fiscal year and some of those initiatives that we have in the pipeline. Are gonna benefit us in in in next fiscal year. So we'll we'll be able to obviously guide to next fiscal year as we get to the end of this year, but there is right now, we're fairly confident a strong gross margin. Daniel Rizzo: Alright. Thank you very much. Operator: Thank you. Ladies and gentlemen, that does conclude our allotted time for questions. We thank you for your participation on today's conference call and ask that you please disconnect your line.
Operator: Welcome to the AEO Inc. Third Quarter 2025 Earnings Conference Call. [Operator Instructions] Please note this event is being recorded. I would now like to turn the conference over to Judy Meehan, Head of Investor Relations and Corporate Communications. Please go ahead. Judy Meehan: Good afternoon, everyone. Joining me today for our prepared remarks are Jay Schottenstein, Executive Chairman and Chief Executive Officer; Jen Foyle, President, Executive Creative Director for American Eagle and Aerie; and Mike Mathias, Chief Financial Officer. Before we begin today's call, I need to remind you that we will make certain forward-looking statements. These statements are based upon information that represents the company's current expectations or beliefs. The results actually realized may differ materially based on risk factors included in our SEC filings. The company undertakes no obligation to publicly update or revise any forward-looking statements, whether as a result of new information, future events or otherwise, except as required by law. Also, please note that during this call and in the accompanying press release, certain financial metrics are presented on both a GAAP and non-GAAP adjusted basis. Reconciliations of adjusted results to the GAAP results are available in the tables attached to the earnings release, which is posted on our corporate website at www.aeo-inc.com in the Investor Relations section. Here, you can also find our third quarter investor presentation. And now I'll turn the call over to Jay. Jay Schottenstein: Thanks, Judy, and good afternoon. I hope everyone had an enjoyable Thanksgiving weekend. I'm extremely pleased with the trend change we've seen across brands, reflecting a number of decisive steps we've taken from merchandising to marketing to operations. These deliberate actions are having a positive impact on our near-term results and also serve us well for the long run. We delivered record revenue in the third quarter and very strong momentum has carried into the fourth quarter. We're seeing an encouraging response to the newness the teams are delivering with each new collection gaining steam, most notably, Aerie and Offline are generating exceptional growth across categories. As discussed last quarter, we have made incremental investments in advertising, which is contributing to stronger demand while better positioning our business for enhanced long-term brand awareness and overall customer engagement. At the same time, we are focused on operational improvements and cost efficiencies to drive higher profitability in what continues to be a dynamic macro environment. Turning to the quarter. Total revenue increased 6% to $1.4 billion, a third quarter record. Operating income of $113 million exceeded our guidance of $95 million to $100 million, fueled by higher-than-expected demand and well-controlled costs. As previously noted, our results also included about $20 million of net impact from tariffs. Diluted EPS for the quarter of $0.53 increased 10% compared to the adjusted EPS last year. The strong top line reflected a return to positive comps, which increased 4%. This was a meaningful acceleration from the 1% decrease last quarter. Improvement was made across both brands and channels, all posting positive comps. Aerie's 11% comp in the third quarter was a real standout where strong demand was broad-based across all categories. Growth accelerated throughout the period, which has continued into the fourth quarter, where we are seeing exceptional demand so far. As we look to the future, we continue to see untapped opportunities within Aerie and Offline, which are rapidly emerging as important customer destinations. At just under $2 billion in revenue and less than 5% market share, this indicates a significant runway for future expansion, underscoring our ability to capture a much larger piece of the market as we execute our strategic initiatives. American Eagle's comp growth of 1% marked a sequential improvement from last quarter. Strength in jeans, coupled with better results in men's were among the drivers. As Jen will review, AE's business strengthened with greater in-stocks in our strongest sellers and new product flows. Positive trends have continued so far in the fourth quarter, including a terrific Thanksgiving weekend. Beyond product, our results have benefited from the success of our recent marketing campaigns, which have driven engagement and attracted new customers. We are encouraged by the impact of the campaigns and collaborations with Sydney Sweeney and Travis Kelce and now holiday gifting with Martha Stewart. We see measurable benefits, especially across our digital channels. Looking forward, we will build on this momentum with more exciting campaigns ahead. All in all, I'm very pleased with the progress and meaningful turnaround from the first half of this year. Now the holiday season is upon us, and the fourth quarter is off to an excellent start. We are seeing a clear acceleration from the third quarter, including a record Thanksgiving weekend with strong performance across brands and channels. As a result, we are raising our fourth quarter outlook. We remain well positioned with exciting new collections centered on gift-giving and events planned throughout the season to continue to delight our customers. Before I turn it over to Jen, I want to take a moment to acknowledge our incredible team for all their hard work and tremendous dedication. Their efforts have fueled a meaningful trend change across our leading brands. Great work continues, and I couldn't be more optimistic about the long-term outlook for our business. We look forward to driving more success as we head into 2026 and beyond, driving profitable growth and enhanced value for AEO. Let me turn it over to Jen. Jennifer Foyle: Thank you, Jay, and good afternoon, everyone. I am very encouraged by the stronger performance across our brands, marking a significant turnaround from the first half of the year. This demonstrates the resilience and product leadership of our portfolio of iconic brands. The increasing customer demand, which has accelerated in the fourth quarter, is spanning new and existing customers, fueled by a well-coordinated effort across both merchandising and marketing. Compelling product collections, combined with higher engagement and expanding brand awareness are driving our performance. And the teams are executing very well, leveraging our expertise in key categories and most importantly, by listening to our customers. Let me walk you through a few highlights in the third quarter, beginning with Aerie. The Aerie brand continues to exceed expectations. We achieved record revenue with the third quarter comps up 11%, fueled by strength across all categories, including intimates, apparel, sleep and Offline. Aerie and Offline's performance has been especially impressive with a meaningful acceleration in demand since the spring season. In fact, comps have strengthened with each new delivery. The resurgence in intimates has been very encouraging with solid growth in both bras and undies. Greater depth and breadth of our signature fabrications, strength in new fashion across bralettes and bra tops and fun prints with matchbacks to apparel are just a few highlights fueling the brand's double-digit growth. Aerie apparel remained consistently strong, driven by bottoms, fleece, tees and sleep, which has emerged as a powerful growth category. Offline by Aerie also continues to gain meaningful mind share as we expand awareness and move into newer markets. We remain highly focused on growing the Activewear segment. We are building on our signature fabrics and franchises such as our core leggings while also launching newness with updated fashion silhouettes. Needless to say, we are very excited about our future for both Aerie and Offline. We are well positioned for the remainder of the holiday season and continue to believe in the substantial long-term opportunities ahead. Now moving to American Eagle, which posted a positive 1% third quarter comp, demonstrating a meaningful improvement from the spring season. Positive demand was fueled by trend right new fall collection combined with bold marketing and exciting product collaborations. Underpinned by our dominance in denim, our strategies to reset the brand and firmly position American Eagle at the center of culture are beginning to yield results. The quarter marked an improvement in our men's business, where we saw nice wins across tops, sweaters, fleece, graphics and knits, all areas we have been working to recapture. Bottoms provided a stable foundation with jeans and non-denim pants trending positive. And favorable trends have continued into the fourth quarter, reflecting the positive reception of our new product. In women's, although we had a very good back-to-school season, the quarter in total was not as strong. Robust demand early in the period led to a number of out of stocks in some of our best-selling items. Non-denim bottoms, shirts and dresses proved more challenging, while knit and fleece tops as well as jeans were positive highlights where we continue to see strong demand. And importantly, better in-stocks late in the quarter drove positive results, which have continued into the fourth quarter. AE is a true holiday destination with amazing gift-giving focus combined with fun fashion and party dressing. The response to date has been highly encouraging. Now shifting gears to marketing. This fall season, American Eagle launched its largest, most impactful advertising campaigns ever, which are delivering results. By collaborating with high-profile partners who are defining culture, we are attracting more customers and have more eyes on the brand than ever before. Combined, the Sydney Sweeney and Travis Kelce partnerships have garnered more than 44 billion impressions. Total customer counts are up across brands and customer loyalty grew 4% in the quarter. AE is clearly building long-term awareness and desirability and has captured the attention of both new and existing customers. Traffic has also increased consistently throughout the quarter, which is most evident within our digital selling channels that include both AE and Aerie. Although it's still early days of our renewed marketing strategy, we know that having the right talent amplifies our brand and product at key moments. We are very encouraged by our progress and expect to continue fueling brand excitement into 2026 and beyond. Our recent holiday campaign with Martha Stewart is yet another example of how we are creating fun moments to delight our customers while reinforcing our position as the go-to gifting destination. The holiday season is in full swing. And as Jay mentioned, we are encouraged with the results so far. We are heads down and focused on the rest of the year to deliver long-term sales and bottom line growth. Thanks to our amazing teams, and thanks to all of you for your ongoing support. I wish everyone a happy and healthy holiday season. And with that, I'll turn the call over to Mike. Mike Mathias: Thanks, and good afternoon, everyone. I'm pleased to see the steady progress throughout our business, which led to strong revenue and profit above our expectations in the third quarter. In addition to generating a meaningful top line improvement, we successfully controlled costs, created efficiencies, managed promotions and navigated through a highly dynamic sourcing environment, minimizing the impact of tariffs. Consolidated revenue of $1.36 billion increased 6% to last year, fueled by comparable sales growth of 4%, with Aerie up 11% and AE up 1%. We saw growth in transactions across brands driven by higher traffic. The average unit retail price was flat to last year. Gross profit dollars of $552 million increased 5%, reflecting higher demand. The gross margin declined 40 basis points to 40.5% compared to 40.9% last year. Net tariff pressure was as expected at $20 million or 150 basis points. Higher markdowns were largely offset by positive sales growth and lower non-tariff costs, including favorability in freight. Buying, occupancy and warehousing leveraged 20 basis points due to higher sales and a continued focus on operational improvements. For example, we drove lower cost per shipment within our direct business, which has been an area of ongoing focus. SG&A increased 10% due to investment in advertising as previously discussed. With our focus on long-term brand benefits, the campaigns are already delivering results and helping to advance our goal of expanding our reach and generating growth across brands. The balance of expense is leveraged, reflecting our ongoing cost management program. Operating income of $113 million was above our guidance of $95 million to $100 million, driven by stronger-than-expected demand. The operating margin of 8.3% declined from an adjusted margin of 9.6% last year. Consolidated ending inventory cost was up 11% with units up 8%. Inventory is balanced across brands, reflecting better in-stocks for American Eagle jeans, new store openings and the demand acceleration at Aerie and Offline. The increase in cost includes the impact of tariffs. Third quarter CapEx totaled $70 million, bringing year-to-date spend to $202 million. We continue to expect CapEx of approximately $275 million for the year. As a reminder, this includes a onetime spend of about $40 million to relocate our New York design center as we previously disclosed. We're on track to open 22 Aerie and 26 Offline stores, which are coming out of the gate quite strong. We'll complete about 50 AE store remodels with full upgrades to our modern design. A few great examples of recent store upgrades are the Aventura Mall and Sawgrass Mills in Miami and our new SoHo location in New York City. All of these A+ stores are among our best, and we want to ensure the customer experience is unmatched. The upgraded footprints have allowed us to showcase our signature brands, AE Aerie and Offline. We're utilizing new technologies to elevate the shopping journey and create a cohesive and modern retail experience. Overall, our remodeling program is generating comps nicely above the average. As we continue to position our fleet for profitable growth, we're also on track to close about 35 lower productivity AE stores. Our capital allocation priorities remain unchanged, and we're focused on prudently investing in growth to continue to build our brands while returning excess cash to shareholders through dividends and share repurchases. As a reminder, during the first half of this year, share repurchases totaled $231 million and year-to-date dividend payments have totaled $64 million. We have a strong balance sheet and ended the period with cash of $113 million and total liquidity of approximately $560 million. Now turning to our outlook. The fourth quarter is off to an excellent start. As the team noted, we're encouraged by the broad-based strength across brands and channels with particular strength in Aerie and Offline. Our inventory and product offerings are well positioned to deliver a successful holiday season, and we're all focused on achieving a strong fourth quarter result. Based on quarter-to-date sales trends and the recognition that we have important selling weeks still ahead, we are raising our fourth quarter operating income guidance to a range of $155 million to $160 million based on comp sales growth of 8% to 9% with similar growth in total revenue. Guidance includes approximately $50 million of incremental tariff costs. Buying, occupancy and warehousing costs are expected to increase due to new store growth for Aerie and Offline and increased digital penetration. SG&A is expected to increase in the low to mid-single digits, driven by investments in advertising. Given the top line strength, we expect both BOW and SG&A to leverage in the fourth quarter. The tax rate is estimated to be approximately 28% and the weighted average share count will be roughly 173 million. To wrap up our prepared remarks, clearly, we're very encouraged by the progress made across our brands. We're highly focused on delivering the remainder of the year, driving strong profit flow-through and sustaining this momentum into 2026. Now we'll open up the call for questions. Operator: [Operator Instructions] The first question comes from Jay Sole with UBS. Jay Sole: My first question, I think, it's for Mike. You talked about the acceleration of fourth quarter to date, and you raised the guidance, the comp guidance, I think you said 8% to 9%. That's pretty significant from where you ended Q3. Can you just talk about where you're trending quarter-to-date to be able to guide to that level? And what's driving the acceleration. And then maybe for Jen, you mentioned strength in denim. If you could elaborate a little bit if people aren't wearing skinny denim like they were, like what are the new silhouettes that are working? And how durable are those trends? Do you think the trends that you're seeing can last well into 2026 or beyond? And if you can help us on that, that would be great. Mike Mathias: Yes. Thanks, Jay. I can talk you through the guidance. So the 8% to 9% comp increase includes a nice improvement or acceleration for both brands quarter-to-date from what we just reported in Q3. I would say if you want to break it down by brand, we'd be looking for the AE brand to be in the low to mid-single digits and Aerie in the high teens, mixing to that 8% to 9% comp. And both brands are ahead of that quarter-to-date, but we know we've got some big weeks ahead of us, only about half the quarter in, but definitely pleased with how November turned out and where we are quarter-to-date through the Thanksgiving weekend. Jennifer Foyle: Yes. And Denim has been very strong. In fact, particularly in women's, we saw acceleration throughout the quarter, getting into the back half of Q3 and into black. It's been our #1 Black Friday as far as denim is concerned. The jeans are certainly winning for us. And as you know, that's our key competency business. Look, silhouettes are changing faster than ever. And I always reemphasize that our teams strategically do just extensive testing and scaling. And we did have some out of stocks, particularly in women's in Q3. Sydney Sweeney certainly accelerated some of that, and we needed to move swiftly to get back into business. And I like what we're seeing at the end of Q3 and headed into Q4 with the denim business. So we're excited. Operator: And the next question comes from Matthew Boss with JPMorgan. Matthew Boss: Congrats on the improvement. So Jen, at Aerie, maybe if we could dig a little deeper. Could you speak to the drivers of the same-store sales improvement over the past two straight quarters? And with that, I guess maybe could you break into customer acquisition trends that you're seeing and initiatives in place to sustain double-digit comp growth in your view? Jennifer Foyle: Yes. It's certainly exciting to see Aerie back on track. Coming off of Q1, we definitely needed to pivot as a team, and we really hunkered down and really thought about our strategy and what we needed to get back to win, not only coming from our core competency businesses, which all accelerated and have been accelerating starting in Q3 into Q4, but also there's new businesses in town. Sleep is doing quite well for us, and it's proving to be a year-round business for us. So a new category there. So obviously, we have Offline too, which is our secondary business coming off of Aerie and that business has proven where you're hearing some decel in the athletic apparel areas. We're holding our own and our leggings are still tried and true and winning for us. The customer acquisition has been strong. Our customers are spending more. We're seeing even so. So coming off of Q3, as we head into Q4, they're actually -- our acquisition has been accelerating. Last week was an incredible week for Aerie, where we saw a huge amount of customer acquisition. So we are taking advantage of our traffic. We're winning our customers. I think we're showing up really proudly. We launched our new 100% real campaign, which is tied to our core competency of how we launch this business, what our platform is. And it's talking to our community, it's speaking towards-- it's playing off of no air brushing our models. And now we've leveraged some of that into the AI world and thinking about how we approach that differently. So Aerie does things differently. We always think into the white space that sometimes can be scary, but we're so proud of what we do in this brand. And I think the team is doing an incredible job leveraging our community, amplifying marketing, but also it's 100% about our product. What we do every day is about our product and winning our customer. Matthew Boss: That's great. And then Mike, could you speak to expectations for markdown in the fourth quarter relative to the third quarter just overall health of your inventory? And how best to think about gross margin levers remaining into next year? Mike Mathias: I can start with inventory, Matt. I mean we're very pleased and comfortable with the plus 11 in total dollars, plus 8 in units, is positioned well to continue to fuel this Aerie and Offline trend. We definitely, as Jen talked about in her remarks, kind of resetting some denim inventory to make sure we're continuing to be in stock and don't miss a sale within the AE jeans category. And again, that plus 11% cost includes the impact of tariffs along with just supporting those businesses. On the markdown front, look, we competed in the third quarter. Markdowns are up a little bit in terms of the total impact to the quarter. We expect Q4 to be similar. We're just be ready to compete in these big days. We competed over the weekend. This November trend that we've seen or the quarter-to-date trend includes a little uptick in markdowns to compete. But definitely winning in terms of the top line growth and the overall margin dollar growth attached to that. And it is in a couple of places. I mean, Aerie is similar markdown rate to last year. So we're driving this trend on markdown rates similar to history. We're not driving it through promotion. And then it really is competing in jeans more than anything from a category perspective that's adding to the markdowns a bit. But we're -- we think that's the right strategy from here. Gross margin then in total, really pleased with the third quarter results. We talked -- we disclosed or we hit the $20 million guidance roughly on the tariff impact. That's about 150 basis points. But as you can see, gross margin only deleveraged by 40 baiss points on four comp. So the team is doing a great job, not only just mitigating tariffs on the front end, but then finding kind of opportunities and efficiencies on other non-tariff impacted line items within our costs. We highlighted freight but there's more work than just on the freight line. So Q4 is similar. I mean, we're guiding to a $50 million impact and kind of the net absolute value or the net impact of that -- absolute impact of that would be about 300 basis points. But we're obviously not guiding gross margin down that much. So we expect to see the same opportunities in terms of offsets and other line items. And then just on an 8% to 9% comp, obviously, we're leveraging a lot of expense lines that are up in gross margin, including and BOW, so including rent, digital delivery, distribution costs, compensation up there as well. But other cost line items within our product costs are being leveraged, too. So we continue to expect to do that going forward. Operator: And the next question comes from Paul Lejuez with Citi. Kelly Crago: This is Kelly on for Paul. I guess first question for you guys. Just could you talk about why -- given you've had these very splashy and high-profile marketing campaigns that were more kind of -- more based on American Eagle marketing campaigns, like why you didn't see that accrue more to AE versus what you're seeing in Aerie, where it seems like you're benefiting a lot from whether that's the product assortment or maybe some of the marketing campaigns. Just help us kind of understand what's happening there. And then just secondly, on the tariff impact, I think you said $50 million impact in the fourth quarter. Is that the right net tariff impact that we should be thinking about for the first half of '26? Jennifer Foyle: Sure. As a company, we're leaning into advertising, we need to compete. When we see what our competition is doing, there was definitely opportunity for us to lean in. And certainly, Sydney Sweeney and Travis, I mean, with the 44 billion impressions, really it was something that we did not expect. And certainly, I mentioned some of the out-of-stocks in women's particularly, but men's certainly turned around in the mid-single-digit comp zone. And that was really -- we are so pleased to see that. And I just wanted to say sometimes there's a halo effect in marketing, right? So as we saw -- as we got into -- as denim, we got our stock in stocks back to more normalized levels towards the end of the quarter. We saw acceleration, particularly in women's and into black. As I mentioned, it was an incredible week for us, Thanksgiving week and Friday was amazing. So we're seeing the results now. And look, this is important for our future. We need to remain strong and competitive, and we need to amplify our product. The teams have been working tirelessly on this price value equation that I think American Eagle does better than anyone, and we're leaning in, and this marketing will certainly amplify. Jay Schottenstein: Jen, I'd like to also add -- we've also seen a significant increase in our loyalty members, too. We saw over 1 million more loyalty members join us in these past few months. And as Jen said, you don't see it right away. As you also pointed out that it's interesting with Sydney Sweeney, the jeans that we have made specifically for Sydney Sweeney, they sold out like within 2 days. They boomed right out right away. Mike Mathias: Then I can take the tariff question. I think maybe the best way to provide some color is just to give the quarterly impact. So we'd expect to go forward, if tariffs hold as is in terms of the impact, we'll see how that continues to progress, about a $25 million to $30 million impact in each of the first and second quarter. So call it, somewhere between 200, maybe 200 to 225 basis points of impact in Q1, same impact in Q2, $40 million to $60 million, call it, in the first half. Next Q3 on the $20 million we just incurred in Q3, we expect Q3 on a full basis to be about a $35 million to $40 million, so call it, $15 million to $20 million impact incrementally next year. And then with the anniversary roughly the $50 million that we're guiding to this fourth quarter. So it's about a 200 to 225 basis point impact on a full year basis. And -- but again, with continued offsets in work, we'd expect the gross margin to not be impacted to that level just like we've seen here in Q3 and Q4. Jay Schottenstein: And Mike, there may be like as Supreme Court ruling coming on shortly, too. It may have changed everything right away. Kelly Crago: So the assumption then would be that you would be taking some like-for-like pricing into next year? Mike Mathias: Yes. I think, I mean, on the pricing front, we definitely do not have a specific strategy to pass through the impact of tariffs to our customers. We continue to take shots where we know we can, where we're making price moves that we still fit within our price value equation that the customer expects, and we don't see any resistance to those price changes from the customer. And just ticket changes that allow us to create a little more room on the promotional front, too, to make some decisions within our lease lines. So we'll continue to do that. I think we're seeing success doing or approaching it that way in the back half right now. We'll continue to do that in next year. Operator: And the next question comes from Jungwon Kim with TD Cowen. Jungwon Kim: You mentioned strong customer acquisition across both brands. Maybe you can give us a little bit more detail around who those customers are and if you're gaining more higher income cohorts. Just curious on who you are gaining share from as you acquire new customers? And then another question, just a follow-up to that is, what are your strategies around retaining those customers you gained in the last 2 quarters? Jennifer Foyle: Look, both brands have -- our customer file is stronger than ever. And -- we certainly have seen acceleration, as I mentioned, going into even leaving Q3 -- exiting Q3 and going into Q4 with some really high -- it's really high-end problems here that we're seeing. Look, it's what we do every day. Our teams need to certainly focus on the retention. And we've been all year long, that's what we've been up to. Our retention is not even -- we're winning on retention. We are winning on customer acquisition. The teams have strategies. Those I tend to not share publicly, but the strategies are already paying off. You can see it in the news that we're just reporting today. We're getting talent. We're working on our influencer programs, but we're also working on our communities. And that is the most important thing. We have powerful brand platforms that we stand for something, and it wears the test of time. And when that works and we have the great product attached to it, we can win and show up in a new way. And the teams have very many strategies, whether it's upper funnel, getting out there and bringing in new customers or working on our performance marketing spend and our influencer strategies. So it's not only -- it's never about one part of the strategy. It's about getting the product right first and making sure that our tactics will amplify that strategy. Certainly, Sydney -- an example, Sydney and Travis, but even the more recent Martha, I mean, that is talent, that's upper funnel. That is us getting our brands out there in new ways. But if you lean into Aerie and how they're working, their marketing strategy, they're leveraging our community in a new way and showing up with how do we go from not air brushing our models I just mentioned into what does AI mean to such a pure brand as Aerie with such an amazing platform. So it is about -- we have two different brands. We have a portfolio of brands in the same token that we leverage our brands. Certainly, we share a platform, but it is about making sure that we play up each brand DNA in the right way, and it's working. That strategy is working. I can just -- I can say that now, and there's work to do always. As we look ahead, we have exciting collaborations, new talent and just new ideas. We're constantly thinking of new ideas. Operator: The next question comes from Rick Patel with Raymond James. Rakesh Patel: I wanted to double-click on your expectations for AUR in Q4. As we think about the company remaining competitive with promotions, but also factoring in some product and perhaps some pricing wins, where do you see AUR landing in the fourth quarter? And then second, what are your expectations for where inventory will end the year, both in terms of dollars and units? Mike Mathias: Hey, Rick, yes, the AUR for the third quarter was relatively flat even with a bit of a markdown increase, just the mix of the businesses between the brands, category mix, our AUR was relatively flat at the company level. We're expecting a similar thing in Q4. November to date here, we saw it play out that way. Aerie is actually driving these comps on some uptick in AUR. We know we're spending a little more markdowns in the jeans category in AEs to drive the business. So the mix for the quarter, we'd expect right now to be similar around a relatively flat AUR for the fourth quarter. And I think it's the way we really expect to plan the business go forward. Rakesh Patel: Great. Any thoughts on inventory? Mike Mathias: Q4, we're not providing specific guidance, but at the end of the day here with the uptick in the trend exceeding plans, we're definitely in chase mode here, which is a good thing when we make -- we have -- we see a lot of profit flow-through when we're doing that, especially on the Aerie side of the house. So we expect inventory in line with sales. We're guiding to the plus 8% to 9% comp. And as of now, I'd expect similar kind of inventory in line with sales or at least units in line with the sales growth, knowing there will be a tariff impact ongoing. But we're not providing specific guidance at this point, but that's what we'd expect to see. Operator: And the next question comes from Chris Nardone with Bank of America. Christopher Nardone: So first, can you just refresh us on how we should think about plans for both the Eagle and Aerie store fleets heading into next year? And if the recent results of both businesses has changed how you're thinking about that versus maybe 90 days ago? Mike Mathias: Yes, Chris, I think for the AE brand, we talked about closing roughly 35 stores at the end of this year. We're looking forward into plans next year, and I expect that to slow down as we've largely closed, I think, over the last 3, 4 years, kind of the lower productivity stores in the fleet in the mainline AE fleet. So 35 at the end of this year here in January, maybe something lower than that, I would expect next year. On the Aerie and OFFLINE growth front, we talked about 22 Aerie, 26 OFFLINE openings this year in 2025. We're looking at a similar 40 to 50 store count at the moment, probably similar weighting offline, a little more -- a little higher count in OFFLINE than in Aerie. But we are looking at this tremendous growth, and we'll -- if we did anything, we'd maybe accelerate some openings on the Aerie and OFFLINE side, but those plans are still in work. Right now, a similar 40 to 50 count is what's in the plan. Christopher Nardone: Okay. Got it. And then just a quick follow-up. I think you alluded Aerie comps are running above the high teens for the quarter, quarter-to-date. And if AUR is roughly flattish, can you just unpack a little bit further? It sounds like you're seeing inflections across the product suite, but are there particular channels, whether that's digital versus retail or certain categories where you're seeing the biggest inflection? We're just trying to understand a little bit better what has changed so drastically over the last 6 months. Mike Mathias: Yes. Look, correct. The guidance we're giving at the 8% to 9% comp, I'll just reiterate, American Eagle low to mid-single expectations, Aerie high teens. Both brands are running ahead of that trend November to date or through the Thanksgiving weekend. Digital ahead of stores. And I think the marketing campaigns that Jen and Jay are talking about, the traffic we're seeing digitally off of those campaigns is significant, and that's where we're seeing a lot of the gains from those efforts and from the effectiveness of those campaigns. So digital was -- both channels were positive in Q3, but digital was on the high end or the high single-digit level for Q3. And we'd expect for Q4 at a plus 8% to 9%, same kind of outcome that digital would really outpace stores, and we've seen that through November and especially over the holiday weekend here where both channels were positive, and we're happy with the success in both channels, but digital is where we're seeing the outpaced growth at the moment. Jennifer Foyle: And in Aerie specifically, I mean, as I mentioned before, men's, we saw an incredible turnaround. And Aerie specifically, all categories are working. Look, the team -- when you have to pivot coming off of Q1, we focused on our product and winning that customer back and ensuring that we could get that momentum that we deserve again. This brand is incredible. And I did want to say, I need to remind everyone on this call that Aerie's brand awareness is only at 55% to 60%. So when I think about our opportunity as we build into 2026, we have an incredible runway in front of us. So we're pulling in product as we speak. We're chasing and the team is working fast and furiously so that we can continue this momentum into next year. Jay Schottenstein: And also, Jen, I think our merchandise is better, too, which help. Jennifer Foyle: I'd like to say that, yes. Operator: And the next question comes from Alex Straton with Morgan Stanley. Alexandra Straton: Congrats on a nice quarter. On these big campaigns that you guys have pursued, can you just give us some context on where you think you'll end the year on marketing expense as a percentage of sales versus typical? Like are you investing more than history? And then as we think about next year, should that line item continue to move higher? Or how do you think about kind of that flywheel between the marketing investment and growth? Mike Mathias: For this year, yes, we're -- I mean, obviously, we made a significant investment in Q3. Q4 is up as well within our guidance, not anywhere near the increase on a percentage basis that Q3 was. Really pleased with the SG&A leverage we'll see in Q4 off of this comp guide. Advertising is still deleveraging a bit, but we're leveraging all other expense categories as intended pretty significantly in the fourth quarter. For the year, we're going to wind up somewhere in the mid-4s as a percentage. And historically, we've been more in the -- I think last year, for example, around 4%. So we're definitely resetting a baseline for advertising spend at the moment. It's working. We're continuing to monitor it. Jen and I and our teams are working very closely and cross-functionally on really on a week-to-week basis, how we're pulsing the spend in advertising on top of the campaigns that are obviously planned well ahead of time. I'd expect -- we expect in our initial plans here for next year is to continue this in the first half, possibly passing more toward a 5% type of rate to reset ourselves and then leverage all our expense lines, funnel some expense or some investment toward advertising and anniversary this come next year around this time in the third quarter. I think that 5% is a good sweet spot that we'd like to maintain over time. So as we're kind of resetting the baseline, we're pathing towards 5%, like the top line growth we're seeing from it. Again, just to reiterate, anniversary it come next year and start to just maintain that type of rate, and we'll evaluate things from there. Jay Schottenstein: And Mike, and trips in the bank, too. We're not saying we have more trips in the bank. Mike Mathias: Yes. More to come. We'll talk -- we have some things on our fourth quarter call in March probably to talk about more exciting things to come. Alexandra Straton: That's great. Maybe one follow-up for you, Mike. Just kind of zooming out here. I know there's been some wrenches in your medium-term outlook since you provided it a couple of years ago. But maybe as we move into the final year of that plan and excluding some of the noncontrollable headwinds like tariffs, can you just like, big picture, talk about where you've made the most progress versus that plan and where there's still more work to be done in this final year here? Mike Mathias: Yes. I'll start on the top line. I know we obviously had a few missteps here in the first half of the year in the first quarter, but the net result of this year with this guide is actually going to wind up kind of in that low to mid-single or within the algorithm we've talked about wanting to achieve every year. So we'll be at a kind of low single-digit trajectory on the full year with this back half being kind of the mid- to high single-digit range. So I think that's the continued focus. I'd also say we made a lot of headway in just the culture change around expenses in total. So we continue to control costs across the P&L. I think the leverage that we're seeing here in BOW, this back half of the year and then SG&A in this fourth quarter is a testament to that. Even with the significant increase in advertising this year that you just asked about and I just provided the calendar on all the other SG&A line items are leveraging in this year. And SG&A in total will be relatively flat on the year at the kind of the low single-digit total year outcome. So I think that's a big change for us over the last several years. It's been a massive focus to have a different mentality around controlling expense. It's allowing us to funnel some of these dollars toward advertising. And so we'll continue to do that. And yes, to your point, the tariff headwind is something we can't control. But I mean, our goal is still this 10% aspiration. Tariffs are going to set that back a little bit. But we're going to continue down the path that we're on, on controlling all other costs, investing some dollars in advertising, fueling Aerie and OFFLINE, hitting that kind of low single plus trajectory in AE and passing back toward that 10% that is still our ultimate goal. Jay Schottenstein: Yes. And Mike, as a general thing, this team after the first quarter, and Jen couldn't emphasize it enough, really took a hard look at everything. We went through all the different areas of the business, every single area, every opportunity the merchandise to the operations, looking where -- what's important, what's not important to the company. The dedication of the associates have been amazing in the last few months, and I'm so proud of this team because that first quarter, we got kicked very hard and nobody quit. Nobody cried about it. Nobody quit. Everybody went to figure out how can we do things better, transformational, looking for where the real opportunities are, looking for where we should go in the future, where the opportunities are and what's it going to take to be the best. And one thing I'm very proud of, if you go into our stores, we have the best-looking stores, the best maintained stores in the mall. If you walk in the mall, our stores look the best. If you go look at our new stores, you go to down to SoHo and you look at our new store we just opened in SoHo, you go to Aventura down in Miami, you'll be very impressed by the stores. They're very, very impressive stores. They're very functional stores. And so I think that we're very excited. I know what we have planned for marketing next year. I know where the merchants are focused. I know the excitement that everybody has in this company, and it's going to be great. Operator: And the next question comes from Janet Kloppenburg with JJK Research Associates. Janet Kloppenburg: Congratulations. And I agree the stores look terrific. Aerie in particular, but American Eagle as well. I just wanted to ask about -- I think you had to chase product earlier in the year as well, Jen. And I'm wondering what's going on there and if that situation is resolved now with the comps being as healthy as they are. And then for Mike, on a 4% comp, you weren't able -- did you leverage buying an occupancy? I think you may have. And what is the target point on that? And in terms of price increases, are they all behind you now? Have you taken them all? Or are there more to come? Jennifer Foyle: Yes, for sure. Thanks, by the way, Janet. We -- it's -- primarily, it's been in women's denim, to be frank. We've been sort of in chase mode since Q1. And quite frankly, we haven't been able to keep up with the demands. And as you know, we have a huge short business, and that business never really turned on. We expect shorts to turn on as we enter Q2, back half of Q1 into Q2, and that never happened. So then we continue to see this demand in long legs, and we really couldn't keep up with that demand. So moving into Q3, we felt like we were in a better position, but we wanted to be prudent as well with our inventories. As you know, denim is probably our higher cost of goods as well, but it's our biggest business. So it's always an art, managing that business. And with the launch of the Sydney Sweeney and actually Travis, we couldn't really keep up with that demand. The teams worked swiftly. We were definitely in the right businesses. We definitely had the right silhouette and the right investment in silhouettes, which led to some of that out of stock, good news there. Bad news, we needed a little bit more inventory to carry and to get that business -- to get women's in total because of the penetration of denim. So good news is certainly in the back half of Q3, we saw nice levels of inventory getting back into our key silhouettes. The top 5 jeans, just to give you some perspective, we planned at -- this is just top 5 jeans styles in women's. We planned up 25% they were up 50% on demand. So we had a lot of work to do. We feel better as we head into Q4. And nodding to what Mike mentioned, we're going to look at denim a little bit differently so that we're maintaining that business while we grow new categories. Mike Mathias: And Janet, on BOW, yes, we did leverage BOW by 20 basis points in the third quarter on the 4 comp. And then that's a good target for us that low to mid-single-digit result to leverage expense really across the board other than this advertising reset we're talking about. And then the fourth quarter on the 8% to 9% comp, we obviously definitely expect to leverage BOW at that kind of result as well. And SG&A will leverage significantly on that kind of result for the fourth quarter. Janet Kloppenburg: Okay. And then just on pricing? Mike Mathias: Yes. We talked about a little earlier. We're not -- I mean the AUR is flat for Q3. We're expecting similar AUR in Q4. We're not pathing through the impact of tariffs to the consumer purposely. We are taking our shots on price moves where, as Jen has said, keeping -- maintaining that price value equation that our customer expects and making sure we're not impacting conversion and give ourselves a little room on the promotional side when we do that as well. So we'll continue to kind of optimize that, take our shots, but net AUR similar to last year is the intent. Operator: And the next question comes from Janine Stichter with BTIG. Janine Hoffman Stichter: Congrats on the great quarter. With this quarter-to-date acceleration, it sounds like a lot of it's been driven by traffic and new customer acquisition. Just wondering what you're seeing on conversion, particularly with some of the product improvements you've made. And then maybe if you can just share your thoughts on the Gen Z consumer. We've certainly heard a lot about that consumer potentially being pressured and pulling back, but it doesn't seem like you're seeing that at all in your business. So I would just love to hear your thoughts on kind of where the consumer is and how they're spending? Mike Mathias: Yes. I think on the metric side of things, traffic was definitely a driver in Q3. We continue to see that here in the fourth quarter through November. With AUR flat, it's been a mix of sort of traffic and then ADS or the UPT, part of the ADS equation, AUR flat, some uptick in UPTs and then traffic with conversion being relatively flat with AUR being relatively flat. That's sort of your mix of metrics that we saw in the third quarter and early days here in Q4, obviously, a big traffic uptick that we've capitalized on through November and through Thanksgiving, and we'll see how that continues to play out. But with AUR relatively flat, we would assume a similar kind of mix of metrics, traffic being a driver, ADS being a driver with AUR flat, conversion relatively flat, and we'll see how it pans out through December. Jennifer Foyle: Yes, we're not feeling that -- we're entertaining Gen Z in all of our brands. So even when you look at Martha Stewart, that might be a question mark, right, why Martha Stewart, but Martha Stewart resonates with Gen Z. That's a perfect example of what we're up to. We're seeing momentum in all age groups. We do have still some opportunity on the lower age scale in AE women's in particular, and we're up to invigorating some product to entertain that age bracket. But honestly, we're not seeing it. And also, this is a critical time to for gift giving, too. So we see mom and dad out there purchasing as well. Judy Meehan: Okay. We have time for one more question. Operator: And the last question comes from Corey Tarlowe with Jefferies. Corey Tarlowe: Mike, I just wanted to ask on SG&A for Q3 and Q4 and just kind of how to think about it next year from a dollar perspective. Is there anything that either comes in or goes out, whether it's marketing? I think you talked -- maybe you talked about incentive comp in prior years, how to think about that just structurally, understanding on a rate basis, obviously, with Q4 sales being so strong, there's going to be a bit of a delta there, but curious what you could unpack for us. Mike Mathias: Sure. Yes. I think, as I said, we'd expect to see some continued investment in advertising through the first half of next year, incremental to where we've been intention to pass toward, call it, that 5% rate annually. So we'll anniversary things in the back half that we're doing currently. Incentive comp is a bit of a TBD. We're still setting plans for 2026. Those annual plans are based on our EBIT target is the success metric. So we'll probably -- we'll give more color in March around 2026 SG&A and how we think that will pan out by quarter with advertising and possibly a bit of more incentive comp in the mix, but more to come in March. Corey Tarlowe: Great. And then just a quick follow-up on Aerie. The momentum has been very, very strong. Curious what you think is specifically working there versus the competition when you either walk the mall or view kind of the competitive set, how you think about your market share gains and the opportunity there? Jennifer Foyle: Yes. I did mention the brand awareness still is -- we have opportunity there. We're still only at 55% to 60%. So as we gain and look towards the future, we have a lot of opportunity there. It's never about one thing. Certainly, we doubled down on the product, the design team and merchant teams really came together and thought about our future strategies and where we were seeing some losses and how we recalibrated all of our categories. And the team did an excellent job from launching new ideas to rebuilding old franchises, i.e., undies. Undies is a fire starter for any order, any basket. And our undies tables have never looked better. So it's all about the product. But strategically, we built into promotions that makes sense, but we pulled back in other areas where it doesn't make sense. And then you layer on this great marketing campaign that we've had in Aerie, which it's been really resonating, 100% real. It's what we're all about. And the team has doubled down and our influencer campaign, getting our clothes on our influencers has been a real win. And there's more to come. We have so many great new ideas, innovations for the future. The team is 100% locked and loaded on thinking about each category, new fabrications, new ideas, new launches. newness in general has been a win for Aerie with our new drops, and that's been really working. So we have a lot in store for 2026. But in the meantime, we're pulling goods in for -- to pull out Q4. We're excited about what's happening right now.